2021-Ford-F-250 350 450 550 600-Owners-Manual-version-3 Om EN 03 2021

2021 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual
2021 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com ford.ca
March 2021
Third Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
MC3J 19A321 AC
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2021
All rights reserved.

Part Number: 202008 20210201134948
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and

maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle
in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Introduction Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................46

About This Manual ..........................................9 Side Airbags .....................................................51
Symbols Glossary ............................................9 Safety Canopy™ ............................................52
Data Recording .................................................11 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......53
Perchlorate .......................................................15 Airbag Disposal ..............................................54
Ford Credit ........................................................15
Replacement Parts Recommendation Keys and Remote Controls
...........................................................................1 6 General Information on Radio
Special Notices ...............................................16 Frequencies .................................................55
Mobile Communications Equipment Remote Control .............................................55
............................................................................17 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
Export Unique Options ................................18 ..........................................................................60
Environment MyKey™
Protecting the Environment .......................19 Principle of Operation ..................................61
Creating a MyKey ...........................................62
At a Glance Clearing All MyKeys ......................................63
Instrument Panel ..........................................20 Checking MyKey System Status .............64
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Child Safety Systems ........................................................64
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................64
General Information .....................................22
Installing Child Restraints ..........................24
Doors and Locks
Booster Seats .................................................33
Locking and Unlocking ...............................66
Child Restraint Positioning ........................35
Keyless Entry ..................................................69
Child Safety Locks .........................................37
Tailgate
Seatbelts
Tailgate Lock .....................................................71
Principle of Operation .................................38
Electronic Tailgate ..........................................71
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................39
Removing the Tailgate .................................72
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................42
Tailgate Step ....................................................72
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................42 Bed Extender ...................................................73
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................43
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Security
Maintenance ...............................................44 Passive Anti-Theft System ........................76
Seatbelt Extensions .....................................44 Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................76
Supplementary Restraints Power Running Boards

System Using Power Running Boards ...................78
Principle of Operation .................................45
Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202008, Third-Printing-
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel Automatic High Beam Control

Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering What Is Automatic High Beam Control
Column .........................................................80 ..........................................................................9 3
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles Switching Automatic High Beam Control
With: Manual Adjustable Steering On and Off ...................................................93
Column ..........................................................81
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
Audio Control ...................................................81 ..........................................................................9 3
Voice Control ..................................................82 Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise ..........................................................................9 3
Control ..........................................................82
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Windows and Mirrors
Cruise Control .............................................82
Power Windows ............................................95
Information Display Control ......................82
Global Opening .............................................96
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................82
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................96
Horn ....................................................................83
Interior Mirror ..................................................99
Sliding Windows ...........................................99
Adjustable Pedals
Sun Visors ......................................................100
Adjusting the Pedals ...................................84
Moonroof .......................................................100
Wipers and Washers Instrument Cluster

Windshield Wipers .......................................85
Gauges .............................................................102
Autowipers ......................................................85
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............105
Windshield Washers ....................................86
Audible Warnings and Indicators ..........109
Lighting Information Displays

General Information .....................................87
General Information ....................................110
Lighting Control .............................................87
Information Messages ................................121
Autolamps .......................................................88
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................88 Remote Start
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Lamps What Is Remote Start ................................140
..........................................................................88 Remote Start Limitations ........................140
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With: Enabling Remote Start .............................140
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .........89 Remotely Starting the Engine ................140
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................89 Extending the Remote Start Duration
Direction Indicators ......................................90 ........................................................................140
Spot Lamps ....................................................90 Remotely Stopping the Engine ...............141
Interior Lamps ................................................90 Remote Start Remote Control Indicators
Ambient Lighting ............................................91 ..........................................................................141
Cargo Lamps ....................................................91 Remote Start Settings ................................141
Table of Contents
Climate Control - Vehicles Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off

With: Automatic .........................................................................148
Temperature Control Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........148
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....143 Setting the Temperature ..........................148
Switching Climate Control On and Off Directing the Flow of Air ...........................148
.........................................................................143 Climate Control – Troubleshooting ......149
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................143 Interior Air Quality
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................150
.........................................................................143
Locating the Cabin Air Filter ....................150
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................143 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter .................150
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................143 Seats
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and Sitting in the Correct Position ..................151
Off .................................................................144 Head Restraints .............................................151
Switching the Heated Rear Window On Manual Seats ................................................153
and Off ........................................................144
Power Seats ..................................................154
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
.........................................................................144 Memory Function .........................................157
Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........144 Rear Seats ......................................................158
Setting the Temperature ..........................144 Heated Seats ................................................160
Directing the Flow of Air ............................145 Ventilated Seats ............................................161
Auto Mode ......................................................145
Climate Control – Troubleshooting ......146 Rear Occupant Alert System
Climate Control - Vehicles What is the Rear Occupant Alert System

.........................................................................162
With: Manual Temperature
Control How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
System Work .............................................162
Identifying the Climate Control Unit ......147
Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
Switching Climate Control On and Off .........................................................................162
.........................................................................147
Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off .........................................................................162
.........................................................................147
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off On and Off - Vehicles With: SYNC
.........................................................................147 .........................................................................162
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
.........................................................................147 On and Off .................................................163
Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
.........................................................................147 - Vehicles With: SYNC 3 ........................163
Switching the Heated Rear Window On Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators
and Off ........................................................148 - Vehicles With: SYNC ...........................163
Table of Contents
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible Engine Emission Control

Warnings .....................................................163
Emission Law ................................................194
Catalytic Converter .....................................195
Garage Door Opener
Selective Catalytic Reductant System -
Universal Garage Door Opener ..............164 Diesel ............................................................197
Diesel Particulate Filter ............................202
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................168 Transmission
Wireless Accessory Charger ....................169 Automatic Transmission ..........................207
Power Take-Off ............................................212
Storage Compartments
Center Console ...............................................171 Four-Wheel Drive
Overhead Console ........................................171 Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................213
Under Seat Storage ......................................171
Rear Axle
Starting and Stopping the Limited Slip Differential .............................221
Engine Electronic Locking Differential ................221
General Information ...................................174
Ignition Switch ..............................................174 Brakes
Keyless Starting ............................................175 General Information ...................................223
Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/7.3L Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................175 ........................................................................225
Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L Diesel Parking Brake ................................................225
..........................................................................177
Hill Start Assist ............................................225
Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L Diesel
.........................................................................182
Engine Idle Shutdown ................................182 Traction Control
Engine Block Heater ...................................182 Principle of Operation ................................227
Using Traction Control ...............................227
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .....................................184 Stability Control
Fuel Quality - E85 .......................................185 Principle of Operation ...............................228
Fuel Quality - Gasoline .............................186 Using Stability Control ..............................229
Fuel Quality - Diesel ...................................187
Running Out of Fuel ...................................189 Trail Control
Refueling - Gasoline ...................................189 What Is Trail Control ...................................231
Refueling - Diesel ........................................190 Switching Trail Control On and Off .......231
Fuel Consumption .......................................193 Setting the Trail Control Speed ..............231
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................231
Trail Control Indicators ...............................231
Table of Contents
Terrain Control Calculating Payload ...................................274

Principle of Operation ...............................232 Calculating the Load Limit ......................274
Using Hill Descent Control ......................232
Pickup Bed
Parking Aids Pickup Bed Anchor Points ........................277
Principle of Operation ...............................234 Pickup Bed Ramps .....................................279
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................234
Rear View Camera ......................................235 Towing
360 Degree Camera ..................................238 Towing a Trailer ...........................................282
Trailer Reversing Aids ................................283
Cruise Control Trailer Sway Control ..................................300
What Is Cruise Control ..............................242 Recommended Towing Weights ..........300
Switching Cruise Control On and Off Essential Towing Checks .........................305
........................................................................242 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......314
Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........242
Canceling the Set Speed .........................243 Driving Hints
Resuming the Set Speed .........................243 Economical Driving ......................................317
Cruise Control Indicators .........................243 Off-Road Driving ..........................................317
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............243 Breaking-In ....................................................320
Driving Through Water ..............................320
Driving Aids Snow Plowing ...............................................321
Driver Alert ....................................................250 Floor Mats ......................................................323
Lane Keeping System ................................251
Blind Spot Information System ............254 Roadside Emergencies
Cross Traffic Alert .......................................259 Roadside Assistance .................................325
Steering ..........................................................262 Hazard Flashers ..........................................326
Pre-Collision Assist ....................................264 Fuel Shutoff ..................................................326
Drive Control ................................................268 Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................327
Post-Crash Alert System .........................329
Load Carrying Transporting the Vehicle ..........................329
Load Carrying Precautions .......................271 Towing Points ..............................................330
Locating the Safety Compliance
Certification Labels ................................272 Customer Assistance
What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating Getting the Services You Need ..............332
.........................................................................272
In California (U.S. Only) ............................333
What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.........................................................................272 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................334
What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight .........................................................272 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................335
What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Rating ..........................................................273
Table of Contents
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Brake Fluid Check ........................................377
Canada .......................................................335 Power Steering Fluid Check ....................378
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature Changing the 12V Battery ........................379
........................................................................337
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................381
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
........................................................................337 Washer Fluid Check ...................................382
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only) Fuel Filter - 6.2L/7.3L .................................382
........................................................................337 Checking the Wiper Blades ....................382
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................382
Fuses Changing a Bulb ..........................................383
Fuse Specification Chart .........................339 Changing the Engine-Mounted and
Changing a Fuse .........................................346 Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel
Filters - 6.7L Diesel .................................386
Maintenance Spring U-Bolt Check - F-600 ................389
General Information ..................................348
Vehicle Care
Opening and Closing the Hood .............348
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L .................349
Cleaning Products .......................................391
Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Diesel .....350
Cleaning the Exterior .................................392
Under Hood Overview - 7.3L ....................351
Waxing ............................................................393
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L .........................352
Cleaning the Engine ...................................393
Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel ............352
Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel ......394
Engine Oil Dipstick - 7.3L ..........................352
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
Engine Oil Check - 6.2L .............................352 ........................................................................394
Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel ...............354 Cleaning the Interior ..................................395
Engine Oil Check - 7.3L .............................355 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Instrument Cluster Lens .......................397
........................................................................356 Cleaning Leather Seats ............................397
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................356 Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............399
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L Cleaning the Wheels .................................399
........................................................................357
Vehicle Storage ...........................................399
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
Diesel ..........................................................358
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 7.3L ....360 Wheels and Tires
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L General Information ..................................402
Diesel ...........................................................361 Tire Care ........................................................404
Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L .................364 Using Snow Chains ....................................420
Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Diesel .....368 Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...........421
Engine Coolant Check - 7.3L ....................371 Changing a Road Wheel ..........................429
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check Technical Specifications .........................440
........................................................................376
Transfer Case Fluid Check ........................377
Table of Contents
Capacities and Specifications Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and

Specification - Gasoline ......................469
Engine Specifications - 6.2L ....................441 Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid Capacity
and Specification ....................................472
Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel .......441
Engine Specifications - 7.3L ....................442 Vehicle Identification
Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L .............................443
Vehicle Identification Number ...............473
Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel ................445
Motorcraft Parts - 7.3L .............................446 Connected Vehicle
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................447 Connected Vehicle Requirements ........474
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Connected Vehicle Limitations .............474
6.2L ..............................................................449
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Network ......................................................474
6.7L Diesel .................................................450
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Network ......................................................474
7.3L ...............................................................453
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Cooling System Capacity and Vehicles With: Modem ..........................475
Specification - 6.2L ...............................455
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting -
Cooling System Capacity and Vehicles With: SYNC/SYNC 3 ............476
Specification - 6.7L Diesel ..................456
Cooling System Capacity and
Specification - 7.3L ................................456 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Fuel Tank Capacity - Diesel ....................457 Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........478
Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline ..............458 Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password ................................478
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 6.2L ...............................459
Air Conditioning System Capacity and Audio System - Vehicles With:
Specification - 6.7L Diesel ..................460 SYNC
Air Conditioning System Capacity and General Information ..................................479
Specification - 7.3L .................................461 Audio Unit ......................................................479
Washer Fluid Specification ......................461 Digital Radio ..................................................481
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and Satellite Radio .............................................484
Specification ............................................462
USB Port ........................................................487
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity
and Specification - Diesel ...................463
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity Audio System - Vehicles With:
and Specification - Gasoline .............463 SYNC 3
Brake Fluid Specification .........................465 General Information .................................488
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and Audio Unit .....................................................488
Specification ............................................466 Digital Radio .................................................489
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and Satellite Radio .............................................492
Specification ............................................466
USB Port ........................................................495
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and
Specification - Diesel ............................467
Table of Contents
SYNC™ Declaration of Conformity ......................646

General Information ..................................496
Using Voice Recognition ..........................497
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ..........499
SYNC™ Applications and Services .....500
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................503
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................504
SYNC™ 3
Using Voice Recognition ...........................515
Entertainment ...............................................521
Climate ............................................................531
Phone ..............................................................533
Navigation .....................................................535
Apps ................................................................540
Settings ..........................................................543
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................545
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................558
Auxiliary Switches ......................................559
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................563
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......565
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........568
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance .............................................574
Customer Information
Radio Frequency Certification Labels
.......................................................................584
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............618
End User License Agreement ..................621
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while

distracted can result in loss of vehicle
E154903
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may A Right-hand side.
take your focus off the road. Your B Left-hand side.
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated These are some of the symbols you may
systems when possible. Make sure you see on your vehicle.
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic Air conditioning system
E162384
devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product Air conditioning system lubricant

features and options available throughout E231157 type
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It Anti-lock braking system
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle. Battery
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
Battery acid
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your Brake fluid - non petroleum
vehicle. based
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand Brake system
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
Introduction
Brake system Flammable

E231160
E270480
Cabin air filter Front airbag

E139223
E67017
Check fuel cap Front fog lamps
Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset
Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment
Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers

E141128
Cruise control Heated rear window

E71340
Do not open when hot Windshield defrosting system
Engine air filter Interior luggage compartment

release
Engine coolant Jack
Engine coolant temperature Keep out of reach of children

E161353
Engine oil Lighting control
Explosive gas Low tire pressure warning
Fan warning Maintain correct fluid level
Fasten seatbelt Note operating instructions
E71880
10
Introduction
Horn control Shield the eyes

E270945
E167012
Panic alarm Stability control

E138639
Parking aid Hill descent control

E139213 E163957
Parking brake Trail control

E272858
Power steering fluid Windshield wiping system

E270969
Power windows front/rear Windshield wash and wipe
Power window lockout

DATA RECORDING
Requires registered technician

E231159 WARNING: Do not connect
wireless plug-in devices to the data link
Safety alert connector. Unauthorized third parties
E65963
could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
See Owner's Manual systems. Only allow repair facilities that
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data
See Service Manual link connector.
E231158
We respect your privacy and are
Service engine soon committed to protecting it. The
information contained in this publication
was correct at the time of going to print,
but as technology rapidly changes, we
Passenger airbag activated
recommend that you visit the regional Ford
E270849 website for the latest information.
Passenger airbag deactivated
E270850
Side airbag
11
Introduction
Your vehicle has electronic control units Service Data

that have data recording functionality and
the ability to permanently or temporarily Service data recorders in your vehicle are
store data. This data could include capable of collecting and storing
information on the condition and status of diagnostic information about your vehicle.
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance This potentially includes information about
requirements, events and malfunctions. the performance or status of various
The types of data that can be recorded are systems and modules in the vehicle, such
described in this section. Some of the data as engine, throttle, steering or brake
recorded is stored in event logs or error systems. In order to properly diagnose and
logs. service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
Note: Error logs are reset following a service and repair facilities may access or share
or repair. among them vehicle diagnostic
Note: We may provide information in information received through a direct
response to requests from law enforcement, connection to your vehicle when
other government authorities and third diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
parties acting with lawful authority or Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
through a legal process. Such information of Canada, in Canada) may, where
could be used by them in legal proceedings. permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
Data recorded includes, for example: with other information we may have about
• Operating states of system you, for example, your contact information,
components, for example, fuel level, to offer you products or services that may
tire pressure and battery charge level. interest you. Data may be provided to our
• Vehicle and component status, for service providers such as part suppliers
example, wheel speed, deceleration, that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
lateral acceleration and seatbelt who are similarly obligated to protect data.
status. We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
• Events or errors in essential systems, comply with law. We may provide
for example, headlamps and brakes. information where required in response to
• System responses to driving situations, official requests to law enforcement or
for example, airbag deployment and other government authorities or third
stability control. parties acting with lawful authority or court
• Environmental conditions, for example, order, and such information may be used
temperature. in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
Some of this data, when used in apps and services, you consent that certain
combination with other information, for diagnostic information may also be
example, an accident report, damage to a accessed electronically by Ford Motor
vehicle or eyewitness statements, could Company and Ford authorized service
be associated with a specific person. facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
12
Introduction
you, where permitted by law. For Canada Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
only, for more information, please review by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data event data recorder under normal driving
storage and use of service providers in conditions and no personal data or
other jurisdictions who may be subject to information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
legal requirements in Canada, the United crash location) is recorded. However, other
States and other countries applicable to parties, such as law enforcement, could
them, for example, lawful requirements to combine the event data recorder data with
disclose personal information to the type of personally identifying data
governmental authorities in those routinely acquired during a crash
countries. investigation.
Event Data To read data recorded by an event data

recorder, special equipment is required,
This vehicle is equipped with an event data and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event recorder is needed. In addition to the
data recorder is to record, in certain crash vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
or near crash-like situations, such as an as law enforcement, that have such special
airbag deployment or hitting a road equipment, can read the information if they
obstacle; this data assist in understanding have access to the vehicle or the event
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The data recorder.
event data recorder is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and Comfort, Convenience and
safety systems for a short period of time, Entertainment Data
typically 30 seconds or less.
Your vehicle has electronic control units
The event data recorder in this vehicle is that have the ability to store data based
designed to record such data as: on your personalized settings. The data is
• How various systems in your vehicle stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
were operating. that you connect to it, for example, a USB
drive or digital music player. You can delete
• Whether or not the driver and some of this data and also choose whether
passenger seatbelts were to share it through the services to which
buckled/fastened. you subscribe. See Settings (page 543).
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the Comfort and Convenience Data
brake pedal.
Data recorded includes, for example:
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• Seat and steering wheel position.
• Where the driver was positioning the
• Climate control settings.
steering wheel.
• Radio presets.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
13
Introduction
Entertainment Data service providers could have access to

additional information, for example, cell
Data recorded includes, for example: phone network tower identification. For
• Music, videos or album art. additional information about our privacy
• Contacts and corresponding address policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
book entries. refer to your local Ford website.
• Navigation destinations. Note: The modem continues to send this
information unless you disable the modem
Services That We Provide or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
data by changing the modem settings. See
If you use our services, we collect and use Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
data, for example, account information, Network (page 474).
vehicle location and driving characteristics,
that could identify you. We transmit this Note: The service can be unavailable or
data through a dedicated, protected interrupted for a number of reasons, for
connection. We only collect and use data example, environmental or topographical
to enable your use of our services to which conditions and data plan coverage.
you have subscribed, with your consent or Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
where permitted by law. For additional modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
information, see the terms and conditions
of the services to which you have Vehicles With SYNC
subscribed.
Mobile Device Data
Services That Third Parties
Provide If you connect a mobile device to your
vehicle, you can display data from your
We recommend that you review the terms device on the touchscreen for example,
and conditions and data privacy music and album art. You can share your
information for any services to which you vehicle data with mobile apps on your
subscribe. We take no responsibility for device through the system. See Apps
services that third parties provide. (page 540).
The mobile apps function operates by your
Vehicles With a Modem (If Equipped) connected device sending data to us in the
The modem has a SIM. The United States. The data is encrypted and
modem was enabled when your includes, for example, the vehicle
vehicle was built and periodically identification number of your vehicle,
sends messages to stay connected to the odometer, SYNC module number,
cell phone network, receive automatic anonymous usage statistics and debugging
software updates and send vehicle-related information. We retain it only as long as
information to us, for example, diagnostic necessary to provide the service, to
information. These messages could troubleshoot, for continuous improvement
include information that identifies your and to offer you products and services that
vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial may be of interest to you according to your
number of the modem. Cell phone network preferences and where allowed by law.
14
Introduction
If you connect a cell phone to the system, details about your vehicle or crash to assist
the system creates a profile that links to emergency services operators to provide
that cell phone. The cell phone profile the most appropriate emergency services.
enables more mobile features and efficient If you do not want to disclose this
operation. The profile contains, for information, do not activate the emergency
example, data from your phonebook, read call system.
and unread text messages and call history, Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
including history of calls when your cell call systems that are required by law.
phone was not connected to the system.
If you connect a media device, the system
creates and retains a media device index PERCHLORATE
of supported media content. The system
also records a short diagnostic log of Certain components in your vehicle such
approximately 10 minutes of all recent as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
system activity. and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
The cell phone profile, media device index may apply for service or vehicle end of life
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle disposal.
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when you For more information visit:
connect your cell phone or media device.
If you no longer plan to use the system or Web Address
your vehicle, we recommend you use the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
master reset function to erase the stored
ouswaste/perchlorate
information. See Settings (page 543).
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your FORD CREDIT
vehicle's module.
For additional information about our US Only
privacy policy, refer to your local Ford Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
website. and lease plans to help you acquire your
Note: To find out if your vehicle has vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
connectivity technology, visit vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
www.FordConnected.com. your business.
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
Vehicles With an Emergency Call more information about Ford Credit and
System access to the online Account Manager tool,
When the emergency call system is active, visit www.ford.com/finance.
it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or activation
of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
or updates to the emergency call system
may also be capable of electronically or
verbally disclosing to emergency services
operators your vehicle location or other
15
Introduction
REPLACEMENT PARTS The Ford Warranty may not cover damage

caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
RECOMMENDATION non-Ford parts.
We have built your vehicle to the highest For additional information, refer to the
standards using quality parts. We terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts SPECIAL NOTICES
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or For a detailed description of what is
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their covered by your New Vehicle Limited
packaging. Warranty, see your warranty guide that is
available online. For more information,
Scheduled Maintenance and refer to our website and download your
Mechanical Repairs copy of the warranty guide
One of the best ways for you to make sure
Special Instructions
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our For your added safety, your vehicle has
recommendations using parts that sophisticated electronic controls.
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet WARNING: You risk death or
or exceed these specifications. serious injury to yourself and others if you
do not follow the instruction highlighted
Collision Repairs by the warning symbol. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions
We hope that you never experience a could result in personal injury.
collision, but accidents happen sometimes.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts WARNING: Never place front seat
meet our stringent requirements for fit, mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
finish, structural integrity, corrosion in front of an active passenger airbag.
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that On Board Diagnostics Data Link
these parts deliver the intended level of Connector
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford WARNING: Do not connect
replacement collision parts. wireless plug-in devices to the data link
connector. Unauthorized third parties
Warranty on Replacement Parts could gain access to vehicle data and
impair the performance of safety related
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement systems. Only allow repair facilities that
parts are the only replacement parts that follow our service and repair instructions
benefit from a Ford Warranty. to connect their equipment to the data
link connector.
16
Introduction
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link pertinent supplements. For additional
Connector (DLC) that is used in information, please contact the Truck Body
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for Builders Advisory Service at
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/
reprogramming services. Installing an and then by selecting Contact Us or by
aftermarket device that uses the DLC phone at 1–877–840–4338.
during normal driving for purposes such as Use of your Ford light truck as an
remote insurance company monitoring, ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance
transmission of vehicle data to other Preparation Package voids the Ford New
devices or entities, or altering the Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void
performance of the vehicle, may cause the emissions warranties. In addition,
interference with or even damage to ambulance usage without the preparation
vehicle systems. We do not recommend package could cause high underbody
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a
devices unless approved by Ford. The risk of spraying fuel which could lead to
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage fires.
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
If your vehicle has the Ford Ambulance
Using your Vehicle With a Preparation Package, it will be indicated
Snowplow on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is on the driver side door
More information and guidelines for using pillar or on the rear edge of the driver door.
your vehicle with a snowplow are in this You can determine whether the
Owner's Manual. See Snow Plowing ambulance manufacturer followed Ford’s
(page 321). recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer. The Ford Ambulance
Using a Slide-In Camper Preparation Package is only available on
For information regarding the use of certain diesel engine equipped vehicles.
slide-in campers, consult the Truck
Camper Loading document supplied with Using your Vehicle as a Stationary
your vehicle. Power Source
Information and guidelines for operating a
Using your Vehicle as an vehicle with an aftermarket power take-off
Ambulance system are in this Owner's Manual. See
If your light truck has the Ford Ambulance Power Take-Off (page 212).
Preparation Package, it may be utilized as
an ambulance. We urge ambulance MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
manufacturers to follow the
recommendations of the Ford Incomplete EQUIPMENT
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s
Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle
Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as WARNING: Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device that may
take your focus off the road. Your
17
Introduction
primary responsibility is the safe

operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
that may affect the use of electronic
Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
18
Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
19
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E299629
A Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 90).

B Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 85).
C Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 110).
D Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 102).
E Navigation, media, phone.
F Entertainment display.
G Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 326).
H Audio. See Audio System (page 479).
I Climate control. See Climate Control (page 143).
J Rear defrost.
K Trailer backup assist. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 283).
L Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 175).
M Voice control. See Using Voice Recognition (page 515).
20
At a Glance
N Horn.
O Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 242).
P Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 80).
Q Parking brake release. See Brakes (page 223).
R Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 87).
21
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION (CPST) to make sure that you properly

install the child restraint in your vehicle
See the following sections for directions and that you consult your pediatrician to
on how to properly use safety restraints make sure you have a child restraint
for children. appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
WARNING: Always make sure your 1-888-327-4236 or go to
child is secured properly in a device that www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
is appropriate for their height, age and Transport Canada toll free at
weight. Child safety restraints must be 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
bought separately from your vehicle. to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
Failure to follow these instructions and area. Failure to properly restrain children
guidelines may result in an increased risk in child restraints made especially for
of serious injury or death to your child. their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
WARNING: All children are shaped death to your child.
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety WARNING: On hot days, the
organizations, base their temperature inside the vehicle can rise
recommendations for child restraints on very quickly. Exposure of people or
probable child height, age and weight animals to these high temperatures for
thresholds, or on the minimum even a short time can cause death or
requirements of the law. We recommend serious heat related injuries, including
that you check with a NHTSA Certified brain damage. Small children are
Child Passenger Safety Technician particularly at risk.
22
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended Restraint
Child Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age
Type
Use a child restraint

Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (sometimes called an
toddlers (generally age four or younger). infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less Use a belt-positioning
Small children
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) booster seat.
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle seatbelt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
Larger children 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb shoulder belt centered
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended across the shoulder and
by child restraint manufacturer). chest, and seat backrest
upright.
• You are required by law to properly use • When possible, always properly
child restraints for infants and toddlers restrain children 12 years of age and
in the United States and Canada. under in a rear seating position of your
• Many states and provinces require that vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
small children use approved booster children are safer when properly
seats until they reach age eight, a restrained in the rear seating positions
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb than in a front seating position.
(36 kg). Check your local and state or • When installing a rear facing child
provincial laws for specific restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
requirements about the safety of avoid interference between the child
children in your vehicle. restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
23
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
Child Seats depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child restraint with

combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
E142594 • Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
fastened in the buckle.
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally • Keep the buckle release button
age four or younger). pointing up and away from the child
restraint, with the tongue between the
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts child restraint and the release button,
(Except Front Center Position of to prevent accidental unbuckling.
Super Cab and Crew Cab) • Place the vehicle seat in the upright
position before you install the child
restraint.
WARNING: Do not place a • Put the seatbelt in the automatic
rearward facing child restraint in front of locking mode. This vehicle does not
an active airbag. Failure to follow this require the use of a locking clip.
instruction could result in personal injury
or death. Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
WARNING: Even with advanced combination lap and shoulder belts:
restraints systems, properly restrain Note: Although the child restraint
children 12 and under in a rear seating illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
position. Failure to follow this could the steps are the same for installing a rear
seriously increase the risk of injury or facing child restraint.
death.
24
Child Safety
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you did not
twist the belt webbing.
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat

with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure you securely latched the tongue
by pulling on it.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and

then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic

locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
E142530
25
Child Safety
Note: The automatic locking mode is

available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the E142534
retractor did not lock, unbuckle the belt
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
E142533 check with Transport Canada for referral
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
kneeling on the child restraint while (Front Center Position of Super
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order Cab and Crew Cab)
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra WARNING: Do not place a
weight of the child to the child restraint. rearward facing child restraint in front of
It also helps to achieve the proper an active airbag. Failure to follow this
snugness of the child restraint to your instruction could result in personal injury
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean or death.
toward the buckle helps to remove
remaining slack from the belt. WARNING: Always use both the
lap and shoulder portion of the seatbelt
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap, in the center seating position.
attach it.
26
Child Safety
The belt webbing below the tongue is the

lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt. The belt webbing above the
tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142530
3. While holding both shoulder and lap

portions next to the tongue, route the
tongue and webbing through the child
restraint according to the child restraint
E142528 manufacturer's instructions. Make sure
1. Position the child restraint in the front that you did not twist the belt webbing.
center seat.
E142531
E162708
buckle (the buckle closest to the
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
27
Child Safety
9. Check from time to time to be sure that

there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
E142533
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
5. While pushing down with your knee on
the child restraint, pull up on the
shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap WARNING: Do not attach two child
belt portion of the combination lap and safety restraints to the same anchor. In
shoulder belt. a crash, one anchor may not be strong
6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and enough to hold two child safety restraint
remove any slack in the belt to securely attachments and may break, causing
tighten the child restraint in the vehicle. serious injury or death.
7. If the child restraint has a tether strap, WARNING: Depending on where
attach it. you secure a child restraint, and
depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
The LATCH system has three vehicle

anchor points: two lower anchors where
the vehicle seat backrest and seat cushion
E142534
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
8. Before placing the child in the seat, tether anchor behind that seating position.
forcibly move the seat forward and LATCH compatible child restraints have
back to make sure the seat is securely two rigid or webbing mounted
held in place. To check this, grab the attachments that connect to the two lower
seat at the belt path and attempt to anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
move it side to side and forward and positions in your vehicle. This type of
back. There should be no more than attachment method eliminates the need
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper to use seatbelts to attach the child
installation. restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the
28
Child Safety
lower anchors are not used. For

forward-facing child restraints, you must
also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if a top tether
strap has been provided with your child
restraint.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the following
seating positions (LATCH is not available
on Regular Cab):
Crew Cab
E312154
The lower LATCH anchors are at the rear

section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat backrest. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions to
properly install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.
E308373
Follow the instructions later in this chapter
on attaching child restraints with tether
Super Cab straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors

from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized

spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
E308385
far apart as those in this vehicle.
29
Child Safety
The lower anchors at the center of the Contact the manufacturer of your child
second row rear seat are spaced 26 in restraint for information about ordering a
(652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) strap if the tether strap on your child
center to center. You cannot install a child restraint does not reach the appropriate
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at top tether anchor in the vehicle.
the center seating position. You can only
The passenger seats of your vehicle may
use LATCH compatible child restraints
have built-in tether strap anchors behind
(with attachments on belt webbing) at
the seats as described below.
this seating position provided that the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
permit use with the anchor spacing stated. loops of webbing above the seat backrest
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower or an anchor bracket behind the seat on
anchor if an adjacent child restraint is the rear edge of the seat cushion.
attached to that anchor. The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super
Each time you use the child restraint, check Cab has three straps along the top of the
that the seat is properly attached to the seat backrest that function as both routing
lower anchors and tether anchor, if loops for the tether straps and anchor
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side loops.
to side and forward and back where it is The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
secured to the vehicle. The seat should are in the following positions (shown from
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do top view):
this for a proper installation.
Regular Cab
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH

Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Restraints
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps

E308389
Many forward-facing child restraints
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child restraint and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
30
Child Safety
Super Cab
E326036
E308396
Crew Cab
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap just snug without lifting the front of
the child restraint. Keeping the child
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.
E308390 Once you install the child restraint using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
Front Seat Tether Strap

Attachment (Regular Cab)
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether
strap over the top of the seat backrest.
31
Child Safety
1. Route the child restraint tether strap Rear Seat Tether Strap
over the back of the seat and under the Attachment (Crew Cab and Super
head restraint. Cab)
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position. You may
need to pull the seat backrest forward
to access the tether anchors. Make sure
the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child restraint.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
Regular Cab Passenger and Center
Seats (located on back panel) E167009
There are three loops of webbing just

above the back of the rear seat (along the
bottom edge of the rear window). Use
these loops as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child restraint
tether straps.
For example, you can use the center loop
as a routing loop for a child restraint in the
center rear seat and as an anchoring loop
for child restraints installed in the outboard
rear seats.
E175295
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if
If you clip the tether strap incorrectly, the the tether strap is hooked to the loop
child restraint may not be retained properly directly behind the child restraint.
in the event of a crash.
To provide a tight tether strap:
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
E162715
32
Child Safety
1. Route the vehicle tether loop between (45 kg) if recommended by your child
the head restraint posts, then route the restraint manufacturer). Many state and
child restraint tether strap through the provincial laws require that children use
loop, forward of the head restraint. approved booster seats until they reach
2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
anchor loop in the adjacent seating 80 lb (36 kg).
position. If using the driver side, pass Booster seats should be used until you can
the strap behind the shoulder belt for answer YES to ALL of these questions
the center seat. Always put the tether when seated without a booster seat:
strap through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post holds the
child restraint tightly, but the head
restraint post is not strong enough to
hold the child restraint during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured in
If your child restraint system has a tether E142595
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend • Can the child sit all the way back
its use. against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
BOOSTER SEATS • Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
shoulder and chest?
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their • Can the child stay seated like this for
back. Failure to follow this instruction the whole trip?
could reduce the effectiveness of the Always use booster seats in conjunction
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for

children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
33
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
E70710
E68924 • High back booster seats

• Backless booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
If your backless booster seat has a supports your child's head, a high back
removable shield, remove the shield. If a booster seat would be a better choice.
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless Children and booster seats vary in size and
booster seat may place your child's head shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
(as measured at the tops of the ears) lap belt low and snug across the hips,
above the top of the seat. In this case, never up across the stomach, and lets you
move the backless booster to another adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
seating position with a higher seat backrest and rest snugly near the center of the
or head restraint and lap and shoulder shoulder. The following drawings compare
belts, or consider using a high back booster the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
seat. uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
34
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle

seat upon which it is being used, placing a WARNING: Always carefully follow
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet the instructions and warnings provided
liner under the booster seat may improve by the manufacturer of any child
this condition. Do not introduce any item restraint to determine if the restraint
thicker than this under the booster seat. device is appropriate for your child's size,
Check with the booster seat height, weight, or age. Follow the child
manufacturer's instructions. restraint manufacturer's instructions and
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the instructions
CHILD RESTRAINT and warnings provided by your vehicle
POSITIONING manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
WARNING: Do not place a or weight or does not properly fit the
rearward facing child restraint in front of child may increase the risk of serious
an active airbag. Failure to follow this injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
or death.
passenger to hold a child on their lap
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to
WARNING: Properly secure
follow this instruction could result in
children 12 years old and under in a rear
personal injury or death in the event of a
seating position whenever possible. If
sudden stop or crash.
you are unable to properly secure all
children in a rear seating position,
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
properly secure the largest child on the
books or towels to boost your child's
front seat. If you must use a forward
height. Failure to follow this instruction
facing child restraint on the front seat,
could result in personal injury or death.
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
35
Child Safety
WARNING: Properly secure child WARNING: Do not put the shoulder

restraints or booster seats when they are section of the seatbelt or allow the child
not in use. They could become projectiles to put the shoulder section of the
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to seatbelt under their arm or behind their
follow this instruction could result in back. Failure to follow this instruction
personal injury or death. could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children

or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Failure to follow this instruction could
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children

Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined LATCH LATCH Seatbelt Seatbelt Seatbelt

Weight of (Lower (Lower and Top and LATCH Only
Restraint Anchors Anchors Tether (Lower
Child and
Type and Top Only) Anchor Anchors
Child
Restraint Tether and Top
Anchor) Tether
Anchor)
Rear facing
Up to 65 lb
child X X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Rear facing
Over 65 lb
child X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Up to 65 lb
X X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Over 65 lb
X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
36
Child Safety
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
151).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (IF

EQUIPPED)
When these locks are set, the rear doors

cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the

rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
37
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
WARNING: Always drive and ride assembly made up of one buckle and
with your seatback upright and the lap one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
belt snug and low across the hips. Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
WARNING: Children must always belt under the arm. Never use a single
be properly restrained. seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Do not allow a WARNING: Even with advanced

passenger to hold a child on their lap restraints systems, properly restrain
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to children 12 and under in a rear seating
follow this instruction could result in position. Failure to follow this could
personal injury or death in the event of a seriously increase the risk of injury or
sudden stop or crash. death.
WARNING: All occupants of your WARNING: Seatbelts and seats

vehicle, including the driver, should may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
always properly wear their seatbelts, sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
even when an airbag supplemental burn a small child. Check seat covers and
restraint system is provided. Failure to buckles before you place a child
properly wear your seatbelt could anywhere near them.
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death. All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder belts. All occupants of
WARNING: It is extremely the vehicle should always properly wear
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside their seatbelts, even when an airbag
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people supplemental restraint system is provided.
riding in these areas are more likely to be The seatbelt system consists of:
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle • Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
that is not equipped with seats and • Shoulder seatbelts with automatic
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your locking mode, (except the driver
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt).
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning • Height adjusters at the front outermost
could result in serious personal injury or seating positions.
death.
• Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an outermost and rear outermost seating
unbelted person is significantly more positions.
likely to die than a person wearing a
seatbelt.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
38
Seatbelts
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. In side
crashes and rollovers, the seatbelt
E142588
pretensioners activate when the Safety
Canopy is activated. 2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Using the Seatbelt with Cinch
The front outermost and rear safety Tongue (Front Center Seat on
restraints in the vehicle are combination Super Cab and Crew Cab)
lap and shoulder belts.
The cinch tongue slides up and down the
belt webbing when you stow the belt or
while putting seatbelts on. When you
buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt, the
cinch tongue allows you to shorten the lap
portion, but pinches the webbing to keep
the lap portion from getting longer. The
cinch tongue is designed to slip during a
crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
either the lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a lap and
E142587 shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
buckle (the buckle closest to the lap belt portion of it.
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
39
Seatbelts
While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the

lap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongue
adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle
receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the seatbelt locks and helps reduce
your forward movement.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive

E162708
with your seatback upright and properly
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
webbing out of the shoulder belt of the seatbelt snugly and low across
retractor. the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
2. While holding the webbing below the women must follow this practice. See
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion) the following figure.
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING: Always drive and ride

with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the

retractor so that the shoulder belt E142590
portion of the seatbelt crosses your Pregnant women should always wear their
shoulder and chest. seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the combination lap and shoulder belt low
belt is twisted, remove the twist. across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
buckle for your seating position until shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
you hear a snap and feel it latch. shoulder and the center of the chest.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
40
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Locking Modes Automatic Locking Mode

In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
WARNING: If your vehicle is
retracts to remove any slack in the
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
and associated components inspected
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury When to Use the Automatic Locking
or death. Mode
All safety restraints in the vehicle are Use this mode any time you install a child
combination lap and shoulder belts. The restraint in a front outermost passenger
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking seating position in a Regular Cab,
mode. The front outermost passenger and SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating
rear seat seatbelts have both types of position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
locking modes described as follows: optional front center seatbelt has a cinch
mechanism. Properly restrain children 12
Vehicle Sensitive Mode years old and under in a rear seat whenever
possible.
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length How to Use the Automatic Locking
adjustment to your movements and Mode
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,
turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a E142591
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline 1. Buckle the combination lap and
the rear seat backrest or push the seat shoulder belt.
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
Feed a small length of webbing back downward until you pull the entire belt
toward the stowed position. out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
41
Seatbelts
How to Disengage the Automatic

Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
E145664
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so

WARNING: Position the safety belt the belt rests across the middle of your
height adjuster so that the belt rests shoulder.
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt properly To adjust the shoulder belt height:
could reduce the effectiveness of the 1. Pull the button and slide the height
safety belt and increase the risk of injury adjuster up or down.
in a crash.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP

AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
E71880 driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
If Then
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- the indicator chime sounds for a few
tion... seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic- chime turn off.
ator chime is sounding...
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
ignition switch is turned to the on position... chime remain off.
42
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER warning function. It provides additional

reminders by intermittently sounding a
Belt-Minder™ tone and illuminating the seatbelt warning
light when you are in the driver seat and a
This feature supplements the seatbelt seatbelt is unbuckled.
If Then
You buckle your seatbelt before you switch

the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
You do not buckle your seatbelt before your The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
and 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the warning tone sounds for six seconds every
ignition on... 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.
The driver seatbelt is unbuckled for about The Belt-Minder feature activates - the
one minute while the vehicle is traveling at seatbelt warning light illuminates and the
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 warning tone sounds for six seconds every
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about five
on... minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt.
Before following the procedure, make sure

Deactivating and Activating the that:
Belt-Minder Feature (Driver only)
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: While the system • The ignition is off.
allows you to deactivate it, this system • All vehicle doors are closed.
is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an • The driver seatbelt is unbuckled.
accident. We recommend you leave the 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
system activated for yourself and others engine.
who may use the vehicle.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light
turns off (about one minute). You must
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
complete Step 3 within 30 seconds
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the
after the seatbelt warning light turns
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled,
off.
it will be re-enabled during the use of
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 61). 3. Buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt
three times at a moderate speed,
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before ending with the seatbelt in the
proceeding with the programming unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
procedure. seatbelt warning light turns on.
43
Seatbelts
4. While the seatbelt warning light is on, SEATBELT EXTENSIONS

buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
WARNING: Persons who fit into
• This will switch the feature off if it is the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
currently on. extension. Unnecessary use could result
• This will switch the feature on if it is in serious personal injury in the event of
currently off. a crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions

CHILD RESTRAINT AND provided free of charge by our dealers.
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle,
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child model year and seating position. The use
safety seat systems periodically to make of an extension intended for another
sure they work properly and are not vehicle, model year or seating position
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child may not offer you the full protection of
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies, WARNING: Never use seatbelt
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt extensions to install child restraints.
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
shoulder belt height adjusters (if extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat WARNING: Do not use extensions
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching to change the way the seatbelt fits
hardware, should be inspected after a across the torso, over the lap or to make
crash. Read the child restraint the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information If, because of body size or driving position,
specific to the child restraint. it is not possible to properly fasten the
We recommend that all seatbelt seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a extension that is compatible with the
crash be replaced. However, if the crash seatbelts is available free of charge from
was minor and an authorized dealer finds our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
that the belts do not show damage and extensions made by the original equipment
continue to operate properly, they do not seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
not in use during a crash should also be is compatible with your vehicle restraint
inspected and replaced if either damage system.
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 391).
44
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury them after inflation.
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag WARNING: If a supplementary
module. restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
WARNING: All occupants of your the system and associated components
vehicle, including the driver, should inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
always properly wear their seatbelts, follow this instruction could result in
even when an airbag supplemental personal injury or death.
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could The airbags are a supplemental restraint
seriously increase the risk of injury or system and are designed to work with the
death. seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
WARNING: Properly secure body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
children 12 years old and under in a rear there is a risk of injury from a deploying
seating position whenever possible. If airbag.
you are unable to properly secure all Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
children in a rear seating position, cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
properly secure the largest child on the airbag deploys. This is normal.
front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat, The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
move the seat as far back as possible. upon activation. After airbag deployment,
Failure to follow these instructions could it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
result in personal injury or death. residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
WARNING: Do not place your arms (to lubricate the bag) or sodium
on the airbag cover or through the compounds (for example, baking soda)
steering wheel. Failure to follow this that result from the combustion process
instruction could result in personal injury. that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
WARNING: Do not place a may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
rearward facing child restraint in front of the residue is toxic.
an active airbag. Failure to follow this While the system is designed to help
instruction could result in personal injury reduce serious injuries, contact with a
or death. deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
WARNING: Do not attempt to a possibility as a result of the noise
service, repair, or modify the associated with a deploying airbag.
supplementary restraint system or Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
associated components. Failure to with considerable force, there is the risk of
follow this instruction could result in death or serious injuries such as fractures,
personal injury or death. facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
45
particularly to occupants who are not · Crash sensors and monitoring

properly restrained or are otherwise out of system with readiness indicator.
position at the time of airbag deployment. E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Thus, it is extremely important that Indicator (page 53).
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible Passenger Airbag On and Off
while maintaining vehicle control. Switch (If Equipped)
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
DRIVER AND PASSENGER children 12 and under in a rear seating
AIRBAGS position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the WARNING: The front passenger
steering wheel. Failure to follow this airbag is not designed to offer protection
instruction could result in personal injury. to an occupant in the center seating
position.
WARNING: Do not place a
rearward facing child restraint in front of WARNING: Your vehicle may have
an active airbag. Failure to follow this an airbag deactivation switch. Before
instruction could result in personal injury driving, always look at the switch to
or death. make sure it is in the appropriate
position. Failure to put the switch in the
proper position can increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a crash.
E181984
The front passenger airbag on and off

switch has indicators that illuminate,
E151127
indicating that the front passenger frontal
airbag is either on or off. The indicators are
The driver and front passenger airbags near the center of the instrument panel.
deploy during significant frontal and near Note: The OFF and ON indicators illuminate
frontal crashes. for a short period of time when you switch
The driver and passenger front airbag the ignition on to confirm it is functional.
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
46
Switch Position Passenger Airbag Status Passenger Airbag

Indicator
Off OFF: Lit Disabled

ON: Unlit
On OFF: Unlit Enabled
ON: Lit
Switching the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNING: If the light does not

illuminate when the passenger airbag
switch is off and you switch the ignition
on, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced immediately by a qualified
technician.
WARNING: To avoid switching on

the airbag, always remove the ignition
key with the switch in the off position.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear E181522

seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always 1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch
use seatbelts and child restraints to OFF and hold in OFF while removing
properly. Do not place a child in a rear the key.
facing infant seat in the front seat unless 2. When you switch the ignition on, the
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag passenger airbag off light illuminates
on and off switch and the passenger briefly, momentarily shuts off and then
airbag is turned off. This is because the switches back on. This indicates that
back of the infant seat is too close to the the passenger airbag is deactivated.
inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal
injury to the infant when the airbag Switching the Passenger Airbag Back
inflates is substantial. On
The passenger airbag on and off switch is

in the glovebox. WARNING: The seatbelts for the
driver and right front passenger seating
positions are specifically designed to
operate together with the airbags in
certain types of crashes. When you
switch off your airbag, you not only lose
47
the protection of the airbag, you also

may reduce the effectiveness of your
seatbelt system. If the passenger does
not meet the requirements stated in the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria, switching off the
airbag can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear

seats, always transport children who are
12 and younger in the rear seat. Always
use seatbelts and child restraints
properly. Do not place a child in a rear
E181521
facing infant seat in the front seat unless
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the
on and off switch and the passenger switch to ON.
airbag is turned off. This is because the
back of the infant seat is too close to the 2. The passenger airbag off light will
inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal briefly illuminate when you switch the
injury to the infant when the airbag ignition on. This indicates that the
inflates is substantial. passenger airbag is operational.
The passenger side airbag should always
WARNING: If the passenger airbag be on (the passenger airbag off light
off light is illuminated when the should not be illuminated) unless the
passenger airbag switch is on and the passenger is a person who meets the
ignition is on, have the passenger airbag requirements stated either in Category 1, 2
switch serviced immediately by a or 3 of the National Highway Traffic Safety
qualified technician. Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria which follows.
The passenger airbag remains off until you
switch it back on. The vast majority of drivers and passengers
are much safer with an airbag than
without. To do their job and reduce the risk
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
pose a potentially deadly risk in some
situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The
most effective way to reduce the risk of
unnecessary airbag injuries without
reducing the overall safety of the vehicle
is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the
front seat. This provides the protection of
seatbelts and permits the airbags to
provide the additional protection they were
48
designed to provide. If you choose to • The vehicle has no rear seat;

deactivate your airbag, you are losing the • The vehicle has a rear seat too small
very significant risk reducing benefits of to accommodate a rear-facing infant
the airbag and you are also reducing the seat; or
effectiveness of the seatbelts, because
seatbelts in modern vehicles are designed • The infant has a medical condition
to work as a safety system with the which, according to the infant's
airbags. physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front so that the
National Highway Traffic Safety driver can constantly monitor the
Administration Deactivation Criteria child's condition.
(Excluding Canada) 2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
WARNING: This vehicle has special • The vehicle has no rear seat;
energy management seatbelts for the • Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in
driver and right front passenger. These the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
particular seatbelts are specifically children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
designed to work with airbags to help ride in the front because no space is
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The available in the rear seat(s) of the
energy management seatbelt gives or vehicle; or
releases additional seatbelt webbing in • The child has a medical condition
some accidents to reduce the which, according to the child's
concentration of force on an occupant's physician, makes it necessary for the
chest and to reduce the risk of certain child to ride in the front seat so that the
bone fractures and injuries to underlying driver can constantly monitor the
organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this child's condition.
energy management seatbelt might
permit the passenger wearing the 3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
seatbelt to move forward enough to medical condition which, according to his
have a serious or fatal injury. The more or her physician:
severe the crash, and the heavier the • Causes the passenger airbag to pose
occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure a special risk for the passenger;
the airbag is on for any passenger who
does not qualify under the National • Makes the potential harm from the
Highway Traffic Safety Administration passenger airbag in a crash greater
deactivation criteria. than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
must ride in the front seat because:
49
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria • My vehicle has no rear seat;

(Canada Only) • Although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
children age 12 and under have no
WARNING: This vehicle has special option but to sometimes ride in the
energy management seatbelts for the front seat because rear seat space is
driver and right front passenger. These insufficient;
particular seatbelts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help • The child has a medical condition that,
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The according to the child's physician,
energy management seatbelt gives or makes it necessary for the child to ride
releases additional seatbelt webbing in in the front seat so that the driver can
some accidents to reduce the monitor the child's condition.
concentration of force on an occupant's 3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
chest and to reduce the risk of certain medical condition that, according to his or
bone fractures and injuries to underlying her physician:
organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this
• Poses a special risk for the passenger
energy management seatbelt might
if the airbag deploys; and
permit the passenger wearing the
seatbelt to move forward enough to • Makes the potential harm from the
have a serious or fatal injury. The more passenger airbag deployment greater
severe the crash, and the heavier the than the potential harm from turning
occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure off the airbag and experiencing a crash
the airbag is on for any passenger who without the protection offered by the
does not qualify under the Transport airbag
Canada deactivation criteria.
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) Seating Adjustment
must ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat; WARNING: National Highway
• The rear seat in my vehicle cannot Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
accommodate a rear-facing infant recommends a minimum distance of at
seat; least 10 in (25 cm) between an
• The infant has a medical condition occupant's chest and the driver airbag
which, according to the infant's module.
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that To properly position yourself away from
the driver can monitor the infant's the airbag:
condition. • Move your seat to the rear as far as you
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or can while still reaching the pedals
under must ride in the front seat because: comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
50
After all occupants have adjusted their If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very Cab, properly restrain the child in the
important that they continue to sit center front unless doing so would interfere
properly. Properly seated occupants sit with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
upright, lean against the seat back, and and shoulder belt protection for all
center themselves on the seat cushion, occupants, and airbag protection for the
with their feet comfortably extended on adults. A child or infant properly restrained
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase in the center front seat should not incur
the chance of injury in a crash event. For risk of serious injury from the airbags.
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both SIDE AIRBAGS
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.
WARNING: Do not place objects
Children and Airbags or mount equipment on or near the
airbag cover, on the side of the front or
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
WARNING: Do not place a come into contact with a deploying
rearward facing child restraint in front of airbag. Failure to follow these
an active airbag. Failure to follow this instructions may increase the risk of
instruction could result in personal injury personal injury in the event of a crash.
or death.
WARNING: Accessory seat covers
not released by Ford Motor Company
could prevent the deployment of the
airbags and increase the risk of injuries
in a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head

on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to

service, repair, or modify the
E142846 supplementary restraint system or
Children must always be properly associated components. Failure to
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that follow this instruction could result in
children are safer when properly restrained personal injury or death.
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
51
The design and development of the side

WARNING: If a supplementary airbag system included recommended
restraint system component has testing procedures that were developed
deployed, it will not function again. Have by a group of automotive safety experts
the system and associated components known as the Side Airbag Technical
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to Working Group. These recommended
follow this instruction could result in testing procedures help reduce the risk of
personal injury or death. injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
The side airbags are on the outermost side
of the front seat backrests. In certain SAFETY CANOPY™
sideways crashes or rollover events, the
side airbags will be inflated. The airbag
was designed to inflate between the door
panel and occupant to further enhance the WARNING: Do not place objects
protection provided to occupants in side or mount equipment on or near the
impact crashes. headliner at the siderail that may come
into contact with a deploying curtain
airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head

on the door. The curtain airbag could
injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to

service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
E152533
associated components. Failure to
The system consists of the following: follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that your vehicle has side WARNING: All occupants of your
airbags. vehicle, including the driver, should
• Side airbags inside the driver and front always properly wear their seatbelts,
passenger seat backrests. even when an airbag supplemental
Crash sensors and monitoring restraint system is provided. Failure to
system with readiness indicator. properly wear your seatbelt could
E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag seriously increase the risk of injury or
Indicator (page 53). death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,

do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
52
· Crash sensors and monitoring

WARNING: If a supplementary system with a readiness
restraint system component has
E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors
deployed, it will not function again. Have and Airbag Indicator (page 53).
the system and associated components
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
The Safety Canopy deploys during downward from the headliner above the
significant side crashes or when a certain doors along the side window opening.
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy The design and development of the Safety
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal, Canopy included recommended testing
behind the headliner, above each row of procedures that were developed by a
seats. In certain sideways crashes or group of automotive safety experts known
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be as the Side Airbag Technical Working
activated, regardless of which seats are Group. These recommended testing
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
to inflate between the side window area related to the deployment of side airbags
and occupants to further enhance (including the Safety Canopy).
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding

equipment to the front end of your
vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
frame, front end body structure, tow
hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify or add equipment to the front
end of your vehicle.
E75004
The system consists of the following: Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors that provide information
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above to the restraints control module which
the trim panels over the front and rear deploys (activates) the seatbelt
side windows identified by a label or pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the
trim. Safety Canopy. Based on the type of crash,
• A flexible headliner which opens above the restraints control module deploy the
the side doors to allow air curtain appropriate safety devices.
deployment
53
The restraints control module also • The design of the side airbags is to
monitors the readiness of the above safety inflate in certain side impact crashes.
devices plus the crash and occupant Side airbags may activate in other
sensors. The readiness of the safety types of crashes if the vehicle
system is indicated by a warning indicator experiences sufficient sideways motion
light in the instrument cluster or by a or deformation.
backup tone if the warning light is not • The design of the Safety Canopy is to
working. Routine maintenance of the inflate in certain side impact crashes
airbag is not required. or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
A difficulty with the system is indicated by may activate in other types of crashes
one or more of the following: if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
The readiness light will not certain likelihood of rollover.
illuminate immediately after you
E67017 switch the ignition on.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
• The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
• You hear a series of five beeps. The possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
tone pattern repeats periodically until qualified personnel.
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration).
• The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
54
Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON Note: If you are in range, the remote control

will operate if you press any button
RADIO FREQUENCIES unintentionally.
This device complies with Part 15 of the Note: The remote control contains sensitive
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada electrical components. Exposure to moisture
license-exempt RSS standard(s). or impact may cause permanent damage.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
harmful interference, and (2) This device
The system uses a radio frequency signal
must accept any interference received,
to communicate with your vehicle and
including interference that may cause
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
undesired operation.
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
WARNING: Changes or handle switch.
modifications not expressively approved • You press the luggage compartment
by the party responsible for compliance button.
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the • You press a button on the transmitter.
radio certification number only signifies If excessive radio frequency interference
that Industry Canada technical is present in the area or if the transmitter
specifications were met. battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
The typical operating range for your use the mechanical key blade in your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). intelligent access key to open the driver
Vehicles with the remote start feature will door in this situation. See Remote
have a greater range. Control (page 55).
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range: REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers. Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
• Structures around the vehicle. Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
• Other vehicles parked next to your unlock or lock the driver door from outside
vehicle. your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
The radio frequency used by your remote ignition key that operates all the locks and
control can also be used by other radio starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
transmitters, for example amateur radios, control.
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
55
E191532
Press the button to release the key blade.

Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E307113
The intelligent access keys operate the

power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E151795 Removable Key Blade

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a The intelligent access key also contains a
security label that provides important key removable key blade that you can use to
cut information. Keep the label in a safe unlock your vehicle.
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
56
WARNING: If the battery

compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
or death.
Note: Refer to local regulations when

disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
E307112 transmitter should operate normally.
Press the release button and pull the key A message appears in the information
blade out. display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
110).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
E151795 before beginning the procedure.
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away

from children to prevent ingestion.
result in personal injury or death. If
E191533
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
57
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.

6. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
E151799
7. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
3. Carefully remove the cover.
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
screwdriver, in the position shown to
release the battery.
E307112
1. Press the release button and pull the

key blade out.
58
E218402

screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward.
E303824
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden onto the transmitter and install the key
behind the key blade head to remove blade.
the battery cover.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory positions.
Press the unlock button on a linked remote
control to recall memory positions. If you
enable the easy entry and exit feature, the
seat moves to the easy entry position. The
seat moves to the driver memory position
when you switch the ignition on.
Linking a Preset Position to your

Remote Control
See Memory Function (page 157).
59
Car Finder
Press the button twice within
three seconds. A tone sounds
E138623 and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
E138624 again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle.
60
MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Certain driver alerts, stability systems

or parking aids turn on automatically
MyKey allows you to program keys with when you use the MyKey system. For
restricted driving modes to promote good example, Blind Spot Information
driving habits. You can program the System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys departure warning or forward collision
that you did not program are administrator warning.
keys or admin keys. • Restricted touchscreen operation in
You can use admin keys to: some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle destination input while the vehicle is in
restrictions. any gear other than park (P) or when
• Program certain MyKey settings. the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
• Clear all MyKey restrictions. speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
After you program a MyKey, you can view
restrictions, if this feature is available
the following information through the
in your market.
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch
MyKeys for your vehicle. the lane departure warning feature off, but
this feature turns back on automatically
• The total distance a MyKey driver with every new key cycle.
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM
Note: Every MyKey receives the same radio or a very basic audio system, then the
restrictions and settings. You cannot radio may not mute.
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a Optional Settings
push-button start switch: When both a You can configure certain vehicle feature
MyKey and an admin key are present when settings when you first create a MyKey. You
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes can also change the settings afterward
the admin key only. with an admin key.
Standard Settings Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
Not every vehicle includes the features available for your vehicle, then they appear
listed below. If your vehicle has this in your information display, providing
equipment, then you cannot change the choices to switch them on or off, or to select
following settings when using a MyKey: a more specific setting.
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. • Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey mutes the audio system until MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
drivers, and in some instances, speeds. The information display shows
passengers, fasten their seatbelts. warnings followed by an audible tone
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel when the MyKey driver reaches the set
warning activates earlier for MyKey speed. You cannot override the set
drivers, giving them more time to refuel. speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.
61
MyKey™
WARNING: Do not set MyKey

maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a
safe speed considering posted speed
limits and prevailing road conditions. The
driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so

MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
E226701
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
control to switch it off. the transmitter you want to program.
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM If your vehicle has a push-button start,
radio or a very basic audio system, then the place the transmitter into the backup
radio may not mute. slot. See previous illustration.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
CREATING A MYKEY through the menus to begin
programming your MyKey. See
Use the information display to create a Information Displays (page 110).
MyKey.
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
Vehicles that have the following center
console:
62
MyKey™
4. A confirmation message appears in the Note: Make sure you label the programmed
display after you finish programming MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
your MyKey. The programmed original admin keys.
restrictions apply when you key off, You can also program the optional MyKey
open and close driver door and restart settings.
your vehicle with the programmed key
or transmitter. Programming or Changing
Note: Make sure you label the programmed Configurable Settings
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
original admin keys. Use the information display to program or
change your optional MyKey settings.
You can also program the optional MyKey
settings. 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
Vehicles that have the following center
console: 2. Access the main menu in the
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 110).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close the driver door and
restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or transmitter.
E269950
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or settings at any time during the same key
the transmitter you want to program. cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
If your vehicle has a push-button start, switch the engine off, you must use an
place the transmitter into the backup admin key to change or clear your optional
slot. See previous illustration. MyKey settings.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
through the menus to begin
programming your MyKey. See When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
Information Displays (page 110). all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
3. Follow the instructions in the display. their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the information display.
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
restrictions apply when you key off, key.
open and close driver door and restart
your vehicle with the programmed key
or transmitter.
63
MyKey™
2. Access the main menu in the Number of MyKeys

through the menus to begin clearing Indicates the number of MyKeys
your MyKey programming. See programmed to your vehicle. Use this
Information Displays (page 110). feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
3. Follow the instructions in the display. all MyKeys have been deleted.
display after you finish clearing your Number of Admin Keys
MyKeys.
Indicates how many admin keys are
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you programmed to your vehicle. Use this
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys feature to determine how many admin
to their original admin key status. You keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions if an additional MyKey has been
individually. programmed.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE

STATUS START SYSTEMS (IF EQUIPPED)
You can find information about your MyKey is not compatible with non
programmed MyKeys by using the Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
information display. See Information systems. If you choose to install a remote
Displays (page 110). start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential causes
I cannot create a MyKey. · The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup slot.
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
64
MyKey™
Condition Potential causes
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is

disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 62).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The key or transmitter used to start the
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 62).
I lost the only admin key. · Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.
I lost a key. · Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. · The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
65
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
You can use the power door lock control seconds to disable or enable two-stage
or the remote control to lock and unlock unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
your doors and tailgate. See Tailgate allows your entire vehicle to unlock with
Lock (page 71). one press of the button.
Note: Do not use the door latch assembly Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks
to attach any accessory, such as handles or your entire vehicle when you disable
steps, as this can cause damage to your two-stage unlocking.
vehicle.
Locking the Vehicle
Power Door Locks (If Equipped) Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
The power door lock control is on the driver E138623 flash.
and front passenger door panels.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors are closed.
Mislock
If any door is open, or if the hood is open
E138628 on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn sounds twice and
A Unlock. the direction indicators do not flash.
B Lock. Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
Remote Control
General Information
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running. You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage or purse when your intelligent access key
Unlock) is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
Press the button to unlock the back of the door handle for unlocking and
driver door. Press the button a separate sensor on the face of each door
E138629 again within three seconds to handle for locking.
unlock all doors. The direction indicators
flash. The direction indicators flash twice The system does not function if:
to confirm the change. The unlocking • Your vehicle battery has no charge.
mode applies to the remote control,
• The key battery has no charge.
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access. • The key frequencies are jammed.
66
Doors and Locks
Note: The system may not function if the At the Electronic Tailgate (If Equipped)
key is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 55).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E187693
E248555
Press the exterior tailgate release button
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
unlocks and opens. See Tailgate Lock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
(page 71).
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not Smart Unlock (If Equipped)
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The This feature helps to prevent you from
intelligent access system requires a brief locking your intelligent access key inside
delay to authenticate your intelligent your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
access key fob. rear cargo area.
Locking Using Intelligent Access If you leave your key in the ignition, when
you open the driver door and lock your
vehicle with the power door lock control,
the doors lock then unlock.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
E248556 • Using the manual lock on the inside of
the door.
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door • Locking the driver door with a key.
handle lock sensor for approximately one • Using the keyless entry keypad.
second to lock, being careful to not touch • Using the lock button on the remote
the unlock sensor on the back of the door control.
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
to confirm locking occurred without Access Keys (If Equipped)
inadvertently unlocking.
Note: Do not use the outside door handle This feature helps to prevent you from
as a roof cargo strap. locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
67
Doors and Locks
When you lock your vehicle using the Autounlock

power door lock control (with the door
open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
vehicle searches for an intelligent access • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
key in the passenger compartment after switch the ignition off or to the
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a accessory position.
key, all of the doors immediately unlock. • You open the driver door within 10
In order to override the smart unlock minutes of switching the ignition off or
feature and intentionally lock the to accessory.
intelligent access key inside your vehicle, Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
you can lock your vehicle after all doors electronically lock your vehicle after you
are closed by using the keyless entry switch the ignition off and before you open
keypad, pressing the lock button on the driver door.
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
intelligent access key in your hand.
You can enable or disable the autounlock
When you open one of the front doors and feature in the information display or an
lock your vehicle using the power door lock authorized dealer can do it for you. See
control, all doors lock then unlock if the General Information (page 110).
ignition is on.
Illuminated Entry
Autolock (If Equipped)
The interior lamps and select exterior
Autolock locks all the doors when: lamps illuminate when you unlock the
• All doors are closed. doors with the remote entry system.
• The ignition is on. The illuminated entry system turns off the
• You shift into any gear putting your lights if:
vehicle in motion. • The ignition is on.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater • You press the remote control lock
than 12 mph (20 km/h). button.
Autolock repeats when: • After 25 seconds of illumination.
• You open then close any door while the The dome lamp does not turn on if the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is control is set to the off position.
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower. The lights do not turn off if:
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater • You switch them on with the dimmer
than 12 mph (20 km/h). control.
• Any door is open.
Battery Saver
The battery saver turns off the interior
lamps 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off, or 10 minutes after you exit the
vehicle.
68
Doors and Locks
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for 1. Enter the factory-set code.

Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) 2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
If you leave the ignition on after leaving seconds.
your vehicle, it turns off 30 minutes after 3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
you close all of the doors. 4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code one.
KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED) The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
To Program additional personal entry
KEYPAD
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step4:
The keypad is near the driver window and • Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
illuminates when you touch it.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast • Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly. • Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code

1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
E190936
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
You can use the keypad to:
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
• Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. This must be done within five seconds
• Program and erase user codes. of completing Step 2.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code Anti-Scan Feature
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
authorized dealer. You can also create up if you enter the wrong code seven times
to five of your own five-digit personal entry (35 consecutive button presses). This
codes. mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
69
Doors and Locks
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:

• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 66).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
To Release the Tailgate (If Equipped)
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 5·6 control within five
seconds.
70
Tailgate
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED) With the Remote Control

Press the remote control button
The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of twice within three seconds.
the tailgate. E191530
With the Outside Control Button

1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the
tailgate will unlock when you press the
tailgate release button.
E224958
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.

Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn
it to the right to unlock the tailgate.
ELECTRONIC TAILGATE (IF

EQUIPPED)
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the

WARNING: It is extremely tailgate handle.
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside 3. Push the tailgate up to close the
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people tailgate.
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow Note: The electronic tailgate is not a
people to ride in any area of your vehicle powered tailgate. The use of a tonneau
that is not equipped with seats and cover or other aftermarket accessories,
safety belts. Make sure everyone in your freezing conditions or being parked downhill
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a may stop your tailgate from opening
safety belt. Failure to follow this warning automatically after it is unlatched. You may
could result in serious personal injury or need to pull the handle to open the tailgate
death. if the tailgate does not automatically lower
after being unlatched.
The electronic tailgate release will not
operate when:
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
71
Tailgate
REMOVING THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure

cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
You can remove the tailgate for more

loading room. E163092
1. Obtain the tailgate removal kit from 6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
the glove box. spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
7. Disconnect the other cable.
8. Lift the tailgate to a 45 degree angle
from horizontal.
9. Lift the right side off its hinge.
10. Lift the tailgate to an 80 degree angle
from horizontal.
11. Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
E248384
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
2. Locate and disconnect the frame
connections. They are on the left-hand TAILGATE STEP (IF EQUIPPED)
side of the vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle may have up to three Use the step to make entering the truck
frame connections. bed easier.
3. Install the caps from the tailgate To reduce the risk of falling:
removal kit on the in-line connectors • Only operate the step when your
that remain on the vehicle. vehicle is on a level surface.
Note: If you do not install the caps on the • Only operate the step in areas with
connectors, some features may not operate sufficient lighting.
as intended.
• Always open the step panel to widen
4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully the step.
feed the tailgate harness up through
the bumper and place it out of the way. • Always use the grab handle when
climbing on the step.
5. Lower the tailgate.
• Do not use the step with bare feet.
72
Tailgate
• Make sure the step is clean before use. Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
• Keep the step load, you plus the load, handle.
below 350 lb (159 kg). Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears as worn or
Opening the Step damaged.
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the Closing the Step
step before moving your vehicle. Do not
drive with the step or grab handle open. 1. Press the yellow button on the
1. Lower the tailgate. telescoping handle to lower the handle,
then press the yellow lever at the
2. Push the button in the center of the bottom of the handle to unlock the
step molding. The step pops out handle. Rotate the handle down from
slightly. vertical to horizontal and push it into
the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
E187718 and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
to its lowest position. Note: Do not exceed 150 pounds (68
kilograms) on the tailgate when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward

out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal
to vertical until you hear a click. You
have locked the handle in place.
73
Tailgate
Tailgate mode
E163098
E163095 4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both

knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center secure the panels.
of your vehicle.
E163099
E163096
5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into
2. Open the latches to release the panels. the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.
E163097
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.

Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
74
Tailgate
Grocery mode
E163100
Follow Steps 1-4 of the tailgate mode

instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
75
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT Automatic Disarming

SYSTEM The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
The system prevents someone from
starting the engine with an incorrectly
coded key. ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The system is not compatible with The active anti-theft system is designed
aftermarket remote start systems. Use of to warn you in the event of unauthorized
these may result in engine starting problems vehicle entry and is also designed to help
and a loss of security. prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices You can choose what is monitored by
or a second coded key on the same key arming the system in different ways. See
chain could cause vehicle starting problems Information Displays (page 110).
if they are too close to the key when starting The direction indicators flash and the horn
the engine. Prevent these objects from sounds if the system triggers while the
touching the coded key when starting the alarm is armed.
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the Take all remote controls to an authorized
coded key and restart the engine if a dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem occurs. problem with your vehicle.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key Using the System
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle. You can select two levels of alarm security.
You can change the level of security when
SecuriLock® the ignition is switched off through the
information display with the two options
The system helps prevent the engine from below:
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the Perimeter Only (If Equipped)
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. Perimeter only monitors the following:
A message could appear in the information • Doors.
display. • Hood.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with • Tailgate.
a coded key, it is not operating correctly.
All Sensors (If Equipped)
A message could appear in the information
display. All sensors monitors the following:
• Doors.
Automatic Arming
• Hood.
The system arms when you switch the • Tailgate.
ignition off.
• Movement inside your vehicle.
• Change in vehicle inclination, for
example, unwanted towing.
76
Security
Note: Do not choose all sensors monitor

mode when the vehicle is in transport or if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur.
Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure you
close all the windows prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences.
Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system does not arm if any door is ajar.
Arming the Alarm

The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
using the remote control or keyless entry
keypad. You can also lock your vehicle
using the lock sensor on the exterior door
handle if your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 66).
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm

Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
• Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad. If
equipped with intelligent access, you
can use the unlock sensor on the
exterior door handle. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 66).
• Switch the ignition on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door lock
cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
switch the ignition on within 12
seconds.
77
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
USING POWER RUNNING Automatic Power Deploy

BOARDS
WARNING: In extreme climates,

excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving
before attempting to step on them. The
running boards will resume normal
function once the blockage is cleared.
E166682
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any The running boards extend down and out
object under your vehicle. Never place when you open the door. This can help you
your hand between the extended running enter and exit your vehicle.
board and your vehicle. A moving running
board may cause injury. Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
boards return to the stowed position after
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
a two-second delay.
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking. Manual Power Deploy
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate You can manually operate the running
more slowly in cool temperatures. boards in the information display.
Note: The running board mechanism may 1. Using the instrument cluster display
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and controls on the steering wheel, select
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this Settings.
happens, manually set the running boards 2. Select Advanced Settings.
to the deployed position. Then, wash the 3. Select Vehicle.
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand. 4. Select Power Running Boards.
5. Select a setting.
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).
78
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
Enabling and Disabling

You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display.
• When disabled, the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
• When enabled, the running boards
move back to the correct positions
based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board reverses direction and
moves to the end of travel if it encounters
an object when moving.
79
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING End of Travel Position

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: The steering column sets a stopping
POWER ADJUSTABLE position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
STEERING COLUMN column. A new stopping position sets if
the steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
WARNING: Do not adjust the To reset the steering column to its normal
steering wheel when your vehicle is stopping position:
moving.
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the the motion of the steering column.
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct 2. Press and hold the steering column
Position (page 151). control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
E261582
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory
Use the control on the side of the steering function. See Memory Function (page
column to adjust the position. 157).
To adjust: Pressing the adjustment control during a
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the memory recall cancels the operation.
control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control. The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 110).
80
Steering Wheel
Note: If you press any adjustment or AUDIO CONTROL

memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
E291380
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 151).
E291395
You can operate the following

functions with the control:
Press - to decrease volume level.
E265304 Press + to increase volume level.
Press to access the previous
media selection.
E265045
Press to access the next media

selection.
E261502 E265044
1. Unlock the steering column. Press repeatedly to scroll

through available audio sources.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the E289636
position you prefer.
Press to access phone mode or
3. Lock the steering column. to answer a phone call.
81
Steering Wheel
Press to end a phone call. CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES

E265040 WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
Press to silence the current CONTROL
media
E268549
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
E142599
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES

WITH: CRUISE CONTROL E191337
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 243).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E191329
See Switching Cruise Control On and

Off (page 242).
E191336
See Information Displays (page 110).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF

EQUIPPED)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and

off using the touchscreen.
82
Steering Wheel
Touch the button to switch the

heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
HORN
Press on the center of the
steering wheel near the horn icon
E270945
to activate the horn.
83
Adjustable Pedals (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS Horizontal Control
WARNING: Never use the pedal

adjustment controls when your feet are
on the accelerator or brake pedal when
the vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your

vehicle is in park (P).
Depending on your vehicle and equipment
A B
level, the shape and location of your E162916
power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
• If your control is vertical, then it is to A. Farther away from you.
the left of the steering column and on
B. Closer to you.
the instrument panel.
• If your control is horizontal, then it is on Both horizontal and vertical controls
the left side of the steering column and operate the same way:
on the instrument panel. 1. Press and hold A to move the pedals
Vertical Control farther away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals
closer to you.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Seats
(page 151).
E176213
A. Farther away from you.

B. Closer to you.
84
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Make sure you switch the windshield

wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
you switch the windshield wipers on. windshield, clean the windshield and the
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
wipers off before entering a car wash. issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the Note: The courtesy wipe feature turns on
windshield, clean the windshield and the after using the windshield washers to
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the remove any excess washer fluid and debris.
issue, install new wiper blades. You can adjust the courtesy wipe settings
in the instrument display.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass, Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper snow or salty road mist can cause
motor to burn out. Always use the inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
windshield washers before wiping a dry smearing.
windshield.
E172817
E172816
Use the rotary control to adjust the
• Rotate away from you for a long wipe sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
interval. select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
• Rotate toward you for a short wipe of water on the windshield. When you
interval. select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
Speed Dependent Wipers
of water on the windshield.
When your vehicle speed increases, the Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
interval between wipes decreases. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED) hit the windshield.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before

you switch the windshield wipers on.
85
Wipers and Washers
In these conditions, you can do the

following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E172818
• A brief press causes a single wipe

without washer fluid.
• A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 110).
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This could
cause the washer pump to overheat.
86
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist E142449
can form on the interior of the lens. The

fine mist eventually clears and exits A Lamps off.
through the vents during normal operation. B Parking lamps, instrument panel
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours lamps, license plate lamps and
under dry weather conditions. rear lamps.
Examples of acceptable condensation are: C Headlamps.
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets). Headlamp High Beam
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E308790
Push the lever away from you to

switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the

lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
87
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
E311233 • If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Slightly pull the lever toward you and Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
release it to flash the headlamps. autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
AUTOLAMPS
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
WARNING: The system does not
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
are on the lighting control.
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not Repeatedly press one of the
turn the headlamps on in low visibility buttons to adjust the brightness.
E291299
conditions, for example daytime fog.
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low E291298

light situations or when the wipers operate.
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -
VEHICLES WITH:
The headlamps remain on for a period of CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
RUNNING LAMPS
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
WARNING: The daytime running
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
lamps system does not activate the rear
cannot switch the high beams on until the
lamps and may not provide adequate
system turns the low beams on.
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
88
Lighting
Switch the daytime running lamps on or FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
off using the information display. See
General Information (page 110). Switching the Front Fog Lamps On
The daytime running lamps turn on when: or Off
1. The lamps are on in the information Only switch the front fog lamps on during
display. reduced visibility.
2. You switch the ignition on.
You can switch the front fog lamps on if
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for any of the following occur:
vehicles with automatic transmissions
• You set the lighting control to the
or you release the parking brake for
parking lamps position.
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
headlamps position.
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
autolamps position and the headlamps
The other lighting control switch positions are on.
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
The front fog lamp button is on the lighting
If the daytime running lamps are off in the control.
information display, the lamps stay off in
Press the button to switch the
all switch positions.
front fog lamps on or off.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - Note: The brightness of the daytime running

lamps may decrease when the front fog
VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME lamps are switched on.
RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
Front Fog Lamp Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
WARNING: The daytime running the front fog lamps on.
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
The system turns the lamps on in daylight

conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to any position except
headlamps.
89
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by

moving the position of the exterior mirrors.
For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim
of the lamps by folding the exterior mirrors
into or away from the windows. For
power-folding mirrors, use the switch on
the driver-side door.
Note: The spot lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
INTERIOR LAMPS
E311431 The lamps turn on under the following

conditions:
Push the lever up or down to use • You open any door.
the direction indicators.
• You press a remote control button.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the • You press the all lamps on button on
direction indicators flash three times. the overhead console.
Front Interior Lamp

SPOT LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The spot lamps are on the forward-facing
side of the exterior mirrors. Switch on the
spot lamps by pressing the buttons above
the lighting control with the parking lamps
on.
E262162
The front interior lamp switches are on the

overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the
overhead console depends on your vehicle.
E176842 All Lamps On
When switching on the spot lamps, the Press to switch all interior lamps
area in front of and to the side of your on.
vehicle illuminates.
90
Lighting
All Lamps Off Select the settings option on the

feature bar.
Press to switch all interior lamps
off.
E262185 Select Vehicle.
Select Ambient Light.
Individual Map Lamps
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
E262193
Press to switch the right-hand

Interior Lamp Function

Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
E306304
When the interior lamp function is off and
you open a door, the courtesy and door Switching Ambient Lighting On
lamps stay off.
Drag the slider above zero brightness.
When the interior lamp function is on and
you open a door, the courtesy and door Adjusting the Brightness
lamps turn on.
Drag the slider left or right.
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber
when the door function is off. Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Rear Interior Lamps Drag the slider left to zero brightness.
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows. CARGO LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press to switch the lamps on or
off. Press the button in the lighting
control panel or in the rear cargo
Press to switch the left-hand
E189587 box to switch on the lamps.
E262193
Press to switch the right-hand

AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)

Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
91
Lighting
E190880
The cargo lamps are in the following areas:

• Either side of the cargo box.
• Next to the tailgate handle.
Note: The cargo lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also
turn off after 10 minutes, fading gradually
to off.
92
Automatic High Beam Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH • The camera is blocked.

BEAM CONTROL • The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
The system turns on high beams if it is dark Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
enough and no other traffic is present. If it curves.
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting Note: High beam reactivation may be
ahead, the system turns the high beams delayed in certain curvy road situations.
off. Low beams remain on. Note: The system may not operate properly
A camera sensor, centrally mounted if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
behind the windshield of your vehicle, free from obstruction or damage.
continuously monitors conditions to turn Note: The system may not operate properly
the high beams on and off. in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
Switch the system on or off using the
until you clear the blockage. A message may
information display. See General
appear in the information display if the
Information (page 110).
camera is blocked.
Activating the Automatic High Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
Beam Control vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
Switch the lighting control to the degrade automatic high beam control
autolamps position to activate. performance.
See Autolamps (page 88).
Note: Automatic high beams are not
available when autolamps are not turned
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
on. CONTROL INDICATORS
When active, the high beams turn on if:
The indicator illuminates to
• The ambient light level is low enough. confirm when the system is
• There is no traffic in front of your ready to assist.
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h). OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
When active, the high beams turn off if:
HIGH BEAM CONTROL
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching relieve you of your responsibility to drive
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps. with due care and attention. You may
• The system detects severe rain, snow need to override the system if it does not
or fog. turn the high beams on or off.
93
Automatic High Beam Control (If Equipped)
WARNING: You may need to

override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: You may need to

override the system during inclement
weather.
E308790
Push the lever away from you to switch

between high beam and low beam.
94
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED) Restoring the One-Touch Up Function

You may lose the one-touch function if the
vehicle battery is low.
WARNING: Do not leave children To reset the function after the battery
unattended in your vehicle and do not recharges:
let them play with the power windows.
They may seriously injure themselves. 1. Pull the switch all the way up.
2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
WARNING: When closing the and continue to hold for two seconds.
power windows, you should verify they 3. Press the switch down and operate the
are free of obstructions and make sure window to the full down position.
that children and pets are not in the One-touch up will now be functional.
proximity of the window openings.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
E176215
WARNING: When you override the
Press the control to open the window. bounce-back feature the window will
not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
Lift the control to close the window.
care when closing the windows to avoid
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when personal injury or damage to your
just one of the windows is open. Lower the vehicle.
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise. Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped) bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
Press or lift the switch fully and release it.
The window will stop if you release the
Press or lift it again to stop the window.
switch before the window closes fully.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.
95
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock (If Equipped) EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the

mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
E176216
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear

window controls.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)

The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
E144073
door.
A Left-hand mirror.
GLOBAL OPENING (IF EQUIPPED) B Adjustment control.
You can use the remote control to open C Right-hand mirror.
the windows with the ignition off.
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
Note: To operate this feature, accessory on, with the ignition in accessory mode or
delay must not be active. the engine running, and then:
Opening the Windows 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
You can only open the windows for a short 2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
time after you unlock your vehicle with the the position of the mirror.
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control 3. Press the mirror control again. The
unlock button to open the windows. control light turns off.
Release the button once movement starts. Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors (If
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
Equipped)
movement.
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
96
Windows and Mirrors
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped) Power-Folding Mirrors
This feature lets you extend the mirror You can fold the mirrors on demand by
about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when pressing the power-folding mirror control
towing a trailer. You can manually pull out on the door. Press the control again to
or push in the mirrors to the desired unfold the mirrors.
position.
E234001
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping

Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.
Note: The left-hand and right-hand mirrors
move at different rates. For example, one
mirror may stop when the other one
continues to move. This is normal. E234002
Auto-Folding Mirrors Note: If you use the power-folding control

to fold the mirrors on demand and the auto
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in fold feature is switched on through the
toward the glass after you place the information display, you must use the
transmission into park (P), switch off the power-folding control again to unfold them.
vehicle, open and close the driver-side door
and lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors Power Telescoping Mirrors
automatically unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the This feature lets you position both mirrors
vehicle. You can switch this feature on and at the same time.
off through the information display. See
General Information (page 110).
97
Windows and Mirrors
To reset the power-fold feature, use the

power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Exterior Mirrors (page 96).
E218902 Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
A Extend. You can save and recall the mirror

positions through the memory function.
B Retract. See Memory Function (page 157).
To adjust your mirrors, press the Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
adjustment control to position the mirrors.
When the vehicle is running, the
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
within one minute, or repeated folding,
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
unfolding and telescoping of the mirrors
the direction indicator.
when holding the control down during full
travel, may disable the system to protect Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
the motors from overheating. Wait
approximately three minutes with the The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
vehicle running, and up to 10 minutes with housing light when you use your
the vehicle off, for the system to reset and transmitter to unlock the doors or when
for function to return to normal. you open a door.
Loose Mirror Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
If your power-folding mirrors are manually The lower, outer part of the mirror housings
folded, they may not work properly even light when you switch the headlamps or
after you re-position them. You need to parking lamps on.
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive. Spot Lamps (If Equipped)
• The mirrors feel loose. The area lights are on the forward-facing
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or portion of the mirror housing. You can
unfolded position. switch them on and off by using the
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal controls located on the instrument panel.
driving position. See Lighting (page 87).
Trailer Towing Camera System (If

Equipped)
See 360 Degree Camera (page 238).
98
Windows and Mirrors
Blind Spot Information System (If SLIDING WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)

Equipped)
Power Sliding Back Window (If

See Blind Spot Information System
Equipped)
(page 254).
INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING: When operating the

power sliding back window, you must
make sure all rear seat occupants and
WARNING: Do not adjust the cargo are not in the proximity of the back
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This window.
vehicle, serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or let them play with the power sliding back
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other window. They may seriously injure
petroleum-based cleaning products. themselves.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror hear up or down and from side to
side.
Manual Dimming Mirror

Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

E176217
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front The control is on the overhead console.
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head Press and hold the control to open the
restraint may also block light from reaching window. Pull and hold the control to close
the sensor. the window.
The mirror dims to reduce glare when
bright lights are detected from behind your
vehicle. It automatically returns to normal
reflection when you shift the transmission
into reverse (R) to make sure you have a
clear view when backing up.
99
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
roof opening.
The moonroof controls are on the

overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof

E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side

window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E191272
A Moonroof open.
B Moonroof vent.
C Sunshade open.
E162197 D Sunshade close.
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. E Moonroof close.
Moonroof Open
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
Press and release the button to open the
moonroof.
WARNING: Do not leave children Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully
unattended in your vehicle and do not opened position to reduce wind noise or
let them play with the moonroof. Failure rumbling that may happen with the
to follow this instruction could result in moonroof fully open. Press and release the
personal injury. button again to open the moonroof fully.
100
Windows and Mirrors
Moonroof Vent
Press and release the button to vent the
moonroof.
Sunshade Open
Press and release the button to open the
sunshade. The sunshade opens with the
moonroof. You can also open the
sunshade with the moonroof closed.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the button again.
Sunshade Close
Press and release the button to close the
sunshade.
Moonroof Close
Press and release the button to close the
moonroof from either the open or vent
positions.
Note: The sunshade stops short of the fully
closed position. Press and release the
button a second time to fully close the
shade. The sunshade completely closes only
when the moonroof is closed. The moonroof
closes with a single press of the close
button.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof reverses some distance if it
detects an obstacle when closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close button within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal.
101
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E219638
A Engine oil pressure gauge.

B Engine coolant temperature gauge.
C Fuel gauge.
D Transmission fluid temperature gauge.
E Speedometer.
F Information display. See General Information (page 110).
G Tachometer.
102
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E219651
A Engine oil pressure gauge.

B Engine coolant temperature gauge.
C Fuel gauge.
D Configurable. Transmission fluid temperature, Turbo boost or DEF gauge (diesel
engines only).
E Speedometer.
F Information display. See General Information (page 110).
G Tachometer.
103
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Low Fuel Reminder

Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle A low fuel level reminder displays and
should stay in the normal operating range sounds when the distance to empty
(between L and H). If the needle falls reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
below the normal range, stop your vehicle, MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
turn off the engine and check the engine (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is for all vehicle keys.
correct, have your vehicle checked by an Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
authorized dealer. different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
Engine Coolant Temperature normal.
Gauge
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 At normal operating temperature, the level
minutes for the cooling system to cool indicator will be in the normal range. If the
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap transmission fluid temperature exceeds
with a thick cloth to prevent the the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
possibility of scalding and slowly remove as safely possible and verify the airflow is
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction not restricted such as snow or debris
could result in personal injury. blocking airflow through the grill. Also,
higher than normal operating temperature
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At can be caused by special operation
normal operating temperature, the level conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or
indicator will be in the normal range. If the off-road use). Operating the transmission
engine coolant temperature exceeds the for extended periods with the gauge in the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as higher than normal area may cause
safely possible, switch off the engine and internal transmission damage. You need
let the engine cool. to alter the severity of your driving
conditions to lower the transmission
Fuel Gauge temperature into the normal range. If the
gauge continues to show high
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly temperatures, see an authorized dealer.
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
The fuel gauge indicates about how much Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
fuel is in the fuel tank.
Indicates the amount of manifold air
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump pressure in the engine.
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. DEF Gauge (If Equipped)
Indicates the current DEF level.
104
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND Adaptive Steering Initialization (yellow,

flashing): The adaptive steering system
INDICATORS has detected a difference between
steering wheel angle and the desired road
The following warning lamps and wheel angle. The steering wheel adjusts
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition itself to correct this difference. This
that may become serious. Some lamps adjustment is part of normal system
illuminate when you start your vehicle to operation.
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the Adaptive Steering Off (yellow, solid): The
respective system warning lamp for further adaptive steering system is off. It is
information. possible that the steering wheel may not
be straight when your vehicle is driving
Note: Some warning indicators appear in straight ahead. If this message persists,
the information display and operate the have your vehicle checked as soon as
same as a warning lamp but do not possible.
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Steering Loss (red, solid): The
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) adaptive steering system integrity cannot
be verified. Do not drive your vehicle and
The speed control system have the system checked immediately.
indicator light changes color to See Steering (page 262).
E144524
indicate what mode the system
is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control Anti-Lock Braking System
(page 243).
Illuminates momentarily when
On (white light): Illuminates when the you switch on the ignition to
adaptive cruise control system is turned confirm that the lamp is
on. Turns off when the speed control functional. If it does not illuminate when
system is turned off. you switch on the ignition or begins to flash
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when at anytime, have the system checked as
the adaptive cruise control system is soon as possible.
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged. If it illuminates when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
Adaptive Steering (If Equipped) (without ABS) unless the brake system
The adaptive steering system warning lamp also illuminates. Have the
indicator illuminates if the system checked as soon as possible.
E223375
system detects a fault during the Automatic High Beam (If Equipped)
continuous diagnostic checks.
Illuminates when this feature is
on. See What Is Automatic
High Beam Control (page 93).
105
Instrument Cluster
Battery Check Fuel Cap (If Equipped)

If it illuminates while driving, it Illuminates when the fuel cap
indicates a malfunction. Switch may not be properly installed.
off all unnecessary electrical Continued driving with this light
equipment and have the system checked on may cause the service engine soon
immediately. warning indicator to come on.
Brake System Warning Lamp Check 4X4 (If Equipped)

Illuminates with a message
WARNING: Driving your vehicle when a four-wheel drive fault is
with the warning lamp on is dangerous. present. See Using Four-Wheel
A significant decrease in braking Drive (page 213).
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your Cruise Control (If Equipped)
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the Illuminates when you switch this
parking brake engaged can cause brake feature on. See Switching
failure and the risk of personal injury. E71340 Cruise Control On and Off
(page 242).
This lamp is a dual function lamp and
illuminates when: Diesel Engine Brake (If Equipped)
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on. Illuminates when you switch the
manual engine brake on. See
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low E171217
General Information (page
brake fluid level, regardless of parking 223).
brake position.
Illuminates when you switch the
If the lamp illuminates while you
automatic engine brake on. See
are moving, you may have the E234452 General Information (page
E270480
parking brake applied. Be sure
223).
that the parking brake is off.
Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible if the lamp Diesel Exhaust Fluid (If Equipped)
continues to illuminate.
With the key in the on position,
Note: Indicators vary depending on region. illuminates when the DEF is
E163176 contaminated, low or someone
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) has tampered with the DEF system. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
Illuminates when you switch this
(page 197).
feature off or in conjunction with
E151262
a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 254).
106
Instrument Cluster
Direction Indicator Front Airbag

Illuminates when you switch on If it fails to illuminate when you
the left or right direction start your vehicle, continues to
indicator or the hazard warning E67017 flash or remains on, it indicates
flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash a malfunction. Have the system checked
faster, check for a burned out bulb. as soon as possible.
Door Ajar Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

Displays when the ignition is on Illuminates when you switch the
and any door is not completely front fog lamps on.
closed.
Electronic Locking Differential (If High Beam

Equipped) Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It
Illuminates when using the flashes when you use the
electronic locking differential. headlamp flasher.
E163170
Engine Coolant Temperature Hill Descent (If Equipped)

Illuminates when the engine Illuminates when hill descent is
coolant temperature is high. switched on.
Stop your vehicle as soon as E163171
possible, switch off the engine and let it
cool. Low Fuel Level
Illuminates when the fuel level
Engine Oil is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
If it illuminates with the engine
possible.
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to Low Tire Pressure Warning
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
Illuminates when the tire
engine oil level.
pressure in one or more tires is
See Engine Oil Check (page 352). below the correct tire pressure.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it It also illuminates momentarily when you
illuminates despite the level being correct. switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
Have the system checked immediately. is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
Fasten Seatbelt flash at any time, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Illuminates and a tone sounds
to remind you to fasten your
E71880 seatbelt.
107
Instrument Cluster
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Stability Control Off

Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when you switch the
Illuminates when a powertrain system off. It goes out when you
or a 4WD fault has been E130458 switch the system back on or
detected. Have your vehicle when you switch the ignition off.
checked as soon as possible. See Using Stability Control (page 229).
Service Engine Soon Tailgate Ajar

Illuminates when you switch the Illuminates when the tailgate is
ignition on prior to engine start not completely closed or when
to check the bulb and to indicate E324523 opened and then closed when
whether your vehicle is ready for Inspection the transmission is in any gear other than
and Maintenance (I/M) testing. park (P).
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this Illuminates when the tow/haul
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for feature is activated. If the light
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. E246592 flashes steadily, have the system
See Emission Law (page 194). checked immediately as damage to the
If it illuminates when the engine is running transmission could occur.
this indicates a malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a Wait To Start (If Equipped)
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system. Illuminates when you switch the
ignition on as part of the
If it flashes, engine misfire may be pre-start system. Wait until the
occurring. Increased exhaust gas wait to start indicator turns off before
temperatures could damage the catalytic attempting to start your vehicle. See
converter or other vehicle components. Starting a Diesel Engine (page 177).
Drive in a moderate fashion, avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration, and have
your vehicle checked immediately. Water In Fuel (If Equipped)
Stability Control
WARNING: Do not drain the
Illuminates when the system is water-in-fuel separator while the engine
active. If it remains illuminated is running. Failure to follow this warning
E138639 or does not illuminate when you may result in fire, serious injury, death or
switch the ignition on, this indicates a property damage.
malfunction. During a malfunction, the
system switches off. Have the system
checked immediately. See Using
Stability Control (page 229).
108
Instrument Cluster
During refueling, it is possible for AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

you to pump
water-contaminated diesel fuel INDICATORS
into your fuel tank. Your vehicle’s fuel
system is equipped with a fuel filter and Key in Ignition Warning Chime
water separator to remove water from the Sounds when you open the driver's door
fuel. The water in fuel indicator illuminates and you have left the key in the ignition.
when the fuel and water separator has a
significant quantity of water in it and Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
requires immediate draining.
If the water in fuel indicator illuminates Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
when the engine is running, stop your vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off the last door is closed and your keyless
the engine, then drain the fuel and water vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
separator. See Fuel Quality (page 187). still on.
Allowing water to stay in the fuel system,
Headlamps On Warning Chime
after the water in fuel indicator illuminates,
could result in extensive damage or failure Sounds when you remove the key from the
of the fuel injection system. ignition and open the driver's door and you
Note: Do not drain the fuel and water have left the headlamps or parking lamps
separator while the engine is running. Air will on.
enter into the fuel system causing the engine
not to operate properly. Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
Equipped) warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
4X2 HIGH system checked by an authorized dealer
Illuminates momentarily when immediately.
two-wheel drive high is engaged.
E181778
4X4 HIGH
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive high is engaged.
E181779
4X4 LOW
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged.
E181780
109
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Note: Some MyKey menu options only

appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
WARNING: Driving while distracted Information Display Controls
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
E184451
Various systems on your vehicle can be • Press the up and down arrow buttons
controlled using the information display to scroll through and highlight the
controls on the steering wheel. options within a menu.
Corresponding information displays on the • Press the right arrow button to enter a
instrument cluster information display. sub-menu.
Note: Some options could appear slightly • Press the left arrow button to exit a
different or not at all if the items are menu.
optional.
• Press the OK button to choose and
Note: Trailer options are not available if confirm a setting or messages.
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h). This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
E204495 indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
2 Inch Display Menu (If Equipped)
Main Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings
110
Trip 1
Digital Speed
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
DTE
Average Fuel
Outside Temp
• Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual trips.
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual trips.
• DTE - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining
in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
• Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Outside Air - Shows the outside air temperature.
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset values.
Note: Trip 2 information is the same as Trip 1.
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
• Distance to E - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only
decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
• Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
• Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time.
111
Driver Assist
Engine Hours Select Your Setting
Dual Fuel Tank Select Your Setting
Hill Strt Asst.
Maint. Monitor Air Fil. Mon. Hold to reset
Shows air filter status
Water in Fuel
Oil Level Low
Oil Life Hold to reset
XXX%
Hold to Reset
DEF Range
Exhaust Filter
Tire Pressure
Oil Temp Oil Temp
Trans. Temp.
Rear Park Aid
Tr Brake Type Select Your Setting
Tr Brake Effort
Trailer Sway
Settings
Vehicle A. Engine Off
Auto Regen
Lighting Select Your Setting
Locks Select Your Setting
Alarm Select Your Setting
Ask on Exit
112
Settings
Remote Start Select Your Setting
Windows Select Your Setting
Wiper Select Your Setting
Controls
MyKey MyKey Status Shows information related to the configured MyKey(s).
Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
911 Assist Select Your Setting
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Vol. Limiter
Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
Display Setup Display Select Your Setting
Settings
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
4 Inch Display Menu
Main Menu
Display Mode
Trip/Fuel
Towing
Off Road
Settings
113
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Dual Fuel Tanks
DEF Status
Digital Speedometer
Engine Information
Maintenance Monitor
Transmission Temp.
Lane Keeping System
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
ECO Coach
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Compass Select Your Setting
Average Speed
Trip 1 or 2
• Shows the time, mileage and average fuel economy of an individual journey. Also
shows DTE.
ECO Coach
• ECO Coach - Provides suggestions on how to drive more economically.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph, average mpg
and DTE.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Also shows
DTE.
114
Towing
Trailer Status Provides trailer status information
for the active trailer: Trailer light
status, Blind Spot, Reverse Guid-
ance, Pro Trailer Backup, trailer
name, accumulated trailer miles,
trailer brake gain and output.
Trailer Tire Displays the trailer tire pressure and options to customize the display.
Pressure
Trailer Trailer Sway Control
Options
Select Trailer Select Your Setting
Change Trailer Settings Follow onscreen direc-
tions to confirm or
modify your settings.
Connection Conventional Follow onscreen direc-
Checklist tions to confirm or
Fifth Wheel modify your settings.
Gooseneck
Note: Trailer options are only available at Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains
speeds less than 3.1 mph (5 km/h) active until you set it as no longer active. An
active trailer still accumulates miles even
after you physically disconnect it from your
vehicle.
Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle and roll.
Settings
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
DTE Calcula- Select Your Setting
tion
115
Settings
Rear Park Aid
Pre-Collision Select Your
Setting
Cruise Control Select Your
Setting
Lane Keeping Select Your
System Setting
Advanced Vehicle 30 min. Max Idle
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Locks
Mirrors
Neutral Tow
Alarm
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper
Controls
MyKey MyKey Status
Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
Do Not
Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
116
Settings
Display Distance Unit Select Your Setting
Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
8 Inch Display Menu (If Equipped)
Main Menu
MyView
Trip/Fuel
Truck Info
Towing
Off Road
Settings
MyView
Tire Pressure
Off Road Status
Configure MyView Select Your Setting
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1
Trip 2
ECO Coach
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
117
Trip/Fuel
Maintenance Monitor
Navigation/Compass
Trip 1 or 2
• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
• DTE - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining
in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only decrease but
also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
• Odo - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
ECO Coach
• ECO Coach - Provides suggestions on how to drive more economically.
Fuel
• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average
mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Maintenance Monitor
• Maintenance Monitor - Shows the maintenance status of various vehicle systems.
Navigation/Compass
• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in
Navigation is not set).
Truck Info
Gauge View Shows various powertrain gauges like trans temp
and DEF fluid.
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Dual Fuel Tanks
Engine Information
Maintenance Monitor Shows the maintenance status of various vehicle
systems.
Transmission Temperature
118
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
Towing % Grade, steering angle, gain and output display
Status
Towing Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Trailer Reverse Guidance Status, Trailer
Informa- BLIS Status and Trailer Disconnected
tion
Trailer Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active
Light trailer.
Check
Trailer Tire Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings.
Pressure
Trailer Trailer Sway Control
Setup
Select trailer Select Your Setting
Change Trailer Settings Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
Connec- Conventional Follow onscreen directions to confirm or
tion Check- modify your settings.
list Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Off Road
Off Road Status
Displays pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4.
Settings
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
119
Settings
Pre-Collision Select Your Setting
Cruise
Control
Gauge Selec-
tion
Lane
Keeping
System
Advanced Vehicle Auto Engine Off
Settings
Easy Entry/Exit
Locks
Neutral Tow
Alarm
Power Running
Boards
Remote Start
Windows
Wiper Controls
MyKey MyKey Status Shows information related to the
configured MyKey(s)
Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.
Do Not Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
120
Settings
Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm
or modify your settings.
Display Distance Unit Select Your
Setup Setting
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages display or are available. The
information display could abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E184451
Press the OK button on the steering wheel

to remove the warning. The information
display removes other messages after a
short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
121
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control

Malfunction from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
243).
Adaptive Cruise Not A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
Available tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
243).
Adaptive Cruise Not You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
Available Sensor water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
Blocked See Manual sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
243).
Normal Cruise Active You select normal cruise control. The system does not brake
Adaptive Braking Off or react to traffic.
Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.
Resume Control
Adaptive Cruise Speed Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.
Too Low to Activate
Adaptive Cruise Shift The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
Down distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
122
Adaptive Steering
Message Action
Adaptive Steering Initial- The adaptive steering system detects a difference between
ization steering wheel angle and the desired road wheel angle. The
steering wheel adjusts itself to correct this difference. This
adjustment is part of normal system operation.
Adaptive Steering Fault The adaptive steering system is off. It is possible that the
Service Required steering wheel could not be straight when the vehicle is driving
straight ahead. If this message persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Adaptive Steering Loss The adaptive steering system integrity cannot be verified. Do
Do Not Drive not drive the vehicle and contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
Message Action
Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AdvanceTrac Off The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac On The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac SPORT The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
MODE it on.
Traction Control Off The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 227).
Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 227).
123
Airbag
Message Action
Occupant Sensor Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

BLOCKED Remove blocked sensor.
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm and Security
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm, Start Vehicle. Alarm (page 76).
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message Action
Engine Shuts Off In The engine is getting ready to shut off.

{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
Engine Shut Off For Fuel The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.
Economy
Engine Shuts Off in The engine is getting ready to shut off. Follow the prompt
{seconds to shut off:#0} from the message to override the shut down.
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
124
Battery and Charging System
Message Action
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Battery Features The battery management system detects an extended low-
Temporarily Turned Off voltage condition. Your vehicle disables various features to
help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features operate
again as normal.
Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
Battery is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message Action
Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
Sensor Blocked See System (page 254).
Manual
Vehicle Coming From X The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 254).
Cross Traffic Not Avail- The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
able Sensor Blocked See system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
Manual System (page 254).
Cross Traffic System A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Fault dealer as soon as possible.
125
Message Action
Cross Traffic Alert Deac- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
tivated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 254).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv- The system automatically turns off and displays this message
ated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 254).
Trailer Blind Spot Not Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or goose-
available Due to Invalid neck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or
Trailer longer than 33 ft (10 m).
Diesel Messages
WARNING: When the Exhaust

Filter Cleaning message appears in the
information display, do not park near
flammable materials, vapors or
structures until filter cleaning is
complete.
Message Action
Exhaust Filter Cleaning Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine
actions raises the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particu-
late Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust soot).
After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust temper-
ature returns to normal levels. This message is NORMAL.
Exhaust Filter Over- The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
loaded Drive to Clean and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
Exhaust Filter Over- until the message turns off.
loaded Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
Clean Now and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
Exhaust Filter at Limit until the message turns off.
Drive to Clean Now
126
Message Action
Exhaust System Over- Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeded the
heated Stop Safely intended operating range. If this warning occurs, a tone
NOW sounds, followed by reduced engine power. The engine shuts
down when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h) . Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Warming Please In extremely cold weather, typically below -15°F (-26°C) and
Wait {seconds:00} sec if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will not
respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds. This
restriction allows your engine to properly circulate the oil to
avoid engine damage.
Exhaust Filter Drive Your diesel particulate filter is clean.
Complete
Exhaust Filter Cleaned Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only).
Exhaust Filter Cleaning The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only).
Stopped
DEF Level Range: XX mi/ The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining
km Refill Now diesel exhaust fluid.
DEF Level Empty Speed Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top
Limited to XX MPH / km/ speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must
h in XX mi/km replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 197).
DEF Level Empty Speed Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Upon restart,
Limited to XX MPH/km/ your vehicle speed is now limited. You must replenish the
h Upon Restart diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page
197).
DEF Level Empty Speed The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the
Limited to XX MPH/km/ diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
h vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page
197).
DEF Level Empty Engine The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust
Idled Soon fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic
Reductant System (page 197).
127
Message Action
DEF Level Empty Engine A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system
Idled See Manual causing your vehicle into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust
fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to
resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective
Catalytic Reductant System (page 197).
DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
to XX MPH/km/h in XX system displays your vehicle’s top speed limit and distance
mi/km before limitation. Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. Upon
to XX MPH/km/h Upon restart, your vehicle speed is now limited. Have the system
Restart checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
to XX MPH/km/h system displays your vehicle’s top speed limit. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Exhaust Filter Over Limit You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Service Now Ignoring the warning message could lead to reduced drivability
and customer expense, including damage to the diesel
particulate filter. Your new vehicle warranty could not cover
this damage.
Water in Fuel Drain Filter The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity
and needs draining. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 361).
Fuel Pressure Low A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low
fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. See Fuel Quality
(page 187).
Doors and Locks
Message Action
X Door Ajar The door(s) listed is not completely closed.
128
Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest soon.
Suggested
Drivetrain
Message Action
To Engage Locking The electronic locking differential requests that you slow to
Differential Slow to XX a certain speed to engage.
mph/km/h
To Engage Locking The electronic locking differential requests that you release
Differential Release the accelerator in order to engage.
Accelerator Pedal
Check Locking Differen- An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is
tial present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Neutral Tow Enabled The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
Leave Transmission in indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with all four wheels
Neutral on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Engine
Message Action
Power Reduced to Lower Engine The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
Temp engine temperature.
129
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet could not be properly closed.
Message Action
To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.
No Key Detected The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 175).
Restart Now or Key is You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
Needed and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Full Accessory Power Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.
Active
Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Max Number of Keys You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
Learned system.
Not Enough Keys You have not programmed enough keys to the system.
Learned
Engine ON Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.
130
Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as

Malfunction Service soon as possible.
Required
Front Camera Tempor- The system detects a condition that has caused the system
arily Not Available to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system detects a condition that requires you to clean the
ility Clean Screen windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as
tion Service Required soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
Wheel wheel.
Maintenance
Message Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
Oil Change Required The oil life left is at 0%.
Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, inspect the brake system immedi-
ately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 377).
Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This could
Mode Contact Dealer not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
See Manual The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.
131
MyKey
Message Action
MyKey not Created You did not program a MyKey.

MyKey Active Drive MyKey is active.
Safely
Speed Limited to XX When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
MPH/km/h that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top Speed of You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.
MyKey Setting
Check Speed Drive You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.
Safely
Buckle Up to Unmute Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.
Audio
AdvanceTrac On - With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.
MyKey Setting
Traction Control On - With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.
MyKey Setting
MyKey Park Aid Cannot With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.
be Deactivated
Lane Keeping Alert On With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.
MyKey Setting
Off Road
Message Action
Hill Descent Control Active Hill descent control mode is active.

Hill Descent Control OFF Hill descent control mode is inactive.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
XX MPH/km/h or Less entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Select Gear You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
132
Message Action
Hill Descent Driver Resume Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
Control resume control.
Hill Descent Control Fault A hill descent system fault is present.
Hill Descent Control Off System The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.
Cooling
Hill Descent Control Ready The hill descent control system is ready.
Park Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 234).
Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a fault that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 234).
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Park Brake
Message Action
To Release: Press Brake The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
and Switch attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
Park Brake Use Switch The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
to Release attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Release Park Brake The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Park Brake Not Applied The electric park brake is not fully applied.
Park Brake Not Released The electric park brake is not fully released.
133
Message Action
Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special
Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. Some functionality could still be available.
Required Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Fault Service The power steering system detects a condition that requires
Now service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
Safely in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault The power steering system detects a condition within the
Service Required power steering system or passive entry or passive start system
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc- The steering lock system detects a condition that requires
tion Service Now service. See an authorized dealer.
Pre-Collision Assist
Message Action
Pre-Collision Assist Not You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
Available Sensor water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
Blocked sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
Available dealer as soon as possible.
134
Remote Start
Message Action
To Drive: Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
and Gear Shift Button to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
Seats
Message Action
Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.
Permitted While Driving
Memory {0} Saved Shows where you have saved your memory setting.
Starting System
Message Action
To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .
Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Engine Start Pending The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.
Please Wait
Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start.
Tailgate
Message Action
Tailgate Ajar The tailgate is not completely closed.
135
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 421).
Tire Pressure Monitor The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
Fault warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 421).
Tire Pressure Sensor A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
Fault use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 421). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trail Control (If Equipped)
Message Action
Reduce Speed To Enter Trail You must reduce your vehicle speed to use trail control.
Control
Trail Control Not Available with You must release the park brake to use trail control.
Park Brake Applied
Trail Control Enabled Use SET You successfully enabled trail control and must press
Button to Set Speed SET to activate.
Trail Control Off Driver Resume A trail control system fault has occurred, the driver
Control must resume control.
Trail Control Off The system has switched off.
Trail Control Fault See Manual A system fault is present.
Trail Control Not Available with You must switch the cruise control off to use trail
Cruise Control Active control.
Trail Control Not Available with You must close the door to use trail control.
Driver Door Open
Descent Control Now Active You switched descent control off, causing the system
Press Trail Control Switch To to turn trail control propulsion off. The vehicle still
Exit brakes if descending a hill. You must press the trail
control switch to reset the system and switch it off.
You can press the switch again to switch this system
on.
136
Message Action
Trail Control Not Available Displays when you must switch off the trailer backup
While Pro Trailer Backup assist to use trail control.
Assist™ Active
Set Trail Control to 1 MPH to Aid Displays when the system detects that you could be
in Getting Unstuck in Sand stuck in sand and turns trail control on to the lowest
set speed.
Set Trail Control to 2 km/h to
Aid in Getting Unstuck in Sand
Trailer
Message Action
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain The current gain setting for the trailer brake.
value:#0.0}
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain The current gain setting for the trailer brake when you
value:#0.0} No Trailer do not have a trailer connected.
Trailer Brake Module Fault Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 282).
Trailer Connected The system detects a correct trailer connection during
a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected The system senses a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally,
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.
Trailer Wiring Fault There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 282).
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
Check Lamps lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
Check Lamps lamp.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
Manual a Trailer (page 282).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Manual See Towing a Trailer (page 282).
137
Message Action
Trailer Tire Low Specified: One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified
tire pressure.
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the
Fault warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is
Fault malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure
Capability Not Detected monitoring system.
Trailer Tire Pressure Indication The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup.
Not Setup See Manual See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 421).
4WD
Message Action
Check 4x4 A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized

4x4 Shift in Progress The 4X4 system is making a shift.
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
your vehicle's speed is too fast.
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 5 km/h
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N Displays when you attempt to switch out of 4X4 LOW
and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N)
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH Displays when you attempt to switch out of 4X4 LOW
and your vehicle's speed is too fast.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 5
km/h
Shift Delayed Pull Forward Could display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.
Shift to Neutral Displays when the system requires an additional
transmission shift to neutral (N) to complete a transfer
case shift.
138
Message Action
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH Displays when you command a 4x4 shift during
conditions which are potentially harmful to the drive-
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h line components.
To Engage 4x4 Release Acceler- Displays when the 4x4 system requests you release
ator Pedal the accelerator pedal to complete a 4x4 shift. See
Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 213).
For Improved Performance 4x4 Displays when you command a drive mode change to
Recommended Deep Snow/Sand and the vehicle is in 2H.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Exit Rock Displays when you attempt to switch out of 4x4 LOW
Crawl Mode and Rock Crawl mode is engaged.
To Enter Rock Crawl Mode 4x4 Displays when you attempt to select Rock Crawl mode
LOW is Required and 4x4 LOW is not engaged.
139
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WHAT IS REMOTE START REMOTELY STARTING THE

ENGINE
The system allows you to remotely start
your vehicle and therefore to heat or cool
the interior to a predetermined
temperature. WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
REMOTE START LIMITATIONS open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
Remote start does not work under the instruction could result in personal injury
following conditions: or death.
• The alarm horn is sounding.
To start the engine, do the following:
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P). Press the button on the remote
control.
• The ignition is on. E138623
• The battery voltage is below the Within three seconds, press the
minimum operating voltage. button on the remote control.
E138625
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel Within three seconds, press the
level is low. button again.
Note: You can use remote start with Note: You can also use the FordPass app
FordPass. See Connecting the Vehicle to to start the engine.
a Wi-Fi Network (page 474).
Note: The turn signals flash twice.
Note: The parking lamps turn on when the
ENABLING REMOTE START engine is running.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Note: The horn sounds if the system fails
to start.
2. Press Vehicle Settings.
Note: All other vehicle systems remain off
3. Press Remote Start Setup.
when you have remotely started the engine.
4. Switch Remote Start on or off.
Note: The vehicle remains secured when
Note: To remote start with FordPass, make you have remotely started the engine. A
sure that the modem is enabled. See valid key must be inside your vehicle to
Connecting FordPass to the Modem switch the ignition on and drive your vehicle.
(page 474).
EXTENDING THE REMOTE
START DURATION
To extend the engine running duration
during remote start, do the following:
Press the button on the remote
control.
E138623
140
Within three seconds, press the 3. Press Climate Control.

button on the remote control. 4. Select Vehicle.
E138625
Within three seconds, press the 5. Switch Auto on or off.
button again.
Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the
Note: You can extend the engine running system attempts to heat or cool the interior
duration to a maximum of 30 minutes. to 72°F (22°C).
Note: When you switch the ignition on, the
REMOTELY STOPPING THE climate control system returns to the last
ENGINE used settings.
Press the button on the remote Switching Climate Control Last

control to stop the engine. Settings On and Off
E138625
Note: You can also use the FordPass app 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
to stop the engine.
REMOTE START REMOTE
4. Switch Last settings on or off.
CONTROL INDICATORS
Note: If you switch the last settings on, the
Remote Control Feedback system remembers the last used settings.
An LED on the remote control provides Switching the Heated Seat

status feedback of remote start or stop Settings On and Off (If Equipped)
commands.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
LED Status
Solid green. Remote start 3. Press Remote Start Setup.
successful. 4. Press Seats.
Solid red. Remote stop 5. Switch Auto on or off.
successful. Note: If you switch the heated seat settings
Blinking red. Request failed or on, the heated seats turn on during cold
status not received. weather.
Blinking green. Status incomplete. Switching the Heated Steering

Wheel Settings On and Off (If Equipped)
REMOTE START SETTINGS 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
Switching Climate Control Auto
Mode On and Off 3. Press Remote Start Setup.
4. Press Seats and Steering Wheel.
5. Switch Auto on or off.
141
Note: If you switch the heated steering

wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel
turns on during cold weather.
Setting the Remote Start Duration

4. Press Duration.
Note: Wait a few seconds before remotely
starting the vehicle after the vehicle stops
running.
142
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature
Control
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE SWITCHING AIR

CONTROL UNIT CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
E339318
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Depending on your vehicle options, the
controls could look different than what you Press the button.
see here.
SWITCHING CLIMATE Air flows through the windshield air vents,

and the blower motor adjusts to the
CONTROL ON AND OFF highest speed.
Press the button. You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
AIR ON AND OFF
Note: The heated rear window also turns
Press the button to recirculate on when you select maximum defrost.
air currently in the passenger
compartment. SWITCHING MAXIMUM
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be COOLING ON AND OFF
prevented from turning on in all air flow
modes except maximum cooling to reduce Press the button.
the risk of the windows fogging up.
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off
when you direct air to the instrument panel Note: When you switch maximum cooling
or footwell air vents during hot weather to off, air conditioning remains on.
improve cooling efficiency.
143
Control
SWITCHING THE HEATED SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR

WIPER PARK ON AND OFF (IF SPEED
EQUIPPED)
When you switch the heated rear E266187

window on, the heated wiper Press up or down on the control
park also turns on. to select the blower motor
speed.
SWITCHING THE HEATED E266186

REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
SETTING THE TEMPERATURE
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SWITCHING THE HEATED

MIRRORS ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
E244115
Press the button. Turn the control on the left-hand side of

the climate control to set the left-hand
E266189
temperature.
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
the climate control to set the right-hand
temperature.
144
Control
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR Press the button on the

touchscreen.
Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
AUTO MODE
Press the button to activate the
selection screen.
E265283 Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press the button on the
touchscreen. Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
button to adjust auto mode.
Directing Air to the Instrument Note: When you switch auto mode on,
Panel Air Vents lights on the blower motor control do not
Press the button to activate the illuminate to indicate the blower motor
selection screen. speed.
E265283
Adjust the blower motor control or air
Press the button on the distribution control to switch auto mode
E244097 touchscreen. off.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Auto Mode Indicators

Vents
The indicators are on the Auto Mode
Press the button to activate the button.
selection screen.
E265283
Auto Mode Indicator Description

Status
One indicator illumin- The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
ated. minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
Two indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is moderate.
ated.
Three indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
ated. reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
145
Control
Switching Dual Mode On and Off How can I reduce the humidity build-up
inside my vehicle?
Press the button.
Do not drive with the system off or
E265280 with recirculated air on.
How can I defog the side windows?
CLIMATE CONTROL – Switch maximum defrost on.
TROUBLESHOOTING How can I defog or clear the windshield
of thin ice?
Climate Control – Frequently Switch maximum defrost on.
Asked Questions Why do I feel air from the footwell air
Why is the volume of air to the rear vents regardless of the air
passenger compartment limited ? distribution?
Objects may obstruct the air direction This is normal operation. You may feel
to the rear passenger compartment. a small amount of air from the
Make sure objects have not been footwell air vents regardless of the air
placed under the front seats. distribution.
Why is the volume of air from the air What happens if I switch auto mode on
vents reduced? when the outside temperature and
in-vehicle temperature is high?
The air intake area at the base of the
windshield could be obstructed. Make The system temporarily selects
sure the air intake area is free from any recirculated air to maximize cooling.
snow, ice or leaves. What happens if I switch auto mode on
What are the recommended settings when the outside temperature is low
for heating the interior? and the engine is cold?
Auto mode on and instrument panel Air is directed to the windshield and
and side air vents fully open. the outer instrument panel air vents.
How can I quickly heat the interior?

Select the highest blower motor
speed, highest temperature and direct
the air to the footwell air vents.
What are the recommended settings
for cooling the interior?
Auto mode on.
How can I quickly cool the interior?
Switch maximum cooling on, switch
recirculated air on and drive with the
windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
146
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE SWITCHING AIR

CONTROL UNIT CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
E308141
DEFROST ON AND OFF
Depending on your vehicle options, the
controls could look different than what you Turn the temperature control
see here. clockwise past the highest
setting to maximize defrosting.
SWITCHING CLIMATE Note: The temperature control springs back
to the highest setting.
CONTROL ON AND OFF
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
Press the button. and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
cannot select recirculated air when
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED maximum defrost is on.
AIR ON AND OFF Note: The heated rear window also turns
on when you select maximum defrost.
Press the button to recirculate
air currently in the passenger
compartment.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
Note: Recirculated air could turn off or be
COOLING ON AND OFF
prevented from turning on in all air flow
Turn the temperature control
modes except maximum cooling to reduce
counterclockwise past the
the risk of the windows fogging up.
lowest setting to maximize
Note: Recirculated air could turn on and off cooling.
when you direct air to the instrument panel
Note: The temperature control springs back
or footwell air vents during hot weather to
to the lowest setting.
improve cooling efficiency.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling
off, air conditioning remains on.
147
SWITCHING THE HEATED SETTING THE TEMPERATURE

REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF (IF
EQUIPPED)
Press the button to clear the rear

window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E244106
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF (IF Turn the temperature control
EQUIPPED) counterclockwise for cooler temperature
settings.
Press the button. Turn the temperature control clockwise
for warmer temperature settings.
E266189
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR

SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR
SPEED Directing Air to the Windshield Air
Vents
Press the button.
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to

indicate the blower motor speed.
Directing Air to the Instrument
Note: When you switch the blower motor Panel Air Vents
off, air conditioning turns off and the
windows could fog up. Press the button.
E244097
Directing Air to the Footwell Air

Vents
Press the button.
148
CLIMATE CONTROL – How can I reduce the humidity build-up

inside my vehicle?
TROUBLESHOOTING
Do not drive with the system off or
with recirculated air on.
Climate Control – Frequently
Asked Questions How can I defog the side windows?
Switch maximum defrost on.
Why is the volume of air to the rear
passenger compartment limited? How can I defog or clear the windshield
of thin ice?
Objects may obstruct the air direction
to the rear passenger compartment. Switch maximum defrost on.
Make sure objects have not been Why do I feel air from the footwell air
placed under the front seats. vents regardless of the air
Why is the volume of air from the air distribution?
vents reduced? This is normal operation. You may feel
The air intake area at the base of the a small amount of air from the
windshield could be obstructed. Make footwell air vents regardless of the air
sure the air intake area is free from any distribution.
snow, ice or leaves.
for heating the interior?
A medium blower motor speed
selected and the air directed to the
footwell and windshield air vents.
How can I quickly heat the interior?
Select the highest blower motor
speed, highest temperature and direct
the air to the footwell air vents.
for cooling the interior?
Air conditioning on, a medium blower
motor speed selected and air directed
to the footwell and windshield air
vents.
How can I quickly cool the interior?
Switch maximum cooling on, switch
recirculated air on and drive with the
windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
149
Interior Air Quality
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
LOCATING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 565).
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter
could reduce cabin air filtration and climate
control performance.
150
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out • Do not recline the seat backrest so that
of position or with the seatback reclined your torso is more than 30 degrees
too far can take weight off the seat from the upright position.
cushion and affect the decision of the • Adjust the head restraint so that the
passenger sensing system, resulting in top of it is level with the top of your
serious injury or death in the event of a head and as far forward as possible.
crash. Always sit upright against your Make sure that you remain
seat back, with your feet on the floor. comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
WARNING: Do not recline the seat yourself and the steering wheel. We
backrest too far as this can cause the recommend a minimum of 10 in
occupant to slide under the seatbelt, (25 cm) between your breastbone and
resulting in personal injury in the event the airbag cover.
of a crash.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
WARNING: Do not place objects slightly bent.
higher than the top of the seat backrest. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
Failure to follow this instruction could press the pedals fully.
result in personal injury or death in the • Position the shoulder strap of the
event of a sudden stop or crash. seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head

restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
E68595 not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
151
Seats
The head restraints may consist of:

WARNING: The head restraint is a A An energy absorbing head
safety device. Whenever possible it restraint.
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied. B Two steel stems.
Failure to adjust the head restraint C Guide sleeve adjust and release
properly could reduce its effectiveness button.
during certain impacts.
D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright button.
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that Adjusting the Head Restraint
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure Raising the Head Restraint
that you remain comfortable. If you are Pull the head restraint up.
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position. Lowering the Head Restraint
Front Seat Head Restraint 1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold buttons C and D.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
E138642
Front Row Center and Rear Seat Center
Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints
(Crew Cab) Head Restraints
Your vehicle may have head restraints that
are non-adjustable. The non-adjustable
head restraints consist of:
E153105
152
Seats
A B
E162872
A An energy absorbing head

restraint. E144727
B Two steel stems.

1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
C Guide sleeve unlock and remove driving or riding position.
button. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
Removing the Head Restraint
After the head restraint reaches the
1. Press and hold buttons C. forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
2. Pull up the head restraint. again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Installing the Head Restraint Note: Do not attempt to force the head
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves restraint backward after you tilt it. Instead,
and push the head restraint down until it continue tilting it forward until the head
locks. restraint releases to the upright position.
Front Seat Center Head Restraint MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may have a front row center
head restraint that you cannot adjust or
remove. WARNING: Do not adjust the
driver's seat or seatback when your
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
vehicle is moving.
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort.
153
Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)

Forward
E166702
E175314
The lumbar support control is located on
Recline Adjustment the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver

seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
E175315
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
154
Seats
E176038
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front

Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the

vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. When the seat backrest and
cushion are both active, the massage
alternates between zones.
E176039
155
Seats
E156301
Massage Mode Lumbar and Bolster Mode
A Back massage intensity Upper lumbar

adjustment
B Massage intensity decrease Lumbar decrease
*
and off
C Cushion massage intensity Lower lumbar
**
adjustment
D Massage intensity increase Lumbar increase
E On and off -
*
The massage feature defaults to an 2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
alternating massage mode with back 3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar intensity.
and bolster feature defaults to the middle To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar mode. massage setting:
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back 1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the >Multi-Contour Seat.
cushion bolster.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
You can also adjust this feature through 3. Press Off, Low or High.
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-Contour Seat.
156
Seats
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED) Note: You can save up to three preset
memory positions.
Note: You can save a memory preset at any
WARNING: Before activating the time.
memory seat, make sure that the area
Recalling a Preset Position
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants 1. Switch the ignition on.
are clear of moving parts.
2. Press and release the preset button
WARNING: Do not use the memory associated with your preferred driving
function when your vehicle is moving. position. The seat and mirrors move to
the position stored for that preset.
This feature recalls the position of the Note: You can only recall preset memory
following: positions when you switch the ignition off,
or when the transmission is in park (P) or
• Driver seat. neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on.
• Power mirrors.
You can also recall a preset memory
• Optional power steering column. position by:
• Optional power adjustable pedals. • Pressing the unlock button on your
The memory control is on the driver door. remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked keyfob is present.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat and steering column to the
easy entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror (or any memory
button) during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
E307868
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Saving a Preset Position Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
1. Switch the ignition on.
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
2. Adjust the features to the positions you positions for up to two remote controls.
prefer.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
3. Press and hold the preset button until positions to the positions you prefer.
you hear a single tone.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
Note: A confirmation that you saved a button for about five seconds. A tone
memory preset appears in the information will sound, and the instrument panel
display. prompts you to press the lock button
on your key fob.
157
Seats
3. Within ten seconds, press the lock

button on the remote control you are
linking. The instrument panel indicates
a successful link.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
E310192
E310192
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If

Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks
Equipped)
into the vertical storage position.
If you enable the easy entry and exit Cushion Lock (If Equipped)
feature, it moves the driver seat rearward
up to 2 in (5 cm) when you put the The locking key is in the remote control.
transmission in park (P) and remove the See Remote Control (page 55).
key from the ignition.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you put the key in the
ignition.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 110).
REAR SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion E224956
If your vehicle has a 60/40 rear seat, you Turn the key to lock or unlock.
can flip each cushion up into a vertical
storage position.
158
Seats
Returning the Seat to the Seating

Position
WARNING: Check under the seat

cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase E162739
A
the risk of serious injury.
Lift the lever and flip up the seat cushion
to access the storage space and the power
point (A).
E162740
To remove the storage space divider,

squeeze the sides and lift it from the
storage tub.
E308139
Pull the strap to release the seat cushion

from the storage position.
Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped)

The rear seat has storage space under the
seat cushion.
E162741
159
Seats
Use your vehicle key to lock the storage Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
space. See Keys and Remote Controls through the various heat settings and off.
(page 55). More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
WARNING: People who are unable vehicle if they were on when you switched
to feel pain to their skin because of your vehicle off.
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
use, exhaustion or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat WARNING: People who are unable
may cause burns even at low to feel pain to their skin because of
temperatures, especially if used for long advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
periods of time. Do not place anything spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
on the seat that insulates against heat, use, exhaustion or other physical
such as a blanket or cushion. This may conditions, must exercise care when
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do using the heated seat. The heated seat
not puncture the seat with pins, needles may cause burns even at low
or other pointed objects. This may temperatures, especially if used for long
damage the heating element which may periods of time. Do not place anything
cause the heated seat to overheat. An on the seat that insulates against heat,
overheated seat may cause serious such as a blanket or cushion. This may
personal injury. cause the heated seat to overheat. Do
not puncture the seat with pins, needles
Do not do the following: or other pointed objects. This may
• Place heavy objects on the seat. damage the heating element which may
• Operate the heated seat if water or any cause the heated seat to overheat. An
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the overheated seat may cause serious
seat to dry thoroughly. personal injury.
Note: The engine must be running to use Do not do the following:
this feature.
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
The rear seat heat controls are on the rear
of the center console.
E146322
160
Seats
Press this symbol to cycle through the

various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the ventilated seats are on, the feature
turns itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Note: To improve comfort, use the
E146322
ventilated seats along with the vehicle’s air
conditioning system.
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
the on position, press the heated seat
switch to enable heating mode. When
activated, they turn off automatically when
you switch off the engine.
VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: The ventilated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The ventilated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
Do not do the following:
• Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
The engine must be running to use this
feature.
E224689
161
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE REAR

OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
The rear occupant alert system monitors Failure to follow this instruction could
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check result in personal injury or death.
for rear seat occupants when you switch
the ignition off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
HOW DOES THE REAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM The system does not detect the presence
WORK of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
It monitors when rear doors are opened
The system monitors when rear doors have and closed.
been opened and closed to indicate the Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
potential presence of an occupant in the there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
rear seat. conditions are met.
A message displays in the information and Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
entertainment display screen and an there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
audible warning sounds when you switch conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
the ignition off after any of the following seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
conditions have been met: through a rear door.
• A rear door is opened or closed while Note: The audible warning does not sound
the ignition is on. when the front door is opened before you
• You switch the ignition on within 15 switch the ignition off.
minutes of a rear door opening and
closing.
SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF -
or sounded. VEHICLES WITH: SYNC
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT Press the button on the audio

unit.
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
1. Using the controls on the audio unit,
select Settings.
WARNING: On hot days, the 2. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped)
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or When you switch the system off, a
serious heat related injuries, including message appears every six months as a
brain damage. Small children are reminder that the system is off. You can
particularly at risk. switch the system back on or leave it off.
162
Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped)
SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT Note: Depending on your SYNC version, the

graphic may look different from what you
ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF see here.
2. Press Vehicle. REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off. SYSTEM INDICATORS -
Note: The default setting is on. VEHICLES WITH: SYNC
Note: Performing a master reset causes the
Message
system to switch on again.
Check rear seats for occupants.
Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped)
When you switch the system off, a Displays when you switch the vehicle off
message appears every six months as a after the alert conditions are met.
reminder that the system is off. You can The message displays for a short
switch the system back on or leave it off. period of time. Press the OK
E281480
button to acknowledge and
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT remove some messages from the
information display.
SYSTEM INDICATORS -
VEHICLES WITH: SYNC 3
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
The warning sounds for a short period of
time.
E350472
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off

after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
163
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR

OPENER
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNING: Do not use the system

with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any E188211
garage door opener manufactured
The universal garage door opener replaces
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
the common hand-held garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
opener with a three-button transmitter
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener The system includes two primary features,
without these features increases the risk a garage door opener and a platform for
of serious injury or death. remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
Note: Make sure that the garage door and well as entry gate operators, security
security device are free from obstruction systems, entry door locks and home or
when you are programming. Do not program office lighting.
the system with the vehicle in the garage. Additional system information can be
Note: Make sure you keep the original found online at www.homelink.com,
remote control transmitter for use in other www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
vehicles as well as for future system or by calling the toll-free help line at
programming. 1-800-355-3515.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale In-Vehicle Programming
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for This process is to program your in-vehicle
security reasons. See Erasing the Function HomeLink function button with your
Button Codes later in this section. hand-held transmitter.
Note: You can program a maximum of Note: The programming steps below
three devices. To change or replace any of assume you will be programming HomeLink
the three devices after it has been initially that was not previously programmed. If your
programmed, you must first erase the HomeLink was previously programmed, you
current settings. See Erasing the Function may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
Button Codes. See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This allows for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
164
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press

and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
E188212 For questions or comments, please contact
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
garage, switch your ignition to the on www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
position, but do not start your vehicle. or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program. Programming Your Garage Door
3. Hold your hand-held garage door Opener Motor
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
the HomeLink button you want to unit and you may need to remove the cover
program. or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have E142659
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator 1. Press the learn button on the garage
/ Canadian Programming. door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button steps.
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice 2. Return to your vehicle.
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
165
E188212 E188213
3. Press and hold the function button you 1. Press and hold the outer two function
want to program for 2 seconds, then buttons simultaneously for
release. Repeat this step. Depending approximately 10 seconds until the
on your brand of garage door opener, indicator light above the buttons
you may need to repeat this sequence flashes rapidly.
a third time. 2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
Gate Operator / Canadian
codes for all buttons.
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require Reprogramming a Single Button
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) To program a device to a previously trained
after several seconds of transmission – button, follow these steps:
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, NOT release the button.
some U.S. gate operators are designed to 2. The indicator light begins to flash after
“time-out” in the same manner. 20 seconds. Without releasing the
Note: If programming a garage door opener button, follow Step 1 in the
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the Programming section.
device during the “cycling” process to For questions or comments, contact
prevent possible overheating. HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
1. Press and release, every two seconds, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
your hand-held transmitter until the or by calling the toll-free help line at
HomeLink indicator light changes to a 1-800-355-3515.
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
166
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
167
12 V DC Power Point 110 V 400 Watt AC Power Point (If

Equipped)
WARNING: Do not plug optional

electrical accessories into the cigar WARNING: Do not keep electrical
lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar devices plugged in the power point
lighter can cause damage not covered whenever the device is not in use. Do not
by the vehicle warranty, and can result use any extension cord with the 110 volt
in fire or serious injury. AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you cause the power point to overload due
can use the socket to power 12 V appliances to powering multiple devices that can
with a maximum current rating of 20 A20 reach beyond the 400 watt load limit
amps. and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the Note: This feature works only when you
power points, this may result in damage to have the ignition switched on.
vehicle systems. Note: This feature has a maximum output
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).
accessory plug. Note: While in drive (D), the maximum
Note: Do not use the power point over the outlet output is 300 watts.
vehicle capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse Note: When powering electric devices that
may blow. require more than 10 watts in vehicles
Note: Always keep the power point caps equipped with keyless start, the engine must
closed when not in use. remain running. If the engine is turned off or
you switch the ignition to accessory mode,
Do not insert objects other than an plugged in devices will not be charged.
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow You can use the power point for electric
the fuse. devices that require up to 400 watts. It is
on the instrument panel, and the rear of
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the the center console.
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
E191617
168
When the indicator light on the power point Locations

is:
Note: Timed power points remain on for 30
• On: The power point is working, the minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.
ignition is on and a device is plugged If you switch the vehicle off, the timed
in. power points remain on for 75 minutes.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in. Power points may be in the following
locations:
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode. • On the instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device • On the rear of the center console.
exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your • In the seat bin.
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and WIRELESS ACCESSORY
switch the ignition off to reset the fault CHARGER (IF EQUIPPED)
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
You can use the 400 watt power outlet for WARNING: Wireless charging
these types of electric devices: devices can affect the operation of
• Electric hand drills. implanted medical devices, including
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
• Rechargeable power tools.
implanted medical devices, we
• Video games. recommend that you consult with your
• Laptops. physician.
• Televisions.
Tests on this equipment show that it
Note: Max 400W - when the vehicle is complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules.
parked and 300W - when the vehicle is
driving. • This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and
Do not use the power point for certain may cause harmful interference to
electric devices, including: radio communications. There is no
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. guarantee that the interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
equipment does cause harmful
electric saws and other electric power
interference to radio or television
tools or compressor-driven
reception, please consult the dealer.
refrigerators.
• This product is not end-user
• Measuring devices, which process
serviceable.
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
169
Do not place metal objects, for example

WARNING: Changes or remote controls, coins and candy
modifications not expressively approved wrappers, on or near the charging area
by the party responsible for compliance when charging a device. Metal objects may
could void the user's authority to operate heat up and degrade the charging
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the performance.
radio certification number only signifies Note: The rate of charge, or charging power,
that Industry Canada technical is controlled by the device. During charging,
specifications were met. the device and the charger may heat up, this
is normal. If the battery gets hotter than
This device complies with Industry Canada usual, the charger may stop charging.
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). The charging area is on the
Operation is subject to: center console or lower
• This device may not cause interference. E297549
instrument panel. See Center
• This device must accept any Console (page 171).
interference, including interference that
You can charge a device if the vehicle is
may cause undesired operation of the
on, when in accessory mode, or anytime
device.
SYNC is on.
Note: The charging performance may be
To begin charging, place the device on the
affected if your device is in a case. It may be
center of the charging surface with the
necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
charging side down. The charging stops
charge your device.
after your device reaches a full charge.
The system supports one Qi wireless
Note: If the system detects a foreign object
charging compatible device on the
or if the device is misaligned on the charging
charging area.
area, a message appears in the display.
Keep the charging area clean and remove
Note: Software and firmware updates may
foreign objects prior to charging a device.
affect device compatibility, including the
Do not place items with a magnetic strip, use of unofficial software or firmware. You
for example passports, parking tickets or should verify charging functionality with your
credit cards, near the charging area when specific devices when in your vehicle.
charging a device. Damage may occur to
the magnetic strip.
Message Behavior Description
Wireless Charger Active Message on screen display This message appears when
or pop-up window. wireless charging begins.
Phone misaligned or object The system stops charging
between phone and charger your device if the system
detected. Correct the condi- detects the phone is
Pop-up window.
tion to resume charging. misaligned, or a foreign
metal object is on the char-
ging surface.
170
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED) OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF

EQUIPPED)
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E224959
Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.
UNDER SEAT STORAGE (IF

EQUIPPED)
E250516
Front Under Seat Storage
A Storage compartment. Compartment - Vehicles Without
B Front storage compartment with Locking Storage
USB ports.
C Sliding cup holder.
D Center storage compartment
with auxiliary power point.
E Rear cup holders.
F Auxiliary power point.
G Heated rear seats.
H AC power point.
I USB charging ports.
E306120
Lift the latch to open the lid and access to

the storage compartment under the center
seat cushion.
171
Front Under Seat Storage Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped)
Compartment - Vehicles With
Locking Storage
E229819
E224738 1. Lift the rear seat to access the under

seat storage bin.
1. Use the key in the remote control to
unlock. See Remote Control (page
55).
E223578
2. Press the latch to release the cushion.

3. Lift the cushion to access the storage
compartment.
E235007
172
2. Lift the front and side panels to expand

and lock them in place.
E235009
4. To collapse, release the lever, push

down to the stowed position and fold
in the side and front panels.
Note: Make sure the storage divider is not
locked into place when collapsing. Push the
button to release the divider door and swing
it to the stowed position on the front wall.
E235008
3. Lock the panels in an open position.
173
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow

storm or blowing snow conditions, the
engine air induction may become partially
clogged with snow and ice. If this occurs,
WARNING: Extended idling at high the engine may experience a significant
engine speeds can produce very high reduction in power output. At the earliest
temperatures in the engine and exhaust opportunity, clear all the snow and ice
system, creating the risk of fire or other away from the air induction inlet.
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or IGNITION SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)

drive your vehicle on dry grass or other
dry ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine / //

in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic.
Always open the garage door before you
start the engine. ///
0
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle E252522

may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5.0 mi 0 (off) - The ignition is off.
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system Note: When you switch the ignition off and
must realign itself with the engine. You can leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
disregard any unusual driving the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
characteristics during this period. battery to lose charge.
The powertrain control system meets all I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
Canadian interference-causing equipment accessories, such as the radio, to operate
standard requirements regulating the while the engine is not running.
impulse electrical field or radio noise. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
When you start the engine, avoid pressing position for too long. This could cause your
the accelerator pedal before and during vehicle battery to lose charge.
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal II (on) - All electrical circuits are
when you have difficulty starting the operational and the warning lamps and
engine. indicators illuminate.
174
III (start) - Cranks the engine. • Press the clutch pedal for manual
transmissions, or brake pedal for
automatic transmissions, and then
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED) press the button for any length of time.
An indicator light on the button
Note: The keyless starting system may not illuminates when then ignition is on and
function if the key is close to metal objects when the engine starts.
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
STARTING A GASOLINE
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and ENGINE - 6.2L/7.3L
start the engine.
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow
down, see an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants fasten their
seat belt.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
E144447
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
The keyless starting system has three • Make sure the transmission is in park
modes: (P).
Off: Turns the ignition off. • Turn the ignition key to the on position.
• Without applying the clutch pedal for Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
manual transmissions, or brake pedal 1. Fully press the brake pedal.
for automatic transmissions, press and
release the button once when the 2. Turn the key to the start position to
ignition is in the on mode, or when the start your vehicle.
engine is running but the vehicle is not 3. When the engine starts, release the key
moving. and then gradually release the brake
pedal as the engine speed increases.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators Note: The engine may continue cranking
illuminate. for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
• Without applying the clutch pedal for Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
manual transmissions, or brake pedal first try, wait for a short period and try again.
for automatic transmissions, press and
release the button once. Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Start: Starts the vehicle. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
175
2. Turn the key to position III to start the Stopping the Engine When Your
engine. Vehicle is Moving
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
WARNING: Switching off the
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 engine when your vehicle is still moving
seconds as starter damage may occur. If results in a significant decrease in
the engine does not start, switch the braking assistance. Higher effort is
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before required to apply the brakes and to stop
trying again. your vehicle. A significant decrease in
steering assistance could also occur. The
Vehicles with Keyless Start steering does not lock, but higher effort
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. could be required to steer your vehicle.
When you switch the ignition off, some
Note: If you press the push button ignition electrical circuits, for example airbags,
switch again prior to the engine starting, the also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
ignition switches to accessory mode and the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
will not start. restart the engine.
Note: If you release the brake pedal before
the engine starts, follow the engine start 1. Put the transmission into neutral (N)
sequence again. and use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
2. Press the center of the push button
into park (P) and switch the ignition
ignition switch.
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
brake pedal.
Failure to Start Automatic Engine Shutdown

If your vehicle has a keyless ignition, it has
If you cannot start the engine after three
a feature that shuts down the engine if it
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
has been idling for an extended period of
procedure:
time. The ignition also turns off in order to
1. Fully press the brake pedal. save battery power. Before the engine
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and shuts down, a message appears in the
hold it there. information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
3. Start the engine. not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine
shuts down. Another message appears in
Stopping the Engine When Your the information display to inform you that
Vehicle is Stationary the engine has shut down in order to save
1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do.
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
176
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

Fuel Vehicles Only)
The starting characteristics of all grades WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
of E85 ethanol make it unsuitable for use result in entry of harmful and potentially
when ambient temperatures fall below lethal fumes into the passenger
0°F (-18°C). Consult your fuel distributor compartment. If you smell exhaust
for the availability of winter grade ethanol. fumes inside your vehicle, have your
As the outside temperature approaches vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
supply winter grade ethanol, the same as
with unleaded gasoline.
Important Ventilating Information
If summer grade ethanol is used in cold
weather conditions, 0°F (-18°C), you may If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
experience increased cranking times, rough engine idling for long periods of time, we
idle or hesitation until the engine has recommend that you do one of the
warmed up. following:
You may experience a decrease in • Open the windows at least 1 in
performance when the engine is cold when (2.5 cm).
operating on E85 ethanol. • Set your climate control to outside air.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in
the air intake system. Such fluid could STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE -
cause immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury. 6.7L DIESEL
If you should experience cold weather Read all starting instructions carefully
starting problems on E85 ethanol, and before you start your vehicle.
neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol
nor an engine block heater is available, the For temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank use of the correct grade engine oil is
improves cold starting performance. Your essential for proper operation. Refer to
vehicle is designed to operate on E85 engine oil specifications for more
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or information. See Engine Oil Capacity
any mixture of the two. and Specification (page 449).
Your vehicle may have a cold weather
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the starting strategy that prevents severe
Preceding Instructions (Flexible Fuel engine damage by assisting in engine
Vehicles Only) lubrication warm-up. In extremely cold
1. Press the accelerator pedal down ambient temperatures, this strategy
one-third to one-half of its travel, and activates and prevents the accelerator
then crank the engine. pedal from being used for 30 seconds after
you start your vehicle. A message appears
2. When the engine starts, release the in the information display as your vehicle
key, then gradually release the warms up. By not allowing the accelerator
accelerator pedal as the engine speed pedal to be used, the engine oil is allowed
increases. If the engine still does not to properly lubricate the bearings
start, repeat Step 1.
177
preventing engine damage due to lack of Vehicles with Keyless Start

proper lubrication. After the 30 second
warm-up period, the accelerator pedal Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
becomes operational again and a message Note: If the push button ignition switch is
appears informing you the vehicle is ok to pressed again prior to the engine starting,
drive. the ignition switches to accessory mode and
When you start the engine in extremely does not start.
cold temperatures -15°F (-26°C), we Note: If you release the brake pedal before
recommend that you allow the engine to the engine starts, follow the engine start
idle for several minutes before you drive sequence again.
the vehicle.
Before starting the engine check the
following: 2. Press the center of the push button
ignition switch.
• Make sure all occupants fasten their
seatbelt. Note: A message appears: Engine Start
Pending, Please Wait.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off. 3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
(P). System
Note: Do not press the accelerator during The diesel engine glow system consists of:
starting.
• Eight glow plugs, one per cylinder.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key • Glow Plug Control Module.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. • Engine Coolant Temperature sensor.
1. Fully press the brake pedal. • Barometric pressure sensor.
2. Turn the key to position II • Environmental temperature sensor.
Note: A message appears: Engine Start The powertrain and glow plug control
Pending, Please Wait. modules electronically control the glow
plug system. After you switch the ignition
3. Wait until the engine glow-plug on, the glow plug control module
indicator turns off. immediately energizes the glow plugs. The
4. Turn the key to position III to start the glow plug control module uses the engine
engine. coolant temperature, barometric pressure
sensor and environmental temperature
sensor to determine how long the glow
brake pedal.
plugs stay energized. The required time for
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 the glow plugs to be energized decreases
seconds as starter damage may occur. If as the coolant temperature, barometric
the engine does not start, switch the pressure and environmental temperature
ignition off and wait 30 seconds before increase.
trying again.
178
Automatic Engine Shutdown When the glow plug pre-heat indicator

turns off, turn the key to start. After you
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless start the engine, the glow plugs may
ignition, it has a feature that automatically remain on for a period. If you do not start
shuts down the engine if it has been idling the engine before the glow plug activation
for an extended period. The ignition also time ends, you need to reset the glow plugs
turns off in order to save battery power. by switching the ignition off. After the
Before the engine shuts down, a message engine starts, allow it to idle for about 15
appears in the information display showing seconds. This protects the engine. Do not
a timer counting down from 30 seconds. increase engine speed until the oil pressure
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, gauge indicates normal pressure.
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down Cold Weather Operation
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
you normally do. the engine to its normal operating
temperature. Long periods of idling,
Cold Weather Starting especially in cold weather, can cause a
buildup of deposits which can cause engine
damage.
WARNING: Do not use starting
fluid, for example ether, in the air intake Change to a lighter grade engine oil to
system. Such fluid could cause make starting easier under these
immediate explosive damage to the conditions. Refer to engine oil
engine and possible personal injury. specifications. See Engine Oil Capacity
and Specification (page 449).
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could temperatures. Diesel fuel which has not
cause an explosion. been properly formulated for the ambient
conditions may gel which can clog the fuel
We recommend that the engine block filters. One indication that the fuel filter(s)
heater be used for starting when the may be clogged is if the engine starts, stalls
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See after a short time, and then does not
Engine Block Heater (page 182). restart. If you have been using biodiesel,
When operating in cold weather, you may you may need to use a fuel with lower
use Motorcraft® cetane improvers or biodiesel content, try another brand, or
non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from discontinue using biodiesel. Do not use
a reputable manufacturer as needed. alcohol based additives to correct fuel
gelling. This may result in damage to the
Switch the ignition on. Do not fuel injectors and system. Use the proper
start the engine until the anti-gel and performance improvement
glow-plug indicator turns off. product. See Engine Oil Capacity and
Specification (page 449).
179
Your vehicle has a fuel and water separator

that recirculates fuel from the engine to WARNING: To reduce the risk of
help prevent fuel filter clogging. To avoid vehicle damage and personal burn
engine fuel starvation during cold weather injuries, do not start your engine with the
operation of 32°F (0°C) or below, we air cleaner removed and do not remove
recommend that the fuel level in your tank it while the engine is running.
should not drop below ¼ full. This helps
prevent air from entering the fuel system
In order to operate the engine in
and stalling the engine.
temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower, read
Your vehicle has a selective catalytic the following instructions:
reduction system that uses Diesel Exhaust • Make sure that the batteries are of
Fluid (DEF) to operate properly. You need sufficient size and are fully charged.
to replenish your vehicle’s DEF at certain Check other electrical components to
intervals. When filling your vehicle’s DEF make sure they are in optimum
tank in cold weather, take special care to condition.
prevent damage to the tank. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System • Use the proper coolant solution at the
(page 197). concentration recommended
protecting the engine against damage
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the from freezing.
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle
speed if you leave it idling in park (P). As • Try to keep the fuel tank full as much
the engine warms-up, the engine sound as possible at the end of operation to
level decreases due to the activation of prevent condensation in the fuel
PCM-controlled sound reduction features. system.
• Make sure you use proper cold weather
If you operate your vehicle in a heavy engine oil and that it is at its proper
snowstorm or blowing snow conditions, level. Also, if necessary, make sure to
snow and ice can clog the engine air follow the engine oil and filter change
induction. If this occurs, the engine may schedule found under the Special
experience a significant reduction in power operating conditions section listed in
output. At the earliest opportunity, clear the scheduled maintenance
all the snow and ice away from inside the information.
air filter assembly. Remove the air cleaner
cover and the air filter and remove any • At temperatures of -9°F (-23°C) or
snow or ice. Remove any debris, snow or below, it is recommended that you use
ice, on the foam filter by brushing the an engine block heater to improve cold
surface with a soft brush. Once you have engine starting.
cleared all of the debris, reinstall the air • If operating in arctic temperatures of
filter and cover. -20°F (-29°C) or lower, consult your
Do not use water, solvents, or a hard brush truck dealer for information about
for cleaning the foam filter. special cold weather equipment and
precautions.
180
We recommend the following cold Idle Control

weather idling guidelines:
Your vehicle may have a factory option for
• You can use Motorcraft® cetane a stationary elevated idle control through
improvers or non-alcohol-based the upfitter switches in the overhead
cetane improvers from a reputable console. This allows the operator to
manufacturer as needed. elevate the idle RPM for extended idle
• Maintain the engine cooling system periods, as well as aftermarket equipment
properly. such as PTO operation. You must configure
• Avoid shutting the engine down after this feature even if ordered from the
an extensive idling period. Drive your factory. See your authorized dealer for
vehicle for several miles with the required upfitting.
engine at normal operating Operation in Snow and Rain
temperatures under a moderate load.
• Consider using an engine block heater. Vehicle operation in heavy snowfall or
extreme rain conditions may feed
• For extended idle times use an excessive amounts of snow or water into
approved idle speed increase device. the air intake system. This could plug the
air filter with snow and may cause the
Winter Operating Tips for Arctic
engine to lose power and possibly shut
Operation -20°F (-29°C) and Below
down.
The following information is a guideline We recommend the following actions after
only and is not to be the only source of operating your vehicle up to 200 mi
possible solutions in resolving extreme (320 km) in snowfall or extreme rain:
cold temperature issues.
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
Starting Aids the hood and clear all the snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet (do not
remove the foam filter) and reset the
WARNING: Do not use starting air filter restriction gauge.
fluid, for example ether, in the air intake Note: Removal of the foam filter degrades
system. Such fluid could cause your vehicle performance during snow and
immediate explosive damage to the hot weather conditions.
engine and possible personal injury.
• Extreme rain: The air filter dries after
The use of the factory engine block heater about 15–30 minutes at highway
assists in engine starting in extreme cold speeds. At the earliest opportunity,
ambient temperatures See Engine Block open the hood and reset the air filter
Heater (page 182). restriction gauge.
Refer to Air filter and restriction gauge in
the Maintenance chapter for more
information. See Changing the Engine
Air Filter (page 358).
181
Operation in Standing Water • A chime sounds and the information

display will show ENGINE TURNS OFF
Ingestion of water into the diesel engine IN 30 (seconds) and start counting
can result in immediate and severe down
damage to the engine. If driving through
water, slow down to avoid splashing water • You can restart the five or 15-minute
into the intake. If the engine stalls, and you timer by changing the position of the
suspect ingestion of water into the engine, accelerator pedal, brake pedal or the
do not try to restart the engine. Consult park brake within the final 30 seconds
your dealer for service immediately. • When the timer reaches zero, the
Your fuel tank vents to the atmosphere by engine shuts down and this message
valves on top of the tank and through the will appear in your information display
fuel cap. If water reaches the top of the ENGINE TURNED OFF
tank, the valves may pull water into the • One minute after the engine has shut
fuel tank. Water in the fuel can cause down, the electrical system simulates
performance issues and damage the fuel key off, even though the ignition is still
injection system. in the on position, initiating normal
accessory delay period
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE • You must move the ignition to the off
position to reset the system before
- 6.7L DIESEL restarting your vehicle.
Switch the ignition off. The engine idle shutdown idle timer does
not start if:
To help prolong engine life, we
recommended you allow the engine to idle • The engine is operating in power
for three to five minutes, especially after take-off mode.
any of the following: • The engine coolant temperature is
• Continuous engine speed. below 60°F (16°C).
• High ambient temperature. • The exhaust emission control device is
regenerating.
• High GVW or GCW operation, for
example heavy loads or trailers.
This allows the turbo charged engine to ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
cool down. EQUIPPED)
ENGINE IDLE SHUTDOWN (IF

EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
Your vehicle may be equipped with an injury.
engine idle shutdown system. This system
automatically shuts down your engine WARNING: Do not use your heater
when it has been idling in P (Park) or N with ungrounded electrical systems or
(Neutral) for five minutes (parking brake two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
set) or 15 minutes (parking brake not set). electrical shock.
When the engine idle shutdown process
has started:
182
Note: The heater is most effective when • Use as short an extension cord as
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F possible.
(-18°C). • Do not use multiple extension cords.
For cold climates that are below 0°F • Make sure that when in operation, the
(-18°C) needing a temporary battery extension cord plug and heater cord
installation. Order the cold climate pack. plug connections are free and clear of
The heater acts as a starting aid by water. This could cause an electric
warming the engine coolant. This allows shock or fire.
the climate control system to respond • Make sure the heater, heater cord and
quickly. The equipment includes a heater extension cord are firmly connected.
element (installed in the engine block) and • Check for heat anywhere in the
a wire harness. You can connect the electrical hookup once the system has
system to a grounded 120-volt AC been operating for approximately 30
electrical source. minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
E308417
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
We recommend that you do the following a dry cloth if necessary.
for a safe and correct operation: The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a of energy per hour of use. The system does
clean area, clear of combustibles. not have a thermostat. It achieves
• Locate the block heater cord near the maximum temperature after
center of the lower front fascia. approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord does not improve system performance and
that is product certified by unnecessarily uses electricity.
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
183
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Automotive fuels can be harmful or

fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank call a physician immediately, even if no
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray symptoms are immediately apparent.
and fire. The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
WARNING: The fuel system may
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
fuel may spray out, which could cause In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
serious personal injury. breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
cause serious injury or death if misused fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
or mishandled. contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a attention. Failure to seek proper
fuel pump nozzle can produce static medical attention could lead to
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are permanent injury.
filling an ungrounded fuel container. • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
WARNING: Fuel may contain the skin, clothing or both, promptly
benzene, which is a cancer-causing remove contaminated clothing and
agent. wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
WARNING: When refueling always contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
shut the engine off and never allow skin irritation.
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell • Be particularly careful if you are taking
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
extremely hazardous under certain for the treatment of alcoholism.
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
Observe the following guidelines when injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
handling automotive fuel: the skin, wash the affected areas
immediately with plenty of soap and
• Extinguish all smoking materials and water. Consult a physician immediately
any open flames before refueling your if you experience any adverse reactions.
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
184
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - E85 Do not be concerned if the engine

sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
Vehicles the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following damage.
identifiers: We recommend Top Tier detergent
• Yellow fuel filler cap. gasolines, where available to help minimize
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet. engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
• Yellow fuel filler housing. additional information, refer to
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler www.toptiergas.com.
door.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
E161513 • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on • Fuels containing more than 85%
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum ethanol or E100 fuel.
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or • Fuels containing methanol.
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a • Fuels containing metallic-based
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85). additives, including manganese-based
Some fuel stations, particularly those in compounds.
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as • Fuels containing the octane booster
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
rating below 87. The use of these fuels manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane The use of fuels with metallic compounds
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The such as methylcyclopentadienyl
performance gained by using premium fuel manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
is most noticeable in hot weather as well as MMT), which is a manganese-based
as other conditions, for example when fuel additive, will impair engine
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 282). performance and affect the emission
control system.
185
Fuel and Refueling
Switching Between E85 and Do not be concerned if the engine

Gasoline sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
We do not recommend repeatedly the recommended octane rating, contact
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or damage.
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your We recommend Top Tier detergent
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi gasolines, where available to help minimize
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change engine deposits and maintain optimal
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85 vehicle and engine performance. For
exclusively, we recommend that you fill additional information, refer to
the fuel tank with regular unleaded www.toptiergas.com.
gasoline at each scheduled oil change. Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
Choosing the Right Fuel vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
E161513 • Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
Your vehicle is designed to operate on compounds.
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum • Fuels containing the octane booster
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
Some fuel stations, particularly those in manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane prohibited by law.
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not The use of fuels with metallic compounds
be covered by the vehicle warranty. such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
For best overall vehicle and engine as MMT), which is a manganese-based
performance, premium fuel with an octane fuel additive, will impair engine
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance and affect the emission
performance gained by using premium fuel control system.
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 282).
186
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold

temperature. For best results at
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), we
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated recommended using a diesel fuel which
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel has been seasonally adjusted for the
Is Required (United ambient conditions.
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands And Other Locales) Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Note: Your warranty will not cover damage Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
caused by using an improper type of fuel or Is Not Required
fuel additive.
For the engine to operate reliably on
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with
low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the
diesel fuel under any circumstances.
engine must be a factory built high-sulfur
Blending used oil with the fuel will
engine (available as a dealer order option
significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust
for select markets) or an ultra low sulfur
emissions and reduce engine life due to
diesel fuel configured engine that has been
increased internal wear.
retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using
We recommend Top Tier diesel fuel where Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
available to help minimize engine deposits Failure to use retrofit components other
and maintain optimal vehicle and engine than those available through your
performance. For additional information, authorized dealer will result in coolant
refer to www.toptiergas.com. system damage, engine overheating,
You should use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel selective catalyst reduction system or
fuel (also known as ULSD) designated as diesel particulate filter damage and
number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of possible base engine damage.
15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You Use only a diesel engine configured for use
may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
containing up to 20% biodiesel, also diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
known as B20. These fuels should meet than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
the ASTM D975 diesel or the ASTM D7467 (16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications. (greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
Outside of North America, use fuels designed to use only Ultra Low Sulfur
meeting EN590 or equivalent local market Diesel fuel may result in damage to engine
standard. emission control devices and the
Using low sulfur diesel fuel aftertreatment system, potentially
(16-500 ppm) or high sulfur rendering the vehicle inoperable.
diesel fuel (greater than 500 Vehicles with engines configured for use
ppm) in your diesel engine will cause with high sulfur diesel fuel are only
certain emission components to available for sale in countries where ultra
malfunction which may also cause the low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
service engine soon light to illuminate available or mandated by the government.
indicating an emissions-related concern. Vehicles originally sold in a ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel market that are subsequently
187
Fuel and Refueling
exported to non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel • Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
markets will need to be retrofitted at the tank for more than 1 month
customer’s expense using Ford authorized • Consider changing brands or reducing
dealer service parts in order to be reliably biodiesel content if you have cold
operated on non- ultra low sulfur diesel temperature fuel gelling issues or a
fuel. frequent LOW FUEL PRESSURE
message appearing
Biodiesel
Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater
than 20% may cause damage to your
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could after-treatment hardware (exhaust
cause an explosion. catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
Concentrations greater than 20% can also
Note: Do not use home heating oil, cause fuel filter restrictions that may result
agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste in a lack of power or damage to fuel
cooking greases, biodiesel greater than 20% system components, including fuel pump
or any diesel not intended for highway use. and fuel injector failures.
Damage to the fuel injection system, engine We recommend SAE 5W-40 oil for fuels
and exhaust catalyst, and diesel particulate with greater than 5% biodiesel (B5). For
filter can occur if you use an improper fuel. more information about oil change
Red dye is used to identify fuels intended intervals and other maintenance when
for agricultural and non-highway use. operating on biodiesel See Special
You may operate your vehicle on diesel Operating Conditions Scheduled
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also Maintenance (page 574).
known as B20. Look for a label on the fuel pump to
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
product from renewable fuel sources, such in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel content is often
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste indicated with the letter B followed by the
cooking greases. percent of biodiesel in the fuel. For
example, B20 indicates a fuel containing
To help achieve acceptable engine 20% biodiesel. Ask the service station
performance and durability when using attendant to confirm the biodiesel content
biodiesel in your vehicle: of a diesel fuel if you do not see a label on
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the the fuel pump.
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
that complies with industry standards should not be stored in the fuel tank for
• Follow the recommended service more than 1 month. If you plan to park or
maintenance intervals See General store your vehicle for more than 1 month,
Maintenance Information (page 565). then you should empty your vehicle fuel
tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the
tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel
fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of
30 minutes.
188
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can If you have run out of fuel:
damage fuel system seals and plastics and • You may need to cycle the ignition from
corrode steel parts. off to on several times after refueling
During cold weather, if you have problems to allow the fuel system to pump the
operating on biodiesel, you may need to fuel from the tank to the engine. On
use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel restarting, cranking time will take a few
content, try another brand, or discontinue seconds longer than normal. With
the use of biodiesel. keyless ignition, just start the engine.
Crank time will be longer than usual.
Diesel Fuel Additives • Normally, adding 1 gal (4 L) of fuel
It should not be necessary to add any preferably gasoline, is enough to restart
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you the engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms and on a steep grade, more than 1 gal
to ASTM industry specifications. (4 L) may be required.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine. REFUELING - GASOLINE
Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an
equivalent cetane booster additive if you
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use WARNING: When refueling always
Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance shut the engine off and never allow
improver or an equivalent additive if there sparks or open flames near the fuel tank
is fuel gelling. filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
Do not use alcohol-based additives to phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel extremely hazardous under certain
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
additives may result in damage to the fuel
injectors and system. See Engine WARNING: Fuel vapor burns
Specifications (page 441). violently and a fuel fire can cause severe
injuries.
Your warranty may not cover repairs
needed to correct the effects of using an WARNING: Read and follow all the
aftermarket product that does not meet instructions on the pump island.
Ford specifications in your fuel.
WARNING: Stay outside your
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle.
WARNING: Keep children away

WARNING: Flow of fuel through a from the fuel pump. Never let children
fuel pump nozzle can produce static pump fuel.
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container. WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
Avoid running out of fuel because this nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
situation may have an adverse effect on into the fuel tank.
engine components.
189
Fuel and Refueling
3. Carefully turn the filler cap

WARNING: Stop refueling after the counterclockwise until it spins off.
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts 4. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel
off for the second time. Failure to follow filler pipe.
this will fill the expansion space in the 5. To install the cap, align the tabs on the
fuel tank and could lead to fuel cap with the notches on the filler pipe.
overflowing.
6. Turn the filler cap clockwise until it
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel clicks at least once.
pump nozzle from its fully inserted If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel
position when refueling. Cap message appears in the instrument
cluster and stays on after you start the
Use the following guidelines to avoid engine, you may not have installed the fuel
electrostatic charge build-up when filling filler properly.
an ungrounded fuel container:
If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next
• Place approved fuel container on the opportunity, safely pull off of the road,
ground. remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
the vehicle - including the cargo area. light or Check fuel cap message may not
reset immediately. It may take several
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
driving cycles for the indicators to turn off.
with the fuel container while filling.
A driving cycle consists of an engine
• Do not use a device that would hold start-up, after four or more hours with the
the fuel pump handle in the fill position. engine off, followed by normal city and
highway driving.
Fuel Filler Cap
REFUELING - DIESEL
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not WARNING: Read and follow all the
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, instructions on the pump island.
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury. WARNING: Stay outside your
vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, unattended when refueling your vehicle.
replace it with a fuel filler cap designed for
your vehicle. The vehicle warranty may be WARNING: Keep children away
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel from the fuel pump. Never let children
system if you do not use the correct genuine pump fuel.
Ford or Motorcraft® fuel filler cap.
When fueling your vehicle: WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
1. Put your vehicle in park (P). nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
2. Switch the engine off. into the fuel tank.
190
Fuel and Refueling
Diesel fuel must not be stored in a

WARNING: Do not remove the fuel galvanized container. The fuel can dissolve
pump nozzle from its fully inserted the zinc in the galvanized container. The
position when refueling. zinc then remains in the fuel. If you run the
contaminated fuel through the engine, the
WARNING: When refueling always zinc can deposit in the fuel injectors
shut the engine off and never allow causing expensive-to-repair damage.
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank Diesel fuel dispensing nozzle fill rate
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is Your vehicle has a fuel fill pipe that is able
extremely hazardous under certain to accept fuel up to 20 gal (76 L) per
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. minute from a 1.2 in (30 mm)
fuel-dispensing nozzle. Pumping fuel at
WARNING: Stop refueling after the greater flow rates may result in premature
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts nozzle shut-off or spit back.
off for the second time. Failure to follow
Truck stops have pumps and nozzles
this will fill the expansion space in the
designed for larger, heavy-duty trucks.
fuel tank and could lead to fuel
When refueling at truck stops: if the nozzle
overflowing.
shuts off repeatedly when refueling, wait
5–10 seconds; then use a slower rate of
flow, do not depress the nozzle trigger as
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
far.
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, Refueling
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury. When fueling your vehicle do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door and
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
remove the fuel tank filler cap.
replace it with a fuel filler cap designed for
Carefully turn the filler cap
your vehicle. The vehicle warranty may be
counterclockwise until it spins off.
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel
system if you do not use the correct genuine
Ford or Motorcraft® fuel filler cap.
Fueling Tips
If air is allowed to enter the fuel system the
engine automatically purges any trapped
air. To purge the air sooner: prior to engine
start, prime the system by turning the key
to on for 30 seconds then to off. Repeat
this several times. The engine may run
rough and produce white smoke while air
is in the system. This is normal.
Use only clean, approved containers that
prevent the entry of dirt or water whenever
you store diesel fuel.
191
Fuel and Refueling
E119081
4. When the pump shuts off, wait 5

seconds, then raise the fuel pump
nozzle and slowly remove it.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
E139202 that the vehicle warranty may not cover.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
possible.
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank Dual Fuel Tanks (If Equipped)
filler pipe opening.
Your vehicle may have a dual fuel tank
A delivery system which operates
independently and automatically. The fuel
pump in the front fuel tank delivers fuel to
the engine. When the fuel level in the front
fuel tank drops below three quarter full,
fuel automatically transfers from the rear
fuel tank to the front fuel tank. Whenever
there is fuel in the rear fuel tank, the front
fuel tank level remains between half and
three quarter full.
B Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel, you
E139203
must add fuel to the front fuel tank to
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower restart the engine.
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel
tank is full.
192
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 110).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy

• Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
• Fully loading your vehicle.
• Carrying unnecessary weight.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 185).
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
193
Engine Emission Control
EMISSION LAW Tampering With a Noise Control

System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
WARNING: Do not remove or alter • Removal or rendering inoperative by
the original equipment floor covering or any person other than for purposes of
insulation between it and the metal floor maintenance.
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the • Repair or replacement of any device or
vehicle from the engine and exhaust element of the design incorporated into
system heat and noise. On vehicles with a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
no original equipment floor covering control prior to its sale or delivery to
insulation, do not carry passengers in a the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
manner that permits prolonged skin use.
contact with the metal floor. Failure to • The use of the vehicle after any person
follow these instructions may result in removes or renders inoperative any
fire or personal injury. device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws may presume to constitute tampering as
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative follows:
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any absorbers, fender apron barriers,
vehicle modification without first underbody noise shields or acoustically
determining applicable laws. absorptive material.
Tampering with emissions • Tampering or rendering inoperative the
control systems including engine speed governor, to allow engine
related sensors or the Diesel speed to exceed manufacturer
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced specifications.
engine power and the illumination of the If the engine does not start, runs rough,
service engine soon light. experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
194
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.

• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
climactic conditions. result in entry of harmful and potentially
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel lethal fumes into the passenger
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. compartment. If you smell exhaust
Regular maintenance or replacement is not fumes inside your vehicle, have your
needed. vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle WARNING: Do not allow people or
checked as soon as possible. animals in truck beds that have
modifications, such as bed covers or
Noise Emissions Warranty, slide-in campers, when the engine is
Prohibited Tampering Acts and running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Failure
Maintenance to follow this instruction could result in
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation personal injury or death.
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb Your vehicle has various emission control
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating components and a catalytic converter that
(GVWR). The preceding statements enables it to comply with applicable
concerning prohibited tampering acts and exhaust emission standards.
maintenance, and the noise warranty To make sure that the catalytic converter
found in the Warranty Guide, are and other emission control components
applicable to complete chassis cabs over continue to work properly:
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. • Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER • Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
WARNING: Do not park, idle or vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other Starting the Vehicle (page 327).
dry ground cover. The emission system • Use only the specified fuel listed.
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. • Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: The normal operating • Avoid running out of fuel.
temperature of the exhaust system is • Have the items listed in scheduled
very high. Never work around or attempt maintenance information performed
to repair any part of the exhaust system according to the specified schedule.
until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter. Note: Your vehicle warranty does not cover
The catalytic converter heats up to a very resulting component damage.
high temperature after only a short The scheduled maintenance items listed
period of engine operation and stays hot in scheduled maintenance information are
after the engine is switched off. essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
195
If you use anything other than our parts for When the service engine soon
maintenance replacements or for service indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
of components affecting emission control, system has detected a
such aftermarket parts should be malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
equivalent to our genuine parts in cause the service engine soon indicator to
performance and durability. illuminate. Examples are:
Illumination of the service engine soon 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
indicator, charging system warning light or engine may misfire or run poorly.
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
power could indicate that the emission fuel—the engine may misfire or run
control system is not working properly. poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
An improperly operating or damaged
properly. See Refueling (page 189).
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or 4. Driving through deep water—the
improperly operating exhaust system electrical system may be wet.
inspected and repaired immediately. You can correct these temporary
Do not make any unauthorized changes to malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
owners and anyone who manufactures, fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades out. After three driving cycles without these
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles or any other temporary malfunctions
are not permitted to intentionally remove present, the service engine soon indicator
an emission control device or prevent it should stay off the next time you start the
from working. Information about your engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle engine startup followed by mixed city and
Emission Control Information Decal highway driving. You do not require
located on or near the engine. This decal additional vehicle service.
also lists engine displacement. If the service engine soon indicator remains
Please consult your warranty information on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
for complete details. available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
Your vehicle has a computer known as the soon indicator on can result in increased
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
monitors the engine’s emission control engine and transmission smoothness and
system. The system protects the lead to more costly repairs.
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
196
Readiness for Inspection and 1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an

Maintenance (I/M) Testing expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
Some state and provincial and local least four 30-second idle periods.
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs 2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
to inspect the emission control equipment eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this start the vehicle and complete the
inspection could prevent you from getting above driving cycle. The vehicle must
a vehicle registration. warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
If the service engine soon off the vehicle until the above driving
indicator is on or the bulb does cycle is complete.
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if driving cycle.
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly, for example, the bulb SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
does not work, or if the OBD-II system has
determined that some of the emission REDUCTANT SYSTEM - DIESEL
control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is not Your vehicle may have a selective catalytic
ready for I/M testing. reduction system. The system helps reduce
emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from
If you have just serviced the vehicle’s the exhaust system. The system
engine or transmission or the battery has automatically injects diesel exhaust fluid
recently run down or you have replaced it, into the exhaust system to enable correct
the OBD-II system may indicate that the selective catalytic reduction system
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To function.
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on Note: Selective catalytic reduction systems
position for 15 seconds without cranking are not fitted to vehicles in markets where
the engine. If the service engine soon only high-sulfur diesel fuel is available.
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level
the service engine soon indicator stays on In order for the system to operate correctly
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid
for I/M testing. level.
The OBD-II system checks the emission A warning message appears in the
control system during normal driving. A information display when the diesel
complete check may take several days. exhaust fluid level is low. If a warning
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, message appears, refill the diesel exhaust
you can perform the following driving cycle fluid tank as soon as possible. See
consisting of mixed city and highway Information Messages (page 121).
driving:
197
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid

Tank
WARNING: Keep diesel exhaust

fluid out of reach of children. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In
case of contact with your eyes, flush
immediately with water and get prompt
medical attention. In case of contact
with your skin, clean immediately with
soap and water. If you swallow any
diesel exhaust fluid, drink plenty of
water, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Only refill the diesel

exhaust fluid tank in a well ventilated
area. When you remove the diesel
exhaust fluid tank filler cap or a diesel
exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia
vapors may escape. Ammonia vapors
can be irritating to skin, eyes and mucous
membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapors
can cause burning to the eyes, throat and
nose and cause coughing and watery
eyes. E308416
The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue

filler cap. The tank is behind the left-hand
front wheel. Fill the tank using a fluid pump
at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a
diesel exhaust fluid container. We
recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust
fluid. See Engine Oil Capacity and
E163354
198
Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is 4. Return the container to the vertical
certified by the American Petroleum position slightly below the diesel
Institute (API). Non-certified diesel exhaust exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid
fluid use can cause damage not covered remaining in the spout to drain back in
by the vehicle Warranty. to the container.
Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the 5. Remove the spout from the diesel
fuel tank. This can cause damage not exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the
covered by the vehicle Warranty. diesel exhaust fluid tank cap.
You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at 6. Remove the spout from the diesel
an authorized dealer, most highway truck exhaust fluid container and replace the
stops or you can contact roadside cap.
assistance for help in finding a retailer that Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in
sells diesel exhaust fluid. In addition, there the container retain it for later use. The
is a government website to help you find spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with
the nearest location to purchase diesel clean water prior to storage. Do not use the
exhaust fluid: diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
http://www.discoverdef.com. fluid.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in
Using a Fuel Station Pump Cold Climates
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the
a nozzle is similar to fuel fill. The nozzle ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
shuts off automatically when the tank is Your vehicle has a preheating system
full. Do not continue to fill the tank as this which allows diesel exhaust fluid to
could cause spilling or overflow, potentially operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not
damaging the tank. use your vehicle for an extended period
when the ambient temperature is below
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may
Using a Container freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid
The following procedure applies to freezes it may damage the tank. This is not
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar covered by the vehicle warranty.
fluid containers. Always follow the
manufacturer's instructions. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning
Messages and Vehicle Operations
1. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap. Place the spout on to
the container and tighten it until you WARNING: Diesel exhaust fluid
feel a strong resistance. must be refilled when low or replaced
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank when contaminated or your vehicle
filler cap. speed becomes limited to 50 mph
3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until (80 km/h). In these conditions, drive with
the seal on the spout seats on to the caution and refill diesel exhaust fluid
filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank. immediately. If the diesel exhaust fluid
When the tank is full the fluid stops becomes empty or contaminated and
flowing automatically. fluid is not replaced, your vehicle
199
becomes limited to engine idle only once Continued driving without refilling results
stopped. In these conditions, be cautious in the following actions as required by the
where you stop your vehicle because you California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
may not be able to drive long distances the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
or maintain highway speeds until you (EPA):
refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid. • Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
WARNING: Tampering with or Prior to this occurring a message
disabling the selective catalytic appears in the information display.
reduction system results in severe • Further vehicle operation without
vehicle performance limitation including refilling the diesel exhaust fluid tank
eventual speed limiting to 5 mph causes the engine to enter an idle-only
(8 km/h). condition. This only occurs upon vehicle
refueling or at an extended idle. A
The information display shows a series of message indicates the required actions
messages about the amount of diesel to resume normal operation. It is
exhaust fluid available. A systems check required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal
displays messages indicating the amount (3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the
of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays tank to exit the idle-only condition, but
a warning message indicating the your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting
approximate distance remaining as the mode until you refill the tank
fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears completely.
empty. See Information Messages
(page 121). Note: For either vehicle speed limiting or
idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation
As the diesel exhaust fluid level resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust
nears empty, the warning fluid tank.
E163176 symbol displays and a series of
tones and messages starting at 500 mi Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid
(800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust tank from empty, there may be a short delay
fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and before detecting the increased level of fluid.
messages continue until you refill the The increased level detection must occur
diesel exhaust fluid tank. before your vehicle returns to full power.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines

and Information
• Use only diesel exhaust fluid that
carries the American Petroleum
Institute (API) certified diesel exhaust
fluid trademark or ISO 22241.
• Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
diesel fuel tank.
• Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
• Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive.
• Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid
container once it is emptied.
200
• Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on Typical Diesel Exhaust Fluid Usage
painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic When Using the Power Take Off (PTO)
components. Immediately wipe away
any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled Continuous PTO use—Minimal PTO use
with a damp cloth and water. If it has
already crystallized, use warm water 0–7,800 mi (0–12,550 km)
and a sponge.
• Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct Contaminated Diesel Exhaust
sunlight and in temperatures between Fluid or Inoperative Selective
23°F (-5°C) and 68°F (20°C). Catalytic Reduction System
• Diesel exhaust fluid freezes below 12°F Selective catalytic reduction systems are
(-11°C). sensitive to contamination of the diesel
• Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the
bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could fluid is important to avoid system
cause damage to interior components malfunctions. If you remove or drain the
or release an ammonia odor inside your diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the
vehicle. same fluid to refill the tank. The system
• Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable, has a sensor to monitor fluid quality.
non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble A warning lamp illuminates and
liquid. a message appears in the
• The system has a diesel exhaust fluid E163176 information display if the system
quality sensor. Dilution of diesel becomes contaminated or inoperative.
exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid
in the SCR system leads to a diesel Continued driving without replacing diesel
exhaust fluid system fault, eventually exhaust fluid or having the selective
leading to the vehicle only operating in catalytic reduction system repaired results
idle-only mode. in the following actions as required by the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
• Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
water or any other liquid.
(EPA):
• An ammonia odor may be smelled
• Within a preset distance to empty,
when the cap is removed or during
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
refill. Refill diesel exhaust fluid in a well
Prior to this occurring a message
ventilated area.
appears in the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
replacing contaminated diesel exhaust
fluid causes the engine to enter an
idle-only condition. This only occurs
upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in
park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for
10 minutes or more and is indicated by
a message in the information display
indicating required actions to resume
normal operation.
201
Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only If your journeys meet one of the following
condition, normal vehicle operation resumes conditions:
when you repair the contaminated system. • You drive only short distances.
To service a contaminated or inoperative
system, see an authorized dealer. • You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER acceleration and deceleration.
(IF EQUIPPED) You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
The filter forms part of the emissions regeneration process:
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
conditions, which you will find at higher
exhaust gas.
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
Regeneration main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
WARNING: Do not park or idle your
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other • Avoid prolonged idling and always
combustible materials. The regeneration observe speed limits and road
process creates very high exhaust gas conditions.
temperatures and the exhaust will • Do not switch the ignition off.
radiate a considerable amount of heat
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
during and after regeneration and after
maintain engine speed between 1500
you have switched the engine off. This is
and 3000 RPM.
a potential fire hazard.
Oxidation Catalytic Converter and
Note: Avoid running out of fuel. Diesel Particulate Filter System (If
Note: During regeneration at low speed or Equipped)
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to high temperatures WARNING: The normal operating
reached during regeneration and is normal. temperature of the exhaust system is
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust very high. Never work around or attempt
sound may be heard during the regeneration to repair any part of the exhaust system
process. until it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle catalytic converter or the diesel
requires periodic regeneration to maintain particulate filter. The diesel oxidation
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry catalytic converter and the diesel
out this process automatically. particulate filter heat up to very high
temperatures after only a short period
of engine operation and remain hot after
you switch the engine off.
202
Your vehicle has a diesel particulate filter. Passive Regeneration

The diesel particulate filter is an inline filter
in the exhaust system that reduces carbon In passive regeneration, the exhaust
emissions by trapping exhaust particles system temperature and constituents
before they reach the tailpipe. The diesel automatically clean the filter by oxidizing
particulate filter looks similar to a the soot. Cleaning automatically occurs
traditional exhaust catalyst and is part of during normal vehicle operating conditions
the exhaust system under your vehicle. The due to driving patterns.
filter couples to a diesel oxidation catalyst Active Regeneration
that reduces the amount of harmful
exhaust emitted from the tailpipe. As soot Once the diesel particulate filter is full of
gathers in the system, it begins to restrict exhaust particles, the engine control
the filter. The system must periodically module commands the exhaust system to
clean the soot that gathers inside the filter. clean the filter through active regeneration.
This is carried out in two ways, passive Active regeneration requires the engine
regeneration and active regeneration. Both computer to raise the exhaust temperature
methods occur automatically and require to eliminate the particles. During cleaning,
no actions from the driver. During either the particles convert to harmless gasses.
one of these regeneration methods, you Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter
may notice a change in exhaust tone. At continues trapping exhaust particles.
certain times, the information display
The regeneration process operates more
shows various messages related to the
efficiently when you drive your vehicle at
diesel particulate filter. See Information
Messages (page 121). a constant speed above 30 mph
(48 km/h) and at a steady engine speed
Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance for approximately 20 minutes. The
frequency and duration of regeneration
You must properly maintain your vehicle's fluctuates by how you drive your vehicle,
diesel particulate filter in order for it to outside air temperature and altitude. For
function properly. most driving, regeneration frequency varies
Do not disregard maintenance messages from 100–500 mi (160–805 km) between
that appear in the information display. occurrences and each occurrence lasts
Failure to follow the instructions of an 9–35 minutes. You can usually reduce the
information message may degrade vehicle duration of regeneration if you maintain a
performance and could lead to engine constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h).
damage that may not be covered by the When the engine control module detects
vehicle Warranty. that the diesel particulate filter is nearly
Failure to perform active or operator full of particulates and you are not
commanded regeneration when instructed operating your vehicle in a manner to allow
could result in a clogged diesel particulate effective automatic regeneration,
filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills messages appear in the information
beyond the regeneration threshold, your display as a reminder for you to drive your
vehicle disables the ability for active and vehicle in order to clean the diesel
operator commanded regeneration. This particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle
could result in irreversible damage to the in a manner to allow effective automatic
diesel particulate filter requiring regeneration, the information display
replacement that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
203
shows a cleaning exhaust filter message, Operator Commanded Regeneration

which is the normal regeneration process. Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position
You can also choose operator commanded
regeneration to clean the exhaust system
at this point. See Information Messages WARNING: Do not park or idle your
(page 121). vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
If you are not able to drive in a manner that combustible materials. The regeneration
allows effective automatic active process creates very high exhaust gas
regeneration or you choose to perform temperatures and the exhaust will
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter radiate a considerable amount of heat
while at idle, then operator commanded during and after regeneration and after
regeneration would need to be performed. you have switched the engine off. This is
a potential fire hazard.
Operator Commanded Regeneration
(If Equipped) WARNING: Stay clear of the
exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot
If your vehicle is operated with significant exhaust gases can burn you badly.
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short Make sure that the louvers located at the
drive cycles, a drive time is less than 10 - tip of the exhaust are clear of any
15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully obstructions as they are used to introduce
warm up, passive and active regeneration fresh air into the tailpipe to cool the
may not sufficiently clean the diesel exhaust gases as they leave the exhaust
particulate filter system. Operator system.
commanded regeneration allows you to
manually start regeneration of the diesel Before you start operator commanded
particulate filter at idle to clean the filter. regeneration, do the following:
If you are not sure whether your vehicle has • Shift into park (P) and apply the
this feature, contact an authorized dealer. parking brake, on stable, level ground.
• Park your vehicle outside of any
When to Carry Out Operator Commanded
Regeneration structure.
• Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m)
You can use the operator commanded away from any obstructions and away
regeneration feature when a message from materials that can easily combust
appears in the information display and you or melt, for example paper, leaves,
are not able to drive in a manner that petroleum products, fuels, plastics and
allows effective automatic active other dry organic material.
regeneration or if you choose to manually
start the regeneration of the diesel • Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8
particulate filter manually while the vehicle tank of fuel.
is idle. See Information Messages (page • Make sure all fluids are at proper levels.
121).
204
How to Start Operator Commanded If the diesel particulate filter is near or at

Regeneration saturation, a message requesting
permission to initiate filter cleaning
appears in the information display. See
WARNING: Stay clear of the Information Messages (page 121).
exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
exhaust gases can burn you badly. the next prompts regarding exhaust
position required to initiate operator
Note: You cannot use the operator commanded regeneration. Be sure to
commanded regeneration until the diesel understand each prompt. If you are not
particulate filter load percentage has sure what is being asked by each prompt,
reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter contact an authorized dealer. The display
load percentage fluctuates up and down confirms the operation has started and
when driving your vehicle due to active and when it has finished. You can also drive to
passive regenerations. clean the filter.
Note: During the use of operator When the system is at the point
commanded regeneration, you may observe of oversaturation, the service
a light amount of white smoke. This is engine warning lamp illuminates
normal. and a message appears in the information
display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning.
You may not be able to use You must have your vehicle checked as
operator commanded soon as possible.
regeneration if the service engine
soon warning lamp appears in the Once operator commanded regeneration
information display starts, engine speed increases to
approximately 1600 rpm and the cooling
Information Display Procedure fan speed increases. You will hear a
change in audible sound due to engine
Start with your vehicle engine and when it
speed and cooling fan speed increases.
has reached the normal operating
temperature, press the information display It is not necessary to open the hood on the
control button on the steering wheel. See engine compartment. Once operator
Information Messages (page 121). If a commanded regeneration completes, the
message advising that the exhaust filter is engine speed returns to normal idling. The
full appears in the information display, exhaust system remains very hot for
press the OK button as instructed. Answer several minutes even after regeneration is
yes to this prompt and then follow the next complete. Do not reposition the vehicle
prompts regarding the exhaust position over materials that could burn until the
required to initiate operator commanded exhaust system has had sufficient time to
regeneration. Be sure to understand each cool. Depending on the amount of soot
prompt. If you are not sure what is being collected by the diesel particulate filter,
asked by each prompt, contact an ambient temperature and altitude,
authorized dealer. The display confirms operator commanded regeneration lasts
the operation has started and when it has approximately 30 minutes.
finished.
205
Operator Commanded Regeneration Filter Service and Maintenance

with Automatic Regeneration Control
(If Equipped) Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
If your vehicle is operated with significant not removed during the regeneration
stationary operation, low speed drive process. The filter may need to be replaced
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short with a new or remanufactured part at
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
or the vehicle does not fully warm up, Actual mileage varies depending on engine
passive and active regeneration may not and vehicle operating conditions.
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate If filter service is required, the
filter system. You can switch off automatic engine control system warning
regeneration until better driving conditions lamp illuminates in the
are available, for example steady high
speed driving. You can then switch
automatic regeneration back on to clean If there are any issues with the
the diesel particulate filter. diesel particulate filter system,
the engine control system
Switching Automatic Regeneration warning lamp and a service
Control On and Off
engine soon warning lamp
To switch operator commanded illuminate to inform you that
regeneration on and off, use the your vehicle requires service. Have your
information display control on the steering vehicle checked as soon as possible.
wheel. See Information Messages (page
121). Scroll to the exhaust cleaning Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly
message, a check in the box indicates the Maintenance
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled. Aftermarket devices or modifications to
the exhaust system may reduce the
How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator effectiveness of the exhaust system as
Commanded Regeneration well as cause damage to the exhaust
system or engine. This may also degrade
If you need to cancel the operator vehicle performance and could lead to
commanded regeneration, pressing the engine damage that may not be covered
brake, accelerator or switching the engine by the vehicle Warranty.
off stops the procedure. Depending on the
amount of time you allowed the operator
commanded regeneration to operate, soot
may not have had sufficient time to be fully
eliminated, but the exhaust system and
exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut
your vehicle off during operator
commanded regeneration, you may notice
turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence
caused by shutting off a diesel engine
during boosted operation and is considered
normal.
206
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:

1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
WARNING: Apply the parking preferred gear.
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before 3. When you have finished driving, come
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow to a complete stop.
this instruction could result in personal 4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
injury or death. latch it in park (P).
The instrument cluster displays the current
WARNING: When your vehicle is
gear.
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to Park (P)
personal injury, death or property This position locks the transmission and
damage. prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of Reverse (R)

park (P) unless the intelligent access key is With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
inside your vehicle. vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
Understanding the Shift Positions out of reverse (R).
of Your Automatic Transmission
6-Speed Transmissions Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle and it is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The drive function
E163183 allows automatic upshifts and downshifts
through the full range of gears.
10-Speed Transmissions
Manual (M)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the
driver can change gears up or down as
preferred. By moving the gearshift lever
from drive position drive (D) to manual
(M), you now have control of selecting the
gear you prefer using buttons on the shift
lever.
E308145
207
Transmission
To return to the normal drive (D) position, To prevent the engine from running at too
move the shift lever from manual (M) to low an RPM, which may cause it to stall,
drive (D). SelectShift still makes some downshifts
for you if it determines that you have not
The transmission operates through the full
downshifted in time. Although SelectShift
range of gears.
makes some downshifts for you, it still
Forced downshifts allows you to downshift at any time if the
SelectShift determines that damage to
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul the engine cannot occur from over-revving.
feature on or off.
SelectShift does not upshift, even if the
• Press the accelerator to the floor. engine is approaching the RPM limit. Shift
• Allows transmission to select an it manually by pressing the + button.
appropriate gear. Note: Engine damage could occur if you
Understanding Your SelectShift maintain excessive engine revving without
Automatic™ Transmission shifting.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes:
• Progressive Range Selection.
• Manual (M).
Progressive Range Selection - PRS
E249567
Note: When pressing the button on the

gearshift lever, you can cycle through the
available drive modes. See Drive Control
(page 268).
Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic™
E312894
transmission gearshift lever. The
SelectShift Automatic transmission gives Progressive Range Selection gives you the
you the ability to change gears up or down ability to lockout gears from the automatic
without a clutch. shifting range. This could provide you with
an improved driving experience, for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep slope.
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The instrument
cluster indicates the available and selected
gears.
208
Transmission
All available gears display with the current Manual (M)

gear indicated. Press the – button again to
lock out gears beginning with the highest Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
gear, for example, press the – button twice (M) position allows you to manually select
to lock out 10th and 9th gears. Only the the gear you prefer. Only the current gear
available gears display, and the displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift
transmission shifts between the available lever to manually select gears. Press the
gears. Press the + button to unlock gears + button to upshift or the – button to
to allow the transmission to shift to higher downshift. Return the transmission to a
gears. The transmission shifts within the different gearshift position to deactivate
gear range you select. manual control.
Recommended shift speeds

Upshift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when Accelerating (Recom- 6-Speed Transmissions

mended for Best Fuel Economy)
Shift from: Gasoline Engines

1-2 8 mph (13 km/h)
2-3 16 mph (26 km/h)
3-4 22 mph (35 km/h)
4-5 35 mph (56 km/h)
5-6 44 mph (71 km/h)
Upshifts when Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy) 10-Speed
Shift from: Gasoline engines Diesel engines

1-2 7 mph (11 km/h) 10 mph (16 km/h)
2-3 10 mph (16 km/h) 15 mph (24 km/h)
3-4 17 mph (27 km/h) 19 mph (31 km/h)
4-5 20 mph (32 km/h) 22 mph (35 km/h)
5-6 23 mph (37 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h)
6-7 29 mph (47 km/h) 31 mph (50 km/h)
209
Transmission
Upshifts when Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy) 10-Speed
7-8 34 mph (55 km/h) 36 mph (58 km/h)

8-9 44 mph (71 km/h) 45 mph (72 km/h)
9 - 10 47 mph (76 km/h) 49 mph (79 km/h)
Automatic Transmission Adaptive

Learning WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning
This feature's design is to increase lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
durability and provide consistent shift feel may not be working properly. Have your
over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle vehicle checked as soon as possible.
or transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is normal and Note: Do not drive your vehicle until you
does not affect function or durability of the verify that the brake lamps are working.
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
Your vehicle comes with brake-shift
learning process fully updates transmission
interlock that prevents the gearshift lever
operation. Additionally, whenever you
from moving from park (P) when you
disconnect the battery or install a new
switch the ignition on but have not pressed
battery, the system must relearn the
the brake pedal.
strategy.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
Neutral Idle with F350, F450, F550 of the park (P) position when the ignition
and F600 Chassis Cab Vehicles is on and the brake pedal pressed, a
malfunction could have occurred. It is
Your transmission could reduce the load possible that a fuse has blown, or your
on the engine when the vehicle stops, and vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
the gear selector is in drive (D) to reduce properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
fuel consumption and emissions. The (page 339).
transmission resumes operation when you
release the brake. This feature activates If you do not have a blown fuse and the
when the transmission is sufficiently brake lamps are working properly, the
warmed, and the vehicle is on a level slope. following procedure allows you to move
the gearshift lever from park (P):
Brake-Shift Interlock 1. Apply the parking brake. Switch the
ignition key to 1 - 0, then remove the
key.
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the 2. Move the steering column to the full
transmission out of park (P) which down and full rearward position,
means your vehicle can roll freely. To toward the driver seat.
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, 3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
always fully apply the parking brake prior
to doing this procedure. Use wheels
chocks if appropriate.
210
Transmission
4. Place your fingers into the hole where

you removed the gearshift lever boot
and pull the top half of the shroud up
and forward to separate it from the
lower half of the shroud. There is a
hinge at the forward edge of the top
shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud
upward on the hinge point, then pull
straight rearward toward the driver
seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the E163186
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column. 9. Start your vehicle.
Perform steps 4 through 8 in reverse order
to get the shroud back together, making
sure to engage the hinge pivots between
the upper and lower halves of the shroud.
Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as you rotate the halves together.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud

or Snow
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, you
can rock it out by shifting between forward
E163185
and reverse gears, stopping between shifts
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
7. Pull the lock lever into the fully accelerator in each gear.
unlocked position and remove the Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
lower shroud cover by pulling the lever is not at normal operating temperature or
handle through the slot in the cover. damage to the transmission could occur.
8. Apply the brake. Gently lift the override
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
disk and move the gearshift lever into
than a minute or damage to the
neutral (N).
transmission and tires could occur, or the
engine could overheat.
211
Transmission
POWER TAKE-OFF (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: Use of auxiliary equipment that
exceeds the maximum Power Take-Off
(PTO) load specified in our Truck Body
Builders Layout Book can adversely affect
the performance of the powertrain system.
Refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off,
or PTO, is often added to the engine or
transmission to operate utility equipment.
Examples include a wheel-lift for tow
trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire
service, and pumping fluids. PTO
applications draw auxiliary horsepower
from the powertrain, often while the
vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there
is limited cooling air flow through the
radiator and around the vehicle that
normally occurs when a vehicle is moving.
The aftermarket PTO system installer,
having the most knowledge of the final
application, is responsible for determining
whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and
alerting the user to the safe and proper
operation.
Split Shaft Capability (If Equipped)

Our Super Duty vehicles are approved for
use as a stationary, including split shaft
capability with 6.7L diesel only, or mobile
power source, within limits and operating
guidelines detailed in our Truck Body
Builders Layout Book. For additional
information, visit www.fordbbas.com.
212
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Note: For important information regarding LOCK
the safe operation of this type of vehicle,

see General Information in the Wheels and
Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may A U TO
damage drive components. 4X4 mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these E339076
surfaces may produce some noise, such as
occasional clunks, but will not damage drive For proper operation, make sure that each
components. hub is fully engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both
Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the set to LOCK or both set to AUTO). To
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), engage LOCK, turn the hub locks
the 4WD system will not perform a shift. completely clockwise; to engage AUTO,
This is normal and should be no reason for turn the hub locks completely
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 counterclockwise.
Low) for proper operation.
The ESOF 4WD system:
Note: You can switch on and switch off the
electronic locking differential by pulling the • Provides 4x4 High engagement and
4WD control (4WD vehicles) or turning the disengagement while the vehicle is
electronic locking differential control (2WD moving.
vehicles). See Electronic Locking • Is operated by a rotary control located
Differential (page 221). on the instrument panel that allows
you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly operation.
(ESOF) 4WD system (If Equipped) • Uses auto-manual hub locks that can
be engaged and disengaged
Note: If 4X4 Low is selected while the
automatically based on the 4x4 mode
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
selected.
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for • Will increase fuel economy when used
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 in the hub lock's recommended AUTO
Low) for proper system operation. mode.
Note: Auto-manual hub locks can be 4WD Indicator Lights
manually locked by rotating the hub lock
control from AUTO to LOCK. Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.
213
4X2 4H (4X4 HIGH)

Momentarily illuminates when Provides mechanically locked four-wheel
2H is selected. drive power to both the front and rear
E181778 wheels for use in off-road or winter
conditions such as deep snow, sand or
4X4 HIGH mud. This mode is not for use on dry
Continuously illuminates when pavement.
4H is selected.
E181779 4L (4X4 LOW)
4X4 LOW Provides mechanically locked four-wheel

drive power to both the front and rear
Continuously illuminates when wheels for use on low traction surfaces,
4L is selected. but does so with additional gearing for
E181780 increased torque multiplication. Intended
only for off-road applications such as deep
CHECK 4X4 sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy
Displays when a 4X4 fault is objects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage while
present. your vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
Using the Electronic Shift on the from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.
Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
Shifting Between System Modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal when a shift in progress message
displays improves engagement or
disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or when applying
the accelerator pedal.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for
E191851 use on dry pavement.
2H (4X2) You can move the control from 2H or 4H

at a stop or while driving. The information
For general on-road driving. Sends power display may display a message indicating
to the rear wheels only and should be used a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
for street and highway driving. Provides complete the message center will then
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at display the system mode selected.
high speeds.
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
214
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use • You can now perform a shift out of 4x4
on dry pavement. low.
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph • Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4x4
(5 km/h) or less. low) as described previously for proper
operation of 4x4 low in this procedure.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD control to the preferred Operating 4WD Vehicles with
position. Spare or Mismatched Tires
The information display will display a On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in the spare tire can affect the 4X4 system.
progress. The information display will then If there is a significant difference between
display the system mode selected. If any the size of the spare tire and the remaining
of the above shift conditions are not met, tires, you may have limited four-wheel
the shift will not occur and the information drive functionality.
display will display information guiding the
driver through the proper shifting When driving with the full-size, dissimilar
procedures. spare wheel and tire assembly, we
recommend that you do not:
If a message in the information display
shows a Shift Delayed Pull Forward • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a 4WD
message, a transfer case gear tooth mode turned on.
blockage is present. To alleviate this • Turn on a 4WD mode unless the
condition, place the transmission in a vehicle is stationary.
forward gear, move the vehicle forward • Use a 4WD mode on dry pavement.
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral to allow the When driving with the full-size, dissimilar
transfer case to complete the range shift. spare wheel and tire assembly, you may
have limited 4WD functionality, especially
Entering and Exiting Rock Crawl when driving in a mechanically locked 4WD
Mode with Tremor Package (If mode. You may experience the following:
Equipped) • Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
E225315 locked 4WD mode.
• To enter rock crawl, your vehicle must Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
be in 4x4 low. assembly may lead to impairment of the
• Press the drive mode button on the following:
shifter column to bring up the
• Comfort and noise.
information display and select rock
crawl mode. • Winter weather driving capability.
• With the switch in 4x4 low position, • Wet driving capability.
press rock crawl mode again to • Four-wheel drive capability.
deactivate it.
215
How Your Vehicle Differs from Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Other Vehicles Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel the vehicle is moving can cause some
drive vehicles) handle differently than momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
vehicles with a lower center of gravity This is the front drivetrain coming up to
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, speed and the automatic locking hubs
excessive speed and abrupt steering in engaging and is not cause for concern.
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously Note: Your vehicle may come with a front
increases the risk of losing control of your air dam that can become damaged (due to
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury reduced ground clearance) when taking your
and death. vehicle off-road. This air dam can be taken
off by removing 15 bolts.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
higher to allow it to travel over rough and rough terrain and have operating
terrain without getting hung up or characteristics that are somewhat
damaging underbody components. different from conventional vehicles, both
The differences that make your vehicle so on and off the road.
versatile also make it handle differently Power is supplied to all four wheels
than an ordinary passenger car. through a transfer case. On four-wheel
Maintain steering wheel control at all drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you
times, especially in rough terrain. Since to select 4WD when necessary.
sudden changes in terrain can result in Information on transfer case operation and
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure shifting procedures can be found in this
you grip the steering wheel from the chapter. Information on transfer case
outside. Do not grip the spokes. maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance chapter. You should become
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
thoroughly familiar with this information
from concealed objects such as rocks and
before you operate your vehicle.
stumps.
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
You should either know the terrain or
mode) uses all four wheels to power the
examine maps of the area before driving.
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
Map out your route before driving in the
you to drive over terrain and road
area. To maintain steering and braking
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
control of your vehicle, you must have all
drive vehicle cannot.
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
216
Basic Operating Principles pedal when changes in vehicle speed are

required. Avoid abrupt steering,
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which acceleration and braking. This could result
can affect the normal steering in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
characteristics of your vehicle. of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces all available road surface to bring your
made slippery by loose sand, water, vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
• Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard skidding the tires and do not attempt any
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce sharp steering wheel movements.
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4H or If your vehicle goes from one type of
4L modes are only intended for surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
consistently slippery or loose surfaces. gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
If Your Vehicle Leaves the Road steering, acceleration or braking).
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your Sand

vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been When driving over sand, try to keep all four
reduced, ease your vehicle back onto the wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
road. Do not turn the steering wheel Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
sharply while returning your vehicle to the to a lower gear and drive steadily through
road. the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
returning to the road. You may lose control under high outside temperatures, use a low
if you do not slow down or if you turn the gear when possible. Low gear operation
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
damage to your vehicle rather than causes vehicle momentum to work against
attempt a sudden return to the road which you and your vehicle could become stuck
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways to the point that assistance may be
out of control or roll over. Remember, your required from another vehicle. Remember,
safety and the safety of others should be you may be able to back out the way you
your primary concern. came if you proceed with caution.
Emergency Maneuvers Mud and Water
In an unavoidable emergency situation Mud

where a sudden sharp turn must be made, Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
remember to avoid over-driving your speed or direction when you are driving in
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
emergency). Excessive steering can result does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth until you regain control of your vehicle.
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
217
After driving through mud, clean off residue If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. around because this could cause vehicle
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that safe location.
could damage drive components.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
Water climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
If you must drive through high water, drive resulting in loss of vehicle control.
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may E143949
damage the transmission. If the front or rear

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
axle is submerged in water, the axle
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
brake application and brake overheating.
should be checked and changed if
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
necessary.
overdrive or move the transmission
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
Although natural obstacles may make it braking as you could lose control. The front
necessary to travel diagonally up or down wheels have to be turning in order to steer
a hill or steep incline, you should always your vehicle.
try to drive straight up or straight down.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping brakes.
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine Driving on Snow and Ice
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do WARNING: If you are driving in
not drive in reverse over a hill without the slippery conditions that require tire
aid of an observer. chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start allow for longer stopping distances and
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
218
chances of a loss of vehicle control If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
which can lead to serious injury or death. it may be rocked out by shifting between
If the rear end of your vehicle slides while forward and reverse gears, stopping
cornering, steer in the direction of the between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
slide until you regain control of your lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
vehicle. Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause damage to the transmission may occur.
transmission damage. Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages than a minute, damage to the transmission
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and and tires may occur or the engine may
ice but can skid like any other vehicle. overheat.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel Parking
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
Avoid sudden applications of power and fully released, but the brake warning
quick changes of direction on snow and lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and may not be working properly. Have your
steadily when starting from a full stop. vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate WARNING: Apply the parking
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in brake, shift into park (P), switch the
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as ignition off and remove the key before
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
become overconfident as to road this instruction could result in personal
conditions. injury or death.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
between you and other vehicles for
the transfer case is in the neutral (N)
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
position, the engine and transmission are
consider using one of the lower gears. In
disconnected from the rest of the driveline.
emergency stopping situations, apply the
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
the automatic transmission is in park (P)
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
or the manual transmission is in gear. Do
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 225).
not leave the vehicle unattended with the
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or transfer case in the neutral (N) position.
Snow Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels

at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
219
Maintenance and Modifications

The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
220
Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL • The electronic locking differential may

not engage if you press your
(IF EQUIPPED) accelerator pedal during an
engagement attempt. A message may
This axle provides added traction on display in the instrument display
slippery surfaces, particularly when one guiding you to release the accelerator
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under pedal.
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle • In 4x2, and 4x4 High modes, the
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle electronic locking differential will
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration automatically disengage at speeds
during tight turns with low vehicle speed. above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will
This is normal behavior and indicates the automatically reengage at speeds
axle is working. below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking
ELECTRONIC LOCKING differential will automatically
DIFFERENTIAL (IF EQUIPPED) disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically
Note: The electronic locking differential is reengage at speeds below 56 mph
for off-road use only and is not for use on (90 km/h).
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking • The AdvanceTrac system has the
differential on dry pavement will result in ability to take over control of the
increased tire wear, noise and vibration. electronic locking differential and
disable it during driving maneuvers
The electronic locking differential is a
when necessary.
device housed in the rear axle that allows
both rear wheels to turn at the same When you switch the system on, if you do
speed. The electronic locking differential not meet the required conditions for
can provide additional traction should your electronic locking differential activation,
vehicle become stuck. You can activate the instrument cluster will display the
the differential electronically and shift it appropriate information guiding you
on the fly within the differential operating through the proper activation process.
speed range. The differential is for use in
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition Activating the Electronic Locking
where you need maximum traction. It is Differential
not for use on dry pavement.
Note: Do not use electronic locking
The following conditions will affect the differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
electronic locking differential: Doing so will produce excessive noise,
• The electronic locking differential will vibration and increase tire wear.
not engage if your vehicle speed is Note: If the electronic locking differential
above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2, or 4x4 has difficulty disengaging, release the
High modes. accelerator pedal and turn the steering
• The electronic locking differential will wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4
Low.
221
Rear Axle
For 4WD vehicles • The system has malfunctioned and is

accompanied by a message in the
information display. See your
authorized Ford dealer for assistance.
• The vehicle is experiencing an anti-lock
brake activation.
Operating ELD With a Spare or

Mismatched Tires
On vehicles with an ELD, the size of the
spare tire can affect performance of the
system. If there is a significant difference
between the two rear tires, you may have
E227398
limited ELD functionality. If the electronic
Pull the 4WD control knob toward you. locking differential has difficulty
disengaging, release the accelerator pedal
For 2WD vehicles and turn the steering wheel in the opposite
direction when rolling. We recommend
engaging and disengaging the ELD at a
stop when you mount a spare on the rear
axle.
E183740
Turn the control to ON.

Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
E163170 display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the

indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
222
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
control during emergency stops by keeping
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
the brakes from locking.
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the This lamp momentarily
system checked by an authorized dealer. If illuminates when you switch the
your vehicle has continuous vibration or ignition on. If the light does not
shudder in the steering wheel while braking, illuminate during start up, remains on or
have it checked by an authorized dealer. flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
wheels, even under normal driving
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to See Warning Lamps and Indicators
brake noise. (page 105).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or If the lamp remains illuminated
standing water to dry the brakes. after you release the parking
E270480
brake, have the system checked
Brake Over Accelerator by an authorized dealer.
In the event the accelerator pedal It also illuminates momentarily
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady when you switch the ignition on
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. not illuminate when you switch the ignition
If you experience this condition, apply the on, or begins to flash at any time, have the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe system checked by an authorized dealer.
stop. Shift the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking Diesel Engine Exhaust Braking (If
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for Equipped)
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer. WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
Brake Assist when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
Brake assist detects when you brake the loss of control of your vehicle.
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides WARNING: Do not use diesel
maximum braking efficiency as long as you engine exhaust braking when the road
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping surface is slippery. Failure to follow this
distances in critical situations. instruction could result in the loss of
223
Brakes
This feature increases engine braking at Automatic Engine Braking

higher engine speeds to provide better
grade descent control with less brake and 1. Press the button twice to switch on
transmission wear and tear. automatic engine braking.
Note: Use this when driving downhill and 2. Release the accelerator or brake pedal.
carrying heavy loads or trailering. The system remembers your vehicle
speed.
Benefits of engine braking are:
Note: This feature offers smoother, less
• Lower brake temperature. aggressive engine braking during downhill
• Reduced brake fade. descents. It may not apply braking if the
vehicle speed is not increasing, although it
• Longer brake life.
will apply full engine braking force when
• Improved driving and trailering control. needed to prevent acceleration. The system
Press the button on the switch automatically activates the engine brake
bank next to the audio unit to and, if necessary, downshifts the
E171217
switch the system on or off. transmission to lower gears to not exceed
your vehicle's set speed when the brake or
There are two engine brake modes, manual accelerator were last released.
and automatic.
Warning Lamp Conditions
Manual Engine Braking • Illuminates when this feature is
1. Press the button to switch on manual switched on and the system is
engine braking. operating properly. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 105).
2. Release the accelerator pedal to
maximize engine braking. • Flashes when the engine brake is
disabled due to a fault or the engine
3. Apply the brakes. The transmission does not meet the required braking
downshifts to lower gears. conditions.
Note: The engine braking feature only • Does not illuminate when the switch
functions when you release the accelerator. or indicator is faulty.
Note: You can shift the transmission to You can switch the system on at anytime.
lower gears with progressive range selection The system becomes active once the
(PRS) or manual shifting independent of braking conditions are met.
pressing the brakes.
Note: You can also use manual engine Braking Conditions
braking with cruise control to improve grade • Your vehicle is in a forward gear.
descent control.
• The engine speed is above about 1500
Note: If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise RPM.
Control, the speed control system uses the
• Your foot is off the accelerator.
selected engine brake mode, transmission
gears, and brakes to maintain the set speed
and distance to the vehicle being followed.
224
Brakes
You can use this feature with tow/haul or To release, pull the brake release lever
progressive range selection to provide located at the lower left side of the
further increased engine braking. The instrument panel.
transmission automatically upshifts to If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
prevent the engine from entering the red or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
zone on the tachometer. See Automatic pedal down, then set the parking brake.
Transmission (page 207). There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
The anti-lock brake system does not
wheels if required. If the parking brake
eliminate the risks when:
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in parking brake may need to be serviced or
front of you. the vehicle may be overloaded.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast. HILL START ASSIST
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal could pulse and may travel further. WARNING: The system does not
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You replace the parking brake. When you
may also hear a noise from the system. This leave your vehicle, always apply the
is normal. parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in

PARKING BRAKE your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
WARNING: Always set the parking system and intervening, if required.
brake fully and make sure the Failure to take care may result in the loss
transmission is placed in park (P). Failure of control of your vehicle, serious
to set the parking brake and engage park personal injury or death.
could result in vehicle roll-away, property
damage or bodily injury. Turn the ignition WARNING: The system will turn
to the lock position and remove the key off if a malfunction is apparent or if you
whenever you leave your vehicle. rev the engine excessively. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
Apply the parking brake whenever your your vehicle, serious personal injury or
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal death.
downward to set the parking brake. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument The system makes it easier to pull away
cluster will illuminate and remains when your vehicle is on a slope without the
illuminated until the parking brake is need to use the parking brake.
released.
225
Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle Switching the System On and Off
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake Vehicles with Manual Transmission
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
You can switch this feature on or off in the
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
information display. The system
The system releases the brakes
remembers the last setting when you start
automatically once the engine has
your vehicle.
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp, You cannot turn the system on or off.
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into When you switch the ignition on, the
a parking space. system automatically turns on.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist

1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
226
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Switching the System Off

When you switch the system off or on, a
The traction control system helps avoid
message appears in the information
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
display showing system status.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
Use the traction and stability control
applies the brakes to individual wheels
switch on the instrument panel to switch
and, when needed, reduces engine power
the system off or on.
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, The switch illuminates when traction
the system reduces engine power in order control is off.
to increase traction. When you place your vehicle into
four-wheel drive low mode the traction
USING TRACTION CONTROL control disables. Traction control resumes
full operation when you put your vehicle
back into two-wheel drive mode.
WARNING: The stability and System Indicator Lights and
traction control light illuminates steadily Messages
if the system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction The stability and traction control
control system using the information light:
E225465
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light • Temporarily illuminates on engine
is still illuminating steadily, have the start-up.
system serviced by an authorized dealer • Flashes when a driving condition
immediately. Operating your vehicle with activates either of the systems.
the traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle • Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury of the systems.
and death. The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
E225466
The system automatically turns on each on engine start-up and stays on
time you switch the ignition on. when you switch the traction control
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, system off.
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Note: For additional information on the
traction and stability control systems. See
Using Stability Control (page 229).
227
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a fault occurs in either the stability

control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
WARNING: Vehicle modifications • The stability and traction control light
involving braking system, aftermarket illuminates steadily.
roof racks, suspension, steering system, • The stability control and traction
tire construction and wheel and tire size control systems do not enhance your
may change the handling characteristics vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
of your vehicle and may adversely affect the wheels.
the performance of the electronic • The Adaptive Steering system (if
stability control system. In addition, equipped) automatically changes the
installing any stereo loudspeakers may steering function to a fixed steering
interfere with and adversely affect the ratio. See Adjusting the Steering
electronic stability control system. Install Wheel (page 81).
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as
far as possible from the front center If a driving condition activates either the
console, the tunnel, and the front seats stability control or the traction control
in order to minimize the risk of interfering system you may experience the following
with the electronic stability control conditions:
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of • The stability and traction control light
the electronic stability control system flashes.
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal • Your vehicle slows down.
injury and death. • Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
laws of physics. It’s always possible to • If the driving condition is severe and
lose control of a vehicle due to your foot is not on the brake, the brake
inappropriate driver input for the pedal may move as the system applies
conditions. Aggressive driving on any higher brake force.
road condition can cause you to lose The stability control system has several
control of your vehicle increasing the risk features built into it to help you maintain
of personal injury or property damage. control of your vehicle:
Activation of the electronic stability
control system is an indication that at Electronic Stability Control
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
reduce the operator’s ability to control to prevent skids or lateral slides by
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss applying brakes to one or more of the
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, wheels individually and, if necessary,
personal injury and death. If your reducing engine power.
electronic stability control system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each

time you switch the ignition on.
228
Stability Control
Roll Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which Control™ (RSC®)
it changes by applying the brakes to one The system turns on each time you switch
or more wheels individually. the ignition on.
Traction Control You can switch the electronic stability
control and roll stability control portions
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability of the system off.
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See When you shift the transmission into
Using Traction Control (page 227). reverse (R) the systems disable.
Use the traction and stability
control switch on the instrument
E130458 panel to switch the systems off
or on.
You can independently switch off the

traction control portion of the system.
E72903
A Vehicle without stability control

skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
229
Stability Control
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Button func- Stability Roll stability Electronic Traction

tions control light control stability control system
control
Default at start- Illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
up during bulb
check
Button pressed Illuminated Enabled Enabled
1 Disabled
momentarily
Button pressed illuminated
3 Disabled Disabled Disabled
and held for
more than 5
seconds
Double Press Illuminated Enabled Enabled
1
Enabled
2
(Pickup Only)
Button pressed Not illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
again after
deactivation
Transfer case Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled
switched to
4
4WD Low
1
Electronic stability control has reduced sensitivity compared to a fully active system.
2
Traction control has reduced sensitivity compared to a fully active system.
3
Lamp light starts blinking for four seconds after entering the press and hold state.
4
Engaging 4WD Low disables roll stability control, electronic stability control and the
traction control systems.
230
Trail Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS TRAIL CONTROL SETTING THE TRAIL CONTROL

SPEED
WARNING: The system does not Note: The buttons are located on the
control speed in low traction conditions steering wheel.
or extremely steep slopes. The system Drive to your preferred speed.
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive Press button to increase the set
with due care and attention. Failure to current speed.
personal injury. Press button to decrease the set
current speed.
replace the parking brake. When you Note: The indicator changes color.
leave your vehicle, always apply the
You can adjust the set speed in small or
parking brake and shift the transmission
large increments. Press the toggle button
into park (P) for automatic transmission
upward or downward once to adjust the
or first gear for manual transmission.
set speed in small increments. Press and
hold the toggle button upward or
Trail control lets you focus on steering downward to adjust the set speed in large
during low-speed and off-road use by increments.
controlling your vehicle's acceleration and
braking. You can also adjust the set speed by
braking.
You can use trail control under the
following speeds: Note: Pressing the brake pedal does not
switch off the system.
• 20 mph (31 km/h) in two-wheel or
four-wheel drive high range.
• 10 mph (15 km/h) in four-wheel drive CANCELING THE SET SPEED
low range.
Press the button.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse (R).
You may hear a noise from the anti-lock E265298
brake system pump motor when you use

the system. This is normal.
TRAIL CONTROL INDICATORS
SWITCHING TRAIL CONTROL
ON AND OFF E272858
Press the button.

E272858
The system switches off if you press the

button again or exceed 42 mph (68 km/h).
231
Terrain Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION USING HILL DESCENT

CONTROL
WARNING: Hill descent control Press and release the hill
cannot control descent in all surface descent button on the
conditions and circumstances, such as E163957 instrument panel. A light in the
ice or extremely steep grades. Hill cluster illuminates and a tone sounds
descent control is a driver assist system when this feature is activated.
and cannot substitute for good judgment To increase descent speed, press the
by the driver. Failure to do so may result accelerator pedal until the desired speed
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious is reached. To decrease descent speed,
injury. press the brake pedal until the desired
speed is reached.
replace the parking brake. When you Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
leave your vehicle, always apply the the desired descent speed is reached,
parking brake and shift the transmission remove your feet from the pedals and the
into park (P) for automatic transmission chosen vehicle speed is maintained.
or first gear for manual transmission.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may
Hill descent control allows the driver to set be observed during hill descent control
and maintain vehicle speed while operation. This is a normal characteristic of
descending steep grades in various surface the ABS and should be no reason for
conditions. concern.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle Hill Descent Modes
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains When the hill descent control switch is
armed, but descent speed cannot be set pressed and hill descent control is
or maintained. active, the hill descent control telltale
flashes.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
use. The amount of time that the feature When the hill descent control switch is
can remain active before cooling varies pressed and conditions are not correct
with conditions. The system will provide for hill descent activation, the hill
a warning in the message center and a descent control system is enabled and
chime will sound when the system is about the hill descent control telltale is solid.
to disengage for cooling. At this time, A message displays in the information
manually apply the brakes as needed to display.
maintain descent speed. • At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the hill descent control switch is
pressed, the hill descent control
system is enabled, the telltale in the
cluster is not illuminated and a
message is displayed in the information
display.
232
Terrain Control (If Equipped)
Refer to the information displays for

additional hill descent control messages.
See Information Messages (page 121).
233
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: When a trailer is connected to your

vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings.
Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer
WARNING: To help avoid personal is connected to prevent these warnings.
injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
system. off when a MyKey is present. See
Information Messages (page 121).
WARNING: The system may not The sensing system warns the driver of
detect objects with surfaces that absorb obstacles within a certain range of your
reflection. Always drive with due care vehicle. The system turns on automatically
and attention. Failure to take care may whenever you switch the ignition on.
result in a crash.
When receiving a detection warning, the
WARNING: Traffic control systems, radio volume reduces to a predetermined
inclement weather, air brakes, external level. After the warning goes away, the
motors and fans may affect the correct radio volume returns to the previous level.
operation of the sensing system.This The sensing system can be switched off
may cause reduced performance or false through the information display menu or
alerts. from the pop-up message that appears
once you shift the transmission into reverse
WARNING: The system may not (R). See General Information (page 110).
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground. If a fault is present in the system, a warning
display and you cannot switch the system
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
on through the pop-up message. See
around the bumper or fascia may create
Information Messages (page 121).
false beeps. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. The rear sensors are only active when the
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the transmission is in reverse (R). As your
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors rate of the audible warning increases.
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be When the obstacle is less than 11.81 in
affected. Do not clean the sensors with (30 cm) away, the warning sounds
sharp objects. continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to 11.81 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned bumper, the tone sounds for only two
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered seconds. Once the system detects an
causing inaccurate measurement of object approaching, the warning sounds
obstacles or false alarms. See your again.
authorized technician.
234
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera

system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use
it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close

to either corner of the bumper or under
E231381 the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
The coverage area is up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
camera system.
the rear bumper. The coverage area could
decrease at the outer corners of the
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
bumper.
as slow as possible, higher speeds may
The system detects certain objects while limit your reaction time to stop your
the transmission is in reverse (R): vehicle.
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph WARNING: Use caution when the
(5 km/h) or less. tailgate is ajar. If the tailgate is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a video image may be incorrect. All
moving object is approaching the rear guidelines disappear when the tailgate
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph is ajar. Some vehicles may not come
(5 km/h) or less. equipped with guidelines.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving WARNING: Use caution when
object is approaching the rear of your turning camera features on or off when
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph the transmission is not in park (P). Make
(5 km/h). sure your vehicle is not moving.
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your The rear view camera system displays
vehicle is stationary, and the detected what is behind your vehicle when you shift
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away the transmission into reverse (R).
from the bumper. During operation, lines appear in the
display that represents the path of your
Obstacle Distance Indicator vehicle and proximity to objects behind it.
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the display screen. See
Rear View Camera (page 235).
235
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees

what is being towed behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once the trailer tow connector is engaged.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
E223144
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
The rear view camera is located on the camera's view. Clean the lens with a
tailgate. soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
Using the Rear View Camera • The camera is misaligned due to
System damage to the rear of your vehicle.
The system uses three types of guides to Camera Guidelines
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
path of your vehicle when reversing. are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving while reversing Note: The centerline is only available if
in a straight line. This can be helpful Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
when backing into a parking space or Note: Some vehicles may not come
aligning your vehicle with another equipped with guidelines.
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the tailgate is ajar, no rear view camera
features are displayed.
Note: If the image does not turn off while
the transmission is not in reverse (R) and
you are driving over a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), have the system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
236
Parking Aids
Always use caution while reversing.

Objects in the red zone are closest to your
A B C D E vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator
F
E142436
A Active guidelines
B Centerline
C Fixed guideline: Green zone E190459
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone The system will provide an image of your
E Fixed guideline: Red zone vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
F Rear bumper the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an Rear Camera Delay
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, the Selectable settings for this feature are ON
vehicle might deviate from the original and OFF.
intended path.
The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
237
Parking Aids
When shifting the transmission out of • Allows you to see a top-down view of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than the area outside your vehicle, including
park (P), the camera image remains in the the blind spots.
display until: • Provides visibility around your vehicle
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently to you in parking maneuvers such as:
increases. • Centering in a parking space.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P). • Obstacles near vehicle.
• You apply the parking brake on vehicles • Parallel parking.
with a manual transmission.
Camera Views
360 DEGREE CAMERA (IF The camera button is located on
EQUIPPED) the instrument panel. Pressing
E205884 the camera button activates the
system.
WARNING: The 360 degree When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D),
camera system still requires the driver only images from the front cameras are
to use it in conjunction with looking out displayed. Press the camera button to
of the windows, and checking the interior display the front camera image on the
and exterior mirrors for maximum display screen.
coverage.
When in drive (D) at speeds greater than
WARNING: Objects that are close 6 mph (10 km/h), properly equipped
to either corner of the bumper or under vehicles can access two camera views. By
the bumper, might not be seen on the pressing the camera button on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the instrument panel, the rear high view
camera system. camera and auxiliary camera can be
viewed.
WARNING: Use caution when When in reverse (R), only images from the
turning camera features on or off when rear cameras are displayed. When you shift
the transmission is not in park (P). Make into reverse (R), the rear view camera
sure your vehicle is not moving. image automatically shows on the display
screen.
Note: The 360 degree camera system turns
off when your vehicle is in motion at low Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped)
speed, except when in reverse (R).
Additional camera views may be
The 360 degree camera system consists available for vehicles with
E233726
of front, side and rear cameras. The specific features. Press the small
system: camera icon shown on the top left corner
• Allows you to see what is directly in of the display screen to open the camera
front or behind your vehicle. view menu.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
238
Parking Aids
The following camera views can be • Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
accessed in park (P), neutral (N) or drive image from the back of your trailer
(D) when you press the camera button: while reversing.
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the • Trailer Reverse Guidance View:
normal front camera view next to a Provides an image of the rear of your
360 degree camera view. vehicle using the side cameras, useful
• Front Normal View: Provides an when reversing with a trailer. Use the
image of what is directly in front of your arrows at the bottom of the screen to
vehicle. adjust the side camera position. See
Trailer Reversing Aids (page 283).
• Front Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is in front of Keep Out Zone
your vehicle.
• Rear High View: Provides an image
of your truck bed and can be used to
assist you when backing up to align and
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer.
• Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view
image from the back of your trailer
while reversing.
The following camera views can be
accessed when you shift into reverse (R):
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal rear camera view next to a 360 E184448
degree camera view. Press the zoom
(+) button to quickly access Rear The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
Normal View from this screen. yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
indication on the ground of the fully
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
extended outside mirror position.
• Rear Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is behind your Front Camera
vehicle.
• Rear High View: Provides an image
of your truck bed and can be used to WARNING: The front camera
assist you when backing up to align and system still requires the driver to use it
hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer. in conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
239
Parking Aids
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view

while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
Bed View Camera (If Equipped)
E184044
The front video camera, located in the

grille, provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds. To use the front video camera
system, place the transmission in any gear E231402
except reverse (R). An image will display
once the camera enable button is pressed. The bed view camera system is a variant
The area displayed on the screen may vary of the rear view camera that is mounted
according to your vehicle's orientation within the high-mount stop lamp. It is
and/or road condition. designed to display the contents of your
truck bed or assist you when backing up to
Side Camera align and hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck
trailer. The bed view camera is not meant
as an alternative to the rear view camera.
E231401
The side view camera, located in the E233763

outside mirror, provide a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle. It aids The camera view contains a dynamic
you while parking your vehicle, or when guideline to help you locate the center of
parking with a trailer attached. your vehicle. This view can be accessed
while in drive (D) or reverse (R).
240
Parking Aids
Auxiliary Camera (If Equipped)

Note: The auxiliary camera works with
trailers up to 50 ft (15 m) in length.
Access the auxiliary camera view
E233727 by pressing the button on the
display screen when in reverse
(R).
Access the auxiliary camera while in drive
(D) by pressing the camera button twice.
The auxiliary camera system is a variant

of the rear view camera. It is designed to
display a rear view image from the back of
a trailer while reversing. The auxiliary
camera is not meant as an alternative to
the rear view camera.
241
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL SETTING THE CRUISE

CONTROL SPEED
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: When you are going
Requirements downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed system does not apply the brakes.
is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Drive to the speed you prefer.
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL Press either button to set the
ON AND OFF current speed.
WARNING: Do not use cruise

control on winding roads, in heavy traffic
or when the road surface is slippery. This Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
could result in loss of vehicle control, Note: The indicator changes color in the
serious injury or death. information display.
The cruise controls are on the steering Changing the Set Speed
wheel. See Switching Cruise Control
On and Off (page 242). Press and release the button to
increase the set speed in small
Switching Cruise Control On increments.
Press the button. Press and hold the button to accelerate.

Release the button when you reach your
E265296 preferred speed.
Switching Cruise Control Off Press and release the button to
decrease the set speed in small
Press the button when the increments.
system is in standby mode.
E265297 Press and hold the button to decelerate.
The system also turns off when you switch Release the button when you reach your
the ignition off. preferred speed.
Note: The set speed erases when you Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
switch the system off. accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
242
CANCELING THE SET SPEED

WARNING: Pay close attention to
Press the button, or tap the changing road conditions such as
brake pedal to cancel the set entering or leaving a highway, on roads
E265298
speed. with intersections or roundabouts, roads
Note: The system remembers the set without visible lanes of travel, roads that
speed. are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under WARNING: Do not use the system
the set speed when driving uphill. in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED
Press the button. when towing a trailer that has
aftermarket electronic trailer brake
controls. Failure to follow this instruction
vehicle, personal injury or death.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
Illuminates when you switch the this can affect the normal operation of
system on. the system. Failure to do so may result
E71340 in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE WARNING: The system may not

CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

WARNING: You are responsible for detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does WARNING: The system does not
not relieve you of your responsibility to detect oncoming vehicles in the same
drive with due care and attention. Failure lane.
the loss of control of your vehicle, WARNING: The system is not a
personal injury or death. crash warning or avoidance system.

with a snow plow blade installed.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to

maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
243
The system uses a radar sensor that

projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
Press and release either button.

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E262918
The adaptive cruise controls are on the

steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

On
Press and release the button.
E233874
E265296
A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
The indicator, current gap setting vehicle detected in front of you.
and set speed appear in the
E144529
information display. Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a

vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does
not always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
E233874
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
244
Setting the Gap Distance

WARNING: The system only warns You can decrease or increase the distance
of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. between your vehicle and the vehicle in
In some cases there may be no warning front by pressing the gap control.
or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes
when necessary. Failure to follow this Press and release to decrease
instruction could result in personal injury the gap distance.
E263697
or death.
Press and release to increase the
Note: When you are following a vehicle and gap distance.
E263696
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap E233874
from the vehicle ahead until:
The selected gap appears in the
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates information display as shown by the bars
to a speed above the set speed. in the image.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out Note: The gap setting is time dependent
of the lane you are in. and therefore the distance adjusts with your
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph vehicle speed.
(20 km/h). Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
• You set a new gap distance. appropriate to the driving conditions.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
information display and an indicator
flashes when the system continues to
brake. Take immediate action.
245
Changing the Set Speed

Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Press and release to increase the
Graphic Distance Gap Dynamic set speed in small increments.
Display, Behavior
Bars Indic- Press and release to decrease
ated the set speed in small
Between increments.
Vehicles
Press and hold either button to change the
1 Closest. Sport.
set speed in large increments. Release the
2 Close. Normal. button when you reach your preferred
speed.
3 Medium. Normal.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
4 Far. Comfort. the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
Each time you switch the system on, it information display when the system is
selects the last chosen gap setting. active.
Overriding the Set Speed Canceling the Set Speed

Press and release the button or
tap the brake pedal.
WARNING: If you override the E265298
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, it does not automatically apply The set speed does not erase.
the brakes to maintain a gap from any Note: If you press the clutch pedal (manual
vehicle ahead. transmission only) for an extended period,
this action also cancels the set speed.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance. Resuming the Set Speed
Use the accelerator pedal Press and release the button.
normally to intentionally exceed
E144529
the set speed limit.
When you override the system, the green Your vehicle speed returns to the
indicator light illuminates and the vehicle previously set speed and gap setting. The
image does not appear in the information set speed displays continuously in the
display. information display when the system is
active.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
speed decreases to the set speed, or a the set speed and intend to return to it.
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
246
Automatic Cancellation Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). The Detection Issues
information display indicates low engine
speed, an audible alarm sounds and the
automatic braking releases if the vehicle WARNING: On rare occasions,
drops below this speed. detection issues can occur due to the
Automatic cancellation can also occur road infrastructures, for example bridges,
when: tunnels and safety barriers. In these
cases, the system may brake late or
• The tires lose traction. unexpectedly. At all times, you are
• You apply the parking brake. responsible for controlling your vehicle,
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an supervising the system and intervening,
audible warning sounds and a message if required.
WARNING: If the system
Automatic braking releases.
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow as soon as possible.
Usage
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
You should select a lower gear when the It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
system is active in situations such as a vehicle later than expected in some
prolonged downhill driving on steep situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
grades, for example in mountainous areas. not illuminate if the system does not
The system needs additional engine detect a vehicle in front of you.
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent it from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Note: When towing with adaptive cruise
control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode and
Diesel Engine Brake.
Note: Tow/Haul mode increases the time
gaps and allows more distance for braking.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

Off
Press and release the button
when the system is in standby
E265297 mode, or switch the ignition off.
247
Optimal system performance requires a

clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available

Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E71621
Detection issues can occur:

A When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
B With vehicles that edge into your E243054
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move The camera is mounted on the windshield
fully into your lane. behind the interior mirror.
C There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases, the system may brake late

or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection. E312903
248
A message displays if something obstructs Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
the radar signals from the sensor. The behind a fascia panel.
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
not function when something blocks the
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
sensor.
block the sensor.
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:

Cause Action
The surface of the radar is dirty or Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
obstructed. or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is clean but the Wait a short time. It may take several
message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the Do not use the system in these conditions
radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the Do not use the system in these conditions
road may interfere with the radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
You are in a desert or remote area with no Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
other vehicles and no roadside objects. control.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
The cruise control indicator light

Switching to Normal Cruise replaces the adaptive cruise
Control E71340 control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
WARNING: Normal cruise control does not respond to lead vehicles.
will not brake when your vehicle is Automatic braking remains active to
approaching slower vehicles. Always be maintain set speed.
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary. You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
249
Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED) Note: If you have a blocked camera or

damaged windshield, the system may not
function.
WARNING: You are responsible for Note: The system remembers the last
controlling your vehicle at all times. The setting when you start your vehicle, unless
system is designed to be an aid and does it detects a MyKey™.
not relieve you of your responsibility to Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
drive with due care and attention. Failure activates at speeds above 40 mph
to follow this instruction could result in (64 km/h).
the loss of control of your vehicle,
WARNING: The system may not

function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest

breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles

may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired. E249505
WARNING: In cold and severe The system monitors your driving behavior
weather conditions the system may not using various inputs including the front
function. Rain, snow and spray can all camera sensor.
limit sensor performance. If the system detects reduced driving
alertness below a certain threshold, the
WARNING: The system will not system alerts you using a tone and a
operate if the sensor cannot track the message in the information display.
road lane markings.
Using Driver Alert
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor, Switching the system on and off
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
WARNING: The system may not selecting Settings, Driver Assist and then
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
with a suspension kit not approved by the system monitors your alertness level
us. based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
Note: Keep the windshield free from System Warnings
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice. Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
250
Driving Aids
The warning system is in two stages. At

first the system issues a temporary warning WARNING: The sensor may
that you need to take a rest. This message incorrectly track lane markings as other
only appears for a short time. If the system structures or objects. This can result in
detects further reduction in driving a false or missed warning.
alertness, another warning could be issued
which remains in the information display WARNING: Large contrasts in
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering outside lighting can limit sensor
wheel control to clear the warning. When performance.
active the system runs in the background
and only issues a warning if required. WARNING: The system may not
Resetting the System operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
You can reset the system by either: obstruction.
• Switching the ignition off and on.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening immediate area surrounding the sensor,
and closing the driver door. have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF WARNING: The system may not
EQUIPPED) correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
us.
WARNING: You are responsible for
Note: The system works as long as the
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
camera can detect one lane marking at a
system is designed to be an aid and does
speed above 40 mph (64 km/h).
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure Note: The system may not function with a
to follow this instruction could result in blocked camera, or if the windshield is
the loss of control of your vehicle, damaged or dirty.
WARNING: Always drive with due

care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on
your vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe

weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not E249505

operate if the sensor cannot track the
road lane markings.
251
Driving Aids
When you switch the system on and it

detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. The system provides an audible
warning and by vibrating the steering
wheel.
Switching the System On and Off

Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey E165517
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert. A Normal
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the B Increased
button does not affect the on or off status
of the system. You can only change the Note: The alert diagram illustrates general
mode and intensity settings. zone coverage. It does not provide exact
zone parameters.
Press the button to switch the
system on or off. The button is Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
E173233 above the audio unit or on the of the steering wheel vibration. Increasing
center console. the intensity causes a higher rate of haptic
feedback.
System Settings • High.
• Normal.
The system sensitivity and intensity can
be adjusted through the display screen. • Low.
See General Information (page 110). The
system remembers the last selection. You System Display
do not need to readjust the setting each
time you turn on your vehicle.
Sensitivity: This setting allows you to
select where in the lane a warning is
provided. Increasing the sensitivity setting
moves the warning zones in closer to your
vehicle.
E233874
When you switch on the system, a graphic

with lane markings appears in the display
screen.
252
Driving Aids
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may See Troubleshooting for additional
still display if adaptive cruise control is information.
enabled. Green: Indicates that the system is
While the system is on, the color of the available or ready to provide a warning on
lane markings change to indicate the the indicated side(s).
system status. Red: Indicates that the system is providing
Gray: Indicates that the system is or has just provided a lane keeping alert
temporarily unable to provide a warning warning.
on the indicated side(s). This may be You can temporarily disable the system at
because:
any time by doing the following:
• Your vehicle is under the activation • Quick braking.
speed.
• Fast acceleration.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Using your direction indicator.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view. • Driving too close to the lane markings.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last feature activation occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
253
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.

There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Vehicle accessories are blocking the camera, for example a snow plow.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION

SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use the blind

spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a
replacement for careful driving.
E227388
The Blind Spot Information System is

designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
254
Driving Aids
Note: The Blind Spot Information System System Lights and Messages
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It is only designed to alert
you to moving vehicles in the blind spot
zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System

E142442
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive The Blind Spot Information System
your vehicle forward above 5 mph illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
(8 km/h). outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
When the Blind Spot Information System
Spot Information System remains on while
is alerting on a vehicle and the
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Spot Information System alert indicator
Information System turns off. Once shifted
flashes as an increased warning level.
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when The alert indicator dims when the system
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph detects nighttime darkness.
(8 km/h). Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
Note: For automatic transmissions, the an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
Blind Spot Information System does not at the same time.
function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Sensor Blockage
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except reverse (R).
E231384
255
Driving Aids
The system uses radar sensors that are Blind Spot Information System
located inside the tail lamp on each side with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow in
front of the sensors or driving in heavy rain
can cause system degradation. Also, other
types of obstructions in front of the sensor
can cause system degradation. This is
referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
appears in the display screen. The alert
E225007
indicators remain ON and the system no
longer provides any warnings. You can The Blind Spot Information System with
clear the warning but the alert indicators Trailer Tow is designed to aid you in
remain illuminated. detecting vehicles that may have entered
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in the detection area zone (A). The detection
two ways: area is on both sides of your vehicle and
trailer, extending rearward from the
• After the blockage in front of the
exterior mirrors to the end of your trailer.
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or When a trailer is attached and the
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic customer has set up a Blind Spot Trailer,
to allow the sensors to detect passing the Blind Spot Information System with
vehicles. Trailer Tow becomes active when driving
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF forward above 6 mph (10 km/h). See
and then back ON. Trailer Reversing Aids (page 283).
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a The Blind Spot Information System with
factory equipped trailer tow module and it Trailer Tow can be turned off in the
is towing a trailer, the sensors will instrument cluster. If the Blind Spot
automatically turn the Blind Spot Information System is turned off, then the
Information System off. If your vehicle has Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer Tow automatically turns off.
tow module, it is recommended to turn the
Blind Spot Information System off
manually. Operating the Blind Spot
Information System without the Blind Spot
Trailer Tow package and a trailer attached
will cause poor system performance.
256
Driving Aids
Setting up a Blind Spot Trailer The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement; just measure
that it is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.
E225008 • Trailer length measurement:
The trailer length is the distance between
A Trailer length the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
B Trailer width trailer. The maximum length that the Blind
Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
C Trailer hitch ball
can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
You can set-up any trailer to work with the • Enter length of trailer:
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).
Tow through the instrument cluster menu.
Toggling up or down using the menu
See General Information (page 110).
buttons will increase/decrease the
While setting up a trailer, a sequence of
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select the
screens appear asking for trailer
length so that the value is equal to or
information. The Blind Spot Information
within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured
System with Trailer Tow specific screens
length. For example, if the actual measured
are described below:
length is 25 ft (7.6 m), then toggle the
• Select type of trailer screen - length in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). When
Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck. the length has been entered, the Blind Spot
The Blind Spot Information System with Information System with Trailer Tow setup
Trailer Tow only supports conventional is saved.
trailers. If fifth wheel or gooseneck is If you do not set up a Blind Spot Trailer, a
selected, the system automatically turns warning appears in the instrument cluster
off. when a trailer is connected stating that the
• Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer system has been turned off due to a trailer
screen? connect.
If no, the Blind Spot Information System Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
turns off. cargo rack with electrical lighting, then the
length will be 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen. will remain on for trailers 3 ft (1 m) or less.
• Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and Note: Proper measurement and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)? measurement entry is required for Blind
If no, the Blind Spot Information System Spot Information System with Trailer Tow
turns off. to function as designed.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
• Trailer width measurement:
257
Driving Aids
System Operation Large box trailers may cause false alerts

to trigger when driving next to buildings or
If you select a trailer in the display screen near parking cars. A false alert may also
prior to connecting the trailer, the system occur while making a 90-degree turn.
will load that configuration and the
information cluster displays a message Trailers that are 8.5 ft (2.6 m) wide at the
when the trailer is connected. A second front and have a total length greater than
message appears stating Cross Traffic 20 ft (6 m) may have delayed alerts from
Alert has been turned off; the Blind Spot passing vehicles when the vehicle is
Information System with Trailer Tow still passing at high speed.
functions normally when driving forward. A box trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft
If no trailer has been set up and a trailer is (2.6 m) may cause early alerts when you
connected, the instrument cluster provides are over taking a vehicle.
a message indicating a trailer is connected When towing a clam shell or V-Nose box
followed by a message asking to select a trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m),
trailer from the existing list of trailers or to delayed alerts on merging vehicles that are
add a trailer. In order for the Blind Spot traveling the same speed as your vehicle
Information System with Trailer Tow to may occur.
function, an existing trailer must be
selected or a new trailer must be added. If System Errors
the request is ignored or if you exit the
screen, a message appears prompting you If the system senses a problem with the
that the system has been turned off due left or right sensor, the telltale illuminates
to a trailer connect. This message may not and a message appears in the display
appear until your vehicle speed reaches screen. See Information Messages
22 mph (35 km/h). (page 121).
The Blind Spot Information System with Switching the System Off and On
Trailer Tow activates when driving forward
for that particular trailer set up. If the You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
ignition is cycled, the Blind Spot Information System off in the display
Information System with Trailer Tow screen. See General Information (page
continues to function using the last trailer 110). When the Blind Spot Information
selected. System switches off, you do not receive
alerts and the display screen shows a
Trailer Considerations system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
The Blind Spot Information System with
the Blind Spot Information System on or
Trailer Tow is designed to work with any
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
or less and total length from the trailer Note: The Blind Spot Information System
hitch ball to the rear of the trailer is 33 ft remembers the last selected on or off
(10.1 m) or less. Different trailers may setting.
cause a slight change in performance as You can also have the Blind Spot
outlined below. Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
258
Driving Aids
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (IF The system alerts you of vehicles

approaching from the sides behind your
EQUIPPED) vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
Using Cross Traffic Alert

WARNING: Do not use the cross The system detects vehicles that approach
traffic alert system as a replacement for at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
using the interior and exterior mirrors or 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
looking over your shoulder before when the sensors are partially, mostly or
reversing out of a parking space. The fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps
cross traffic alert system is not a increase the coverage area and
replacement for careful driving. effectiveness.
WARNING: The system may not The system turns on when you start the
operate properly during severe weather engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy system turns off when you shift out of
rain and spray. Always drive with due reverse (R).
care and attention. Failure to take care
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only

partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
259
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on performance.
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and If the sensors are blocked, a message may
zone coverage on that side is severely appear in the information display when
reduced. you shift into reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors Cross Traffic Alert System

Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
E231384
• You reverse out of an angled parking
The sensors are inside the brake lamp on space.
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
260
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When • Information display. See General

Trailer is Attached Information (page 110).
Note: The system may not correctly operate • Touchscreen. See Settings (page 543).
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an Note: The system turns on every time you
approved trailer tow module and tow bar, switch the ignition on. To permanently
the system turns off when you attach a switch the system off, contact an authorized
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket dealer.
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off Cross Traffic Alert Indicator
when you attach a trailer.
When the system detects an
Cross traffic alert remains on when you approaching vehicle, a tone
E268294
attach a trailer in vehicles that come with sounds, a warning lamp
blind spot information system with trailer illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror
tow under the following conditions: and arrows appear in the information
• You connect a trailer. display to show which side the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
• The trailer is a bike rack or cargo rack
with a maximum length of 3 ft (1 m). Note: If arrows do not display, a message
• You set the trailer length to 3 ft (1 m)
in the information display. If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
See Blind Spot Information System
a message appears in the information
(page 254).
display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
Switching the System On and Off as possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
To switch the system on or off, adjust the could alert you, even when there is nothing
setting. Depending on your vehicle options, in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
the setting could be in the following: passing further away from your vehicle.
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
Message Action
Cross Traffic Alert Displays instead of indication arrows when the system
detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Not Avail- Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean
able Sensor Blocked See the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your
Manual vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
Fault as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Alert Deac- Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.
tivated Trailer Attached
261
Driving Aids
STEERING Steering Tips

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
Hydraulic Power Steering
• An improperly inflated tire.
To help prevent damage to the power • Uneven tire wear.
steering system:
• Loose or worn suspension
• Do not hold the steering wheel at its components.
furthest turning points for more than
three to five seconds when the engine • Loose or worn steering components.
is running. • Improper vehicle alignment.
• Avoid continuously steering back and Note: A high crown in the road or high
forth with elevated engine RPM as this crosswinds may also make the steering
may overheat the system. If trying to seem to wander or pull.
free a stuck vehicle, pause between
attempts to allow the power steering Electronic Torque Overlay Steering
system to cool or seek assistance. (If Equipped)
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool.
• Do not operate the vehicle if the power WARNING: The electric power
steering pump fluid level is below the steering system has diagnostic checks
MIN mark on the reservoir. that continuously monitor the system. If
• Some noise is normal during operation. a fault is detected, a message displays
If excessive, check for low power in the information display. Stop your
steering pump fluid level before vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
seeking service by your dealer. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and
• Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused watch the information display for a
by low power steering fluid. Check for steering system warning message. If a
low power steering pump fluid level steering system warning message
before seeking service by your dealer. returns, have the system checked as
• Do not fill the power steering pump soon as possible.
reservoir above the MAX mark on the
reservoir, as this may result in leaks WARNING: If the system detects
from the reservoir. an error, you may not feel a difference in
the steering, however a serious condition
If the power steering system breaks down
may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
or if you switch the engine off, you can
soon as possible. Failure to do so may
steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
result in loss of steering control.
more effort.
If you have any steering components
serviced or replaced, install new fasteners.
Many fasteners have coatings with thread
adhesive, or have prevailing torque
features you cannot reuse. Do not reuse a
bolt or nut. Torque fasteners to
specifications.
262
Driving Aids
The electronic torque overlay steering Adaptive Steering (If Equipped)

system adds supplemental steering assist
to the hydraulic gear when needed, Note: The adaptive steering system has
dependent on vehicle conditions such as diagnostic checks that continuously monitor
vehicle speed, steering wheel angle, and the system. If the system detects a fault, a
steering wheel torque. The hydraulic message displays in the information display.
steering system provides the majority of If a red warning message displays, stop your
steering assistance. The electronic torque vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. The
overlay enables features such as pro trailer message may clear if the fault is no longer
backup assistance and lane departure present. If an adaptive steering system
warning. warning message appears each time you
start your vehicle, have the system checked
If your vehicle loses electrical power while as soon as possible.
you are driving, your vehicle loses electric
power steering assistance. The steering The adaptive steering system continually
system still operates, and you can steer changes the steering ratio with changes to
your vehicle with hydraulic assist. Steering vehicle speed, optimizing the steering
your vehicle with only hydraulic assist response in all conditions. The system also
requires more effort. changes when you switch on the
transmission tow/haul feature. When you
Extreme continuous steering may increase select the tow/haul button, the adaptive
the effort required for you to steer your steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity
vehicle. This increased effort prevents to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds,
overheating and permanent damage to while maintaining the ease of parking and
the steering system. You do not lose the maneuverability at low speeds.
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers Note: The adaptive steering system is
allow the system to cool and return to designed with a locking device. With the
normal operation. lock engaged, the adaptive steering system
remains mechanically locked at a fixed
Adaptive Learning (If Equipped) steering ratio. You may also notice a click
when you switch the vehicle on or after you
The electronic power steering system switch it off, as the lock disengages or
adaptive learning helps correct road engages.
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with Note: If your vehicle loses electrical power
the brake system to help operate or detects a fault when you are driving, the
advanced stability control and accident system automatically shuts down and you
avoidance systems. Whenever the battery retain normal steering function with a fixed
is disconnected or a new battery installed, steering ratio. During this time it is possible
you must drive your vehicle a short that the steering wheel may not be straight
distance before the system relearns the when the vehicle is driving straight ahead.
strategy and reactivates all systems. In addition, the driver may notice that the
steering wheel angle required to steer the
vehicle may be different.
263
Driving Aids
Note: During parking maneuvers, the

adaptive steering system balances the driver WARNING: The system may fail or
work load for various steering wheel inputs operate with reduced function during
and vehicle loading conditions. Under cold and severe weather conditions.
extreme operating conditions the system Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
locking device may engage. This strategy adversely affect the system. Keep the
prevents overheating and permanent front camera and radar free of snow and
damage to the adaptive steering system. ice. Failure to take care may result in the
Typical steering and driving maneuvers loss of control of your vehicle, serious
allow the system to cool and return to personal injury or death.
normal operation.
WARNING: Some situations and
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (IF objects prevent hazard detection. For
example low or direct sunlight, inclement
EQUIPPED) weather, unconventional vehicle types,
and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to follow this
WARNING: You are responsible for instruction could result in the loss of
controlling your vehicle at all times. The control of your vehicle, personal injury or
system is designed to be an aid and does death.
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure WARNING: Take additional care if
to follow this instruction could result in your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are
the loss of control of your vehicle, towing a trailer. These conditions could
personal injury or death. result in reduced performance of this
system. Failure to follow this instruction
WARNING: The system does not could result in the loss of control of your
detect vehicles that are driving in a vehicle, personal injury or death.
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure WARNING: The system cannot
to follow this instruction could result in help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
the loss of control of your vehicle, this system to replace driver judgment
personal injury or death. and the need to maintain a safe distance
and speed.
operate during hard acceleration or Using the Pre-Collision Assist
steering. Failure to take care may lead System
to a crash or personal injury.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active
at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active
at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
264
Driving Aids
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching Active Braking: Active braking may

another stationary vehicle, a vehicle activate if the system determines that a
traveling in the same direction as yours, or collision is imminent. The system may help
a pedestrian within your driving path, the the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
system provides three levels of the crash completely.
functionality: Note: Brake Support and Active Braking are
1. Alert active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
2. Brake Support If the vehicle has a radar sensor or Adaptive
Cruise Control, then Brake Support and
3. Active Braking Active Braking are active up to the maximum
speed of the vehicle.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system
disables when you select 4X4 LOW, Deep
Snow/Sand mode, Rock Crawl mode, or
E255268 when you manually disable AdvanceTrac™.
Distance Indication and Alert (If

Equipped)
Distance Indication and Alert is a function

that provides the driver with a graphical
indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same
direction. The Distance Indication and Alert
screen in the display screen shows one of
E156131 the graphics that follow.
Alert: When active, a flashing visual
warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
Brake Support: The system helps reduce
the impact speed by preparing the brakes
for rapid braking. The system does not
apply the brakes. If you press the brake
pedal, the system could apply additional
braking up to maximum braking force, even
if you lightly press the brake pedal.
265
Driving Aids
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is

small, a red visual indication displays.
Note: Distance Indication and Alert
deactivates, and the graphics do not display
when Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
E254791
Speed Sensitivity Graphics Distance Gap Time Gap

62 mph
Normal Grey >82 ft (25 m) >0.9sec
(100 km/h)
62 mph 56–82 ft 0.6sec —
Normal Yellow
(100 km/h) (17–25 m) 0.9sec
62 mph
Normal Red <56 ft (17 m) <0.6sec
(100 km/h)
• If required, you can switch Active

Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist Braking on or off.
Settings
• If required, you can switch the entire
You can adjust the following settings by Pre-Collision Assist feature on or off.
using the information display controls. See
Note: Active braking automatically turns
on every time you switch the ignition on.
• You can change Alert and Distance
Alert sensitivity to one of three settings.
• You can switch Distance Indication and
Alert on or off.
266
Driving Aids
Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, we If a message regarding a blocked sensor
recommend that you switch the system off or camera appears in the information
if you install a snow plow or similar object display, the radar signals or camera images
in such a way that it may block the radar have become obstructed. If your vehicle
sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected has a radar sensor, it is located behind the
setting across key cycles. fascia cover in the center of the lower grille.
With a blocked sensor or camera, the
Blocked Sensors Pre-Collision Assist system may not
function, or performance may reduce. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for when this message displays.
E307836
1 Camera.
2 Radar sensor (if equipped).
Camera Troubleshooting
Cause Action
The windshield in front of the camera is Clean the outside of the windshield in front
dirty or obstructed in some way. of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is Wait a short time. It may take several
clean but the message remains in the minutes for the camera to detect that there
display screen. is no obstruction.
267
Driving Aids
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)

Cause Action
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
or obstructed in some way.
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display minutes for the radar to detect that there
screen. is no obstruction.
Pre-Collision Assist disables itself. The
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering
system automatically reactivates a short
with the radar signals.
time after the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface Pre-Collision Assist disables itself. The
of the road may interfere with the radar system automatically reactivates a short
signals. time after the weather conditions improve.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
radar checked for proper coverage and
impact.
operation.
Note: Proper system operation requires a

clear view of the road by the camera. Have DRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
any windshield damage in the camera's field
of view repaired. Selectable Drive Modes
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle The system delivers a driving experience
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone through a suite of sophisticated electronic
may change. This could cause missed or vehicle systems. These systems optimize
false vehicle detections. Contact an steering, handling and powertrain
authorized dealer to have the radar checked response. This provides a single location
for proper coverage and operation. to control multiple system's performance
settings.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment Changing the drive mode automatically
condition, a message may display in the changes the functionality of the following
information display indicating temporary systems:
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor automatically recalibrates
successfully.
268
Driving Aids
• Electronic stability control and traction Tow/Haul – For improved

control maintains your vehicle control transmission operation when
in adverse conditions or E246592 towing a trailer or a heavy load.
high-performance driving. This mode moves upshifts to higher engine
• Electronic throttle control enhances speeds to reduce the frequency of
the powertrain response to your inputs. transmission shifting. This mode also
provides engine braking in all forward
• Transmission controls are optimized gears, which slows your vehicle and assists
with shift schedules tuned to each you in controlling your vehicle when
terrain. descending a grade. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies based
Using the System
on the amount you press the brake pedal.
The system tailors your vehicle
configuration for each mode you select. Deep Snow/Sand – For snow or
soft, dry sand.
E295420
Column Shifter
Eco – For efficient driving. This
mode helps deliver maximum
E295413
fuel efficiency and helps to
increase driving range.
Slippery – For less than ideal
E295414
road conditions such as snow or
ice covered roads. Use this mode
for crossing terrain where loose, wet or
slippery material covers a firm surface.
Slippery mode lowers throttle response
and, if equipped with automatic
E249567 transmission, optimizes shifting for slippery
To change the drive mode setting, press surfaces.
the drive mode button. The drive mode Rock Crawl – For optimum
selection menu appears in the instrument rock-climbing ability. Rock crawl
cluster and allows you to select through E225315
mode prompts you to put your
the available drive modes. vehicle in 4x4 Low. Rock Crawl mode
Normal – For everyday driving. optimizes the throttle and transmission
This mode is a perfect balance response to provide you additional control
E225310
of excitement, comfort, and of your vehicle. See Using Four-Wheel
convenience. Drive (page 213).
Some drive modes reduce
traction and stability control
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul E130458 performance and the warning
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
indicator illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
the loss of control of your vehicle.
269
Driving Aids
Note: Your vehicle starts in the last selected

drive mode for appropriate modes when
starting the vehicle within two hours of the
last key off. If the vehicle has been off for
more than two hours, a drive mode reminder
prompt displays on the instrument cluster
which requires you to confirm before the
vehicle returns to the last selected drive
mode.
Note: Mode changes are not available when
the vehicle ignition is off. In drive (D), only
some modes may be available.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system for
proper operation. Certain drive modes are
not available based on the gearshift
position. If a mode is unavailable due to a
system fault or change in gearshift position,
the mode defaults to Normal.
270
Load Carrying
LOAD CARRYING
PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
Keep your loaded vehicle weight label vehicle weight limits can
within its design rating capability, adversely affect the
with or without a trailer. Properly performance and handling of
loading your vehicle provides your vehicle, cause vehicle
maximum return of vehicle design damage and can result in the
performance. Before you load your loss of control of your vehicle,
vehicle, become familiar with the serious personal injury or death.
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with WARNING: Do not use
or without a trailer, from the replacement tires with lower
vehicle’s Tire and Loading load carrying capacities than the
Information label or Safety original tires because they may
Compliance Certification label. lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
WARNING: The original tires do not increase the
appropriate loading capacity of GVWR and GAWR limitations.
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much WARNING: Do not exceed
space is available) or by payload the GVWR or the GAWR
capacity (how much weight the specified on the certification
vehicle should carry). Once you label.
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is WARNING: Exceeding any
space available. Overloading or vehicle weight rating can
improperly loading your vehicle adversely affect the
can contribute to loss of vehicle performance and handling of
control and vehicle rollover. your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the
loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: When loading

the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
271
Load Carrying
handle differently than unloaded WHAT IS THE GROSS AXLE

vehicles. Take extra precautions, WEIGHT RATING
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
when driving a heavily loaded Rating)
vehicle.
GAWR is the maximum allowable
The gross combined weight must weight that a single axle (front or
never exceed the Gross Combined rear) can carry. These numbers
Weight Rating. are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
LOCATING THE SAFETY
WHAT IS THE GROSS VEHICLE
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION
WEIGHT RATING
LABELS
GVWR is the maximum allowable
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example: weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM

LOADED TRAILER WEIGHT
E198828
The Safety Compliance Certification label Maximum loaded trailer weight is

is located on the door hinge pillar, the highest possible weight of a
door-latch post, or the door edge that fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
meets the door-latch post, next to the tow. Consult an authorized dealer
driver seating position. (or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
272
Load Carrying
WHAT IS THE GROSS Combined Weight Rating.)

COMBINED WEIGHT RATING Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
Gross Combined Weight Rating vehicles and for trailers where the
(GCWR) is the maximum Gross Combined Weight of the
allowable weight of the vehicle towing vehicle plus the trailer
and the loaded trailer, including exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
all cargo and passengers, that the Rating of the towing vehicle.
vehicle can handle without risking Note: For trailer towing
damage. (Important: The towing information refer to the RV and
vehicle’s braking system is rated Trailer Towing Guide available at
for operation at Gross Vehicle an authorized dealer, or online at
Weight Rating, not at Gross the website that follows.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online

Website www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides
273
Load Carrying
CALCULATING PAYLOAD is the maximum payload for your

vehicle as built by the assembly
Tire and Loading Label Information plant. If you install any additional
Example: equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
CALCULATING THE LOAD

LIMIT
Steps for determining the correct
load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
E198719
in your vehicle.
Payload is the combined weight 3. Subtract the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your of the driver and passengers
vehicle is carrying. The maximum from XXX kg or XXX lb.
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The 4. The resulting figure equals the
label is either on the B-pillar or the available amount of cargo and
edge of the driver door. Vehicles luggage load capacity. For
exported outside the US and example, if the “XXX” amount
Canada may not have a tire and equals 1,400 lb. and there will
loading label. Look for “The be five 150 lb. passengers in
combined weight of occupants your vehicle, the amount of
and cargo should never exceed available cargo and luggage
XXX kg or XXX lb” for maximum load capacity is 650 lb.
payload. The payload listed on the (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
Tire and Loading Information label
274
Load Carrying
5. Determine the combined Suppose your vehicle has a

weight of luggage and cargo 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. and luggage capacity. You and
That weight may not safely one of your friends decide to pick
exceed the available cargo and up cement from the local home
luggage load capacity improvement store to finish that
calculated in Step 4. patio you have been planning for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a the past two years. Measuring the
trailer, load from your trailer inside of the vehicle with the rear
will be transferred to your seat folded down, you have room
vehicle. Consult this manual to for twelve 100-pound
determine how this reduces the (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
available cargo and luggage you have enough load capacity to
load capacity of your vehicle. transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
Helpful examples for weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
calculating the available the calculation would be: 1400 -
amount of cargo and luggage (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
load capacity - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a to carry that much weight. In
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo metric units, the calculation would
and luggage capacity. You decide be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
to go golfing. Is there enough load kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
capacity to carry you, four of your 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
friends and all the golf bags? You You will need to reduce the load
and four friends average 220 weight by at least 240 pounds
pounds (99 kilograms) each and (104 kilograms). If you remove
the golf bags weigh approximately three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. cement bags, then the load
The calculation would be: 1400 - calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
enough load capacity in your the load capacity to transport the
vehicle to transport four friends cement and your friend home. In
and your golf bags. In metric units, metric units, the calculation would
the calculation would be: 635 be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) - kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 - 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
275
Load Carrying
The above calculations also

assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
276
Pickup Bed
PICKUP BED ANCHOR POINTS
Pickup Bed Anchor Point

Precautions
WARNING: Always properly secure

cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
WARNING: The appropriate

loading capacity of your vehicle can be
limited either by volume capacity (how
much space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle E327579
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is Installing and Removing the
space available. Overloading or Pickup Bed Tie-Down Cleats
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and Installing the Cleats
vehicle rollover.
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn
WARNING: It is extremely clockwise to unlock.
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside 2. Insert the cleat into the pickup bed
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people anchor point and slide upward.
riding in these areas are more likely to be 3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock.
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Locating the Pickup Bed Anchor

Points
The pickup bed anchor points are located
at each corner of the pickup bed.
277
Pickup Bed
Pickup Bed Anchor Point Load

Capacities
E327575 E327576
Note: Leave the key in the lock when A B

removing or installing the cleats. The key
cannot be removed unless it is in the locked Maximum force Maximum force
position. between directly between diagonally
opposed cleats opposed cleats
Removing the Cleats 276 lb (125 kg). 600 lb (272 kg).
To remove, reverse the installation
procedure. Note: You could damage the pickup bed
walls if you overload the tie downs.
Note: Make sure that you properly balance
and secure the cargo load. Failure to do this
can cause cargo instability and damage to
the box.
Note: Do not secure cargo with tie downs
connected from the tie down brackets to
the cargo box tie downs. This could cause
the tailgate to detach.
278
Pickup Bed
PICKUP BED RAMPS (If Installing and Removing the

Pickup Bed Ramp Holder
Equipped)
Installing the Ramp Holder
Pickup Bed Ramp Precautions
WARNING: When sliding the ramp

up or down, take care not to get your
fingers or hands caught in the
mechanism. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Make sure that you

correctly install the ramp to the tailgate
plate. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury. E194387
WARNING: Do not step or sit on 1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over
the ramp when it is in the stowed the mounting plate and rotate the
position. Failure to follow this instruction ramp holder into position.
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Only install the ramp

within the prescribed ramp angles.
result in personal injury.
Note: Each pickup bed ramp has a

maximum capacity of 400 lb (181.4 kg).
Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground
before usage.
E194388
Note: For loading and unloading
equipment, your ramp should be set 2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards
between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees into the installed position.
downward to avoid damage to the ramp
claw and tailgate plate. 3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
Note: When using your vehicle for off-road
operation, remove the bed ramps from the Removing the Ramp Holder
vehicle and store them in a safe location
away from your vehicle. Remove in the reverse order.
279
Pickup Bed
Installing and Removing the

Pickup Bed Ramps
Installing the Bed Ramp
1. Remove the front and rear cables.
E194382
5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate

plate.
E194380
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew

the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.
E211150
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of

the ramp to the open position.
Note: You can use a smooth surface tool
to rotate the stops. E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and

extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.
280
Pickup Bed
Removing the Ramp

Remove in the reverse order.
Storing the Pickup Bed Ramps

Storing the Bed Ramp
1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.

6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Note: Make sure you properly secure the
locking cable. If the locking cable is
unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise.
281
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER Your vehicle may have ability to

modify trailer towing features.
See General Information (page
WARNING: Do not exceed 110).
the GVWR or the GAWR Your vehicle's load capacity
specified on the certification designation is by weight, not by
label. volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
WARNING: Towing trailers loading a vehicle or trailer.
beyond the maximum Towing a trailer places an extra
recommended gross trailer load on your vehicle's engine,
weight exceeds the limit of your transmission, axle, brakes, tires
vehicle and could result in engine and suspension. Inspect these
damage, transmission damage, components periodically during,
structural damage, loss of and after, any towing operation.
vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and personal injury. Note: To prevent your trailer from
accumulating distance, and the
WARNING: Do not exceed trailer information status appearing
the lowest rating capacity for when you restart your vehicle after
your vehicle or trailer hitch. disconnecting your trailer, you must
Overloading your vehicle or deactivate your trailer. Using the
trailer hitch can impair your information display, go to the
vehicle stability and handling. Towing menu and then the Select
Failure to follow this instruction Trailer option. Select the No active
could result in the loss of control trailer option. See General
of your vehicle, personal injury or Information (page 110).
death.
Load Placement
WARNING: Do not cut, To help minimize how trailer
drill, weld or modify the trailer movement affects your vehicle
hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch when driving:
could reduce the hitch rating. • Load the heaviest items closest
Your vehicle may have electrical to the trailer floor.
items, such as fuses or relays, • Load the heaviest items
related to towing. See Fuse centered between the
Specification Chart (page 339). left-hand and right-hand side
trailer tires.
282
Towing
• Load the heaviest items above vehicle, when viewed from the
the trailer axles or just slightly side.
forward toward the trailer When driving with a trailer or
tongue. Do not allow the final payload, a slight takeoff vibration
trailer tongue weight to go or shudder may be present due to
above or below 10-15% of the the increased payload weight.
loaded trailer weight. Do not Additional information regarding
exceed the tongue load rating proper trailer loading and setting
indicated on the conventional your vehicle up for towing is in
hitch receiver. another chapter of this manual.
• Select a ball mount with the See Recommended Towing
correct rise or drop. When both Weights (page 300).
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame You can also find information in
should be level, or slightly the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
angled down toward your available at your authorized
dealer, or online.

Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/

TRAILER REVERSING AIDS (IF encourage the use of voice-operated
EQUIPPED) are aware of all applicable local laws
Pro Trailer Backup Assist With devices while driving.
Trailer Reverse Guidance
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
WARNING: Driving while distracted attention and judgment, or the need to
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash apply the brakes. This system does NOT
and injury. We strongly recommend that automatically brake your vehicle. If you
you use extreme caution when using any fail to press the brake pedal when
device that may take your focus off the necessary, you may collide with another
road. Your primary responsibility is the vehicle.
283
Towing
This feature helps you to steer your vehicle Note: The system relies on user
when reversing with a trailer by: measurements to determine sticker
• Using the control knob with Pro Trailer placement or user installation of a sensor
Backup Assist. to determine system limits. It is critical to
correctly take the key measurements or
• Using the steering wheel with Trailer properly install the sensor. Incorrect
Reverse Guidance. measurements or sensor placement can
Each trailer you use with your vehicle has result in the improper function of the system
to be setup once. up to and including contact between your
vehicle and trailer. Even with correct
You must take care to follow the setup measurements and sensor placement, the
process accurately to correctly place the system cannot determine if the trailer body
sticker or sensor. may contact your vehicle. Check the
Contact your dealership if you need clearance between your vehicle and trailer,
assistance setting up your trailer. especially for sharp turns.
Note: Your vehicle saves the trailer Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
information when you enter it into the backing up. The system is not a replacement
system. You can add a maximum of 10 for proper use of the throttle and brake
trailers to the system. pedals.
Note: The system is not a substitute for Note: The system does not support backing
safe driving practices. up when towing multiple trailers. If you are
towing more than one trailer, you must
Note: You must always be aware of your
disconnect the additional trailers before
vehicle and trailer combination, and the
using the system.
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or Positioning Your Vehicle and
prevent your vehicle or trailer from making Trailer
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment. Hitch your trailer to your vehicle and
connect the electrical wiring harness.
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of Check to make sure that the wiring is
your vehicle swings out when changing the working. See Essential Towing Checks
direction of the trailer. (page 305).
E209759
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a

level surface.
284
Towing
For best results, make sure that your trailer 1. Press the button to switch the system
rides level with the ground when you hitch on.
your vehicle. More information on selecting 2. Use the controls on the steering wheel
your towbar is available in the Towing to select the option to add a trailer in
section. See Towing (page 282). the information display. See General
Information (page 110).
3. Add a personalized name for the trailer
using the screen prompts. Use the
down arrow to scroll to the preferred
letter and then press the right arrow to
advance to the next letter. Press OK to
E209760
continue.
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle 4. Select the Trailer Brake Type.
are in line with each other. You can do this Note: Select Default Electric/Surge/None
by putting the transmission in drive (D) and if your trailer has electric, surge or no brakes.
pulling straight forward.
5. Select the Trailer Brake Effort.
Setting Up the System Note: The default option is Low. We
recommend this for most trailers. If the
trailer brakes require more initial voltage, or
if you prefer more aggressive braking, select
Medium or High.
6. Select the trailer type.
Note: The system may prompt you to setup
Trailer Blind Spot before continuing the
setup process.
7. Select whether you want to add Pro
Trailer Backup Assist.
Conventional Trailer Setup (If

Equipped)
The following are examples of

conventional trailers.
E318266
285
Towing
E310619
Use the supplied measurement card, a

tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area to attach the sticker. The sticker
is in the back cover pocket of your quick
start guide. Make sure the entire sticker is
within the green zone between the two
arcs or distance markers on the diagram,
and is also visible in the rear view camera
E311876
display.
Once you have found the correct location,
Placing the Sticker
place the sticker.
You must place the sticker in an area
visible by the rear view camera. Taking the Measurements
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps After you place the sticker on your trailer,
turn on to improve visibility. you must take some measurements.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the Note: You must take accurate
following procedure. measurements for the system to properly
operate.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view camera's view of the sticker. For Note: When rounding in inches, round
example, items such as a jack handle or upward if the measured length is a quarter
wiring. inch or greater. Round downward if the
measured length is less than a quarter inch.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and For example, 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be
clean horizontal surface. For best results, rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in
apply the sticker when temperatures are (30.8 cm) would be rounded down to
above 32°F (0°C). 12.00 in (30.48 cm).
Note: Do not move stickers after placing Note: When rounding in centimeters, round
them. Do not re-use any stickers if removed. to the nearest whole centimeter. If the
Note: You can purchase additional stickers measurement is less than 0.2 in (0.5 cm)
through your authorized dealer. round downward. If the measurement is
more than or equal to 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round
upward. For example, 11.9 in (30.3 cm)
would be rounded down to 11.8 in (30 cm).
12.0 in (30.5 cm) would be rounded up to
12.2 in (31 cm).
286
Towing
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial Entering the Measurements

units as required by your country or vehicle.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter
The measurement card requires you to each of the measurements. Use the up and
record four key distances: A, B, C and D. down arrows to increase or decrease the
Record the trailer name for these numbers, as necessary. Press OK to
measurements. confirm each measurement. When you add
the last measurement, the information
display shows all the measurements you
A entered. You can choose to confirm or
change the measurements.
B Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the rear view camera display to see
if the system identifies the sticker. The
system marks the sticker with a red circle.
C Confirm that the red circle shows over the
sticker image in the rear view camera
display.
D Note: If the system cannot locate the
D
sticker, try cleaning the camera lens. Make
E209806 sure the sticker is within the zone indicated
in Placing the Sticker.
A The horizontal distance from the
license plate to the center of the Calibrating the System
ball hitch on the trailer. To complete setup, drive your vehicle
B The horizontal distance from the straight forward between 4–24 mph
center of the ball hitch to the (6–39 km/h), as directed by the
center of the sticker. information display.
C The point to point distance from The information display shows a message
the rear view camera to the during calibration and after calibration is
center of the sticker. complete
D The horizontal distance from the Note: Calibration steps for conventional
tailgate to the center of the trailers, fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers
trailer axle or axles. vary. Calibration instructions for fifth wheel
and gooseneck trailers are in the following
Note: Round distance D to the nearest section.
inch.
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight
Note: Distance D is the center of the axles during the calibration process. If the steering
for trailers with more than one axle. wheel is in a turned position, the calibration
pauses.
Note: For best results, do not calibrate the
system at night.
287
Towing
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer

Setup (If Equipped)
The following are examples of fifth wheel
and gooseneck trailers.
E316145
To use the system with a fifth wheel or

gooseneck trailer, you must install a
sensor. Refer to the instructions in the
sensor kit for proper installation.
Note: Make sure the arrows on the sensor
housing are facing up. Mount the sensor to
a vertical part of the trailer that pivots and
moves when you turn your vehicle. Do not
mount to a stationary surface or to the truck
side of the fifth wheel trailer hitch.
E311877
Note: You need to replace the 7/4 way
connector in the bumper with the
Installing the Sensor recommended 7/12 pin connector if your
vehicle did not come with the fifth wheel
prep package. See your authorized dealer.
Note: If your vehicle has the fifth wheel
prep package, you have everything you need.
If your vehicle does not have the fifth wheel
prep package, see your authorized dealer to
purchase the sensor kit and the 7/12 pin
connector.
Calibrating the System

During calibration, the system determines
E315959 the trailer length. The system supports
trailer lengths of 10–39 ft (3–11.94 m)
distance from the hitch point to the center
of the axle or axles.
To calibrate the system, you need an area
where you can safely drive forward and
turn left or right. An open parking lot is an
ideal place to perform the calibration.
288
Towing
Drive straight at approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h) to align the trailer behind your
vehicle. The information display and center
screen provide you with instructions and
tells you when the system is ready for a
turn. Turn left or right whenever you are
ready and in a safe turning area.
Note: You need to turn approximately 90
degrees to calibrate the system.
Note: The information display shows if you
are going too slow or fast. Calibration
pauses if the speed is outside the required
range of 2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist

To use the system, press the button and
watch the information display. Use the
controls on the steering wheel to highlight
the trailer, then press OK to select the
trailer.
E318266
When the system locates the sticker or

confirms the sensor is connected, the
display prompts you to shift into reverse
(R). The system turns on.
Note: If you use the steering wheel, the
system turns off and a warning appears in
Follow the screen prompts to steer your
vehicle and trailer.
Note: You may have to drive forward to
straighten the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the control knob instead. The knob
acts as the steering control for the trailer.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
289
Towing
Release the knob when the trailer is

moving in the direction you want. Control
the accelerator and brakes while the
system steers your vehicle automatically
to keep the trailer moving straight back.
Note: For fifth wheel and gooseneck
trailers, the weight and hitch position of
these trailers may make the trailer respond
E209812 differently to the knob input than
conventional trailers. You may need to
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make
release the knob early or stop and pull
the trailer go left.
forward to align your truck and trailer when
returning to straight backing after making a
turn.
Note: Trailer maneuvering performance
may be compromised when using a fifth
wheel sliding hitch or pivoting pin box since
the system does not know the pivot point.
Note: You may have to use the knob to
E209813
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer conditions.
go right. Note: The system limits the vehicle speed.
Note: Practice maneuvering with the Note: When you release the knob or turn it
system in a safe open area first. to the center position, your vehicle follows
Note: Try backing up in a straight line and the trailer's path.
then turning the knob slowly in the direction
you want to go. Using Trailer Reverse Guidance
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the This provides information graphics and up
knob results in a jerky movement of the to seven camera views to help you backup
vehicle. your trailer when you use the steering
wheel. If you do not set up the system, you
can still use the camera views.
Note: The hitch angle graphic, automatic
view switching and straight backup mode
are not available if you do not set up the
system.
1. Shift into reverse (R). Press the rear
camera button to expand the menu.
E209814
2. Press the trailer icon.
3. Select the applicable trailer in the
290
Towing
4. When in this mode, you can see the Rear split view camera. Shows
camera view on the side your trailer is a 180 degree view of behind your
E310974
moving, or both sides when the trailer vehicle.
is straight behind you. When the views
change with the trailer direction, it is Bed camera. Shows the truck
called auto mode. For example, if you bed and can be used for a fifth
E310995
turn the trailer to the right, you see the wheel or gooseneck trailer.
right side of your vehicle and trailer. Trailer AUX camera. Shows a
You can manually switch this view at rear view camera image of what
any time by using the arrow keys. To E311776
is behind your trailer. This
return to auto mode, press the auto camera needs to be purchased and
button. separately installed.
Straight backup mode. Use this
view when you want to keep your Trailer Reverse Guidance view.
E224484
trailer completely in line with Shows you a view of the sides of
E310965
your truck. In this mode, a steering wheel your truck and your trailer. In
graphic shows you which way to turn your auto mode, this view moves as your trailer
steering wheel to keep your trailer straight. moves so that you do not have to adjust
the camera as you turn.
Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle
into drive (D), pull forward and straighten This takes you back to the
out the vehicle and trailer before engaging 360-degree camera system and
E224486
straight backup mode. out of the Trailer Reverse
Guidance feature.
System Camera Views
Auto. This feature returns you to
Use the view that helps you the most when auto view.
reversing your vehicle and trailer. You can E315644
use these views in either mode.
Hitch Angle Graphic
Left and right arrows let you see other
views regardless of your trailer angle in rear After setting up a trailer, the display shows
split view camera and Trailer Reverse a small top-view representation of your
Guidance view. truck and trailer.
Auto mode is the default view if you have This representation shows two,
set up Trailer Reverse Guidance. different-colored lines. A black line shows
360 camera. Shows a 360 you where your trailer is in relation to your
degree view on the right-hand vehicle. For Trailer Backup Assist, the white
E310996
side of the screen, with the keep line represents the amount the trailer can
out zone on the left-hand side of the turn based on knob input. For Trailer
screen. Reverse Guidance, the white line
represents the amount the trailer can turn
Rear view camera. Use this view based on steering wheel position.
when you want to see your trailer
E310967
hitch or what is directly behind
your vehicle.
291
Towing
A small representation shows you two Accurate measurements are critical for
zones to warn you of a possible jackknife correct system function. If you need to
condition. The view shows your truck and check measurements entered or change
trailer position and provides visual them, you can access them through the
feedback to help avoid a jackknife instrument cluster. Choose the option to
condition entirely. change the sticker from the change trailer
The yellow zone indicates you are settings menu. It is not necessary to
approaching the maximum controllable remove the sticker if you are just reviewing
trailer angle for the system. When your or changing measurements.
trailer enters this zone, it is more difficult The following menu warnings or difficulties
to reduce the trailer turn when backing up. may occur during setup. Tips to resolve
It may be necessary to put your vehicle them are listed below.
back into drive (D) and pull forward to get
Note: If you still experience issues with the
the truck and trailer back to an in-line
system's ability to detect the sticker, see
position.
the information in the next section regarding
The red zone indicates you have exceeded sticker lost during system operation.
the maximum controllable trailer angle for
Measurement A has reached maximum or
the system. Put the truck into drive (D) and
minimum value:
pull forward until your trailer is no longer
in the red zone. • The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a license plate to
Troubleshooting - Conventional hitch ball center measurement of
Trailer 9–20 in (23–52 cm) when installed.
Do not attempt to use drawbars that
Note: The system requires a clear view of have a length outside this range as the
the sticker placed on the trailer. You must system performance degrades and
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for could cause improper system function.
the system to operate correctly.
• Make sure that the measurement being
Setup made is the horizontal distance only
from license plate to the hitch ball
The system is designed to be used with a center. A straight line distance that
wide variety of trailers. There are some includes any vertical rise or drop
trailers that do not have a proper surface increases the measurement and makes
and location to mount the sticker. These it inaccurate. Inaccurate
trailers are not supported. Attempts to measurements degrade system
place the sticker on a surface that does performance and could cause improper
not meet the sticker placement system function. See step 4 of the
requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup setup instruction to review
instruction or entering inaccurate measurement instructions.
measurements to proceed through setup
can result in improper system function.
292
Towing
Measurement B has reached maximum or Measurement D has reached maximum or

minimum value: minimum value:
• Make sure that the sticker placement • Make sure that the measurement being
instruction in step 3 of the setup has made is the horizontal distance only
been followed. Stickers placed outside from tailgate to the center of the single
the allowed zone adversely affects the axle or the center of all the axles on the
system performance and could cause trailer. See step 4 of the setup for
improper feature function. additional measurement instructions.
• Make sure that the measurement being The system does not support trailer
made is the horizontal distance only lengths outside the range allowed by
from center of sticker to the hitch ball the information display.
center. A straight line distance that System is circling something beside the
includes any vertical rise or drop sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
increases the measurement and
• Make sure the rear camera is clean and
causes an inaccurate value to be
the sticker is clearly visible in the
entered into the system. See step 4 of
camera image. Clean the camera and
the setup for additional measurement
sticker if necessary.
instructions.
• The camera system uses the entered
Measurement C has reached maximum or measurements to help locate the
minimum value: sticker. Inaccurate sticker
• Make sure you follow the sticker measurements degrade the system’s
placement instructions in step 3 of the ability to locate the sticker. Verify the
setup. Stickers placed outside the measurements you enter into the
allowed zone adversely affect the system are accurate.
system performance and could cause • Remove the incorrectly circled label or
improper feature function. If you have decal if possible.
met all the criteria for sticker
placement and you see this message, • If you cannot resolve the issue, try a
the sticker is either too far below or too new sticker location. The sticker
close to the camera to properly location must still meet the
recognize the sticker. For the system requirements noted in step 3 of the
to operate correctly, the sticker height setup instructions. Only one sticker can
must be lowered if you receive the be placed on the trailer for correct
minimum warning or the sticker height system function. The previous sticker
must be raised if you receive the must be removed or covered so only
maximum warning. one sticker is visible to the camera.
• Only one sticker can be placed on the Calibration
trailer for correct system function. The
previous sticker must be removed or The system monitors various vehicle
covered so only one sticker is visible to parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
the camera. driven straight and the trailer is straight
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or
• Measurement B and C must be
trailer movement pauses the calibration.
measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.
293
Towing
For best results: Sticker lost:

• Use a long, straight, smooth and level • If the system cannot initially find the
road when attempting to calibrate. sticker, it may be necessary for you to
• Drive straight forward. change the lighting conditions by
moving the vehicle and trailer or
• Drive between 4–24 mph waiting until conditions change.
(6–39 km/h).
• Check for the following if you receive
System Operation the lost sticker message while using
the system.
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to • Stop your vehicle as soon as the
resolve them are listed below. message displays.
• Make sure the sticker is visible and the
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not pattern is discernable in the rear view
Available or Trailer Reverse Guidance camera image.
System is Not Available:
• Clean the sticker and camera to make
• The system relies on many sure they are unobstructed.
sub-systems in your vehicle to correctly
operate. If those sub-systems are not • Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free
correctly operating, the system may cloth and water.
not be available. • Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbing
• Low battery voltage is a condition that alcohol sprayed directly onto the
prevents the system from operating. sticker, and then wipe clean with a soft
Please make sure the battery is cloth.
correctly charged if the system is not • Remove any items that may be
available. blocking the view of the sticker.
• You may need to drive your vehicle Depending on your trailer configuration
straight forward above 25 mph and any equipment mounted to your
(40 km/h) before the system is trailer, it is possible for the sticker to be
available again. blocked from view of the camera as it
rotates on the hitch ball but not be
• If the message continues to display, blocked during setup. Remove the
see your authorized dealer for service. obstruction if possible. It may be
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving necessary to remove the sticker from
Required to Initialize Steering Press Knob its current location if the obstruction
to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving cannot be cleared. Place a new sticker
Required to Initialize Steering Press OK to that is visible to the camera in all
Exit: positions of the trailer behind your
• The steering system needs to learn vehicle.
internal parameters to fully enable the
feature. Drive your vehicle straight
forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
approximately 5 minutes.
• This may occur when your vehicle is
new, the battery voltage is too low, the
battery has been disconnected or your
steering system has been serviced.
294
Towing
• Placing the sticker on a surface angled • The camera system uses the entered
away from the vehicle reduces measurements to help locate the
performance. Use a drawbar that sticker. Inaccurate measurements
positions the trailer level to the ground reduce the system’s ability to locate
when attached to the vehicle. This the sticker. Check the measurements
typically provides a level surface to entered into the system are correct.
mount the sticker. Place the sticker on Refer to step 4 of setup for instructions
a bracket or other object when no level on measurements.
surface is available. • You can change your measurement by
• Make sure the entire sticker is on a flat going into the information display
surface that is completely visible to the menu, selecting trailer options,
camera. Do not fold the sticker over an selecting change trailer setting and
edge on the trailer frame. This can then selecting the change sticker
degrade performance. option. Disregard the prompt to remove
• Shadows on the sticker may affect this sticker and continue to the next
tracking performance under some step if you only plan to update the
lighting conditions. Moving the sticker measurements for the current sticker
to another location within the allowed location.
placement area may improve System does not reverse straight:
performance. Use the change sticker
• Factors such as the drawbar
option in the information display menu
connection to the hitch receiver, road
if you move the sticker.
camber, road grade and compliance in
• You can change your sticker location the trailer suspension can influence
by going into the information display how straight the system is able to
menu, selecting trailer options, reverse your trailer when the knob is
selecting change trailer settings and not turned. You can compensate for
then selecting the change sticker the trailer drifting to the right or left by
option. The previous sticker must be slowly turning the knob until the trailer
removed. ONLY ONE STICKER is following your preferred path and
SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE TRAILER then holding the knob in that position.
FOR CORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION. If you would like to recalibrate the
system for straight backing, you can do
so with the following procedure.
• Go into the information display menu,
select trailer options, select change
trailer setting and then select the
change sticker option. Your saved
measurements display. Do not change
them but continue to confirm
measurements. Once you confirm the
measurements, the system then
prompts you to perform the calibration
procedure.
295
Towing
System consistently shows Pro Trailer System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control
angle Press Knob to Exit: of Steering Wheel:
• The system uses your measurements • The system displays this warning when
to determine sticker position and it can no longer steer the vehicle and
establish system limits. Accurate you must take over steering. There are
sticker placement and trailer four reasons why this warning displays
measurements provide the best and additional information regarding
system performance. If you are the reason for the warning is available
consistently receiving this warning, it is on the center display.
likely there is an issue with sticker • The steering wheel is touched when
placement or the entered under system control. Avoid touching
measurements. Make sure that the the wheel during system operation.
sticker is placed correctly based on
step 3 and the measurements were • The maximum speed for feature
made correctly according to step 4. operation is exceeded. System
The troubleshooting guide for trailer performance is optimized at slower
measurements can also be reviewed speeds. Reverse slowly.
for help in making measurements. • The sticker was lost by the camera
• To change sticker location or change system. Once your vehicle is stopped,
trailer measurements, go into the additional warnings indicate the sticker
information display menu, select trailer was lost. Refer to sticker lost
options, select change trailer setting troubleshooting tips.
and then select the change sticker • An internal condition for system
option. operation was not met which requires
• If the sticker location needs to be your vehicle to return to manual control
changed, the previous sticker must be of the steering. Using the system for an
removed and a new sticker needs to extended period of time can cause the
be placed on the trailer. ONLY ONE steering system to heat up and turn off
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE Pro Trailer Backup Assist steering
TRAILER FOR PROPER SYSTEM control to protect itself. The system
FUNCTION. may require a cool down time of up to
30 minutes. Keep the system off and
• Disregard the prompt to remove this drive forward at a normal speed or
sticker and continue to the next step if switch the vehicle off.
you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker Note: The system is designed to be used
location. with the same trailer connection every time
the trailer is chosen from the selection
menu. When using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole on drawbars with more
than one, connecting the drawbar to your
vehicle affects the trailer measurements.
Take the measurements again and update
if required.
296
Towing
Troubleshooting - Fifth Wheel and Note: If you did not purchase the fifth wheel
Gooseneck Trailer prep pack, you need to replace the 7/4 way
trailer connector in your bumper with a 7/12
Setup pin connector. See your authorized dealer.
The system is designed to be used with a Calibration
wide variety of trailers. There are some
trailers that do not have a proper surface The calibration process is required for the
and location to mount the sensor. These system to determine the trailer length. The
trailers are not supported. Attempts to system supports trailer lengths of 10–39 ft
install the sensor in a manner that does (3–11.94 m) distance from the hitch point
not meet the requirements can result in to the center of the axle or axles. The
improper system function. calibration process consists of a straight
forward drive followed by a turn. During
To correctly install the trailer sensor:
the straight drive, the system monitors
• Attach to vertical surface with the various vehicle parameters to make sure
arrows pointed straight up. your vehicle is being driven straight and the
• If you are not sure, use a level to check trailer is straight behind your vehicle. Any
that the attachment surface is vertical. steering input or trailer movement during
this straight drive pauses the calibration.
• Securely fasten the sensor so that it is
During the turn, the system monitors
rigidly mounted and does not shake or
various vehicle parameters to make sure
wobble.
your vehicle and trailer are correctly
• Install within the range of the 12 way turning.
connector so that when the trailer
swings the wire harness does not For best results:
stretch, pinch or pull. • Use a smooth and level road when
attempting to calibrate.
If the system displays Pro Trailer Backup
Assist™ Sensor Not Detected Refer to • Steer and smoothly turn and avoid
Owner's Manual Press Knob to Exit or abrupt steering inputs.
Trailer Reverse Guidance Sensor Not • Drive between 2–16 mph (4–25 km/h).
Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
• Make a typical 90 degree corner turn.
OK to Exit:
Turning too shallow does not allow the
• Check that the 12 way connector is fully system to calibrate.
inserted into the 12 way socket. The red
rubber seal is not visible when the The typical calibration process results in
connector is fully inserted. the system displaying messages in the
information display. The system also
• Check that the wiring harness sensor displays additional warnings if the vehicle
connection is fully inserted at the trailer or trailer motion is not within the
sensor. calibration limits.
• Check for damaged wiring between the
12 way connector and the trailer sensor.
• If you have a 12 way connector inside
the bed and in the bumper, ensure that
only a single sensor is connected.
297
Towing
If the system remains on one message for Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Driving
an extended time, is not progressing Required to Initialize Steering Press Knob
through the typical calibration steps or if to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance Driving
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not Required to Initialize Steering Press OK to
Detected. Shift to Park Press Knob to Exit, Exit:
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not • The steering system needs to learn
Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press internal parameters to fully enable the
Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance feature. Drive your vehicle straight
Trailer Not Detected. Refer to Owner's forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) for
Manual. Press OK to Exit displays, check approximately 5 minutes.
the following:
• This may occur when your vehicle is
• Verify the sensor is correctly installed. new, the battery voltage is too low, the
See Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer battery has been disconnected or your
Sensor Installation. steering system has been serviced.
• Verify the trailer length is within the Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sensor Not
allowed range of 10–39 ft (3–11.94 m). Detected Refer to Owner's Manual Press
• Verify you are calibrating on a smooth Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance
road surface. Sensor Not Detected Refer to Owner's
Repeat calibration on a different route if Manual Press OK to Exit:
you have verified the previous checks. • Check that the 12 way connector is fully
inserted into the 12 way socket. The red
System Operation rubber seal is not visible when the
connector is fully inserted.
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during system operation. Tips to • Check that the wiring harness sensor
resolve them are listed in the following connection is fully inserted at the trailer
section. sensor.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not • Check for damaged wiring between the
Available or Trailer Reverse Guidance 12 way connector and the trailer sensor.
System is Not Available: • Only one sensor can be connected to
• The system relies on many your vehicle at a time. If you have a 7/12
sub-systems in your vehicle to correctly pin connector in the truck bed and in
operate. If those sub-systems are not the bumper, check to make sure that
correctly operating, the system may only one sensor is connected.
not be available. Note: If you did not purchase the fifth wheel
• Low battery voltage is a condition that prep pack, you need to replace the 7/4 way
prevents the system from operating. trailer connector in your bumper with a 7/12
Please make sure the battery is pin connector. See your authorized dealer.
correctly charged if the system is not Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not
available. Detected. Refer to Owner's Manual. Press
• If the message continues to display, Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance
see your authorized dealer for service. Trailer Not Detected. Refer to Owner's
Manual. Press OK to Exit:
• If the message continues to display,
see your authorized dealer for service.
298
Towing
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Trailer Not System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Detected Pull Forward to Initialize Press Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum trailer
Knob to Exit or Trailer Reverse Guidance angle Press Knob to Exit:
Trailer Not Detected Pull Forward to • Verify sensor is correctly installed. See
Initialize Press OK to Exit: Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer
• If the vehicle has not moved during this Sensor Installation.
key cycle, it must be driven forward to • Verify the correct trailer is selected in
initialize the sensing system. the information display.
• Extended operation at speeds below • The system may need to be
1 mph (1 km/h) may cause the sensing recalibrated. The system can be
system to lose the trailer position and recalibrated by using the information
the system needs to be re-initialized. display to delete the trailer and
• Drive forward above 2 mph (3 km/h) repeating the setup process. If the
and the system indicates when it same sensor is installed on another
initializes. trailer, create a new trailer in the
System repeatedly displays Pro Trailer information display and complete the
Backup Assist™ Stop Now System Not setup and calibration process for the
Active Press Knob to Exit: new trailer. If using the same sensor on
multiple trailers, disconnect the 7/12
• System is not fully activated. Select pin connector when switching trailers.
the trailer in the information display by See Setting Up The System.
using the controls on the steering
wheel and wait until Pro Trailer Backup System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Assist™ Backup Slowly Turn Knob to Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control
Steer Press Knob to Exit displays of Steering Wheel:
before starting to move backward. • The system displays this warning when
• This displays if you backup during the it can no longer steer the vehicle and
calibration process. Drive forward and you must take over steering. There are
complete calibration. four reasons why this warning displays
and additional information regarding
System does not reverse straight: the reason for the warning is available
• Verify sensor is correctly installed. See on the center display.
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer • The steering wheel is touched when
Sensor Installation. under system control. Avoid touching
• Factors such as the hitch connection, the wheel during system operation.
road camber, road slope and • The maximum speed for feature
compliance in the trailer suspension operation is exceeded. System
can influence how straight the system performance is optimized at slower
is able to reverse the trailer when the speeds. Reverse slowly.
knob is not turned. You can
compensate for the trailer drifting to
the right or left by slowly turning the
knob until the trailer is following your
preferred path and then holding the
knob in that position.
299
Towing
• The trailer is not detected. Once your This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
vehicle is stopped, additional warnings individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
indicate the trailer is not detected. engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
Refer to trailer not detected the stability control light flashes and the
troubleshooting tips. message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
• An internal condition for system SPEED appears in the information display.
operation was not met which requires The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
your vehicle to return to manual control down, then pull safely to the side of the
of the steering. Using the system for an road and check for proper tongue load and
extended period of time can cause the trailer load distribution. See Load
steering system to heat up and turn off Carrying (page 271).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist steering
control to protect itself. The system RECOMMENDED TOWING
may require a cool down time of up to
30 minutes. Keep the system off and WEIGHTS
drive forward at a normal speed or
switch the vehicle off.
WARNING: You must use
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL the heavy-duty drawbar pin
supplied with your vehicle when
using the heavy-duty hitch.
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway Failure to follow this instruction
control increases the risk of loss of could result in the loss of control
vehicle control, serious injury or death. of your vehicle, personal injury or
Ford does not recommend disabling this death.
feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as
hill climbing), the driver has significant Note: Vehicles with a 21,200 lb
trailer towing experience, and can control (9,616 kg) hitch and above must
trailer sway and maintain safe operation. use the drawbar pin that came with
the vehicle. You can obtain a
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer replacement drawbar pin at your
sway, but reduces it once it begins. authorized dealer.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers Note: Make sure to take into
from swaying.
consideration trailer frontal area.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too Do not exceed 60 ft² (5.6 m²)
high, the system may activate multiple trailer frontal area for conventional
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
trailers. Do not exceed 75 ft² (6.9
m²) trailer frontal area for fifth
wheel and gooseneck trailers.
300
Towing
Note: Exceeding this limitation Note: Certain states require

may significantly reduce the electric trailer brakes for trailers
performance of your towing over a specified weight. Be sure to
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a check state regulations for this
low aerodynamic drag and rounded specified weight. The maximum
front design helps optimize trailer weights listed may be limited
performance and fuel economy. to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
Note: Your vehicle could have include the wiring connector
reduced performance when needed to use electric trailer
operating at high altitudes and brakes.
when heavily loaded or towing a
trailer. When driving at elevation, Your vehicle may tow a trailer
in order to match driving provided the maximum trailer
performance as perceived at sea weight is less than or equal to the
level, reduce gross vehicle weight maximum trailer weight
and gross combination weight by calculated using the formula
2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation. following the chart.
Pickup and box delete

Maximum
Vehicle Engine Rear axle ratio GCWR
19,500 lb
3.73 (8,845 kg)
6.2L gas
22,000 lb
4.30 (9,979 kg)
23,500 lb
6.7L diesel 3.31 (10,659 kg)
F-250
30,000 lb
6.7L diesel
1
3.31, 3.55 (13,607 kg)
21,800 lb
3.55 (9,888 kg)
7.3L gas
26,000 lb
4.30 (11,793 kg)
F-350 single 19,500 lb
6.2L gas 3.73
rear wheel (8,845 kg)
301
Towing
Pickup and box delete

Maximum
Vehicle Engine Rear axle ratio GCWR
23,000 lb
4.30 (10,433 kg)
30,000 lb
3.31 (13,607 kg)
6.7L diesel
30,000 lb
3.55 (13,607 kg)
23,500 lb
3.73 (10,659 kg)
7.3L gas
27,500 lb
4.30 (12,473 kg)
3.73 20,000 lb
(9,071 kg)
6.2L gas
4.30 23,500 lb
(10,659 kg)
3.55 40,000 lb
F-350 dual rear (18,143 kg)
6.7L diesel
wheel 4.10 43,400 lb
(19,685 kg)
3.73 24,000 lb
(10,886 kg)
7.3L gas
4.30 28,000 lb
(12,700 kg)
4.30 45,300 lb
F-450 6.7L diesel (20,547 kg)
1 Trailer Tow Package.
302
Towing
Chassis cab
Rear axle Maximum
Vehicle Engine ratio GCWR
3.73 30,000 lb
6.7L diesel
F-350 single (13,607 kg)
rear wheel 4.30 26,000 lb
7.3L gas (11,793 kg)
3.73 31,500 lb
(14,288 kg)
6.7L diesel
4.10 32,500 lb
wheel 3.37 22,500 lb
(10,205 kg)
7.3L gas
4.30 26,000 lb
(11,793 kg)
4.10 32,500 lb
(14,741 kg)
6.7L diesel
F-450 dual rear 35,000 lb
4.30
wheel (15,875 kg)
28,000 lb
7.3L gas 4.88 (12,700 kg)
4.10 32,500 lb
(14,741 kg)
F-550 dual rear 6.7L diesel
wheel (17500/ 37,000 lb
4.30
18000 lb (16,782 kg)
GVWR)
28,000 lb
7.3L gas 4.88 (12,700 kg)
F-550 dual rear 32,500 lb
wheel (19000/ (14,741 kg)
6.7L diesel 4.88
19500 lb 40,000 lb
GVWR) (18,143 kg)
303
Towing
Chassis cab
Rear axle Maximum
Vehicle Engine ratio GCWR
28,000 lb
7.3L gas 4.88 (12,700 kg)
43,000 lb
6.7L diesel 4.88
wheel 30,000 lb
7.3L gas 4.88 (13,607 kg)
This equals the maximum loaded

Calculating the Maximum trailer weight for this combination.
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
1. Start with the gross combined your vehicle. Reduce the total
weight rating for your vehicle payload by the final trailer tongue
model and axle ratio. See the weight.
previous chart.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
2. Subtract all of the following to determine the maximum trailer
that apply to your vehicle: weight allowed for your vehicle if
• Vehicle curb weight. you are not sure.
• Hitch hardware weight, such as For additional information on
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight trailer weights, reference the RV
distributing hardware. & Trailer Towing Guide available
• Driver weight. at your authorized dealer, or
online.
• Passenger(s) weight.
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
• Aftermarket equipment weight.

Website www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides
304
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Trailer Towing Connector
WARNING: Make sure that the

vertical load on the tow ball is between
the minimum and maximum
recommended weight at all times.
result in the loss of control of your
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:

• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your E163167
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws When attaching the trailer wiring connector
for towing a trailer. to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
• See the instructions included with trailer functions. Some seven-position
towing accessories for the proper connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
installation and adjustment which confirms that it is the proper wiring
specifications. connector and works correctly with your
• Service your vehicle more frequently if vehicle.
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information. See Color Function
Scheduled Maintenance (page 565).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp
instructions the rental agency gives White Ground (-)
you.
See Load Limits in the Load Carrying Blue Electric brakes
chapter for load specification terms found Green Right turn signal and stop
on the tire label and Safety Compliance lamp
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load. Orange Battery (+)
Vehicles with a diesel engine have an Brown Running lights
engine braking feature. See General
Information (page 223). Grey Reverse lights
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Some vehicles will have the ability to
modify trailer towing features. See
305
Towing
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a

factory brake controller, the Battery (+)
Orange wire is powered when you start the A B C D E
engine and you apply the brakes at least
once when a trailer with brake lamps is
connected. If your vehicle is not equipped
with a factory brake controller, relays control
the system and it becomes active when you
power on your vehicle.
Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear

View Camera System
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Use the centerline (B) guideline to assist
you in setting your steering wheel properly
to help align the trailer hitch and tongue.
F
E142436
A Active guidelines.
B Centerline.
C Fixed guideline: Green zone.
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone.
E Fixed guideline: Red zone.
F Rear bumper.
Fixed guidelines are always shown in the

display, but the active guidelines only
display when the steering wheel is turned.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
306
Towing
The active guidelines fade in and out • A trailer hitch with a 3 inch receiver and
depending on the steering wheel position. a 5/8 inch hitch pin. Check the
The active guidelines are not shown when stamped rating number on the pin to
the steering wheel position is straight. determine the 21,200 lb (9,616 kg) or
24,200 lb (10,976 kg) hitch pin
Always use caution while reversing.
capacity.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are • A hitch pin sleeve stored in the glove
farther away. Objects are getting closer to box to use when mounting the 3 inch
your vehicle as they move from the green drawbar with the 3/4 inch pin hole.
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the • A cotter pin to help keep the hitch pin
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to in place.
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle. Installing a 3 Inch Drawbar with 3/4
Refer to the Rear View Camera section for Inch Pin Hole
additional information. See Rear View
Camera (page 235).
Hitches
Note: On pick-up trucks, the trailer hitch
provided on this vehicle enhances crash
protection for the fuel system. Do not
remove!
Note: Do not cut, drill, weld or modify trailer
hitches. Modifying trailer hitches can reduce
hitch rating.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% for conventional towing or
15-25% for fifth wheel towing of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue. Do
not exceed the tongue load rating
indicated on the conventional hitch
receiver.
Hitch Components (If Equipped) E247903
The following components are required. The pin sleeve should be inserted in the
Some are provided in certain vehicles. 3/4 inch pin hole of the 3 inch drawbar.
307
Towing
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring

bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper
is higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may
cause unpredictable handling, and could
result in serious personal injury.
E247902
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
Remove reducers before inserting the 3 following procedure:
inch drawbar. Insert the drawbar into hitch 1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
receiver. trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
E247909
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
Put the 5/8 inch hitch pin through pin hole. • Check that the trailer tongue securely
Place the cotter pin around the neck of attaches and locks onto the hitch.
hitch pin.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
308
Towing
Fifth-wheel Trailer Hitch (If Equipped) Safety Chains

Note: For a detailed description of Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
installation and other information, see the bumper. Always connect the safety chains
Owner's Manual-5th Wheel Trailer Hitch. to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
Note: The mounting pads in the bed are hitch.
specifically designed for certain fifth-wheel Install trailer safety chains to the trailer
trailer hitches and gooseneck ball hitches. hitch as recommended by the
Do not use these mounting pads for other manufacturer. Cross the chains under the
purposes. trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
Note: Contact an authorized dealer to turning tight corners. Do not allow the
purchase gooseneck and fifth-wheel hitches chains to drag on the ground.
that are compatible with your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
fifth-wheel prep package. This package
enables your vehicle to accept certain
fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck
ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch
attaches to the four mounting pads in the
pick-up bed. An optional 7-pin trailer wiring
connector may be in the bed as well. The
gooseneck ball hitch is a separate
mounting pad from the fifth-wheel hitch,
located in the center of the bed. E265060
Shorter pick-up boxes, such as the 6½-foot

If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
box on the F-250 and F-350, provide less
make sure the latch is fully closed.
clearance between the cab and the
fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailer Note: If you install the hook with the latch
compared to longer box pick-ups, such as facing toward the rear of your vehicle, you
an 8-foot box on the F-250 or F-350. When may not be able to fully close the safety
selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it is chain hook latch. If this occurs, install the
critical to check that this combination hook with the latch facing toward the front
provides clearance between the front of of your vehicle.
the trailer and tow vehicle for turns up to
90 degrees. Failure to follow this Trailer Brakes
recommendation could result in the trailer
contacting the cab of the tow vehicle
during tight turns that are typical during WARNING: Do not connect a
low-speed parking and turning maneuvers. trailer's hydraulic brake system directly
This contact could result in damage to the to your vehicle's brake system. Your
trailer and tow vehicle. vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
309
Towing
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or

surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed E183395
vehicles and trailers weighing more When used properly, the trailer brake
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded. controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
(If Equipped)
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
WARNING: The anti-lock brake You can adjust the amount of initial trailer
system does not control the trailer brake output by selecting one of three
brakes. settings through the message center.
Ford has tested the trailer brake controller
WARNING: Use the integrated to be compatible with several major
trailer brake controller to properly adjust brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer
the trailer brakes and check all brakes. Contact an authorized dealer for
connections before towing a trailer. information on which brands you can use.
The controller user interface consists of
result in the loss of control of your
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Note: The integrated Ford brake controller Pressing these buttons adjusts the
is compatible with trailers equipped with controller's power output to the trailer
electric-actuated drum brakes and brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
electric-over hydraulic brake systems. the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
Note: The integrated Ford brake controller braking). Pressing and holding a button
does not control hydraulic surge-style raises or lowers the setting continuously.
brakes. The gain setting displays in the message
center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
310
Towing
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
lever to the left to switch on the trailer's Controller Mode
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for Choose the low, medium or high setting
adjusting gain section for instructions on for the required initial trailer brake output.
proper use of this feature. If you use the
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs Note: Only perform this procedure in a
determines the power sent to the trailer traffic-free environment at speeds of
brakes. approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control The gain setting adjusts the trailer brake
lever lights both the trailer brake lamps controller for the specific towing condition.
and your vehicle brake lamps. You should change the setting as towing
Trailer brake control messages appear in conditions change. Changes to towing
the information display as follows: conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER:
Shows the current gain setting. The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=/ / / / making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
/ /: Displays when braking. The bars when using the brakes. Locked trailer
indicate the amount of power going to wheels may lead to trailer instability.
the trailer brakes.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
when the system senses a correct working condition, functioning normally
trailer wiring connection. and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays
when the system senses a trailer 2. Hook up the trailer and make the
disconnection. electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake 3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
Controller Effort or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
confirmation message appears in the
Choose either the electric option for trailers
with electromagnetic drum brakes, or the
electric over hydraulic option for trailers 4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
with these brake systems. buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
Trailer Brake Effort Setting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
The trailer brake controller allows the user
to customize how aggressively the trailer 5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
brakes engage. The default value is the low trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
setting and is the recommended setting of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
for most trailers. If your trailer's brakes squeeze the manual control lever
require more initial voltage, or if you prefer completely.
more aggressive trailer braking, then select
either the medium or the high setting.
311
Towing
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated Points to Remember

by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps brake controller without consulting the
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
point just below trailer wheel lock-up. result.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel • Adjust gain setting before using the
lock-up may not be attainable even trailer brake controller.
with the maximum gain setting of 10. • Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
Information Display Warning Messages above, whenever road, weather, trailer
or vehicle loading conditions change
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose from when the gain was initially set.
the trailer brake controller to determine • Only use the manual control lever for
exactly which trailer fault has occurred. proper adjustment of the gain during
However, your Ford warranty does not cover trailer setup. Misuse, such as
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer. application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT
vehicle.
Displays in response to faults sensed by • Avoid towing in adverse weather
the trailer brake controller, accompanied conditions. The trailer brake controller
by a single tone. If this message appears, does not provide anti-lock control of
contact an authorized dealer as soon as the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
possible for diagnosis and repair. The lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
controller may still function, but with in reduced stability of trailer and tow
degraded performance. vehicle.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER • The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
Displays when there is a short circuit on vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
the electric brake output wire. so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
If this message displays, with no trailer or harsh. This feature is only active
connected, the problem is with your vehicle when applying the brakes using your
wiring or trailer brake controller. Contact vehicle's brake pedal, not the
an authorized dealer. controller.
If the message only displays with a trailer • The controller interacts with the brake
connected, the problem is with the trailer control system and powertrain control
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for system of your vehicle to provide the
assistance. This can be a short to ground best performance on different road
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage conditions.
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
312
Towing
• Your vehicle's brake system and the • When stopped in congested or heavy
trailer brake system work traffic during hot weather, place the
independently of each other. Changing gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
the gain setting on the controller does transmission cooling and to help A/C
not affect the operation of your performance.
vehicle's brakes. • Turn off the speed control with heavy
• When you switch the engine off, the loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
controller output is disabled and the control may turn off automatically
display and module shut down. when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
Trailer Lamps • Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
WARNING: Never connect any overheat and become less effective.
trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
lamp wiring; this may damage the • If your transmission is equipped with a
electrical system resulting in fire. Contact Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
your authorized dealer as soon as this feature when towing. This provides
possible for assistance in proper trailer engine braking and helps eliminate
tow wiring installation. Additional excessive transmission shifting for
electrical equipment may be required. optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed • If your vehicle is equipped with
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake Adaptive Steering and you have
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are enabled Tow/Haul, the Adaptive
working. Steering system adjusts the steering
response to match your vehicle’s load.
Before Towing a Trailer The system reduces vehicle sensitivity
to steering inputs at higher vehicle
Practice turning, stopping and backing up speeds while it maintains the ease of
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer parking and maneuverability at low
combination before starting on a trip. speeds.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other • If your vehicle is equipped with
obstacles. AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
When Towing a Trailer maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
• Check your hitch, electrical connections slower speed while towing may reduce
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly this tendency.
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km). • If you are towing a trailer frequently in
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi gross combined weight rating (or any
(800 km). combination of these factors), consider
• Do not make full-throttle starts. refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
filled with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 441).
313
Towing
• Allow more distance for stopping with Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and the rear axle has been submerged in water.
brake gradually. Water may have contaminated the rear
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if axle lubricant, which is not normally
you must park on a grade: checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
FOUR WHEELS
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.) WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a ignition is in the accessory or on position
temporary or conventional spare tire. A when being towed.
"temporary" spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type Emergency Towing
(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
different manufacturer than the road tires If your vehicle becomes inoperable
on your vehicle. Consult information on the (without access to wheel dollies,
tire label or Safety Compliance label for car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
limitations when using. vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or and transmission configuration) under the
Personal Watercraft (PWC) following conditions:
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer • Your vehicle is facing forward for
before backing the trailer into the water. towing in a forward direction.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer • Place the transmission in neutral (N).
after you remove the trailer from the water. If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
When backing down a ramp during boat override it. See Transmission (page
launching or retrieval: 207).
• Do not allow the static water level to • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper. • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
• Do not allow waves to break higher Recreational Towing
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper. Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
Exceeding these limits may allow water to fumes from entering your vehicle. See
enter vehicle components: Climate Control (page 143).
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
314
Towing
Follow these guidelines if you have a need 9. Press and hold the OK button until a
for recreational towing, such as towing confirmation message appears in the
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We have information display.
designed these guidelines to prevent Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
damage to your transmission. transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles 10. If you do not see a message in the
display, you must perform the
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels procedure again from the beginning.
on the ground, as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. You must tow your 11. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the and turn the ignition off.
ground, such as when using a car-hauling 12. If your vehicle has an ignition key, you
trailer. must leave the key in the ignition
while towing.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles
Note: To lock and unlock your vehicle, use
If towing your vehicle with wheels off the the keyless entry keypad or extra set of keys.
ground it must be all four wheels, such as 13. If your vehicle has intelligent access,
when using a car-hauling trailer. switch the vehicle into accessory
To tow a four-wheel drive vehicle with all mode. See Starting and Stopping
wheels on the ground, place the transfer the Engine (page 174).
case in its neutral position and engage the Note: You do not need to leave your keys
four-wheel-down towing feature. in the vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
Perform the steps in the following section vehicle as you normally do.
after positioning your vehicle behind the 14. Release the brake pedal.
tow vehicle and properly securing them
together.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your WARNING: Do not disconnect the
vehicle to the tow vehicle. battery during recreational towing. It
prevents the transfer case from shifting
Towing With All Four Wheels On The properly and may cause the vehicle to
Ground roll, even if the transmission is in park
(P).
1. Put the ignition in the on position, but
do not start the engine. WARNING: Shifting the transfer
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. case to its neutral position for
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive control to recreational towing may cause the
2H. vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is
in park (P). It may injure the driver and
4. Shift into neutral (N). others. Make sure you press the foot
5. Using the instrument cluster display brake and the vehicle is in a secure, safe
controls on the steering wheel, select position when you shift to neutral (N).
Settings.
6. Select Advanced Settings. Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position while towing with all four
7. Select Vehicle. wheels on the ground will damage vehicle
8. Select Neutral Tow. components.
315
Towing
Note: You can check four-wheel-down Resolving the Shift Delayed Pull Forward
towing status at any time by opening the Message
driver's door or turning the ignition to the 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
accessory or on position. A message
displays in the information display 2. Put the transmission into neutral (N),
confirming your vehicle is in neutral tow. and then start the engine.
When finished towing with all four wheels 3. With the engine running, shift the
on the ground return the transfer case to transmission to drive (D) and let the
its 2H position: vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
1. With your vehicle still properly secured 4. Make sure the instrument cluster
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in displays that neutral tow is disabled.
the on position, but do not start the
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition
key, switch the key to on. If your vehicle
has intelligent access, switch the
vehicle into accessory mode. See
(page 174).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift out of neutral (N).
4. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral
Tow Disabled.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward
displays in the instrument cluster, a transfer
case blockage is present. See resolving the
shift delayed pull forward message
instructions after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake and disconnect
the vehicle from the tow vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the
engine and shift the transmission to
drive (D) to make sure the transfer
case is out of neutral (N).
7. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of neutral (N),
set the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.
316
Driving Hints
ECONOMICAL DRIVING • Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a

trailer.
Your fuel economy is affected by several • Carry unnecessary weight
things, such as how you drive, the (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
conditions you drive under, and how you lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
maintain your vehicle. weight carried).
You may improve your fuel economy by • Driving with the wheels out of
keeping these things in mind: alignment.
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, Conditions
moderate fashion. • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
• Drive at steady speeds without trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
stopping. speed.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may • Adding certain accessories to your
eliminate the need to stop. vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
• Combine errands and minimize rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
stop-and-go driving. racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling equipped).
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 • Using fuel blended with alcohol may
km/h]). lower fuel economy.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use • Fuel economy may decrease with lower
only the recommended size. temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
• Perform all regularly scheduled fuel economy as compared to driving
maintenance. on hilly terrain.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel • Transmissions give their best fuel
economy: economy when operated in the top
• Sudden accelerations or hard cruise gear and with steady pressure
accelerations. on the gas pedal.
• Revving the engine before turning it off. • Four-wheel-drive operation (if
• Idle for periods longer than one minute. equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front OFF-ROAD DRIVING
defroster.
Note: The following off-road driving
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain. information applies to Tremor package
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while equipped vehicles only.
driving.
317
Driving Hints
In addition to providing an excellent Basic Off-road Driving Techniques

on-road driving experience, your vehicle
excels at all types of off-road driving. Your • Grip the steering wheel with thumbs
vehicle has been designed and equipped on the outside of the rim. This reduces
to allow you to explore those places where the risk of injury due to abrupt steering
the road doesn’t take you, whether it’s a wheel motions that occur when
forest trail or the open desert. Before going negotiating rough terrain. Do not grip
off-roading, consult with your local the steering wheel with thumbs inside
governmental agencies to determine the rim.
designated off-road trails and recreation • Throttle, brake and steering inputs
areas. Also, be sure to understand any should be made in a smooth and
off-road vehicle registration requirements controlled manner. Sudden inputs to
for the area in which you plan on driving. the controls can cause loss of traction
Tread Lightly® is an educational program or upset the vehicle, especially while
designed to increase public awareness of on sloped terrain or while crossing
land-use regulations and responsibilities obstacles such as rocks or logs.
in our nation’s wilderness areas. Ford joins • Look ahead on your route noting
the U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land upcoming obstacles, changes to
Management in encouraging you to help surface texture, color changes and any
preserve our national forest and other other factors which may indicate a
public and private lands by treading lightly. change in available traction. Adjusting
the vehicle speed and route
Before taking your vehicle off-roading, a
accordingly. During pre-run, mark
basic vehicle inspection should be
obstacles with GPS markers to make
conducted to make sure that the vehicle
sure appropriate speeds are used to
is in peak operating condition.
avoid potential vehicle damage.
It is always recommended that at least • When driving off-road, if the front or
two vehicles are used while off-roading. rear suspension is bottoming-out
The buddy system helps make sure that and/or excessive contact with the
help is close at hand should a vehicle skid-plates is encountered, reduce
become stuck or damaged. It is also wise vehicle speed to avoid potential
to take supplies such as a first aid kit, damage to the vehicle.
drinking water, tow strap, cell or satellite
phone with you any time an off-road • When running with other vehicles, it is
excursion is planned. recommended that some form of radio
communication is used so the lead
Remove the front license plate before vehicle can notify others of obstacles
off-roading to achieve optimal that could cause damage.
performance.
• Always keep available ground
clearance in mind and pick a route that
minimizes the risk of catching the
underside of the vehicle on an obstacle.
318
Driving Hints
• When negotiating low speed obstacles, Hill Climbing

applying light brake pressure in
conjunction with the throttle will help
prevent the vehicle from lurching and WARNING: Extreme care should
will allow you to negotiate the obstacle be used when steering the vehicle in
in a more controlled manner. Using 4L reverse down a slope so as not to cause
also assists with this. the vehicle to swerve out of control.
• Use and equip supplemental safety
equipment. • Always attempt to climb a steep hill
• Please consult your local off-road along the fall line of the slope and not
group for other helpful tips. diagonally.
• Off-roading requires a high degree of • If the vehicle is unable to make it up
concentration. Even if your local law the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back
does not prohibit alcohol use while down the slope. Place the vehicle in
driving off-road, Ford strongly low range and slowly back down in
recommends against drinking alcohol reverse.
if you plan to off-road. • When descending a steep slope, select
low gear and engage trail control. Use
Crossing Obstacles the throttle and brake pedals to control
your descent speed as described earlier
• Review the path ahead before in this section using trail control. Note
attempting to cross any obstacles. It is that trail control is functional in reverse
best if the obstacles are reviewed from and should be used in this situation.
outside the vehicle so that there is a
good understanding of the terrains After Off-Road Driving
condition both in front of and behind
the obstacles. It is important to complete a full vehicle
• Approach obstacles slowly and slowly inspection after off-road driving. Some
creep the vehicle over. items to check include:
• If a large obstacle such as a rock • Make sure that tires are inflated to
cannot be avoided, choose a path that proper tire pressure as indicated on the
places the rock directly under the tire tire placard.
rather than the undercarriage of the • Check the wheels and undercarriage
vehicle. This helps prevent damage to for built up mud or debris which can
the vehicle. cause vehicle vibration.
• Ditches and washouts should be • Make sure that the grille and radiator
crossed at a 45 degree angle, allowing are clear of any obstructions that may
each wheel to independently cross the affect cooling.
obstacle. • Make sure that the brakes are in proper
working order and free of any mud,
stones and debris, which can become
trapped around the brake rotor,
backing plate and caliper.
• Check that the air filter is clean and dry.
• Inspect for torn or punctured boots on
ball joints, half shafts, steering gears.
319
Driving Hints
• Inspect exhaust system for damage or Note: Engine damage can occur if water
looseness. enters the air filter.
• Inspect undercarriage fasteners. If any
are loose or damaged, tighten or
For Vehicles without Tremor Off-
replace ensuring that the proper torque Road Package
specification is used. Note: Driving through standing water can
• Inspect the tires for any cuts in the cause vehicle damage.
tread or sidewall area. Also inspect the Note: Drive through water in an emergency
sidewall for any bulge indicating only and not as part of normal driving.
damage to the tire.
Before driving through standing water,
• Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks,
check the depth. Never drive through water
or other damage.
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
• Refit the front license plate if removed hubs.
previously.
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine. E176913
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 mi When driving through standing water, drive
(1,600 km) before towing a trailer. Make very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
sure you use the specified engine oil. See Your brake performance and traction may
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification be limited. After driving through water and
(page 449). as soon as it is safe to do so:
Do not add friction modifier compounds • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
or special break-in oils during the first few brakes and to check that they work.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation.
These additives may prevent piston ring • Check that the horn works.
seating. • Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
DRIVING THROUGH WATER the steering power assist works.
WARNING: Do not drive through

flowing or deep water as you may lose
320
Driving Hints
For Vehicles with Tremor Off-Road • Certification to government safety laws

Package such as occupant protection and airbag
deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
Your vehicle equipped with Tremor for an Alterer’s Label on the vehicle
Off-Road package is capable of traveling from the snowplow installer certifying
through water at a maximum depth of that the installation meets all
33 in (837 mm). When driving through applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
standing water do not exceed crawl speed Safety Standards (FMVSS).
of 4 mph (7 km/h).
• The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity
• Always determine the depth before (TARC) is on the lower right side of the
attempting a water crossing. vehicle’s Safety Compliance
• Proceed slowly and avoid splashing Certification Label. This applies to
water any more than is necessary. As Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb
the water depth increases, vehicle (4,536 kg) GVWR or less. This is the
speed must be reduced to avoid weight of permanently-attached
potential vehicle damage. auxiliary equipment, such as snowplow
frame-mounting hardware, that can
• Be aware that obstacles and debris
be added to the vehicle and satisfy
may be beneath the water’s surface.
Ford compliance certification to
• Keep the doors fully closed during the FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may
water crossing. require the auxiliary equipment installer
• Upon completion of the water crossing, additional safety certification
slowly drive a short distance and check responsibility. The Front Accessory
the brakes for full effectiveness. Reserve Capacity (FARC) is for
customer convenience.
• Rear ballast weight behind the rear
SNOW PLOWING axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
Ford recommends that the Super Duty
front-to-rear weight balance for proper
F-Series used for snow removal include
braking and steering.
the snowplow package option.
• Front wheel toe may require
Installing the Snowplow re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting the Ford Workshop Manual.
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book, • Headlight aim may require
snowplow section, found at re-adjustment.
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical
installation affects the following:
321
Driving Hints
• The tire air pressures recommended Snowplowing with your Airbag

for general driving are on the vehicle’s Equipped Vehicle
Safety Certification Label. The
maximum cold inflation pressure for
the tire and associated load rating is WARNING: Do not attempt to
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure service, repair, or modify the
may require re-adjustment within these supplementary restraint system or
pressure limits to accommodate the associated components. Failure to
additional weight of the snowplow follow this instruction could result in
installation. personal injury or death.
• Federal and some local regulations
require additional exterior lamps for WARNING: All occupants of your
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult vehicle, including the driver, should
your authorized dealer for additional always properly wear their seatbelts,
information. even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to
Operating the Vehicle with the properly wear your seatbelt could
Snowplow Attached seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow
removal until you have driven at least WARNING: Modifying or adding
500 mi (800 km). equipment to the front end of your
Ford recommends vehicle speed does not vehicle (including hood, bumper system,
exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when frame, front end body structure, tow
snowplowing. hooks and hood pins) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
If transporting a snowplow in summertime, increasing the risk of injury. Do not
cooling system airflow may be blocked by modify or add equipment to the front
the snowplow. Change the snowplow end of your vehicle.
height or position to improve airflow to the
radiator or limit your vehicle speed to a Note: Please refer to the Body Builders
maximum of 45 mph (72 km/h). Layout Book for instructions about the
The attached snowplow blade restricts appropriate installation of additional
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the equipment.
engine to run at a higher temperature: Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and
Attention to engine temperature is passenger airbag supplemental restraint
especially important when outside system. The supplemental restraint system
temperatures are above freezing. Angle will activate in certain frontal and offset
the blade to maximize airflow to the frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
radiator and monitor engine temperature sufficient frontal deceleration.
to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance. Careless or high speed driving while
plowing snow that results in sufficient
Follow the severe duty schedule in your vehicle decelerations can deploy the
Scheduled Maintenance information for airbags. Such driving also increases the risk
engine oil and transmission fluid change of accidents.
intervals.
322
Driving Hints
Never remove or defeat the tripping FLOOR MATS

mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle
and the snow removal equipment as well WARNING: Use a floor mat
as possible airbag deployment. designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
Engine temperature while plowing area. Failure to follow this instruction
When driving with a plow, your engine may vehicle, personal injury or death.
run at a higher temperature than normal
because the attached snowplow blade will WARNING: Pedals that cannot
restrict airflow to the radiator. move freely can cause loss of vehicle
• If you are driving more than 15 mi control and increase the risk of serious
(24 km) at temperatures above personal injury.
freezing, angle the plow blade either
full left or full right to provide WARNING: Secure the floor mat
maximum airflow to the radiator. to both retention devices so that it
cannot slip out of position and interfere
• If you are driving less than 15 mi with the pedals. Failure to follow this
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph instruction could result in the loss of
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you will not control of your vehicle, personal injury or
need to worry about blade position to death.
provide maximum airflow.
WARNING: Do not place additional
Transmission operation while floor mats or any other covering on top
plowing of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels this instruction could result in the loss of
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may control of your vehicle, personal injury or
fail and injure a passenger or bystander. death.
• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) WARNING: Always make sure that
when plowing in small areas at speeds objects cannot fall into the driver foot
below 5 mph (8 km/h). well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) that are loose can become trapped
when plowing larger areas or light snow under the pedals causing a loss of
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph vehicle control.
(24 km/h).
• Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.
323
Driving Hints
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor

mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
324
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE • Towing — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,
Vehicles Sold in the United States: local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
Getting Roadside Assistance eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
To fully assist you should you have a disablement location or to the nearest
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company authorized dealer. If a member
offers a complimentary roadside requests a tow to an authorized dealer
assistance program. This program is that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
separate from the New Vehicle Limited the disablement location, the member
Warranty. shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
The service is available:
• Roadside Assistance includes up to
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
• For the coverage period supplied with eligible vehicle requires service at the
your vehicle. nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
Roadside Assistance covers: vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
• A flat tire change with a good spare any roadside services.
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit). Vehicles Sold in the United States:
• Battery jump start. Using Roadside Assistance
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement Complete the roadside assistance
cost is the customer's responsibility). identification card and place it in your
• Fuel delivery — independent service wallet for quick reference. This card is in
contractors, if not prohibited by state, the Owner's Manual kit.
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
United States vehicle customers who
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
require Roadside Assistance, call
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
1-800-241-3673.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences If you need to arrange roadside assistance
within a 12-month period. for yourself, Ford Motor Company
• Winch out — available within 100 ft reimburses a reasonable amount for
(30 m) of a paved or county towing to the nearest dealership within
maintained road, no recoveries. 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
325
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting FUEL SHUTOFF

Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of WARNING: If your vehicle has been
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary involved in a crash, have the fuel system
roadside assistance program. This program checked. Failure to follow this instruction
is eligible within Canada or the continental could result in fire, personal injury or
United States. death.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week. Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
This program is separate from the New that various systems are safe to restart.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage Once the vehicle determines the systems
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside restart.
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage. Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
If you require more information, please call a qualified technician.
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca. The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
HAZARD FLASHERS impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
Note: The hazard flashers operate when you may restart your vehicle.
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle If your vehicle has a key system:
is not running, the battery loses charge. As 1. Switch off the ignition.
a result, there may be insufficient power to
2. Switch to start position.
restart your vehicle.
3. Switch off the ignition.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your 4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
hazard flashers when your fuel pump.
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
motorists. steps 1 through 4.
• Press the flasher control and all front If your vehicle has a push button start
and rear direction indicators flash. system:
• Press the button again to switch them 1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
off. vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
326
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
by pressing the brake pedal and disabled vehicle as this could damage the
START/STOP, or press START/STOP vehicle electrical system.
without pressing the brake pedal.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
steps 1 through 4. two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Do not attach the

WARNING: Batteries normally cables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers,
produce explosive gases which can the intake manifold or electrical
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not components as grounding points. Stay
allow flames, sparks or lighted clear of moving parts. To avoid reverse
substances to come near the battery. polarity connections, make sure that you
When working near the battery, always correctly identify the positive (+) and
shield your face and protect your eyes. negative (-) terminals on both the
Always provide correct ventilation. disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain WARNING: Do not attach the end
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, of the positive cable to the studs or
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when L-shaped eyelet located above the
working near the battery to protect positive (+) terminal of your vehicle’s
against possible splashing of acid battery. High current may flow through
solution. In case of acid contact with skin and cause damage to the fuses.
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt WARNING: Do not connect the end
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, of the second cable to the negative (-)
call a physician immediately. terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the
WARNING: Use only adequately gases that surround the battery.
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
Preparing Your Vehicle represents the booster vehicle.
Do not attempt to push-start your

automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
327
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
1 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
3 4 Removing the Jumper Cables
2 Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable

to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive 1
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal 2
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine, 3
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground E142665
connection point if available.
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
328
2. Remove the jumper cable on the

negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped). E143886
• Your vehicle runs out of power. If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled professional towing service or, if you are a
in specific markets. member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
WARNING: Block the wheels to
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
help prevent the vehicle from moving.
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.
WARNING: Unexpected and
possibly sudden vehicle movement may We produce a towing manual for all
occur if you do not take these authorized tow truck operators. Have your
precautions. tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
329
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive

vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such WARNING: Always slowly remove
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed the slack from the recovery strap prior
equipment. However, it is acceptable to to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your significantly higher loads which can
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle cause the recovery hooks to break off, or
configuration, you perform the following the recovery strap to fail which can cause
before towing: serious injury or death.
• If your vehicle has a manual-shift
transfer case, make sure the front WARNING: Never link two straps
wheel hub locks are in the FREE together with a clevis pin. These heavy
position before towing. metal objects could become projectiles
• If your vehicle has an electronic if the strap breaks and can cause serious
shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make injury or death.
sure you switch the four-wheel drive
control to the 2H position before Your vehicle comes equipped with
towing. frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly applied to them greater than the gross
four-wheel drive vehicle with the front vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
wheels on the ground without disengaging
the front hubs may cause damage to the Before using recovery hooks:
automatic transmission. • Make sure all attaching points are
Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or secure and capable of withstanding
an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel the applied load.
drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the • Never use chains, cables or tow straps
ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or with metal hook ends.
faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause • Only use recovery straps that have a
damage to the automatic transmission. minimum breaking strength two to
Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow a three times the gross vehicle weight of
dual rear wheel vehicle requires removing the stuck vehicle.
an outer rear wheel before towing. • Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
TOWING POINTS
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
WARNING: Using recovery hooks absorb the energy in the event the
is dangerous and should only be done by strap breaks.
a person familiar with proper vehicle
recovery safety practices. Improper use • Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
of recovery hooks may cause hook failure loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
or separation from the vehicle and could weight rating specified on the
result in serious injury or death. certification label.
330
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck

vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
331
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU Additional information and resources are

available online:
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be Website
performed by an authorized dealer. While www.owner.ford.com
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling These are some of the items that can be
authorized dealer who wants to ensure found online:
your continued satisfaction. • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so • Owner Manuals.
not all authorized dealers are authorized • Maintenance Schedules.
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
• Recalls.
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle • Ford Extended Service Plans.
to another authorized dealer. • Ford Genuine Accessories.
A reasonable time must be allowed to • Service specials and promotions.
perform a repair after taking your vehicle In Canada:
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or Mailing address
remanufactured or other parts that are Customer Relationship Centre
authorized by Ford. Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Away From Home Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
If you are away from home when your Telephone
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the 1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
online resources listed below to find the (TDD for the hearing impaired:
nearest authorized dealer. 1-888-658-6805)
In the United States:
Website
Mailing address
www.ford.ca
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248 Facebook
Dearborn, MI 48126 FordServiceCA (English)
Telephone FordServiceQC (Français)
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) Twitter

(TDD for the hearing impaired: @FordServiceCA
1-800-232-5952)
If your vehicle is configured as a
motorhome please call 1-800-444-3311
for support.
332
Customer Assistance
Additional Assistance IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
receiving, follow these steps: requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
1. Contact your Sales Representative or vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
Service Advisor at your selling or applicable express warranty after a
servicing authorized dealer. reasonable number of attempts, the
2. If your inquiry or concern remains manufacturer shall be required to either
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, replace the vehicle with one substantially
Service Manager or Customer Relations identical or repurchase the vehicle and
Manager. reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
3. If you require assistance or clarification
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
on Ford Motor Company policies,
for consumer use). The consumer has the
please contact the Ford Customer
right to choose whether to receive a refund
Relationship Center.
or replacement vehicle.
In order to help us serve you better, please
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
have the following information available
presumes that the manufacturer has had
when contacting a Customer Relationship
a reasonable number of attempts to
Center:
conform the vehicle to its applicable
• Vehicle Identification Number. express warranties if, within the first 18
• Your telephone number (home and months of ownership of a new vehicle or
business). the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located. 1. Two or more repair attempts are made
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading. on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
In some states within the United States,
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
you must directly notify Ford in writing
on the same nonconformity (a defect
before pursuing remedies under your
or condition that substantially impairs
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
allowed a final repair attempt.
OR
Additionally, in some states within the 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
United States, a consumer has the option of nonconformities for a total of more
of submitting a warranty dispute to the than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
BBB Auto Line before taking action under all at one time).
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
pursuing replacement or repurchase must also notify the manufacturer of the
remedies provided by certain state laws. need for the repair of the nonconformity
This dispute handling procedure is not at the following address:
required prior to enforcing state created Ford Motor Company
rights or other rights which are independent 16800 Executive Plaza Drive
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or Mail Drop 3NE-B
state replacement or repurchase laws. Dearborn, MI 48126
333
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting program are usually decided within 40
in court any rights or remedies conferred days after you file your claim with the BBB.
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are not bound by the decision, and
You are also required to use BBB AUTO may reject the decision and proceed to
LINE before exercising rights or seeking court where all findings of the BBB Auto
remedies created by the Federal Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. in the court action. Should you choose to
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
redress by pursuing rights and remedies is then bound by the decision, and must
not created by California Civil Code Section comply with the decision within 30 days
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss of receipt of your acceptance letter.
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
not required by those statutes.
information that follows, please call or
write to request a program application.
THE BETTER BUSINESS You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE new vehicle, information about your
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a needs to be completed, signed and
warranty concern has not been resolved returned to the BBB along with proof of
using the three-step procedure outlined ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB reviews
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the the claim for eligibility under the Program
Services you need section, you may be Summary Guidelines.
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program. You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of 1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor National Programs, Inc.
Company to explore options for settlement 1676 International Drive, Suite 550
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached McLean, VA 22102
during mediation or you do not want to BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
participate in mediation, and if your claim requested by calling the Ford Motor
is eligible, you may participate in the Company Customer Relationship Center
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing at 1-800-392-3673.
will be scheduled so that you can present
For additional information, refer to the
your case in an informal setting before an
Better Business Bureau website.
impartial person. The arbitrator considers
the testimony provided and makes a Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
decision after the hearing. right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
334
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE GETTING ASSISTANCE

MEDIATION/ARBITRATION OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) CANADA
For vehicles delivered to authorized Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
Canadian dealers. In those cases where country, contact the appropriate foreign
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford embassy or consulate. These officials can
of Canada and the authorized dealer to inform you of local vehicle registration
resolve a factory-related vehicle service regulations and where to find unleaded
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
Canada participates in an impartial third sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
party mediation/arbitration program
If you cannot find the proper fuel
administered by the Canadian Motor
recommended for your vehicle, contact
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
our Customer Relationship Center.
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
without proper conversion may damage
a disagreement when all other efforts to
the effectiveness of your emission control
produce a settlement have failed. This
system and may cause engine knocking or
procedure is without cost to you and is
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
Company or Ford of Canada is not
and expensive legal proceedings.
responsible for any damage caused by use
In the CAMVAP program, impartial of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at also result in difficulty importing your
mutually convenient times and places in vehicle back into the United States.
an informal environment. These impartial
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
arbitrators review the positions of the
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
parties, make decisions and, when
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
appropriate, render awards to resolve
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
CAMVAP services are available in all contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Canadian territories and provinces. For Assistance Center:
more information, without charge or
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 Customer Relationship Centers in:
or visit www.camvap.ca.
335
Customer Assistance
Customer Relation-
Phone Fax E-mail
ship Center
Asia Pacific N/A N/A apemcrc@ford.com

Caribbean and
+1-800-841-3673 N/A atnclien@ford.com
Central America
Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441067
UAE
80004441066
Middle East Saudi Arabia 971 4 3327 266 menacac@ford.com
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
Kuwait
22280384
North Africa N/A N/A nafcrc@ford.com
Puerto Rico and U.S.
+1-800-841-3673 N/A atnclien@ford.com
Virgin Islands
Sub-Saharan Africa N/A N/A ssacrc@ford.com
infokr1@ford.com or
South Korea +82-02-1600-6003 N/A
infokr@lincoln.com
If you are in another foreign country,

If you buy your vehicle in North America
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
and then relocate to any of the above
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
locations, register your vehicle
communicate your concern with the
identification number (VIN) and new
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
address with Ford Global Trade Services
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
336
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL If NHTSA receives similar

OWNER'S LITERATURE complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
To order the publications in this portfolio, safety defect exists in a group of
contact Helm, LLC at: vehicles, it may order a recall and
HELM, LLC remedy campaign. However,
47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200 NHTSA cannot become involved
Plymouth, Michigan 48170 in individual problems between
Attention: Customer Service you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Or to order a free publication catalog, call Company.
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
To contact NHTSA, you may call
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST the Vehicle Safety Hotline
Helm, LLC can also be reached by their toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
website: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.helminc.com www.safercar.gov; or write to:
(Items in this catalog may be purchased Administrator
by credit card, check or money order.)
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Obtaining a French Owner’s Southeast
Manual
Washington, D.C. 20590
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by You can also obtain other
contacting Helm, LLC using the contact information about motor vehicle
information listed previously in this section. safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(U.S. ONLY) (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
a defect which could cause a which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
crash or could cause injury or inform Transport Canada and Ford of
death, you should immediately Canada.
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
337
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Phone 1-800-333-0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1-800-565-3673
338
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART The engine compartment fuse box is in the

engine compartment. It has high-current
Engine Compartment Fuse Box fuses that protect your vehicle's main
electrical systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery, you need to reset some features.
battery before servicing high current See Changing the 12V Battery (page 379).
fuses.
Replace fuses with the same type and
rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 346).
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
E306306
339
Fuses
Fuse Fuse Protected Component

Number Rating
1 20 A Power point 4.
3 10 A Spot light module.
4 10 A Four-wheel drive vacuum solenoid.
5 40 A Active front steering.
6 10 A Snow plow.
7 30 A Trailer tow battery charge.
8 10 A Anti-lock brake system module.
9 10 A Electronic power assisted steering module.
10 30 A Trailer tow park lamps.
11 20 A Horn.
12 30 A Torque overlay.
13 30 A Power sliding rear window.
14 40 A Body control module - battery power in feed 1.
15 30 A Passenger seat power.
16 10 A Powertrain control module.
Transmission control module.
17 10 A Blind spot information system.
18 10 A Four-wheel drive module.
19 5A Adaptive cruise control.
20 15 A Heated mirrors.
21 40 A Heated rear window.
22 10 A On-board diagnostic module.
Smart data link connector.
23 15 A Transmission control module.
24 30 A Driver power seat.
25 25 A Voltage quality module.
340
Fuses

Number Rating
26 30 A Trailer tow battery charge.

27 20 A Rear heated seats.
28 25 A Glow plug (diesel).
— Not used (gas).
29 40 A Electric power assisted steering motor.
30 10 A Not used (spare).
33 10 A Alternator sense line 2.
34 50 A Electric cooling fan (gas).
Supplemental air heater (diesel).
37 60 A Anti-lock brake system pump.
38 60 A Inverter.
40 30 A Starter motor solenoid.
41 10 A Tailgate release solenoid.
42 40 A Blower motor.
43 10 A Trailer tow backup lamps.
44 40 A Trailer tow lighting module.
45 30 A Anti-lock brake system valve.
46 30 A Compressed natural gas module power.
47 50 A Supplemental air heater (diesel).
— Not used (gas).
48 50 A Supplemental air heater (diesel).
— Not used (gas).
341
Fuses

Number Rating
49 — Not used.
50 30 A Heated and cooled seats.
52 15 A Compressed natural gas (gas).
Fuel rail pressure relief control (diesel).
53 20 A Exhaust gas recirculation stepper motor (gas).
Universal exhaust gas oxygen sensors (gas).
Exhaust gas recirculation cooler bypass (diesel).
Urea pump motor controller (diesel).
Oxygen sensors.
54 20 A A/C clutch relay power.
Fan clutch.
55 5A Rain sensor.
56 30 A Windshield wipers.
57 10 A Upfitter interface module.
58 10 A Alternator sense line.
59 30 A Power running boards.
60 40 A Body control module - battery power in feed 2.
61 10 A Telescopic mirror motors.
62 40 A Trailer brake control.
Aftermarket e-brake access.
63 15 A Multi-contour seats.
64 20 A Ignition coil (gas).
Glow plug module (diesel).
Nitrogen oxide module (diesel).
Urea level and quality sensor (diesel).
65 30 A Fuel pump.
66 10 A A/C clutch solenoid.
67 40 A Auxiliary lighting module.
342
Fuses

Number Rating
69 60 A Body control module power.

70 30 A Trailer tow stop and turn lamps.
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse

Passenger Compartment Fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
Panel
Replace fuses with the same type and
The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of rating. See Changing a Fuse (page 346).
the passenger footwell behind a trim panel.
To remove the trim panel, pull it toward
you and swing it away from the side. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves
on the panel, and then push it shut.
E145984

Number Rating
1 — Not used.
2 10 A Driver door pack switch.
Power sliding rear window switch.
3 7.5 A Seat memory switch.
343
Fuses

Number Rating
Power lumbar motor.

Wireless charging module.
5 — Not used.
6 10 A Power telescoping mirrors switch.
Front power windows switch.
7 10 A Brake on-off switch.
8 5A Embedded modem.
9 5A Combined sensor module.
10 — Not used.
11 — Not used.
12 7.5 A On-board diagnostic module.
Smart data link connector.
Climate control module.
13 7.5 A Steering column control module.
Instrument cluster.
14 15 A Not used.
15 15 A SYNC.
Display.
16 — Not used.
17 7.5 A Active front steering module.
Park aid module.
18 7.5 A Selectable drive modes switch.
Select shift switch.
19 5A Head up display.
20 5A Ignition switch.
Key inhibit solenoid.
21 5A Head up display.
In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
22 5A Upfitter switches.
344
Fuses

Number Rating
23 30 A Driver front door module.

24 30 A Moonroof.
26 30 A Passenger front door module.
28 30 A Amplifier.
29 15 A Adjustable pedals switch.
30 5A Brake on-off output to trailer brake controller and customer access
circuits.
31 10 A Remote keyless entry.
32 20 A Radio.
33 — Not used.
34 30 A Run/start relay.
35 5A Not used (spare).
36 15 A Camera module.
Lane keeping system.
Auto-dimming interior mirror.
Rear heated seats.
37 20 A Heated steering wheel.
38 30 A Power windows.
Circuit
Breaker
Note: Spare fuse amperage may vary.
345
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse

with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe E217331
wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
346
Fuses
Callout Fuse Type
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
347
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION Working with the Engine On
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help

maintain its roadworthiness and resale WARNING: To reduce the risk of
value. There is a large network of vehicle damage and personal burn
authorized dealers that are there to help injuries, do not start your engine with the
you with their professional servicing air cleaner removed and do not remove
expertise. We believe that their specially it while the engine is running.
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. 1. Set the parking brake and shift the
They are supported by a wide range of transmission to park (P).
highly specialized tools developed 2. Block the wheels.
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
necessary parts and service. Check your HOOD
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered. 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, of the instrument panel.
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough E166491
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning 2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
material (such as cigarettes) away locate the secondary release lever
from the battery and all fuel related under the front of the hood near the
parts. center of your vehicle.
Working with the Engine Off

1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
348
Maintenance
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders

hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.
E190266
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.2L
E330427
A Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 379).

B Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 339).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 352).
349
Maintenance
D Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 364).

E Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 377).
F Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 382).
G Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 379).
H Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 378).
I Engine oil fill cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 352).
J Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 357).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.7L DIESEL
E310091
A Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 379).

B Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 339).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 352).
D Secondary fuel filter. See Changing the Engine-Mounted and Diesel Fuel
Conditioner Module Fuel Filters (page 386).
E Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 354).
350
Maintenance
F Engine cooling system coolant reservoir - primary high-temperature cooling

system. See Engine Coolant Check (page 364).
G Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 377).
H Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 379).
I Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 382).
J Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 378).
K Secondary cooling system coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page
364).
L Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 358).
M Air filter restriction gauge. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 358).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 7.3L
E314803
A Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 382).
B Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 368).
C Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 377).
D Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 339).
351
Maintenance
E Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 378).
F Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 352).
G Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 352).
H Air cleaner assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 357).
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.2L ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 7.3L
E161560 E250320
A MIN A Minimum.
B MAX B Nominal.
C Maximum.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.7L
DIESEL ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.2L
To check the engine oil level consistently
A B and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Run engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
E71362
neutral (N).
A Minimum. 4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
B Maximum. pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
352
Maintenance
5. Open the hood. See Opening and

Closing the Hood (page 348).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. For 6.2L V8 See
Under Hood Overview (page 349).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 352).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
E142732
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 441). Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
emission system protection standards and
engine is running.
fuel economy requirements of the
Note: If the oil level is between the International Lubricants Specification
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
To top up the engine oil level do the
Note: The oil consumption of new engines following:
reaches its normal level after approximately
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
oil filler cap before you remove it.
Adding Engine Oil 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. For
6.2L V8 See Under Hood Overview
(page 349).
WARNING: Do not remove the filler 3. Only add engine oil that meets our
cap when the engine is running. specifications. See Capacities and
Do not use supplemental engine oil
4. Recheck the oil level.
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may 5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
353
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.7L Adding Engine Oil

DIESEL
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make Do not use supplemental engine oil
sure the transmission is in park (P) or additives because they are unnecessary
neutral (N). and could lead to engine damage that may
2. Run engine until it reaches normal not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
operating temperature. To top up the engine oil level do the
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level following:
ground. 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 oil filler cap before you remove it.
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
pan. Checking the engine oil level too Under Hood Overview (page 349).
soon after you switch the engine off Turn it counterclockwise and remove
may result in an inaccurate reading. it.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and 3. Add engine oil of the proper viscosity
Closing the Hood (page 348). and grade that meets Ford
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with specifications. See Engine Oil
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Capacity and Specification (page
Hood Overview (page 349). 450). You may have to use a funnel to
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it pour the engine oil into the opening.
again to check the oil level. See 4. Recheck the oil level.
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 352). 5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
8. Make sure that the oil level is between dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
the maximum and minimum marks. If 6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
the oil level is at the minimum mark, it clockwise until you feel a strong
add oil immediately. See Engine Oil resistance.
Capacity and Specification (page
449). Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the maximum mark may cause engine damage.
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the correctly.
engine is running.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
Note: If the oil level is between the absorbent cloth immediately.
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
354
Maintenance
Engine lubrication for severe Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
service operation engine is running.
The following conditions define severe Note: If the oil level is between the
operation for which engine operation with maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
SAE 5W-40 oil which meets Ford is acceptable. Do not add oil.
specification, WSS-M2C171-F1, is Note: The oil consumption of new engines
recommended. Oil and oil filter change reaches its normal level after approximately
intervals will be determined by the 3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ as noted
previously. Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 7.3L WARNING: Do not remove the filler

cap when the engine is running.
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make additives because they are unnecessary
sure the transmission is in park (P) or and could lead to engine damage that may
neutral (N). not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 565).
E142732
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
Scheduled Maintenance (page 565). by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it An oil with this trademark symbol
again to check the oil level. See conforms to the current engine and
Scheduled Maintenance (page 565). emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
8. Make sure that the oil level is between International Lubricants Specification
the maximum and minimum marks. If Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities To top up the engine oil level do the
and Specifications (page 441). following:
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
355
Maintenance
3. Add engine oil that meets the correct 5. For diesel engines, you need to reset
specification. the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™. See
4. Recheck the oil level. Information Displays (page 110).
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the Engine lubrication for severe
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. service operation
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
The following conditions define severe
it clockwise until you feel a strong
operation for which engine operation with
resistance.
SAE 5W-40 that meets our specification
Note: Do not add oil further than the WSS-M2C171-F1 is recommended. Oil and
maximum mark. Oil levels above the oil filter change intervals will be
maximum mark may cause engine damage. determined by the Intelligent Oil Life
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap Monitor™ as noted previously.
correctly. • Frequent or extended idling (over 10
Note: Soak up any spillage with an minutes per hour of normal driving).
absorbent cloth immediately. • Low-speed operation/stationary use.
• If vehicle is operated in sustained
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL ambient temperatures below -9°F
(-23°C) or above 100°F (38°C).
AND OIL FILTER
• Frequent low-speed operation,
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel consistent heavy traffic less than
engine, an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ 25 mph (40 km/h).
calculates the proper oil change service • Operating in severe dust conditions.
interval. When the information display • Operating the vehicle off road.
indicates: OIL CHANGE REQUIRED, change
the engine oil and oil filter. See • Towing a trailer over 1,000 mi
Information Displays (page 110). (1,600 km).
• Sustained, high-speed driving at Gross
The engine oil filter protects your engine
Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum
by filtering harmful, abrasive or sludge
loaded weight for vehicle operation).
particles and particles significantly smaller
than most available will-fit filters. See • Use of fuels with sulfur content other
Motorcraft Parts (page 443). than ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD).
1. Unscrew the oil filter and oil pan drain • Use of high-sulfur diesel fuel.
plug and wait for the oil to drain.
2. Replace the filter. OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
Note: Do not handle hot oil filter with bare RESET
hands.
Use the information display controls on
3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug.
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
4. Refill the engine with new oil. See indicator.
Engine Oil Capacity and
356
Maintenance
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter

From the main menu scroll to: element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
Message Action and description may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Truck Info Press the down arrow Change the air filter element at the correct
button, then from this menu service interval. See Scheduled
scroll to the following Maintenance (page 565).
message.
Mainten- Press the OK button. x4
ance
Monitor
Oil Life: Press the down arrow
xxx% button, then from this menu
scroll to the following 2 3
message.
Oil Life Press the OK button.
Oil Life Press and hold the OK
Hold OK to button until the instrument
Reset cluster displays the
following message.
4
Oil Life: 100%
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%. 1
Repeat the process if the oil
change indicator does not
reset.
E226426
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR 1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
FILTER - 6.2L electrical connector, if required.
2. Remove the air intake tube securing
clamp.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of 3. Pull the air intake tube away from the
vehicle damage and personal burn air filter housing.
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove 4. Remove the clips that secure the air
it while the engine is running. filter housing cover. Remove the air
filter housing cover.
Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
443).
357
Maintenance
E226427
5. Remove the air filter element from the

air filter housing.
6. Install in the reverse order.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR E310318

FILTER - 6.7L DIESEL 1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector, if required.
2. Remove the clips (x3) that secure the
WARNING: To reduce the risk of air filter housing cover. Remove the air
vehicle damage and personal burn filter housing cover. Disconnect and
injuries, do not start your engine with the pull the air intake tube away, as
air cleaner removed and do not remove needed.
it while the engine is running.
Use the correct specification air filter

element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
443).
element may result in severe engine
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 565). E310319
3. Remove the air filter element from the

air filter housing.
358
Maintenance
4. Remove the auxiliary foam filter from Check the air filter restriction gauge
the air filter housing. whenever you open the hood to carry out
5. To install, reverse the removal general engine maintenance or at least
procedure. The housing cover can be every 7,500 mi (12,000 km). If you operate
oscillated slightly left to right to assist your vehicle in extremely dusty conditions,
with installation as needed, until check the gauge at least every 500 mi
positioned such that all three clips can (800 km) or two weeks, whichever occurs
be re-engaged. first. Change the air filter element when
the restriction gauge reads near the
Air Filter Restriction Gauge change filter line and the gauge is yellow.
Allowing the restriction gauge to reach
maximum affects engine performance and
fuel economy.
Operating your vehicle in heavy snowfall
or extreme rain conditions may allow
excessive amounts of snow or water into
the air intake system. This could restrict air
flow and cause the engine to lose power
or shut down.
After installing a new air filter element, you
must reset the gauge by pressing the reset
button.
After operating your vehicle during heavy
snowfall or extreme rain, do the following:
• Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear any snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet and
reset the air filter restriction gauge.
• Extreme rain: The air filter element
dries out after approximately 15–30
minutes of driving at highway speeds.
At the earliest opportunity, open the
hood and reset the air filter restriction
gauge.
Note: Do not remove the foam filter.
E310420
The air filter restriction gauge is in the

upper housing of the air filter assembly.
359
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR

FILTER - 7.3L
WARNING: To reduce the risk of

vehicle damage and personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with the
air cleaner removed and do not remove
it while the engine is running.
Note: Operating your vehicle in heavy

E163756
snowfall or extreme rain conditions may
allow excessive amounts of snow or water 2. Reposition the locking clip on the
into the air intake system. This could plug connector, squeeze the connector and
or soak the air filter that could cause the pull it off of the air outlet tube.
engine to lose power or shut down.
When replacing the air filter element, use
a Motorcraft® air filter element. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 443).
element may result in severe engine
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 565).
E270821
3. Clean the area from around the air tube

to the air cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system. Next,
loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp
so the clamp is no longer snug to the
air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner
housing.
E270820
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor

electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. Disconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector.
360
Maintenance
x3
E163760
10. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor

electrical connector to the outlet
tube. Make sure the locking tab on
the connector is in the locked
position.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER

E207259 WATER TRAP - 6.7L DIESEL
5. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Push the air filter
cover toward the center of the vehicle WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
and up slightly to release it. in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
6. Remove the air filter element from the disposal facility.
air filter housing.
7. Install the new air filter element. Your vehicle has a diesel fuel conditioner
8. Engage the clips to secure the air filter module. The module is mounted between
housing cover to the air filter housing. the outboard side of the fuel tank and the
Be careful not to crimp the filter frame rail.
element edges between the air filter Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
housing and cover. Ensure that you tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
align the tabs on the edge properly into on some models.
the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube clamp
bolt snugly. Do not over tighten
air-tube clamp bolt.
361
Maintenance
You should drain water from the to exceed this level, the water may pass
module assembly whenever the through to the engine and may cause fuel
warning light illuminates or a injection equipment damage.
display advising you to drain the water Filter Location
separator. This occurs when approximately
6.76 fl oz (200 ml) of water accumulates Use the tables below to find the location
in the module. If you allow the water level of your filter.
Pick-up Truck
Cab Type Box Length Filter Location
Regular. 8 ft (2.4 m)
Left side of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
SuperCab.
8 ft (2.4 m)
In front of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
Super Crew Cab.
8 ft (2.4 m) Left side of fuel tank.
Chassis Cab
Cab Type Fuel Tank Type Filter Location
Chassis Cab. Single midship fuel tank Right side of fuel tank.
Right side of midship fuel
Chassis Cab. Aft axle/midship fuel tanks
tank.
Chassis Cab. Single aft axle fuel tank Front of fuel tank.
Draining the Diesel Fuel

Conditioner Module
1. Switch the engine off.
2. Access the underside of your vehicle.
362
Maintenance
2 E269861
4. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner

module. Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
Drain the filter, approximately 0.5 gal
E226475 (2 L), into an appropriate container.
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
3. Use the table to find the location of module.
your fuel filter.
5. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to
tighten the drain plug.
6. Prime the system by turning the key to
the on position for 30 seconds. Turn
the key to the off position, then the on
position again for another 30 seconds.
Repeat this twice.
363
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK - Maintain coolant concentration within

48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
6.2L point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We
WARNING: Do not remove the recommend Robinair® Coolant and
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is Battery Refractometer 75240 (Rotunda
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 tool part number: ROB75240). We do not
minutes for the cooling system to cool recommend the use of hydrometers or
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap coolant test strips for measuring coolant
with a thick cloth to prevent the concentration.
possibility of scalding and slowly remove Note: Automotive fluids are not
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
could result in personal injury. windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in
the windshield washer reservoir. If Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could system sealants, or additives as they can
make it difficult to see through the cause damage to the engine cooling or
windshield. heating systems. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
WARNING: To reduce the risk of Warranty.
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant Adding Coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid
can come out forcefully when you loosen WARNING: Do not remove the
the cap slightly. coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
WARNING: Do not add coolant minutes for the cooling system to cool
further than the MAX mark. down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the
When the engine is cold, check the possibility of scalding and slowly remove
concentration and level of the coolant at the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
the intervals listed in the scheduled could result in personal injury.
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 565). It is very important to use prediluted
coolant meeting the correct specification
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is in order to avoid plugging the small
between the MIN and the MAX marks on passageways in the engine cooling system.
the coolant reservoir. See Cooling System Capacity and
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The Specification (page 456). Incorrect
level may extend beyond the MAX mark. prediluted coolant use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
364
Maintenance
To top up the coolant level do the Do not use the following as a coolant
following: substitute:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure • Alcohol.
escapes as you unscrew the cap. • Methanol.
2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the • Brine.
correct specification. See Scheduled
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level. Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
hard stop. the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant the coolant.
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. Recycled Coolant
Do not mix different colors or types of We do not recommend the use of recycled
prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing coolant as an approved recycling process
of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect is not yet available.
prediluted coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may Dispose of used engine coolant in an
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of for recycling and disposing of automotive
engine coolant per month, have your fluids.
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of Severe Climates
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage. If you drive in extremely cold climates:
In case of emergency, you can add a large • It may be necessary to increase the
amount of water without prediluted coolant concentration above 50%.
coolant in order to reach a vehicle service • A coolant concentration of 60%
location. On arrival do the following: provides improved freeze point
1. Drain the cooling system. protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
2. Chemically clean the cooling system. protection characteristics of the
We recommend Motorcraft Premium coolant and may cause engine
Cooling System Flush. damage.
3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon
as possible.
Water alone, without prediluted coolant,
can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
365
Maintenance
If you drive in extremely hot climates: Continued operation increases the engine
• It may be necessary to decrease the temperature, causing the engine to
coolant concentration to 40%. completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat When the engine temperature cools, you
protection. Coolant concentrations can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
below 40% decrease the freeze and checked as soon as possible to minimize
corrosion protection characteristics of engine damage.
the coolant and may cause engine
damage. When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme

climates should use prediluted coolant for WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
optimum cooling system and engine use during emergencies only. Operate
protection. your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
Fail-Safe Cooling to rest in a safe location and seek
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
drive your vehicle before any incremental mode, your vehicle will have limited
component damage occurs. The fail-safe power, will not be able to maintain
distance depends on ambient high-speed operation, and may
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
If the engine begins to overheat, the crash resulting in serious injury.
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone: WARNING: Do not remove the
A warning lamp illuminates and coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
a message may appear in the on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
information display. minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
If the engine reaches a preset could result in personal injury.
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating Your vehicle has limited engine power
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
acts as an air pump and cools the engine. vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
When this occurs, your vehicle still maintain high-speed operation and the
operates, however: engine may operate poorly.
• Engine power is limited. Remember that the engine is capable of
• The air conditioning system turns off. automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
366
Maintenance
2. If you are a member of a roadside You may notice a reduction in vehicle

assistance program, we recommend speed caused by reduced engine power in
that you contact your roadside order to manage the engine coolant
assistance service provider. temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
3. If this is not possible, wait a short mode if certain high-temperature and
period for the engine to cool. high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant vehicle loading, grade and ambient
level is at or below the minimum mark, temperature. If this occurs, there is no
add prediluted coolant immediately. need to pull off the road. You can continue
5. When the engine temperature cools, to drive your vehicle.
you can re-start the engine. Have your The air conditioning may automatically
vehicle checked as soon as possible to turn on and off during severe operating
minimize engine damage. conditions to protect the engine from
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair overheating. When the coolant
increases the chance of engine damage. temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
Engine Coolant Temperature turns on.
Management (If Equipped)
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
WARNING: To reduce the risk of soon messages appear in your information
crash and injury, be prepared that the display, do the following:
vehicle speed may reduce and the
vehicle may not be able to accelerate 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
with full power until the coolant possible and shift the transmission into
temperature reduces. park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the coolant temperature gauge needle
engine may temporarily reach a higher returns to the normal position. After
temperature during severe operating several minutes, if the temperature
conditions, for example ascending a long does not drop, follow the remaining
or steep grade in high ambient steps.
temperatures. 3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
At this time, you may notice the coolant cool. Check the coolant level.
temperature gauge moves toward the red 4. If the coolant level is at or below the
zone and a message may appear in the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
information display. immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
367
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK - Maintain coolant concentration within

48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
6.7L DIESEL point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Check the coolant concentration
using a refractometer. We do not
WARNING: Do not remove the recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is coolant test strips for measuring coolant
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 concentration.
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap Adding Coolant
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction WARNING: Do not add engine
could result in personal injury. coolant when the engine is on or the
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow
WARNING: Do not put coolant in this instruction could result in personal
the windshield washer reservoir. If injury.
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the WARNING: Do not remove the
windshield. coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
WARNING: To reduce the risk of minutes for the cooling system to cool
personal injury, make sure the engine is down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
cool before unscrewing the coolant with a thick cloth to prevent the
pressure relief cap. The cooling system possibility of scalding and slowly remove
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
can come out forcefully when you loosen could result in personal injury.
the cap slightly.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
WARNING: Do not add coolant interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
further than the MAX mark. windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
When the engine is cold, check the Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
concentration and level of the coolant at system sealants, or additives as they can
the intervals listed in the scheduled cause damage to the engine cooling or
maintenance information. See Scheduled heating systems. Resulting component
Maintenance (page 565). damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is Warranty.
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
368
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted 4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
coolant approved to the correct the cap clockwise until it contacts the
specification to avoid plugging the small hard stop.
passageways in the engine cooling system. 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
See Cooling System Capacity and reservoir the next few times you drive
Specification (page 455). Do not mix your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
different colors or types of coolant in your prediluted engine coolant to bring the
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using coolant level to the proper level.
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. use the approved antifreeze concentrate
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and Cooling System Capacity and
models may not be approved to our Specification (page 455). Using water that
specifications and may cause damage to has not been deionized may contribute to
the cooling system. Resulting component deposit formation, corrosion or plugging of
damage may not be covered by the vehicle the small cooling system passageways.
Warranty.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
If the coolant level is at or below the engine coolant per month, have your
minimum mark, immediately add vehicle checked as soon as possible.
prediluted coolant. Operating an engine with a low level of
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems coolant can result in engine overheating
with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant and possible engine damage.
recovery system, add coolant to the In case of emergency, you can add a large
coolant recovery reservoir when the engine amount of water without prediluted
is cool. Add prediluted coolant to the coolant in order to reach a vehicle service
maximum level. For all vehicles which have location. On arrival do the following:
a coolant degas system with a pressurized
cap, or if it is necessary to remove the 1. Drain the cooling system.
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator, 2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
follow these steps to add engine coolant: We recommend Motorcraft Premium
1. Turn the engine off and let it cool. Cooling System Flush.
2. Slowly unscrew the cap. Any pressure 3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon
escapes as you unscrew the cap. as possible.
3. Slowly fill the coolant reservoir with Water alone, without prediluted coolant,
prediluted engine coolant to within the can cause engine damage from corrosion,
minimum and maximum range on the overheating or freezing.
engine coolant reservoir. If you Do not use the following as a coolant
removed the radiator cap in an substitute:
overflow system, fill the radiator until
• Alcohol.
the coolant is visible and the radiator
is almost full. If you add coolant to • Methanol.
bring the level within the minimum and • Brine.
maximum range when the engine is not
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
cold, the system may remain under
filled.
369
Maintenance
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine 10. Engine cooling system: Repeat steps
damage from overheating or freezing. 5 through 9 until the coolant level has
Do not add extra inhibitors or non-specified stabilized and is no longer dropping
additives to the coolant. These can be after each step and the upper
harmful and compromise the corrosion radiator hose at the radiator is warm
protection of the coolant. to the touch, indicating that the
engine thermostat is open and
Engine and Secondary Cooling coolant is flowing through the
System Refill Procedure radiator.
11. Check the secondary cooling system.
Perform this procedure when refilling the Repeat steps 1 through 10 until the
engine or secondary cooling systems after coolant level has stabilized and is no
it has been drained or become extremely longer dropping after each step and
low: the lower passenger side of the
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the secondary radiator is warm to the
engine off and let it cool. touch, indicating secondary
thermostat is open and coolant is
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick
flowing through the entire system.
cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap
counterclockwise until pressure begins 12. Check the coolant level in both
to release. systems before you drive your vehicle
the next few times.
3. Step back when the pressure releases.
13. If necessary, add prediluted engine
4. When you are sure that all the pressure
coolant to the coolant reservoirs until
has been released, use the cloth to turn
the coolant level is within the
the cap counterclockwise and then
minimum and maximum range as
remove it.
listed on the reservoir. After you add
5. Slowly add prediluted engine coolant coolant, check the coolant
to the coolant reservoir until the concentration.
coolant level is within the minimum
and maximum range as listed on the Recycled Coolant
reservoir.
We do not recommend the use of recycled
6. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. coolant as an approved recycling process
7. Start and run the engine at 2000 rpm is not yet available.
for 2 minutes. Dispose of used engine coolant in an
8. Shut the engine off, and remove the appropriate manner. Follow your
pressure relief cap as previously community’s regulations and standards
outlined. for recycling and disposing of automotive
9. If required, add prediluted engine fluids.
coolant to the coolant reservoir until
the coolant level is within the minimum
and maximum range as listed on the
reservoir.
370
Maintenance
Severe Climates Engine-driven Cooling Fan

If you drive in extremely cold climates: Your vehicle may have an engine driven
• It may be necessary to increase the cooling fan drive also called a fan clutch.
coolant concentration above 50%. This fan drive changes the fan speed to
match the vehicle’s changing cooling air
• A coolant concentration of 60% flow requirements. Fan speed, fan noise
provides improved freeze point level and fuel consumption all will increase
protection. Coolant concentrations based on the driving conditions that
above 60% decrease the overheat include trailer towing, hill climbing, heavy
protection characteristics of the loads, high speed and high ambient
coolant and may cause engine temperature, individually or in combination.
damage.
The fan drive is designed to provide the
If you drive in extremely hot climates: minimum fan speed and resulting
• You can decrease the coolant minimum fan noise and fuel consumption
concentration to 40%. required to meet the ever-changing vehicle
• Coolant concentrations below 40% cooling air flow requirements. You can hear
decrease the freeze and corrosion the amount of fan noise increasing and
protection characteristics of the decreasing as the engine power
coolant and may cause engine requirements and vehicle driving conditions
damage. change as you drive. This is normal to the
operation of your vehicle. You may also
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme hear high levels of the fan when the engine
climates should use prediluted engine is first started and should normally
coolant for optimum cooling system and decrease after driving for a short time.
engine protection.
Coolant Change ENGINE COOLANT CHECK -

Follow the specific mileage intervals, as 7.3L
listed in the scheduled maintenance
information, to change the coolant. The
information display may display a message WARNING: Do not remove the
to change coolant at this time. Add coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
prediluted coolant approved to the correct on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
specification. See Capacities and minutes for the cooling system to cool
Specifications (page 441). down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
WARNING: Do not put coolant in

the windshield washer reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
371
Maintenance
WARNING: To reduce the risk of WARNING: Do not remove the

personal injury, make sure the engine is coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
pressure relief cap. The cooling system minutes for the cooling system to cool
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
can come out forcefully when you loosen with a thick cloth to prevent the
the cap slightly. possibility of scalding and slowly remove
WARNING: Do not add coolant could result in personal injury.
further than the MAX mark.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
When the engine is cold, check the interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
concentration and level of the coolant at windshield washer fluid outside of its
the intervals listed in the scheduled specified function and vehicle location.
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is as they can cause damage to the engine
between the MIN and MAX marks on the cooling or heating systems. Resulting
coolant reservoir. component damage may not be covered by
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The the vehicle Warranty.
level may extend beyond the MAX mark. It is very important to use prediluted
Maintain coolant concentration within coolant approved to the correct
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze specification in order to avoid plugging the
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F small passageways in the engine cooling
(-37°C). Check the coolant concentration system. See Cooling System Capacity
using a refractometer. We do not and Specification (page 455). Do not mix
recommend the use of hydrometers or different colors or types of coolant in your
coolant test strips for measuring coolant vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
concentration. an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
Adding Coolant not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
WARNING: Do not add engine specifications and may cause damage to
coolant when the engine is on or the the cooling system. Resulting component
cooling system is hot. Failure to follow damage may not be covered by the vehicle
this instruction could result in personal Warranty.
injury.
If the coolant level is at or below the
immediately.
372
Maintenance
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant engine coolant per month, have your
recovery system, add coolant to the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
coolant recovery reservoir when the engine Operating an engine with a low level of
is cool. Add prediluted coolant to the coolant can result in engine overheating
maximum level. For all vehicles which have and possible engine damage.
a coolant degas system with a pressurized Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant may change color from orange to
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator, pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
follow these steps to add engine coolant: clear and uncontaminated, this color change
1. Turn the engine off and let it cool. does not indicate the coolant has degraded
2. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
escapes as you unscrew the cap. the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
3. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with
prediluted engine coolant to within the Note: In case of emergency, you can add a
minimum and maximum range on the large amount of water without coolant in
engine coolant reservoir. If you order to reach a vehicle service location.
removed the radiator cap in an Water alone, without coolant, can cause
overflow system, fill the radiator until engine damage from corrosion, overheating
the coolant is visible and the radiator or freezing. When you reach a service
is almost full. If coolant is added to location, you must have the cooling system
bring the level within the minimum and drained, flushed and refilled using the
maximum range when the engine is not correct specification prediluted coolant or
cold, the system may remain antifreeze concentrate. See Cooling
underfilled. System Capacity and Specification (page
455).
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
the cap clockwise until it contacts the Do not use the following as a coolant
hard stop. substitute:
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant • Alcohol.
reservoir the next few times you drive • Methanol.
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough • Brine.
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the proper level. • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved antifreeze concentrate Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See damage from overheating or freezing.
Cooling System Capacity and Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
Specification (page 455). Using water that the coolant. These can be harmful and
has not been deionized may contribute to compromise the corrosion protection of
deposit formation, corrosion or plugging of the coolant.
the small cooling system passageways.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
373
Maintenance
Dispose of used engine coolant in an Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan

appropriate manner. Follow your Clutch)
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive Your vehicle comes with an engine driven
fluids. cooling fan drive, also called a fan clutch.
This fan drive changes the fan speed to
Severe Climates match the vehicle’s changing cooling air
flow requirements. Fan speed, fan noise
If you drive in extremely cold climates: level and fuel consumption all will increase
• It may be necessary to increase the based on the driving conditions that
coolant concentration above 50%. include trailer towing, hill climbing, heavy
• A coolant concentration of 60% loads, high speed and high ambient
provides improved freeze point temperature, individually or in combination.
protection. Coolant concentrations The fan drive is designed to provide the
above 60% decrease the overheat minimum fan speed, and resulting
protection characteristics of the minimum fan noise and fuel consumption
coolant and may cause engine required to meet the ever changing vehicle
damage. cooling air flow requirements. You will hear
If you drive in extremely hot climates: the amount of fan noise increasing and
decreasing as the engine power
• You can decrease the coolant requirements and vehicle driving conditions
concentration to 40%. change as you drive. This is to be expected
• Coolant concentrations below 40% as being normal to the operation of your
decrease the freeze and corrosion vehicle. High levels of fan noise might also
protection characteristics of the be heard when your engine is first started,
coolant and may cause engine and should normally decrease after driving
damage. for a short time.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme Fail-Safe Cooling
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
engine protection. drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
Coolant Change distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
Change the coolant at specific mileage
intervals as listed in the scheduled How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
maintenance information. The information
display may display a message to change If the engine begins to overheat, the
coolant at this time. Add prediluted coolant temperature gauge moves toward
coolant approved to the correct the red zone:
specification. See Capacities and A warning lamp illuminates and
Specifications (page 441). a message may appear in the
374
Maintenance
If the engine reaches a preset Your vehicle has limited engine power
over-temperature condition, the engine when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
switches to alternating cylinder operation. vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump maintain high-speed operation and the
and cools the engine. engine may operate poorly.
When this occurs, your vehicle still Remember that the engine is capable of
operates, however: shutting down to prevent engine damage.
• Engine power is limited. In this situation:
• The air conditioning system turns off. 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to 2. If you are a member of a roadside
completely shut down. Your steering and assistance program, we recommend
braking effort increases in this situation. that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle 3. If this is not possible, wait a short
checked as soon as possible to minimize period for the engine to cool.
engine damage. 4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
use during emergencies only. Operate
minimize engine damage.
your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
to rest in a safe location and seek increases the chance of engine damage.
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited Engine Coolant Temperature
power, will not be able to maintain Management (If Equipped)
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power WARNING: To reduce the risk of
steering assist, and power brake assist, crash and injury, be prepared that the
which may increase the possibility of a vehicle speed may reduce and the
crash resulting in serious injury. vehicle may not be able to accelerate
with full power until the coolant
WARNING: Do not remove the temperature reduces.
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
minutes for the cooling system to cool engine may temporarily reach a higher
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap temperature during severe operating
with a thick cloth to prevent the conditions, for example ascending a long
possibility of scalding and slowly remove or steep grade in high ambient
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction temperatures.
375
Maintenance
At this time, you may notice the coolant AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the FLUID CHECK
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
You may notice a reduction in vehicle by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
speed caused by reduced engine power in should be added by an authorized dealer.
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this The automatic transmission does not have
mode if certain high-temperature and a transmission fluid dipstick.
high-load conditions take place. The Have an authorized dealer check and
amount of speed reduction depends on change the transmission fluid and filter at
vehicle loading, grade and ambient the correct service interval. See your
temperature. If this occurs, there is no scheduled maintenance information. Your
need to pull off the road. You can continue transmission does not consume fluid.
to drive your vehicle. However, the fluid level should be checked
The air conditioning may turn on and off if the transmission is not working properly,
during severe operating conditions to (i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts
protect the engine from overheating. When slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid
the coolant temperature decreases to the leakage.
normal operating temperature, the air Do not use supplemental transmission
conditioning turns on. fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
If the coolant temperature gauge moves agents. The use of these materials may
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant affect transmission operation and result
temperature warning or service engine in damage to internal transmission
soon messages appear in your information components.
display, do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
376
Maintenance
TRANSFER CASE FLUID BRAKE FLUID CHECK

CHECK (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid

from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
other materials may result in brake
system damage or failure. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid

to touch your skin or eyes. If this
happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
contact your physician.
WARNING: The brake system

could be affected if the brake fluid level
is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
E164246 mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the
fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through the filler
opening so that the fluid level is at the
bottom of the opening.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
377
Maintenance
For detailed interval information, see

Scheduled Maintenance in your Owner's
Manual or your local maintenance guide.
POWER STEERING FLUID

CHECK
Check the power steering fluid. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 565). If
adding fluid is necessary, use only
MERCON LV ATF
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient
temperature.
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It
should be between the MIN and MAX
range. Do not add fluid if the level is
E170684
within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low, add fluid to bring
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface. the fluid level up to between the MIN
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see and MAX range.
where the brake fluid level is relative 3. Switch the engine on.
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the 4. While the engine idles, turn the steering
reservoir. wheel left and right several times.
Note: If the brake fluid level is between the 5. Switch the engine off.
MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir, it
is acceptable. 6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir.
Do not add fluid if the level is between
Note: If the brake fluid level is below the the MIN and MAX range.
MIN mark or above the MAX mark, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small
amounts, continuously checking the
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the level until it is between the MIN and
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully MAX range. For proper fluid type, See
tight, unless you are adding fluid. Capacities and Specifications (page
Only use fluid that meets our 441). Be sure to put the cap back on the
specifications. See Capacities and reservoir.
Brake Fluid Service Interval

Brake fluid absorbs water over time which
degrades the effectiveness of the brake
fluid. Change the brake fluid at the
specified intervals to prevent degraded
braking performance.
378
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
WARNING: Batteries normally battery cables from only one battery
produce explosive gases which can does not disconnect your vehicle
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not electrical system. Make sure you
allow flames, sparks or lighted disconnect the battery cables from all
substances to come near the battery. batteries when disconnecting power.
When working near the battery, always Failure to do so may cause serious
shield your face and protect your eyes. personal injury or property damage.
Always provide correct ventilation.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
WARNING: When lifting a maintenance-free battery which normally
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure does not require additional water.
on the end walls could cause acid to flow When a battery replacement is required,
through the vent caps, resulting in you must use a recommended
personal injury and damage to the replacement battery that matches the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a electrical requirements of the vehicle.
battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners. Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
WARNING: Keep batteries out of vent tube, battery cover or shield.
reach of children. Batteries contain For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, top of the battery clean and dry.
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect If you see any corrosion on the battery or
against possible splashing of acid terminals, remove the cables from the
solution. In case of acid contact with skin terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
or eyes, flush immediately with water for can neutralize the acid with a solution of
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt baking soda and water.
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, Because your vehicle’s engine is
call a physician immediately. electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
WARNING: Battery posts, by power from the battery. When the
terminals and related accessories battery is disconnected or a new battery
contain lead and lead compounds, is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
chemicals known to the State of and fuel trim strategy for optimum
California to cause cancer and driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
reproductive harm. Wash your hands vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
after handling. ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
379
Maintenance
4. Press the brake pedal and start your Systems included are:
vehicle. • Heated rear window.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal • Heated seats.
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the • Climate control.
following: Reset the clock. Reset the • Heated steering wheel.
power windows bounce-back feature. • Audio unit.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 95).
Reset the radio station presets. See • Navigation system.
Audio System (page 488). A message may appear in the information
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one displays to alert you that battery
minute. protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) action is taking place, and not intended to
to completely relearn the idle trim and indicate an electrical problem or that the
fuel trim strategy. battery requires replacement.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to After battery replacement, or in some
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the cases after charging the battery with an
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely external charger, the battery management
affected until the engine computer system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel time to relearn the battery state of charge.
trim strategy. During this time your vehicle must remain
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are fully locked with the ignition switched off.
operating on E85, you may experience poor Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
starts or an inability to start the engine and of charge, the battery management system
driveability problems until the fuel trim and may temporarily disable some electrical
ethanol content have been relearned. systems.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek Electrical Accessory Installation
advice from your local authority about To make sure the battery management
recycling old batteries. system works correctly, do not connect an
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 electrical device ground connection
days without recharging the battery, we directly to the battery negative post. This
recommend that you disconnect the can cause inaccurate measurements of
negative battery cable to maintain battery the battery condition and potential
charge for quick starting. incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
Battery Management System (If
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
Equipped)
affect battery performance and durability.
The battery management system monitors This may also affect the performance of
battery conditions and takes actions to other electrical systems in the vehicle.
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
380
Maintenance
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS 3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and open
Vertical Aim Adjustment the hood.
The headlamps on your vehicle are

properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe

a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
E142592
A 8 feet (2.4 meters) B

B Center height of lamp to ground A
C 25 feet (7.6 meters)
D Horizontal reference line
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line E223774
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height. 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
adjusting, you may want to block the light
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
from one headlamp while adjusting the
to adjust the vertical aim of the
other.
headlamp.
Note: A. LED headlamp.
381
Maintenance
B. Halogen headlamp. CHECKING THE WIPER

6. Repeat steps 3 thru 5 to adjust the BLADES
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment

Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
WASHER FLUID CHECK

E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of

WARNING: If you operate your the blade to check for roughness.
vehicle in temperatures below 40°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
protection. Failure to use washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or
with antifreeze protection in cold cloth.
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk CHANGING THE WIPER
of injury or accident.
BLADES
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets You can manually move the wiper arms
Ford specifications. See Capacities and when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
Specifications (page 441). of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER - 6.2L/7.3L

E165804
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel 1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement from the glass.
is not needed.
382
Maintenance
Front Park and Direction Indicator

Lamp Bulbs
Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs,
remove the air intake pipe. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 357).
To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove
the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with
diesel engine only.
A
E165794
2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and

separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you turn the ignition on.
• Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance. E224990
• You can improve poor wiper quality by 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
cleaning the wiper blades and the off.
windshield.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
CHANGING A BULB and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
WARNING: Switch the lamps and
the ignition off. Failure to follow this Headlamp Bulbs
warning could result in serious personal
injury. Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs,
remove the air intake pipe. See Changing
WARNING: Bulbs can become hot. the Engine Air Filter (page 357).
Let the bulb cool down before removing To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove
it. Failure to do so could result in the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with
personal injury. diesel engine only.
Use the correct specification bulb. See

Bulb Specification Chart (page 447).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
383
Maintenance
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition

off.
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Handle a halogen bulb carefully and
keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb
only by its plastic base and do not touch the
glass. The oil from your hand could cause
E224991 the bulb to break the next time the fog
lamps are operated.
off. Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear
2. Disconnect the electrical connector. Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp Bulbs
and remove it. Pickup Models - Vehicles without Blind
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from Spot Information System
the bulb holder.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.
5
Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E223775

off.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
E163826
384
Maintenance
3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp Chassis Cabs

assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Pickup Models - Vehicles with Blind

Spot Information System
E163828
4
off.
2. Remove the screws and the lamp lens
from lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Cargo Lamp and Central High

Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs
off.
E224204
5 6
2. Remove the screws and carefully pull
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition the lamp assembly from the vehicle to
off. expose the bulb sockets.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp
assembly and carefully pull the lamp
assembly from the tailgate pillar by
releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Remove the screws from the blind spot
information system module cover.
and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight E187290
out.
and remove it.
385
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight CHANGING THE ENGINE-

out.
MOUNTED AND DIESEL FUEL
License Plate Lamp Bulb CONDITIONER MODULE FUEL
FILTERS - 6.7L DIESEL
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel

in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
Your vehicle has two fuel filters. The first

filter mounts on top of the engine on the
left-hand side. The second filter is inside
E163830 the diesel fuel conditioner module. The
module is attached to the fuel tank in
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition different locations depending on the
off. configuration of your truck. See table
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the below for configurations.
bumper. Note: The module is at the front of the fuel
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank
and remove it. on some models.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight Regular fuel filter changes are an
out. important part of engine maintenance;
failing to keep with the scheduled
LED Lamps (If Equipped) maintenance could lead to engine
performance issues and fuel injection
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See system damage. See Scheduled
an authorized dealer if they fail. Maintenance (page 565).
The following lamps may be LED: Use only recommended service parts
• Headlamps. conforming to specifications. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 443).
• Front fog lamps.
Note: Using fuel that has high levels of
• Rear lamps.
impurities may require more frequent filter
• High stop lamp and cargo lamp. replacements than the service interval
• License plate bulb. specifies.
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module

Filter
Filter Location
Use the tables below to find the location
of your filter.
386
Maintenance
Pick-up Truck
Cab Type Box Length Filter Location
Regular. 8 ft (2.4 m)
Left side of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
SuperCab.
8 ft (2.4 m)
In front of fuel tank.
6.75 ft (2.057 m)
Super Crew Cab.
8 ft (2.4 m) Left side of fuel tank.
Chassis Cab
Cab Type Fuel Tank Type Filter Location
Chassis Cab. Single midship fuel tank Right side of fuel tank.
Right side of midship fuel
Chassis Cab. Aft axle/midship fuel tanks
tank.
Chassis Cab. Single aft axle fuel tank Front of fuel tank.
1. For 2017 models, disconnect the fuel

Removal line quick connect coupling from the in
tank fuel pump. For 2018 models and
later, skip this step but insure that the
fuel filler cap is closed before draining
the filter. Failure to close the fill cap
results in the siphoning of the entire
fuel tank contents when you open the
drain screw.
2. Locate your filter.
E247666
387
Maintenance

5. Fully loosen the bolts securing the
lower portion of the diesel fuel
conditioner module housing.
Note: Do not fully remove the bolts from
the lower portion of the diesel fuel
conditioner module housing.
6. Remove the lower portion of the diesel
fuel conditioner module housing.
E269861
3. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner

module. Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise until it stops. Do not
use any tools to loosen the drain plug.
Drain the filter, approximately 0.53 gal
(2 L), into an appropriate container.
Do not re-use the fuel drained from the
module.
E269863
7. Slide the filter element toward the

drain plug to disengage the securing
clips.
Installation
1. Slide the filter element into the housing
and fully engage the securing clips.
2. Install the lower portion of the housing.
Tighten the bolts until you feel a strong
resistance. Maximum torque 7 lb.ft
(9 Nm).
3. Connect the electrical connector.
4. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise
until it stops and you feel a strong
resistance. Do not use any tools to
E269862 tighten the drain plug.
388
Maintenance
Engine-mounted Fuel Filter

3
Although the fuel system is not fully
pressurized when the vehicle is off, some
residual pressure may remain in the fuel
system since it can take some time for the
pressure to completely bleed off.
Therefore, we recommend you place an
absorbent cloth below the filter connectors
to absorb any fuel that may drain.
The engine-mounted fuel filter is a plastic
disposable cartridge. 2
Removal
E226214
1
2. Rotate the filter fully counterclockwise
until the peg is at the far end of the slot.
3. Pull the filter straight up from the
bracket and discard the filter.
Note: No special air purge is necessary after
filter servicing. The fuel system purges the
air in the filters.
Installation
1. Install the new filter into the filter
bracket. Turn the filter clockwise to
lock it in place.
E226215
2. Reconnect the fuel lines.
1. Disconnect the fuel lines by squeezing 3. Switch the ignition on for 30 seconds
the connector tabs and pulling the lines and then switch the ignition off.
straight off. Repeat this operation six times in a row
to purge any trapped air from the fuel
system.
SPRING U-BOLT CHECK - F-

600
Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts after
your vehicle has been operated under load
for 1,000 mi (1,600 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts every
37,000 mi (60,000 km).
389
Maintenance
Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts with

your vehicle at curb height and unloaded.
Inspect the U-bolt threads for rust and
debris. Clean the threads if contaminated.
U-bolt Nut Torque

Rear Axle
Note: Check and tighten the U-bolt nuts
evenly using a criss-cross pattern in the
following stages.
Stage lb.ft (Nm)
1. 70 lb.ft (100 Nm)

2. 150 lb.ft (200 Nm)
3. 220 lb.ft (300 Nm)
4. 300 lb.ft (400 Nm)
390
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products Materials
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37- WSS-M14P19-A
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
391
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

Note: Do not scrape the exterior lamps
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
or chemical solvents to clean them.
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash. Note: Do not wipe the exterior lamps when
they are dry.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or Exterior Chrome Parts
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces. • Apply a high quality-cleaning product
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to bumpers and other chrome parts.
to the touch, or during strong or direct Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
sunlight. We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water • Do not apply the cleaning product to
spotting. hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird than the time recommended.
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your • Using non-recommended cleaners can
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. result in severe and permanent
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and cosmetic damage.
Tar Remover. Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
• Remove any exterior accessories, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they
example antennas, before entering a can scratch the chrome surface.
car wash. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
residue on painted surfaces
immediately. Exterior Plastic Parts
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents For routine cleaning we recommend
can damage painted surfaces. If these Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
substances come in contact with your spots are present, we recommend
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
possible.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
Immediately remove fuel spillages, AdBlue however, pressure washing may be used
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits under the following conditions:
and road tar. These may cause damage to
your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. • Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Remove any exterior accessories, for
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
example antennas, before entering a car
(82°C).
wash.
392
Vehicle Care
• Use a spray with a 40 degree wide • Do not allow wax to come in contact
spray angle pattern. with any non-body (low-gloss black)
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) colored trim. The wax will discolor or
distance and 90 degree angle to your stain the parts over time.
vehicle's surface. • Roof racks.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle • Bumpers.
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may • Grained door handles.
damage graphics and cause the edges to
• Side moldings.
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
• Mirror housings.
Underbody • Windshield cowl area.
Regularly clean the underside of your • Do not apply wax to glass areas.
vehicle using water. Keep body and door • After waxing, your car's paint should
drain holes free of debris or foreign feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
material. smudges.
Under Hood
CLEANING THE ENGINE
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft Engines are more efficient when they are
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
and Tar Remover. the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
WAXING • Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
car's paint from the elements. We
and cause damage.
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
When washing and waxing, park your block or other engine components.
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
applying wax. Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
• Use a quality wax that does not contain Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
abrasives. Shampoo.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
to apply and remove the wax. remove the cover before application of
• Apply a small amount of wax in a Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
back-and-forth motion, not in circles. Immediately rinse away any over spray.
393
Vehicle Care
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it

is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
E163380
CLEANING THE EXHAUST -
6.7L DIESEL The visible holes in the exhaust tip and the
holes under the shield just inboard of the
right rear tire(s) are functional. The holes
need to be kept clear of mud/debris or
WARNING: Failure to maintain the foreign material to maintain proper
functional holes, in the tailpipe section function of the exhaust system. Clean and
of the exhaust, clean and free of debris remove debris or foreign material if present
or foreign material may result in the as needed. Spraying with a hose during
holes becoming blocked or plugged. Do regular washing of vehicle should help
not modify or remove the tail-pipe keep holes clean and clear of debris or
section. Blocked or plugged holes or foreign material.
removal/modification of the system
could result in elevated exhaust gas
temperatures which may result in CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
vehicle/property damage or personal WIPER BLADES
injury.
Car wash chemicals and environmental
WARNING: The normal operating fallout can result in windshield and wiper
temperature of the exhaust system is blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
very high. Never work around or attempt wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
to repair any part of the exhaust system operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
until it has cooled. Use special care when blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
working around the diesel oxidation performance.
catalytic converter and/or the diesel
particulate filter (DPF). The diesel
oxidation catalytic converter and/or the
DPF heats up to a high temperature after
only a short period of engine operation
and can stay hot even after the engine
is turned off. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
394
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades: For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
• Clean the windshield with a equipped with side airbags:
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
cleaning the interior of the windshield, vacuum cleaner.
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the • Remove light stains and soil with
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe Motorcraft Professional Strength
any glass cleaner off these surfaces Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
immediately.
• If grease or tar is present on the
• For windshields contaminated with material, spot-clean the area first with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
the entire windshield using steel wool Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a Cleaner.
circular motion and rinse with water.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl cleaning, clean the entire area
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer immediately (but do not oversaturate)
concentrate. or the ring will set.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other • Do not use household cleaning
sharp objects to clean or remove decals products or glass cleaners, which can
from the inside of the heated rear window. stain and discolor the fabric and affect
The vehicle warranty does not cover the flame retardant abilities of the seat
damage caused to the heated rear window materials.
grid lines.
Note: Cashmere and microfiber cloth fabric
is made of polyester microfiber with
CLEANING THE INTERIOR micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning Note: Do not use commercially available
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's leather and vinyl cleaning products on
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken cashmere or microfiber cloth fabric.
the belt webbing.
Note: Your vehicle may have cashmere or
microfiber cloth fabric on the seats,
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
headliner, floor mats and door panels.
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Depending on the type of stain, use water,
Such products could contaminate the lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
side airbag system and affect cleaning. For cleaning microfiber cloth,
performance of the side airbag in a crash. refer to the following chart:
395
Vehicle Care
Type of Stain Cleaning Procedure
Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup. Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing
with clean water.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine. Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water. Avoid warm water because it
makes these substances coagulate.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola Use lukewarm water. If the color remains,
and tea. treat with lemon juice and then rinse.
Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing
with cream or chocolate, ice cream or with clean water.
mustard.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water
with sugar. and rinse by dabbing with clean water.
Dye transfer and all other stains. Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.
396
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT 1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

soft cloth as quickly as possible.
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
CLUSTER LENS Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
WARNING: Do not use chemical or stain remover on an inconspicuous
solvents or strong detergents when area.
cleaning the steering wheel or 3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
instrument panel to avoid contamination clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
of the airbag system. water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather 4. If necessary, apply more soap and
instrument panels and leather interior trim water solution or cleaning product to
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
(page 397). soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
these areas.
area.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase 6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF
undesirable windshield reflection.
EQUIPPED)
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these Without King Ranch Edition
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and Note: Follow the same procedure as
cluster lens. cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you instrument panels and leather interior trim
have been in contact with certain surfaces.
products such as insect repellent and For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
to the interior painted surfaces. water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand soft cloth.
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. For cleaning and removing spots and stains
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Your warranty may not cover these Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
damages. commercially available leather cleaning
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has product for automotive interiors.
been spilled on the instrument panel or on Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
interior trim surfaces: an inconspicuous area.
397
Vehicle Care
You should: • Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a orange juice or oil-based products on
vacuum cleaner. the leather as they may permanently
stain the leather.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible. • Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
Do not use the following products as these or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
may damage the leather: or plastics.
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
Scratches
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners. Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
• Alcohol solutions. evidence of naturally occurring markings,
• Solvents or cleaners intended such as small scars. These markings give
specifically for rubber, vinyl and character to the seating covers and are
plastics. considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.
With King Ranch Edition
In order to lessen the appearance of
Your vehicle has seating covered in certain scratches and other wear marks,
premium, top-grain leather that is apply conditioner on the affected area
extremely durable, but still requires special following the same instructions as in the
care and maintenance in order to preserve Conditioning section.
longevity and comfort.
Conditioning
Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather. Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Cleaning Shop. Visit the website at
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a www.krsaddleshop.com, or call
clean, damp cloth or soft brush. 1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United
States. If you are unable to obtain King
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough premium leather conditioner.
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution. • Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible. • Make sure the leather is dry then apply
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
an inconspicuous part of the leather as to a clean, dry cloth.
cleaners may darken the leather. • Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
398
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT VEHICLE STORAGE

DAMAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to days or more, read the following
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle maintenance recommendations to make
color code is printed on a sticker on the sure your vehicle stays in good operating
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your condition.
color code to your authorized dealer to We engineer and test all motor vehicles
make sure you get the correct color. and their components for reliable, regular
Before repairing minor paint damage, use driving. Under various conditions,
a cleaner to remove particles such as bird long-term storage may lead to degraded
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar engine performance or failure unless you
spots, road salt and industrial fallout. use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
Read the instructions before using cleaning
products. General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
CLEANING THE WHEELS place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use • If vehicles are stored outside, they
Ford approved wheel cleaner if require regular maintenance to protect
available. against rust and damage.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a Body
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
tar remover. We recommend that you remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
use Ford approved bug and tar remover exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
if available. and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
stored in exposed locations.
after cleaning.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an prevent rust.
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
a few minutes before doing so. This with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
discs, brake pads and linings. when you wash your vehicle.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot. • Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
Note: Some car washes could damage a light grade oil.
wheel rims and covers.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, • Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel solvents.
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
399
Vehicle Care
Engine Brakes
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to • Make sure the brakes and parking brake
storage because used engine oil release fully.
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage. Tires
• Start the engine every 15 days for a • Maintain recommended air pressure.
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to Miscellaneous
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature. • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
• With your foot on the brake, shift
with grease to prevent rust.
through all the gears while the engine
is running. • Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
• We recommend that you change the
and prevent corrosion.
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again. Removing Vehicle From Storage
Fuel system When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
fuel pump nozzle. or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
Cooling system • Check windshield wipers for any
• Protect against freezing temperatures. deterioration.
• When removing your vehicle from • Check under the hood for any foreign
storage, check coolant fluid level. material that may have collected
Confirm that there are no cooling during storage such as mice or squirrel
system leaks and that fluid is at the nests.
recommended level. • Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery during storage.
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep • Check tire pressures and set tire
connections clean. inflation per the Tire Label.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 • Check brake pedal operation. Drive
days without recharging the battery, your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
we recommend that you disconnect forth to remove rust build-up.
the battery cables to maintain battery • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
charge for quick starting. oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
levels.
features if you disconnect the battery
cables. • If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
400
Vehicle Care
Contact an authorized dealer if you have

any concerns or issues.
401
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to utility vehicle and truck

owners
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
tires from that fitted at the factory, the significantly higher rollover rate than
speedometer may not display the correct other types of vehicles.
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from that fitted by the WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
manufacturer, you can check the suitability center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
with an authorized dealer. drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
Additional information related to the (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
functionality and maintenance of your tires excessive speed and abrupt steering in
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
Care (page 404). increases the risk of losing control of your
You can find the recommended tire vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
inflation pressures can on the Tire Label, and death.
which is on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver door. You can also find this WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
information on the Safety Compliance unbelted person is significantly more
Certification Label, affixed to either the likely to die than a person wearing a
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the seatbelt.
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver seating position. WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
We strongly recommend maintaining these
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
the tire pressure recommendations can
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
situations, it won't stop any faster than
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
way your vehicle handles.
at a safe speed.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are Utility vehicles and trucks handle
intending to drive your vehicle and when the differently than passenger cars in the
tires are cold. various driving conditions that are
Note: Check your tire pressures at least encountered on streets, highways and
once per month. off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the as passenger cars any more than low-slung
pressure to the highest value given for your sports cars are designed to perform
vehicle and tire size combination. satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
402
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
supplements for specific information about spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
equipment features, instructions for safe have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
driving and additional precautions to is a significant difference between the size
reduce the risk of an accident or serious of a spare and the remaining tires,
injury. four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped) (page 213).
How your vehicle differs from

WARNING: Do not become other vehicles
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
from some other vehicles in a few
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than • Higher - to allow higher load carrying
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive capacity and to allow it to travel over
at a safe speed. rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive, • Shorter - to give it the capability to
when selected, has the ability to use all approach inclines and drive over the
four wheels to power itself. This increases crest of a hill without getting hung up
traction which may enable you to safely or damaging underbody components.
drive over terrain and road conditions that All other things held equal, a shorter
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle wheelbase may make your vehicle
cannot. quicker to respond to steering inputs
Power is supplied to all four wheels than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
through a transfer case or power transfer • Narrower - to provide greater
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you maneuverability in tight spaces,
to select different modes as necessary. For particularly in off-road use.
information on transfer case operation and
As a result of the above dimensional
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
Drive (page 213). For information on
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
transfer case maintenance, See
and a greater difference in center of gravity
Maintenance (page 348). You should
between the loaded and unloaded
become thoroughly familiar with this
condition. These differences that make
information before you operate your
your vehicle so versatile also make it
vehicle.
handle differently than an ordinary
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the passenger car.
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
403
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE U.S. Department of

Transportation Tire quality
Information About Uniform grades: The U.S. Department of
Tire Quality Grading Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
E142542
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
Tire Quality Grades apply to new would wear one and one-half (1
pneumatic passenger car tires. ½) times as well on the
The Quality grades can be found government course as a tire
where applicable on the tire graded 100. The relative
sidewall between tread shoulder performance of tires depends
and maximum section width. For upon the actual conditions of their
example: Treadwear 200 use, however, and may depart
Traction AA Temperature A. significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
These Tire Quality Grades are practices, and differences in road
determined by standards that the characteristics and climate.
United States Department of
Transportation has set. Traction AA A B C
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread, WARNING: The traction
winter-type snow tires, grade assigned to this tire is
space-saver or temporary use based on straight-ahead braking
spare tires, light truck or LT type traction tests, and does not
tires, tires with nominal rim include acceleration, cornering,
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or hydroplaning or peak traction
limited production tires as defined characteristics.
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
404
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
grades represent the tire’s ability represent higher levels of
to stop on wet pavement as performance on the laboratory
measured under controlled test wheel than the minimum
conditions on specified required by law.
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire Glossary of Tire Terminology
marked C may have poor traction *Tire label: A label showing the
performance. original equipment tire sizes,
Temperature A B C recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
WARNING: The *Tire Identification Number
temperature grade for this tire is (TIN): A number on the sidewall
established for a tire that is of each tire providing information
properly inflated and not about the tire brand and
overloaded. Excessive speed, manufacturing plant, tire size and
underinflation, or excessive date of manufacture. Also referred
loading, either separately or in to as DOT code.
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure. *Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
The temperature grades are A *Standard load: A class of
(the highest), B and C, P-metric or Metric tires designed
representing the tire’s resistance to carry a maximum load at set
to the generation of heat and its pressure. For example: For
ability to dissipate heat when P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
tested under controlled conditions for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
on a specified indoor laboratory Increasing the inflation pressure
test wheel. Sustained high beyond this pressure will not
temperature can cause the increase the tire’s load carrying
material of the tire to degenerate capability.
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden *Extra load: A class of P-metric
tire failure. The grade C or Metric tires designed to carry a
corresponds to a level of heavier maximum load at 42 psi
performance which all passenger (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
car tires must meet under the pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
405
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of Information Contained on the

air pressure. Tire Sidewall
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a Both United States and Canada
standard unit of air pressure. Federal regulations require tire
*Cold tire pressure: The tire manufacturers to place
pressure when the vehicle has standardized information on the
been stationary and out of direct sidewall of all tires. This
sunlight for an hour or more and information identifies and
prior to the vehicle being driven for describes the fundamental
1 mile (1.6 kilometers). characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
*Recommended inflation Identification Number for safety
pressure: The cold inflation standard certification and in case
pressure found on the Safety of a recall.
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge Information on P Type Tires
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch E
post, next to the driver's seating C D F
position), or Tire Label located on G
the B-pillar or the edge of the
B
H
driver's door.
A
B-pillar: The structural member I
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim. J
M
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
L
K
the perimeter of the tire that E142543
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle. P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) rating. The definitions of these
for a tire or a tire and tube items are listed below. (Note that
assembly upon which the tire the tire size, load index and speed
beads are seated. rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example).
406
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated G. H: Indicates the tire's speed

by the Tire and Rim Association, rating. The speed rating denotes
that may be used for service on the speed at which a tire is
cars, sport utility vehicles, designed to be driven for extended
minivans and light trucks. Note: If periods of time under a standard
your tire size does not begin with condition of load and inflation
a letter this may mean it is pressure. The tires on your vehicle
designated by either the European may operate at different
Tire and Rim Technical conditions for load and inflation
Organization or the Japan Tire pressure. These speed ratings may
Manufacturing Association. need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
B. 215: Indicates the nominal ratings range from 81 mph (130
width of the tire in millimeters km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
from sidewall edge to sidewall These ratings are listed in the
edge. In general, the larger the following chart.
number, the wider the tire.
Note: You may not find this
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio information on all tires because it
which gives the tire's ratio of is not required by federal law.
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. Letter mph ( km/h)
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim rating
diameter in inches. If you change M 81 (130)
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the N 87 (140)
new wheel diameter.
Q 99 (159)
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to R 106 (171)
how much weight a tire can carry. S 112 (180)
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not, T 118 (190)
contact a local tire dealer.
U 124 (200)
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it H 130 (210)
is not required by federal law. V 149 (240)
407
Wheels and Tires
Letter mph ( km/h) J. Tire Ply Composition and

rating Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
W 168 (270) layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
Y 186 (299) manufacturers also must indicate
Note: For tires with a maximum the ply materials in the tire and the
speed capability over 149 mph sidewall, which include steel,
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers nylon, polyester, and others.
sometimes use the letters ZR. For K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and
capability over 186 mph (299 pounds that can be carried by the
km/h), tire manufacturers always tire. (affixed to either the door
use the letters ZR. hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification door-latch post, next to the
Number: This begins with the driver's seating position), or Tire
letters DOT and indicates that the Label located on the B-pillar or
tire meets all federal standards. the edge of the driver's door.
The next two numbers or letters L. Treadwear, Traction and
are the plant code designating Temperature Grades:
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and *Treadwear The treadwear grade
the last four numbers represent is a comparative rating based on
the week and year the tire was the wear rate of the tire when
built. For example, the numbers tested under controlled conditions
317 mean the 31st week of 1997. on a specified government test
After 2000 the numbers go to four course. For example, a tire graded
digits. For example, 2501 means 150 would wear 1½ times as well
the 25th week of 2001. The on the government course as a tire
numbers in between are graded 100.
identification codes used for *Traction: The traction grades,
traceability. This information is from highest to lowest are AA, A,
used to contact customers if a tire B, and C. The grades represent the
defect requires a recall. tire's ability to stop on wet
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
AT: All Terrain, or government test surfaces of
AS: All Season. asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
408
Wheels and Tires
*Temperature: The temperature

grades are A (the highest), B and B
C, representing the tire's C
resistance to the generation of A
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's D
recommended cold inflation E142544
B
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance LT type tires have some additional
Certification Label (affixed to information beyond those of P
either the door hinge pillar, type tires. These differences are
door-latch post, or the door edge described below.
that meets the door-latch post, A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
next to the driver's seating by the Tire and Rim Association,
position), or Tire Label located on that is intended for service on light
the B-pillar or the edge of the trucks.
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower B. Load Range and Load
than the recommended pressure Inflation Limits: Indicates the
on the vehicle label. tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
warnings such as standard load at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
or radial tubeless. maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
Additional Information defined as four tires on the rear
Contained on the Tire Sidewall axle (a total of six or more tires on
for LT Type Tires the vehicle).
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
409
Wheels and Tires
D. Maximum Load Single lb T type tires have some additional

(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates information beyond those of P
the maximum load and tire type tires. These differences are
pressure when the tire is used as described below:
a single; defined as two tires A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
(total) on the rear axle. designated by the Tire and Rim
Information on T Type Tires Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
T145/80D16 is an example of a utility vehicles, minivans and light
tire size. trucks.
Note: The temporary tire size for B. 145: Indicates the nominal
your vehicle may be different from width of the tire in millimeters
this example. Tire Quality Grades from sidewall edge to sidewall
do not apply to this type of tire. edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
B C D height to width. Numbers of 70 or
E lower indicate a short sidewall.
A
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
E142545
410
Wheels and Tires
Inflating Your Tires

Safe operation of your vehicle WARNING: Under-inflation
requires that your tires are is the most common cause of
properly inflated. Remember that tire failures and may result in
a tire can lose up to half of its air severe tire cracking, tread
pressure without appearing flat. separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
Every day before you drive, check control and increased risk of
your tires. If one looks lower than injury. Under-inflation increases
the others, use a tire gauge to sidewall flexing and rolling
check pressure of all tires and resistance, resulting in heat
adjust if required. buildup and internal damage to
At least once a month and before the tire. It also may result in
long trips, inspect each tire and unnecessary tire stress, irregular
check the tire pressure with a tire wear, loss of vehicle control and
gauge (including spare, if accidents. A tire can lose up to
equipped). Inflate all tires to the half of its air pressure and not
inflation pressure recommended appear to be flat!
by Ford Motor Company.
Always inflate your tires to the
You are strongly urged to buy a Ford recommended inflation
reliable tire pressure gauge, as pressure even if it is less than the
automatic service station gauges maximum inflation pressure
may be inaccurate. Ford information found on the tire. The
recommends the use of a digital Ford recommended tire inflation
or dial-type tire pressure gauge pressure is found on the Safety
rather than a stick-type tire Compliance Certification Label or
pressure gauge. Tire Label (affixed to either the
Use the recommended cold door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
inflation pressure for optimum tire or the door edge that meets the
performance and wear. door-latch post, next to the
Under-inflation or over-inflation driver's seating position), or Tire
may cause uneven treadwear Label located on the B-pillar or
patterns. the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
411
Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure the B-pillar or the edge of the
to change the ride characteristics driver's door. The cold inflation
of the vehicle. If you do not pressure should never be set lower
maintain the inflation pressure at than the recommended pressure
the levels specified by Ford, your on the Safety Compliance
vehicle may experience a condition Certification Label or Tire Label.
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a When weather temperature
severe vibration and oscillation in changes occur, tire inflation
the steering wheel after the vehicle pressures also change. A 10°F
travels over a bump or dip in the (6°C) temperature drop can
road that does not dampen out by cause a corresponding drop of 1
itself. Shimmy may result from psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
significant under-inflation of the Check your tire pressures
tires, improper tires (load range, frequently and adjust them to the
size, or type), or vehicle proper pressure which can be
modifications such as lift-kits. In found on the Safety Compliance
the event that your vehicle Certification Label or Tire Label.
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting To check the pressure in your
off the accelerator pedal or lightly tire(s):
applying the brakes. The shimmy 1. Make sure the tires are cool,
will cease as the vehicle speed meaning they are not hot from
decreases. driving even a mile.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is Note: If you are checking tire
the tire manufacturer's maximum pressure when the tire is hot, (for
permissible pressure and the example, driven more than 1 mile
pressure at which the maximum [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
load can be carried by the tire. This reduce air pressure. The tires are
pressure is normally higher than hot from driving and it is normal for
the manufacturer’s recommended pressures to increase above
cold inflation pressure which can recommended cold pressures. A
be found on the Safety hot tire at or below recommended
Compliance Certification Label cold inflation pressure could be
(affixed to either the door hinge significantly under-inflated.
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
412
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you have to drive a 6. Visually inspect the tires to

distance to get air for your tire(s), make sure there are no nails or
check and record the tire pressure other objects embedded that
first and add the appropriate air could poke a hole in the tire and
pressure when you get to the cause an air leak.
pump. It is normal for tires to heat 7. Check the sidewalls to make
up and the air pressure inside to go sure there are no gouges, cuts or
up as you drive. bulges.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the Tire Inflation Information
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
WARNING: An inflated tire
3. Add enough air to reach the and rim can be very dangerous
recommended air pressure. if improperly used, serviced or
Note: If you overfill the tire, release maintained. To reduce the risk
air by pressing on the metal stem of serious injury, never attempt
in the center of the valve. Then to re-inflate a tire which has
recheck the pressure with your tire been run flat or seriously
gauge. under-inflated without first
removing the tire from the wheel
4. Replace the valve cap. assembly for inspection. Do not
5. Repeat this procedure for each attempt to add air to tires or
tire, including the spare. replace tires or wheels without
first taking precautions to
Note: Some spare tires operate at protect persons and property.
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare All tires with Steel Carcass Plies
tires, (see the Dissimilar spare (if equipped):
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store This type of tire utilizes steel cords
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). in the sidewalls. As such, they
For full-size and dissimilar spare cannot be treated like normal light
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel truck tires. Tire service, including
and tire assembly information for adjusting tire pressure, must be
a description. Store and maintain performed by personnel trained,
at the higher of the front and rear supervised and equipped
inflation pressure as shown on the according to Federal Occupational
Safety Compliance Certification Safety and Health Administration
Label or Tire Label. regulations. For example, during
413
Wheels and Tires
any procedure involving tire

inflation, the technician or WARNING: Always inflate
individual must utilize a remote steel carcass tires with a remote
inflation device, and ensure that air fill with the person inflating
all persons are clear of the standing at a minimum of 12 ft
trajectory area. (3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
E161437
leakage and repair or replace the

Inspecting Your Tires and tire and replace the valve stem.
Wheel Valve Stems Inspect the tire sidewalls for
Periodically inspect the tire treads cracking, cuts, bruises and other
for uneven or excessive wear and signs of damage or excessive
remove objects such as stones, wear. If internal damage to the tire
nails or glass that may be wedged is suspected, have the tire
in the tread grooves. Check the tire demounted and inspected in case
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
414
Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced. When the tire tread wears down

For your safety, tires that are to the same height as these wear
damaged or show signs of bars, the tire is worn out and must
excessive wear should not be used be replaced.
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail. Damage
Improper or inadequate vehicle Periodically inspect the tire treads
maintenance can cause tires to and sidewalls for damage (such
wear abnormally. Inspect all your as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
tires, including the spare, cracks in the tread groove and
frequently, and replace them if separation in the tread or
one or more of the following sidewall). If damage is observed
conditions exist: or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tire Wear Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade

over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
E142546 (load, speed, inflation pressure)
When the tread is worn down to the tires experience throughout
one sixteenth of an inch (2 their lives.
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your WARNING: In general, tires
vehicle from skidding and should be replaced after six
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear years regardless of tread wear
indicators, or wear bars, which or even if they have not been
look like narrow strips of smooth used. However, heat caused by
rubber across the tread will hot climates or frequent
appear on the tire when the tread high-load conditions can
is worn down to one sixteenth of accelerate the aging process and
an inch (2 millimeters). may require you to replace tires
more frequently.
415
Wheels and Tires
Tire Replacement
WARNING: You should Requirements
replace your spare tire when you Your vehicle is equipped with tires
replace the road tires or after six designed to provide a safe ride
years due to aging even if it has and handling capability.
not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification WARNING: Only use

Number replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load
Both United States and Canada index, speed rating and type
Federal regulations require tire (such as P-metric versus
manufacturers to place LT-metric or all-season versus
standardized information on the all-terrain) as those originally
sidewall of all tires. This provided by Ford. The
information identifies and recommended tire and wheel
describes the fundamental size may be found on either the
characteristics of the tire and also Safety Compliance Certification
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Label (affixed to either the door
Identification Number for safety hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
standard certification and in case the door edge that meets the
of a recall. door-latch post, next to the
This begins with the letters DOT driver’s seating position), or the
and indicates that the tire meets Tire Label which is located on
all federal standards. The next the B-Pillar or edge of the
two numbers or letters are the driver’s door. If this information
plant code designating where it is not found on these labels, then
was manufactured, the next two you should contact your
are the tire size code and the last authorized dealer as soon as
four numbers represent the week possible. Use of any tire or wheel
and year the tire was built. For not recommended by Ford can
example, the numbers 317 mean affect the safety and
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 performance of your vehicle,
the numbers go to four digits. For which could result in an
example, 2501 means the 25th increased risk of loss of vehicle
week of 2001. The numbers in control, vehicle rollover, personal
between are identification codes injury and death.
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
416
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To reduce the WARNING: Always inflate

risk of serious injury, when steel carcass tires with a remote
mounting replacement tires and air fill with the person inflating
wheels, you should not exceed standing at a minimum of 12 ft
the maximum pressure indicated (3.66 m) away from the wheel
on the sidewall of the tire to set and tire assembly.
the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the Important: Remember to replace
beads do not seat at the the wheel valve stems when the
maximum pressure indicated, road tires are replaced on your
re-lubricate and try again. vehicle.
When inflating the tire for The two front tires or two rear tires
mounting pressures up to 20 psi should generally be replaced as a
(1.38 bar) greater than the pair.
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following The tire pressure sensors mounted
precautions must be taken to in the wheels are not designed to
protect the person mounting the be used in aftermarket wheels.
tire: The use of wheels or tires not
1. Make sure that you have the recommended by Ford Motor
correct tire and wheel size. Company may affect the
2. Lubricate the tire bead and operation of your tire pressure
wheel bead seat area again. monitoring system.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel If the tire pressure monitoring
and tire assembly. system indicator is flashing, the
4. Use both eye and ear system is malfunctioning. Your
protection. replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
WARNING: For a mounting pressure monitoring system, or
pressure more than 20 psi some component of the system
(1.38 bar) greater than the may be damaged.
maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
417
Wheels and Tires
Replacing a Tire That is Highway Hazards

Greenhouse Gas Certified
No matter how carefully you drive
The tires installed on this vehicle there’s always the possibility that
at the factory as original you may eventually have a flat tire
equipment are certified for on the highway. Drive slowly to the
Greenhouse Gas and Fuel closest safe area out of traffic.
Efficiency regulations. This may further damage the flat
Replacement tires must be of tire, but your safety is more
equal or lower rolling resistance important.
level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with If you feel a sudden vibration or
your tire supplier(s) for ride disturbance while driving, or
appropriate replacement tires. you suspect your tire or vehicle
Safety Practices has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
WARNING: If your vehicle off the road. Stop and inspect the
is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do tires for damage. If a tire is
not rapidly spin the tires; under-inflated or damaged,
spinning the tires can tear the deflate it, remove wheel and
tire and cause an explosion. A replace it with your spare tire and
tire can explode in as little as wheel. If you cannot detect a
three to five seconds. cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
WARNING: Do not spin the dealer to have the vehicle
wheels at over 34 mph inspected.
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and Tire and Wheel Alignment
injure a passenger or bystander.
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
Driving habits have a great deal pothole can cause the front end
to do with your tire mileage and of your vehicle to become
safety. misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
*Observe posted speed limits. pull to one side when you’re
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns. driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
*Avoid potholes and objects on dealer check the wheel alignment
the road. periodically.
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking.
418
Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front Note: Your vehicle may be

or the rear can cause uneven and equipped with a dissimilar spare
rapid treadwear of your tires and wheel and tire assembly. A
should be corrected by an dissimilar spare wheel and tire
authorized dealer. Front-wheel assembly is defined as a spare
drive vehicles and those with an wheel and tire assembly that is
independent rear suspension may different in brand, size or
require alignment of all four appearance from the road tires and
wheels. wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
The tires should also be balanced intended for temporary use only
periodically. An unbalanced tire and should not be used in a tire
and wheel assembly may result in rotation.
irregular tire wear.
Note: After having your tires
Tire Rotation rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
WARNING: If the tire label
shows different tire pressures for Rotating your tires at the
the front and rear tires and the recommended interval (as
vehicle has a tire pressure indicated in the Scheduled
monitoring system, then you Maintenance chapter) will help
need to update the settings for your tires wear more evenly,
the system sensors. Always providing better tire performance
perform the system reset and longer tire life. Sometime
procedure after tire rotation. If irregular tire wear can be
you do not reset the system, it corrected by rotating the tires.
may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
E142548
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and

four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram).
419
Wheels and Tires
E166988
Dual rear wheel drive vehicle - six

tire rotation (front tires at top of E227387
diagram).
If your vehicle is equipped with Note: When installing 17-inch dual
dual rear wheels it is rear wheels, align the valve stems
recommended that the front and facing each other.
rear tires (in pairs) be rotated only
side to side. We do not USING SNOW CHAINS
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set. After tire rotation, WARNING: Snow tires must be the
inflation pressures must be same size, load index and speed rating
adjusted for the tires new as those originally provided by Ford. Use
positions in accordance with of any tire or wheel not recommended
by Ford can affect the safety and
vehicle requirements. performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. Additionally, the use of
420
Wheels and Tires
non-recommended tires and wheels can • For Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) vehicles,
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer only install snow chains on the outer
case or power transfer unit failure. wheel of each pair.
Follow the Ford recommended tire • Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
inflation pressure found on the Safety rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
Compliance Certification Label (on the and retighten the chains. If this does
door hinge pillar, door latch post or the not work, remove the chains to prevent
door edge that meets the door latch damage to your vehicle.
post, next to the driver seat), or Tire • Remove the tire chains when you no
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the longer need them. Do not use tire
driver door. Failure to follow the tire chains on dry roads.
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and If you have any questions regarding snow
adversely affect the way your vehicle chains or cables, please contact your
handles. authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not use snow chains TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

on snow-free roads.
SYSTEM
Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles
with LT275/65R20 or LT 285/75R18 sized Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring
tires. System
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow. WARNING: The tire pressure
However, in some climates, you may need monitoring system is not a substitute for
to use snow tires and cables. If you need manually checking tire pressures. You
to use cables, we recommend that you use should periodically check tire pressures
steel wheels of the same size and using a pressure gauge. Failure to
specification, as cables may chip correctly maintain tire pressures could
aluminum wheels. increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
Note: The suspension insulation and control, vehicle rollover and personal
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. injury.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains. Check each tire, including the
spare, if provided, monthly when
Follow these guidelines when using snow
cold and inflated to the inflation
tires and chains:
pressure recommended by the vehicle
• If possible, avoid fully loading your manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
vehicle. inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has
• Use only SAE Class S chains. tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
• Install chains securely, verifying that inflation pressure label, you should
the chains do not touch any wiring, determine the proper tire inflation pressure
brake lines or fuel lines. for those tires.
• Only install snow chains on the rear
axle.
421
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle Always check the TPMS malfunction
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure telltale after replacing one or more tires or
Monitoring System (TPMS) that wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale replacement or alternate tires and wheels
when one or more of your tires is allow the TPMS to continue to function
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, properly.
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
Operation is subject to the following two
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
conditions:
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency • This device may not cause harmful
and tire tread life, and may affect the interference.
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • This device must accept any
Please note that the TPMS is not a interference received, including
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and interference that may cause undesired
it is the driver's responsibility to maintain operation.
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation Note: Changes or modifications not
has not reached the level to trigger expressively approved by the party
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure responsible for compliance could void the
telltale. user's authority to operate the equipment.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with The term "IC" before the radio certification
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate number only signifies that Industry Canada
when the system is not operating properly. technical specifications were met.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
combined with the low tire pressure
Monitoring System
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale flashes for
approximately one minute and then
remains continuously illuminated. This
sequence continues upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate E142549
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
422
Wheels and Tires
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire The tire pressure monitoring system
pressure sensor located inside the wheel measures pressure in your road tires and
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sends the tire pressure readings to your
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is turns on if the tire pressure is significantly
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take low. Once the light is illuminated, one or
care when changing the tire to avoid more of your tires are under-inflated and
damaging the sensor. needs to be inflated to the manufacturer’s
recommended tire pressure. Even if the
You should always have your tires serviced
light turns on and a short time later turns
by an authorized dealer.
off, your tire pressure still needs to be
Periodically check the tire pressure, at least checked.
monthly, using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
When you need to replace one of your road
Monitoring System
tires with the temporary spare, the system
Single Rear Wheel continues to identify an issue to remind
you to repair the damaged road wheel and
tire assembly and put it back on your
vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
E224333 monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
Dual Rear Wheel the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
E224332
423
Wheels and Tires
Low Tire Pressure Possible Cause Customer Action Required

Warning Light
Solid warning light Tire under inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label, located on
the edge of driver door or the B-Pillar,
you must drive your vehicle for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
Tire rotation without On vehicles with different front and rear
sensor training tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 404).
Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
light assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
424
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset

Procedure
When putting air into your tires, such as at
a gas station or in your garage, the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
WARNING: To determine the
respond immediately to the air added to
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
your tires.
the Safety Compliance Certification
It may take up to two minutes of driving Label (on the door hinge pillar,
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn door-latch post or the door edge that
off after you have filled your tires to the meets the door-latch post, next to the
recommended inflation pressure. driver seat) or the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitoring system reset procedure after
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic each tire rotation.
tire. When driving in a normal manner, a To provide the vehicle's load carrying
typical passenger tire inflation pressure capability, some vehicles require different
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) recommended tire pressures in the front
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
stationary overnight with the outside pressure monitoring system equipped on
temperature significantly lower than the these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may low tire pressure warning light at two
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of different pressures; one for the front tires
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This and one for the rear tires.
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as Since tires need to be rotated to provide
being significantly lower than the consistent performance and maximum tire
recommended inflation pressure and life, the tire pressure monitoring system
activate the system warning light for low needs to know when the tires are rotated
tire pressure. to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
If the low tire pressure warning light is on, information, the system can detect and
visually check each tire to verify that no tire properly warn of low tire pressures.
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the System reset tips:
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
425
Wheels and Tires
• To reduce the chances of interference 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring

from another vehicle, perform the system sensors in the tires using the
system reset procedure at least 3 ft following system reset sequence
(1 m) away from another Ford Motor starting with the left front tire in the
Company vehicle undergoing the following clockwise order: Left front -
system reset procedure at the same driver side front tire, Right front -
time. passenger side front tire, Right rear -
• Do not wait more than two minutes passenger side rear tire, Left rear -
between resetting each tire sensor or driver side rear tire.
the system can time-out and you have 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
to repeat the entire procedure on all stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
four wheels. air pressure until the horn sounds.
• A double horn sounds indicating the Note: The single horn tone confirms that
need to repeat the procedure. the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
Performing the System Reset Procedure double horn is heard, the reset procedure
- Single Rear Wheel was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
Read the entire procedure before 7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
attempting. stem on the right front tire. Decrease
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph the air pressure until the horn sounds.
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes, 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
then park in a safe location where you stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
can easily get to all four tires and have air pressure until the horn sounds.
access to an air pump.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
2. Place the ignition in the off position and stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
keep the key in the ignition. air pressure until the horn sounds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position Training is complete after the horn
with the engine off. sounds for the last tire trained, driver
side rear tire, the system indicator
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off stops flashing, and a message shows
three times. You must accomplish this in the information display.
within 10 seconds. If you successfully
enter the reset mode, the horn sounds 10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
once, the system indicator flashes and beeps are heard, the reset procedure
a message shows in the information was unsuccessful and you must
display. If this does not occur, please repeat it. If after repeating the
try again starting at step 2. If after procedure and two short beeps are
repeated attempts to enter the reset heard when the ignition is turned to
mode, the horn does not sound, the off, seek assistance from your
system indicator does not flash and no authorized dealer.
message shows in the information
display, seek service from your
authorized dealer.
426
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
air pressure as indicated on the system sensors in the tires using the
Safety Compliance Certification following system reset sequence
Label, affixed to either the door hinge starting with the left front tire in the
pillar, door-latch post, or the door following order: Left front - driver side
edge that meets the door-latch post, front tire, Right front - passenger side
next to the driver seating position or front tire, Right outer rear -passenger
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or side rear outer tire, Right inner rear -
the edge of the driver door. passenger side rear inner tire, Left outer
rear - driver side rear outer tire, Left
Performing the System Reset Procedure inner rear - driver side rear inner tire.
- Dual Rear Wheel
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
For further information see stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
Understanding Your Tire Pressure air pressure until the horn sounds.
Monitoring System and refer to Dual Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
Rear Wheel, earlier in this section.
the sensor identification code has been
Read the entire procedure before learned by the module for this position. If a
attempting. double horn is heard, the reset procedure
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes, 7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
then park in a safe location where you stem on the right front tire. Decrease
can easily get to all six tires and have the air pressure until the horn sounds.
access to an air pump. 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
2. Place the ignition in the off position and stem on the right outer rear tire.
keep the key in the ignition. Decrease the air pressure until the horn
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position sounds.
with the engine off. 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off stem on the right inner rear tire.
three times. You must accomplish this Decrease the air pressure until the horn
within 10 seconds. If you successfully sounds.
enter the reset mode, the horn sounds 10. Remove the valve cap from the valve
once, the system indicator flashes and stem on the left outer rear tire.
a message shows in the information Decrease the air pressure until the
display. If this does not occur, please horn sounds.
try again starting at step 2. If after 11. Remove the valve cap from the valve
repeated attempts to enter the reset stem on the left inner rear tire.
mode, the horn does not sound, the Decrease the air pressure until the
system indicator does not flash and no horn sounds. Training is complete
message shows in the information after the horn sounds for the last tire
display, seek service from your trained, the system indicator stops
authorized dealer. flashing, and a message is shown in
427
Wheels and Tires
12. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn The trailer tire pressure monitoring system
beeps are heard, the reset procedure is an added safety feature that allows you
was unsuccessful and you must to view your trailer tire pressures through
repeat it. If after repeating the the information display. See General
procedure and two short beeps are Information (page 110). Tire pressure
heard when the ignition is turned to sensors are mounted into each tire on your
off, seek assistance from your trailer. The sensors send a message to your
authorized dealer. vehicle indicating the current trailer tire
13. Set all six tires to the recommended pressure.
air pressure as indicated on the If the trailer tire pressure monitoring
Safety Compliance Certification system detects that a tire is low, a warning
Label, affixed to either the door hinge message appears in the information
pillar, door-latch post, or the door display. The trailer tire pressure status
edge that meets the door-latch post, screen in the information display highlights
next to the driver seating position or the tire with a low pressure.
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or
The main function of the trailer tire
the edge of the driver door.
pressure monitoring system is to warn you
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring when your trailer tires need air. It can also
System (If Equipped) warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended.
Note: Additional equipment may be See Information Messages (page 121).
required for your vehicle to support trailer
tire pressure monitoring. See your authorized When a Temporary Spare or New Tire
dealer for more information. is Installed
Note: The trailer tire pressure monitoring If you have replaced a trailer tire with a new
system is not a substitute for proper tire or spare tire, a warning message appears
maintenance. It is your responsibility to and pressure readings are no longer
maintain correct tire pressures at all times. displayed for that tire.
Note: If a trailer tire is repaired, replaced or To restore the full function of the trailer
broken down for service, the screw and valve tire pressure monitoring system:
on the trailer tire pressure sensor should be • Have the damaged wheel and tire
replaced. See your authorized dealer for assembly repaired and remounted to
details. your trailer.
• Install the trailer tire pressure
monitoring sensor into the new wheel
and tire assembly.
• Perform the trailer tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring

System Reset Procedure
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation, or when a new trailer tire
E235807 pressure sensor is installed into a trailer tire.
428
Wheels and Tires
The trailer tire pressure monitoring system Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
can be reset through the menu in the Assembly Information
information display. See General
Information (page 110). Performing the
trailer setup process also resets the trailer WARNING: Failure to follow these
tire pressure monitoring system. guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and

tire, then it is intended for temporary use
WARNING: If the tire pressure only. This means that if you need to use it,
monitor sensor becomes damaged it you should replace it as soon as possible
may not function. with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the and wheels that were originally provided
tire pressure monitoring system, the by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
indicator light illuminates when the spare is damaged, it should be replaced rather
tire is in use. To restore the full function of than repaired.
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
Note: You should only use tire sealants in appearance from the road tires and
roadside emergencies as they may cause wheels.
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor. Full-size dissimilar spare
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not When driving with the full-size dissimilar
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
decrease your speed. Hold the steering • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe • Use more than one dissimilar spare
place on the side of the road. wheel and tire assembly at a time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire • Use snow chains on the end of the
pressure monitoring system, have a flat vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
serviced by an authorized dealer in order and tire assembly.
to prevent damage to the system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System When driving with the full-size dissimilar
(page 421). Replace the spare tire with a spare wheel and tire assembly, 4WD
road tire as soon as possible. During functionality may be limited. You may
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have experience the following:
the authorized dealer inspect the system • Additional noise from the transfer case
sensor for damage. or other drive components.
• Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked 4WD mode.
429
Wheels and Tires
When driving with the full-size dissimilar • Wet weather driving capability.
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is • Four-wheel drive capability.
recommended that you do not:
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD. spare wheel and tire assembly additional
• Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is caution should be given to:
stationary. • Towing a trailer.
• Use 4WD on dry pavement.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare camper body.
wheel and tire assembly can lead to • Driving vehicles with a load on the
impairment of the following: cargo rack.
• Handling, stability and braking Drive cautiously when using a full-size
performance. dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
• Comfort and noise. and seek service as soon as possible.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
Location of the Spare Tire and
• Winter weather driving capability. Tools
See the following table for their locations:
Item Location
Spare tire - pick-up trucks only Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper.
Jack Fastened to the floor pan behind the rear-
most seat on the passenger side.
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug wrench exten- Regular Cab: Fastened to floor behind the
sion - only provided on dual rear wheel driver seat.
vehicles. Super Cab and Crew Cab: Fastened to the
floor under the rear seat on the driver's side.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: The jack supplied with

this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in
an emergency.
E166722
430
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To help prevent your WARNING: Do not get under a

vehicle from moving when changing a vehicle that is only supported by a
wheel, shift the transmission into park vehicle jack.
(P), set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to WARNING: Do not attempt to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
the wheel being changed. For example, close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
when changing the front left wheel, off the road to avoid the danger of being
place an appropriate block or wheel hit when operating the jack or changing
chock on the right rear wheel. the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack WARNING: Only use the spare
provided as original equipment with your wheel carrier to stow the wheel provided
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one with your vehicle. Other wheel sizes
provided, make sure the jack capacity is could cause the spare wheel carrier to
adequate for the vehicle weight, fail if it does not fit securely or is too
including any vehicle cargo or heavy.
modifications. If you are unsure if the jack
capacity is adequate, contact the Note: Do not use impact tools or power
authorized dealer. tools operating at over 200 RPM on the
spare wheel carrier winch, which may cause
WARNING: Failure to follow these it to malfunction and prevent a secure fit.
guidelines could result in an increased Override the winch at least three times
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or (there is an audible click each time) to make
death. sure the wheel and tire fit securely.
WARNING: Never place anything Note: Passengers should not remain in the
between the vehicle jack and your vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
vehicle. 1. Park the vehicle on a level firm ground
and activate the hazard flashers.
WARNING: Never place anything 2. Apply the parking brake, place the
between the vehicle jack and the ground. transmission in park (P), switch the
engine off.
WARNING: Park your vehicle so
that you do not obstruct the flow of 3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
traffic or place yourself in any danger and the flat tire. For example, if the left
set up a warning triangle. front tire is flat, block the right rear
wheel.
WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support
as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
431
Wheels and Tires
7. One or more handle extensions are

used to operate the spare tire carrier.
To assemble, align the button with the
hole and slide the parts together. To
disconnect, press the button and pull
apart.
E175447
4. You can find the jack on the floor

behind the rear-most seat on the
passenger side. Turn the retainers
counterclockwise to remove the jack.
E308882
8. The lug wrench is used to turn the

handle extensions and the jack handle;
slide the square end of the handle
extension into the square hold of the
lug wrench until it clicks in place.
E309424
5. You can find the tool kit on the floor

under the driver seat for regular cab or
under the rear seat on the driver side.
Turn the retainers counterclockwise to
remove the tool kit.
E162796
9. Fully insert the jack handle, with one

extension, through the bumper hole
and into the guide tube. Additional
extensions will be needed if the tailgate
is in the lowered position and cannot
E309795
be raised. Turn the handle
6. Use the ignition key to open the lock at counterclockwise and lower the spare
the rear bumper. tire until you can slide the tire rearward
432
Wheels and Tires
and the cable is slack. You will feel 13. Position the jack under the correct
some resistance when you turn the jack jacking points according to following
handle assembly. If not replacing the pictures.
spare or flat tire to the underbody
storage area, raise the wheel retainer Removing Wheel Trim With Single
up into the installed position. Wheels
10. Slide the retainer through the center 1. Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
of the spare tire wheel and remove between the wheel rim and the wheel
the spare tire. trim.
2. Carefully remove the wheel trim.
Vehicles With Dual Rear Alloy Wheels
E310417
11. Remove the wheel trim with the lug

wrench tip, or use the wheel trim tool
described later in this section.
12. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground. For dual rear wheel,
assemble the lug wrench and
extension tool together to access the E338541
lug nuts.
E309794
433
Wheels and Tires
E338552
2. Insert the wheel trim removal tool into

the notch in the wheel trim.
3. Rotate the wheel trim removal tool and
remove the wheel trim.
E338539 Jacking the Vehicle
The wheel trim removal tool is in the
storage bag near the lug wrench. F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel
Vehicles
Rear Wheel Trim
E162801
E338557
1. Locate the notch in the wheel trim.
434
Wheels and Tires
E162802 E162805
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and F-550

Vehicles
E162803
E162812
E162804
E162813
Front (4x2):F350 Dual rear wheel

Note: Place the jack directly under the
I-beam.
435
Wheels and Tires
Rear: F-350 dual rear wheel
E162815
E162816
Front passenger side (4x4): F-350 dual
rear wheel Front: F-450 and F-550
E162814
E162818
Front driver side (4x4): F-350 dual rear Rear: F-450 and F-550
wheel
Insert the hooked end of the jack handle
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat into the jack and turn the jack handle
area on the outboard side of the differential clockwise. For hydraulic jacks, operate the
housing. handle up-and-down until the wheel is
completely off the ground and high enough
to install the spare tire.
Note: Hydraulic jacks have a pressure relief
valve that prevents lifting loads which
exceed the jack's rated capacity.
F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel
Vehicles
E162817
436
Wheels and Tires
Note: For F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450

and F-550 Vehicles, insert the notched end
of the jack handle to the release valve, open
the release valve slightly by turning the
handle counterclockwise. Stop turning the
release valve when vehicle start to lower.
Make sure to close the valve when you
completely lower your vehicle.
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and
F-550 Vehicles.
E162811
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel Vehicles
E162812
Installing the lug Nuts and Ornaments

E162819 1
Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench, 6 7

replace the flat tire with the spare, making
sure the valve stem of the spare is facing
outward when replacing a front wheel. For
the rear wheel position on vehicles with 4 3
single rear wheel fitments, install the spare
with the valve stem facing outward. For
vehicles with dual rear wheels, the valve
stem of the spare must face outward when 8 5
replacing an inner wheel, but must face
E161441 2
inward when replacing an outboard wheel.
Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is 8-lug nut torque sequence
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
Lower the vehicle completely by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise until the
vehicle is completely lowered.
437
Wheels and Tires
10 1
3 8
5 6
7 4
A B
E169375 2 9 E162822
10-lug nut torque sequence Note: If the ornament retention clips are
aligned between the studs or lug nuts, the
Note: When installing the wheel center
ornament will be improperly installed. This
ornaments, make sure that the ornament
improper installation may appear and sound
retention towers on the back side of the
correct, but will not keep the ornament on
ornament are aligned with the studs or nuts
the vehicle. Ornaments improperly installed
and retain to the flange on the lug nuts.
in this manner may become loose or fall off
during driving.
E162820
Note: For dual rear wheels, align the E162823
ornament with the lug nuts. (A) is the clip

Use your hand or a rubber mallet to tap the
in the ornament and (B) is the flange of the
ornament until the retention clips snap
lug nut. Make sure that each of the retention
over the lug nut flanges. Tap in a star
clips are sitting on a lug nut flange.
pattern until the ornament seats fully onto
the wheel. There should be an even gap
between the ornament and the wheel
when it is properly installed.
438
Wheels and Tires
2. Slide the wheel partially under the

vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. If equipped, you may
A have to remove the wheel center cap
prior to pushing the retainer through
the center of the wheel. To remove the
C D center cap, press it off with the lug
wrench tip from the inner side of the
wheel. Pull on the cable to align the
B components at the end of the cable.
3. Turn the lug wrench clockwise until the
E162824 tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench
Stowing the Flat Tire or Spare Tire will become harder to turn and the
spare tire winch will ratchet or slip
1. Place the tire on end with the valve when the tire is raised to maximum
stem facing toward the front of the tightness. You will hear a clicking sound
vehicle. Lay the tire on the ground, near from the winch indicating that the tire
the rear of the vehicle, with the valve is properly stowed. Check that the tire
stem side facing up. lies flat against the frame and is
properly tightened.
4. Carefully place all tools back in the tool
kit bag.
5. Reinstall the tool kit bag and tighten
the wing nut.
6. Properly reinstall the jack into the
bracket and tighten the wing nut.
E162800
439
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
1
Bolt size lb.ft (Nm)
M14 x 1.5 150 lb.ft (204 Nm)

1 Torque
specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque
at 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire,
or wheel removal.
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified
torque at 100 mi (160 km), and again at 500 mi (800 km) of new vehicle operation and
after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, or wheel removal.
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque procedures.
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
440
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L
Engine 6.2L V8 Engine
Displacement. 379 in³ (6,210 cm³)

Required fuel. Minimum 87 octane
Firing order. 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.041 in (1.04 mm) - 0.047 in (1.2 mm)
Compression ratio. 9.8:1
Drivebelt Routing
E163761
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL
Engine 6.7L V8 Diesel Engine

Required fuel. Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel up to B20
Firing order. 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
441
Drivebelt Routing Dual Alternator

Single Alternator
E299021
E299020
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 7.3L
Engine 7.3L V8 Engine

Required fuel. Minimum 87 octane
Firing order. 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2
Ignition system. Coil near spark plug with spark plug wire
Spark plug gap. 0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)
442
Drivebelt Routing Dual Alternator

Single Alternator
E298579
E305075
A Drivebelt closest to the engine.
A Drivebelt closest to the engine. B Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
B Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.2L
Component Motorcraft Part number
Air filter element. FA-1950

Battery (XL). BXT-65-650
Battery (all except XL). BXT-65-750
Cabin air filter. FP-79
1 FL-820-S
Engine oil filter.
2 SP-526
Spark plugs.
Six-speed automatic transmission fluid FT-188
filter (6R100).
443
Ten-speed automatic transmission fluid FT-221

filter (10R140).
Windshield wiper blades. WW-2248
1 If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D.
2 For spark plug replacement, contact your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the recommended intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 568).

We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. These parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
444
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.7L DIESEL
Air filter. FA-1951

Foam pre-filter. FA-1952
Battery (two required). BXT-65-750
1 FL-2051-S
Engine oil filter.
Fuel filter. FD-4631
filter (10R140).
specification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D.
We recommend Motorcraft® parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. These parts are engineered for your vehicle, and meet or exceed our
445
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 7.3L
Component Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element. FA-1950

Battery. BXT-65-750
1 FL-820-S
Engine oil filter.
Spark plugs. SP-589
filter (10R140).
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our
446
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART the proper lamp performance, light

brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
Replacement bulbs are specified in the The correct bulbs will not damage the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking warranty and will provide quality bulb
for North America to make sure they have illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Headlamp. H13/9008 60/55

Headlamp. LED LED
Front side marker lamp. W5W 5
Front fog lamp. 9140 40
Front fog lamp.

3
LED LED
Front direction indicator and parking

T20/7444NA 28/8
lamp.
Rear lamp, brake lamp, and rear side 3157K 27/7
1
marker lamp. Low/Mid series.
Rear direction indicator lamp. Low/Mid WTY21W 21
1
series.
Rear lamp, brake lamp, rear direction LED LED
indicator, rear side marker lamp and
1
reverse lamp. High series.
Rear lamp, brake lamp, rear direction 3157K 27/7
2
indicator and rear side marker lamp.
Reversing lamp. Low/Mid series. WT21W 21
License plate lamp. Low series. 168 5
License plate lamp. High series. LED LED
Central high mounted cargo lamp. 912 12.8
Central high mounted cargo lamp. LED LED
Side direction indicator and mirror LED LED
clearance lamp.
447
Front clearance lamp. LED LED

Rear clearance lamp. LED LED
Front identification lamp. LED LED
Rear identification lamp. LED LED
Underhood lamp. LED LED
1 Pickup only.
2 Chassis cab only.
3 U.S. and Canada only
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Map lamp. LED LED

Glove compartment lamp. LED LED
Interior lamp. LED LED
Overhead console lamp. LED LED
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
448
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND

SPECIFICATION - 6.2L
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods. E142732
• Increased emission levels. An oil that displays this symbol conforms

• Reduced vehicle performance. to current engine, emission system and
• Reduced fuel economy. fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SP requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
All. 7.0 qt (6.6 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor WSS-M2C961-A1

Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
449
Alternative Engine Oil for we recommend that you use the following
Extremely Cold Climates alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
To improve engine cold start performance, reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend WSS-M2C963-A1
E240523
Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
SPECIFICATION - 6.7L DIESEL your vehicle. If Motorcraft motor oil is not
available, use motor oil of the
Use oil that meets the defined recommended viscosity grade that meets
specification and viscosity grade. our specification WSS-M2C171-F1. You can
If you do not use oil that meets the defined find the list of approved motor oils at
specification and viscosity grade, it could www.motorcraft.com.
result in: Do not use supplemental engine oil
• Component damage that your vehicle additives because they are unnecessary
warranty does not cover. and could lead to engine damage that your
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
450
The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel

engines is important for satisfactory
operation. Determine which oil viscosity
best suits the temperature range you
expect to encounter for the next service
interval from the SAE Viscosity Grades
chart.
Note: An engine block heater is
recommended at temperatures below -9°F
(-23°C).
E327351
451
Capacities
All. 13.0 qt (12.3 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 10W-30 Super Duty Diesel Motor WSS-M2C171-F1

Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Super Duty Motor Oil SAE 10W-30 /
Huile moteur Super Duty SAE 10W-30 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XO-10W30-QSDF(U.S.)
CXO-10W30-LSD12(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-40 WSS-M2C171-F1
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel

Fuel Blends (B20 Max)
452
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor WSS-M2C171-F1

Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 15W-40 Super Duty Diesel Motor WSS-M2C171-F1
Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Super Duty Motor Oil SAE 15W-40 /
Huile moteur Super Duty SAE 15W-40 Motor-
craft®(Canada)
XO-15W40-QSDF(U.S.)
CXO-15W40-LSD12(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe

Duty Service
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor WSS-M2C171-F1

Oil(U.S.)
(Canada)
XO-5W40-5Q3SD(U.S.)
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND

SPECIFICATION - 7.3L
Use oil that meets the defined
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in:
warranty does not cover. E142732
• Longer engine cranking periods. An oil that displays this symbol conforms
• Increased emission levels. to current engine, emission system and
• Reduced vehicle performance. fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
• Reduced fuel economy.
453
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
and could lead to engine damage that your
API SP requirements and display the API
Capacities
All. 8.0 qt (7.57 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor WSS-M2C961-A1

Oil(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
/ Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30
XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend WSS-M2C963-A1
454
E240523
If you do not use coolant that meets the

defined specification, it could result in:
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 6.2L warranty does not cover.
Use coolant that meets the defined • Reduced vehicle performance.
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 24.6 qt (23.3 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
455
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY If you do not use coolant that meets the
AND SPECIFICATION - 6.7L
DIESEL warranty does not cover.
specification. Note: An engine block heater is
recommended at temperatures below-9°F
(-23°C).
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Primary cooling system. 31.7 qt (30 L)

Secondary cooling system. 8.1 qt (7.7 L)
Materials
Name Specification

Coolant(U.S.)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
If you do not use coolant that meets the

COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION - 7.3L warranty does not cover.
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 22.5 qt (21.3 L)
456
Materials
Name Specification

Coolant(U.S.)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - DIESEL

Capacities
Variant Quantity
Complete vehicle-142 inch and 148 inch 29.0 gal (109.8 L)

wheelbase, middle location.
Complete vehicle-160 inch and 164 inch 34.0 gal (128.7 L)
wheelbase, middle location.
Complete vehicle-176 inch wheelbase, 48.0 gal (181.7 L)
middle location.
Incomplete vehicle, middle location. 26.5 gal (100.3 L)
Incomplete vehicle, aft- axle -location. 40.0 gal (151.4 L)
Incomplete vehicle, middle and aft- axle - 66.5 gal (251.7 L)
locations.
457
FUEL TANK CAPACITY - GASOLINE

Capacities
Variant Quantity
Complete vehicle-all except 176 inch 34.0 gal (128.7 L)

wheelbase and incomplete vehicles.
Complete vehicle-176 inch wheelbase. 48.0 gal (181.7 L)
Incomplete vehicle, aft- axle -location. 40.0 gal (151.4 L)
Incomplete vehicle, middle location. 26.5 gal (100.3 L)
458
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM the air conditioning refrigerant system

CAPACITY AND can cause personal injury.
SPECIFICATION - 6.2L Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
defined specifications.
WARNING: The air conditioning If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
refrigerant system contains refrigerant meets the defined specifications, it could
under high pressure. Only qualified result in:
personnel should service the air • Component damage that your vehicle
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Refrigerant Refrigerant Oil
With six-speed automatic 27 oz (0.765 kg) 4.1 fl oz (120 ml)

transmission.
With ten-speed automatic 27 oz (0.765 kg) 3.7 fl oz (110 ml)
transmission.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant(U.S.) WSH-M17B19-A

R-134a Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-134a(Canada)
YN-19(U.S.)
CYN-19-R(Canada)
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil(U.S.) WSH-M1C231-B
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil / Huile
PAG pour compresseur frigorifique Motor-
craft®(Canada)
YN-12-D(U.S. & Canada)
459

SPECIFICATION - 6.7L DIESEL Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
Capacities
All. 27 oz (0.765 kg) 3.7 fl oz (110 ml)
Materials
Name Specification

YN-19(U.S.)
CYN-19-R(Canada)
craft®(Canada)
460

SPECIFICATION - 7.3L Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
Capacities
All. 27 oz (0.765 kg) 3.7 fl oz (110 ml)
Materials
Name Specification

YN-19(U.S.)
CYN-19-R(Canada)
craft®(Canada)
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
461
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen- WSS-M14P19-A

trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motor-
craft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-F/M(Canada)
If you do not use fluid that meets the

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
CAPACITY AND warranty does not cover.
SPECIFICATION (IF EQUIPPED) • Reduced vehicle performance.
Use fluid that meets the defined

specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Complete vehicle. 7.4 gal (28 L)

Incomplete vehicle. 7.2 gal (27.3 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid(U.S.) WSS-M99C130-A

Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid / Fluide pour
échappement diesel Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-27-GAL,PM-27-JUG(U.S.)
CPM-27-J(Canada)
462
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION If you do not use fluid that meets the

FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - DIESEL warranty does not cover.
Use fluid that meets the defined • Reduced vehicle performance.
specification. Note: Only use MERCON ULV transmission
fluid for automatic transmissions that
require MERCON ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid could cause
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
18.1 qt (17.1 L)
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis- WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULV

sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CAPACITY AND warranty does not cover.
SPECIFICATION - GASOLINE • Reduced vehicle performance.
Use fluid that meets the defined Six-Speed Automatic
specification. Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON LV transmission
require MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid could cause
463
Capacities
Variant Quantity
6.2L. 1
13.9 qt (13.2 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV,

Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
Ten-Speed Automatic
Transmission
Note: Only use MERCON ULV transmission
require MERCON ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid could cause
Capacities
Variant Quantity
6.2L. 1
18.2 qt (17.2 L)
7.3L . 1
18.2 qt (17.2 L)
464
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis- WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULV

sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
Note: We recommend you use DOT 4 Low

Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. If
you use any fluid other than the
Use fluid that meets the defined recommended fluid, it could cause reduced
specification and viscosity grade. brake performance and not meet our
If you do not use fluid that meets the performance standards. Keep brake fluid
defined specification and viscosity grade, clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
it could result in: water, petroleum products or other
• Component damage that your vehicle materials could result in brake system
warranty does not cover. damage and possible failure.
• Reduced brake performance.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor WSS-M6C65-A2

Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
465
TRANSFER CASE FLUID specification.

CAPACITY AND If you do not use fluid that meets the
SPECIFICATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Use fluid that meets the defined warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1.9 qt (1.8 L)
Materials
Name Specification

Fluid(U.S.)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)

defined specification and viscosity grade,
FRONT AXLE FLUID CAPACITY it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION • Component damage that your vehicle
specification and viscosity grade. • Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Four-wheel drive without limited slip. 2.75 qt (2.6 L)

Four-wheel drive with limited slip. 1
2.75 qt (2.6 L)
1 For complete refill of limited slip axles, add 5.4 fl oz. (160 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier in

the total lube volume of 2.75 qt (2.6 L).
466
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier(U.S.) EST-M2C118-A

Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier / Additif
modificateur de friction Motorcraft®(Canada)
XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle WSP-M2C197-A
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
CXY-80W90-1L(Canada)

REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION - DIESEL • Component damage that your vehicle
specification and viscosity grade. • Reduced vehicle performance.
Rear Axle - 10.5

Capacities
Variant Quantity
With Electronic Locking Differential. 3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)

Without Electronic Locking Differential. 3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic WSS-M2C942-A

Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
467
Rear Axle - 10.8

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 3.6 qt (3.42 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle WSL-M2C192-A

Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant / Lubrifiant synthétique pour pont arrière
SAE 75W-140 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
Rear Axle - 11.8

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
3.78 qt (3.58 L)
1 Forcomplete refill of limited slip axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier
in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
468
Materials
Name Specification

XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
Lubricant(U.S.)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)

REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION - • Component damage that your vehicle
GASOLINE warranty does not cover.
Rear Axle - 10.5

Capacities
Variant Quantity
With Electronic Locking Differential. 3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L)

Without Electronic Locking Differential. 3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L)
469
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic WSS-M2C942-A

Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic
Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute
qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85
XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada)
Rear Axle - 10.8

Capacities
Variant Quantity
7.3L. 3.6 qt (3.42 L)
Materials
Name Specification

Lubricant(U.S.)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
Rear Axle - 11.8

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 1
3.78 qt (3.58 L)
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier
in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
470
Materials
Name Specification

XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle WSP-M2C197-A
Lubricant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant
/ Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE
80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XY-80W90-QL(U.S.)
Rear Axle - 11.8 (With Heavy Duty Tow Option)

Capacities
Variant Quantity
7.3L. 1
3.78 qt (3.58 L)
XL-3 or equivalent, meeting specification EST-M2C118-A. Include this friction modifier in
the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L).
Materials
Name Specification

XL-3(U.S.)
CXL-3(Canada)
Lubricant(U.S.)
XY-75W140-QL(U.S.)
471
HYDRAULIC POWER If you do not use fluid that meets the

STEERING FLUID CAPACITY
AND SPECIFICATION warranty does not cover.
Use fluid that meets the defined • Reduced vehicle performance.
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
Materials
Name Specification

Fluid(U.S.)
XT-10-QLVC(U.S.)
CXT-10-LV6(Canada)
472
Vehicle Identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
Locating the Vehicle Identification

Number
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142477
A World manufacturer identifier.

B Brake system, gross vehicle
weight rating, restraint devices
and their locations.
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type.
D Engine or motor type.
E Check digit.
F Model year.
E311767 G Assembly plant.
Note: In the illustration, XXXX is H Production sequence number.
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
Vehicle Identification Number

Overview
The vehicle identification number contains
the following information:
473
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE 2. Press FordPass Connect.

REQUIREMENTS 3. Press Connectivity Settings.
4. Switch connectivity features on or off.
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle
network.
Connecting FordPass to the
Modem
Some remote features require additional
service activation. Log in to your Ford 1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
account for details. Some restrictions, third using the vehicle settings menu.
party terms and message or data rates 2. Open the FordPass app on your device
may apply. and log in.
3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE if already added.
LIMITATIONS 4. Select the option for vehicle details.
5. Select the option to activate your
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or vehicle.
regulations could affect functionality and
availability, or continued provision of some 6. Make sure that the name on the screen
features. These changes could even stop matches the name shown in your
some features from functioning. FordPass account.
7. Confirm that FordPass account is
connected to the modem.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
A MOBILE NETWORK
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO
What Is the Modem A WI-FI NETWORK
The modem allows access to a 1. Press Settings.
range of features built into your 2. Press Wi-Fi.
vehicle.
3. Switch Wi-Fi on.
4. Press View Available Networks.
Enabling and Disabling the Modem 5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
1. Press Settings. Note: Enter the network password to
connect to a secure network.
474
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING - VEHICLES WITH:

MODEM
Symptom Possible Cause and Resolution
I cannot confirm the – Modem is not enabled.

connection of my FordPass • Switch connectivity features on.
account to the modem.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
475
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING - VEHICLES WITH:

SYNC/SYNC 3
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi – Password error.

network. • Enter the correct network password.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection – Weak network signal.

disconnects after successful • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
connection. a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot – Obstructed network signal.

but the network signal • If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
strength is weak. your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the – Hidden network.

list of available networks • Make the network visible and try again.
that I expect to see.
476
Connected Vehicle
I cannot see the Wi-Fi – System limitation.

hotspot name when I search • Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
for Wi-Fi networks on my
cell phone or other device. • The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at
this time.
Software downloads take – Weak network signal.

too long. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
The system seems to – No software update available.

connect to a Wi-Fi network – Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
and the signal strength is of terms and conditions.
excellent but the software
does not update. • Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
477
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI 2. If the portal does not open on your

device, open a website and it redirects
HOTSPOT to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it 3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
for access to the Internet. portal to purchase a plan.
Select the settings option on the Note: If you have an active plan, the system
feature bar. does not redirect to the vehicle network
E280315
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
1. Press FordPass Connect. Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot. to purchase more data.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting Note: If data usage information is available
is on. in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
approximate.
3. Press Settings.
Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
4. Press Wi-Fi visibility. system does not remove your vehicle from
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
on. remove your vehicle from the account,
contact your vehicle network carrier.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name
Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
and Password Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
Select the settings option on the vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
feature bar. and availability.
E280315
1. Press FordPass Connect. CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-

2. Press Vehicle Hotspot. FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
3. Press Settings. PASSWORD
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name.
Select the settings option on the
4. Press View Password. feature bar.
E280315
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Hotspot 1. Press FordPass Connect.
2. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and
select the hotspot from the list of 3. Press Settings.
available Wi-Fi networks. 4. Press Edit.
2. When prompted, enter the password. 5. Press Change SSID Name.
Purchasing a Data Plan 6. Enter your required SSID.
7. Press Done.
1. Connect a device to the hotspot.
8. Press Change Password.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal
opens on your device. 9. Enter your required password.
10. Press Done.
478
Audio System - Vehicles With: SYNC
GENERAL INFORMATION hand-held device while driving and

WARNING: Driving while distracted are aware of all applicable local laws
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash that may affect the use of electronic
and injury. We strongly recommend that devices while driving.
device that may take your focus off the Radio Frequencies and Reception
road. Your primary responsibility is the Factors
recommend against the use of any Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING: Driving while distracted

systems when possible. Make sure you E291383
that may affect the use of electronic Note: Depending on your vehicle option
devices while driving. package, the controls may look different
from what you see here.
479
Note: Some features, such as satellite Adjusting the Volume

radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Accessing the Apps Menu

Press and release the button to
access the apps menu. Follow
the on-screen prompts to make
your selection.
Accessing the Clock Settings

access the clock setting.
E265036
Use the center arrow controls to
change the hours and minutes.
E265373
Accessing the Media Source Menu Turn to adjust the volume.

Press and release the button to Changing Radio Stations
open the media source menu.
E265035
You can press this multiple times to

change to a SYNC-Media device or scroll
through the media sources using the arrow
buttons. Press OK to select a source.
Accessing the Phone Features

access the phone features of the
SYNC system.
Accessing the Sound Settings

access settings for Treble, E265696
E280315
Midrange, Bass, Fade and
Balance. In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
Accessing the Settings Menu In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
Press and release the button to station.
access the settings menu.
E142607
Follow the on-screen prompts
to make your selection.
480
Listening to the Radio Using the Display Control

Press and release the button to Use the up and down arrow buttons to
listen to the radio or change select the various settings. When you make
E265033 radio stations. your selection, press the left and right
arrow buttons to change the settings.
Playing or Pausing Media Press and release to confirm a
selection.
Press and release the button to E265041
either play or pause current
media source. Press and release the function buttons
below the display to select different
functions of the audio system depending
Switching the Audio Unit On and on which mode you are in.
Off
Using the Number Block
In radio mode, store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a favorite station,
Switching the Display On and Off press and hold until the sound returns. In
phone mode, enter a phone number.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and
E272035 Reverse
Switching Radio Text On and Off
E265045
display extra information, for
E268570 example, artist name.
E265044
Note: Extra information may not always be In radio mode, select a frequency band and
available. press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off that direction.
Press and release the button to In satellite radio mode, press and release
repeat the current media source. to select the next or previous satellite radio
E268569
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
Switching Shuffle Mode On and next or previous station in that category.
Off
Press and release the button to DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
shuffle the current media source.
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
481
HD Radio technology is the digital The multicast indicator appears in FM

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your mode, only, if the current station is
system has a special receiver that allows broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
it to receive digital broadcasts, where The highlighted numbers signify available
available, in addition to the analog digital channels where new or different
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital content is available. HD1 signifies the main
broadcasts provide a better sound quality programming status and is available in
than analog broadcasts with free, analog and digital broadcasts. Other
crystal-clear audio and no static or multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
distortion. For more information, and a only available digitally.
guide to available stations and
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
programming, please visit
can access the following functions:
www.hdradio.com.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a active channel as a memory preset.
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, Touch and hold a memory preset slot
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your until the sound returns. There is a brief
screen. When this logo is available, you mute while the radio saves the station.
may also see Title and Artist fields Sound returns when finished. When
on-screen. switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
482
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
483
Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. The
multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in
recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.
direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. 1
below.
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. 1
below.
1 http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company variety of music, news, sports, weather,
and DTS are not responsible for the traffic and entertainment satellite radio
content sent using HD Radio technology. channels. For more information and a
Content may be changed, added or deleted complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
at any time at the station owner's channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
discretion. United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
484
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system may mute.
SiriusXM satellite radio is a

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted news, weather, traffic and entertainment
right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. Your factory-installed
programming including canceling, moving SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
or adding particular channels, and its prices, hardware and a limited subscription term,
at any time, with or without notice to you. which begins on the date of sale or lease
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
Motor Company and its affiliates will be for availability.
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination. For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
E208625
485
Locating Your ESN 1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.

2. Tune to channel 0.
Troubleshooting
Message Condition Action
Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not
or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
SIRIUS system failure tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SiriusXM satellite or Siri- you move into an open area,
usXM tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
Updating… Update of channel No action required. The
programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
1-888-539-7474 subscription issues.
None found All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
Check Channel Guide skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
486
USB PORT The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
WARNING: Driving while distracted Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
and injury. We strongly recommend that cables and adapters may not work.
device that may take your focus off the Locating the USB Ports
road. Your primary responsibility is the The USB ports may be in the following
safe operation of your vehicle. We locations:
hand-held device while driving and • Inside the media bin.
encourage the use of voice-operated • Inside the center console.
systems when possible. Make sure you • On the lower instrument panel.
that may affect the use of electronic Note: The number and type of USB ports
devices while driving. may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
USB A data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 168).
E201595
USB C
E301114
487
Audio System - Vehicles With: SYNC 3
GENERAL INFORMATION hand-held device while driving and

WARNING: Driving while distracted are aware of all applicable local laws
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash that may affect the use of electronic
and injury. We strongly recommend that devices while driving.
device that may take your focus off the Radio Frequencies and Reception
road. Your primary responsibility is the Factors
recommend against the use of any Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
result in the audio system muting.
AUDIO UNIT

you use extreme caution when using any E291384
road. Your primary responsibility is the Note: Depending on your vehicle option
safe operation of your vehicle. We package, the controls could look different
recommend against the use of any from what you see here.
hand-held device while driving and Note: Some features, such as satellite
encourage the use of voice-operated radio, may not be available in your location.
systems when possible. Make sure you Check with an authorized dealer.
that may affect the use of electronic Note: The touchscreen system controls
devices while driving. most of the audio features.
488
Adjusting the Volume Selecting the Audio Modes

access different audio modes,
E265035
for example AM and FM.
Setting a Memory Preset

Tune to a station, then press and hold one
of the memory preset buttons on the
touchscreen. The audio briefly mutes while
the system saves the station and returns
once the station is stored.
Switching the Audio Unit On and

Off
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.

Some vehicles may be able to adjust the Using Seek, Fast Forward and
volume using buttons on the steering Reverse
wheel.
Changing Radio Stations

E265045
E265044
In radio mode, select a frequency band and

press and release either button. The
system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
In satellite radio mode, press and release
to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category,
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the
next or previous station in that category.
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)

E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the available in all markets.
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
489
HD Radio technology is the digital The multicast indicator appears in FM

evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your mode, only, if the current station is
system has a special receiver that allows broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
it to receive digital broadcasts, where The highlighted numbers signify available
available, in addition to the analog digital channels where new or different
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital content is available. HD1 signifies the main
broadcasts provide a better sound quality programming status and is available in
than analog broadcasts with free, analog and digital broadcasts. Other
crystal-clear audio and no static or multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
distortion. For more information, and a only available digitally.
guide to available stations and
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
programming, please visit
can access the following functions:
www.hdradio.com.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a active channel as a memory preset.
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, Touch and hold a memory preset slot
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your until the sound returns. There is a brief
screen. When this logo is available, you mute while the radio saves the station.
may also see Title and Artist fields Sound returns when finished. When
on-screen. switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
490
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.

responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
491
Potential station issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. The
multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in
recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.
direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. 1
below.
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. 1
below.
1 http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company variety of music, news, sports, weather,
and DTS are not responsible for the traffic and entertainment satellite radio
content sent using HD Radio technology. channels. For more information and a
Content may be changed, added or deleted complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
at any time at the station owner's channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
discretion. United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
492
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system may mute.
SiriusXM satellite radio is a

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted news, weather, traffic and entertainment
right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. Your factory-installed
programming including canceling, moving SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
or adding particular channels, and its prices, hardware and a limited subscription term,
at any time, with or without notice to you. which begins on the date of sale or lease
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
Motor Company and its affiliates will be for availability.
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination. For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account.
E208625
493
Locating Your ESN 1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.

2. Tune to channel 0.
Troubleshooting
Message Condition Action
Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not
or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
SIRIUS system failure tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SiriusXM satellite or Siri- you move into an open area,
usXM tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
Updating… Update of channel No action required. The
programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
1-888-539-7474 subscription issues.
None found All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
Check Channel Guide skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
494
USB PORT The USB port allows you to plug in media

playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices.
WARNING: Driving while distracted Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
and injury. We strongly recommend that cables and adapters may not work.
device that may take your focus off the Locating the USB Ports
road. Your primary responsibility is the The USB ports may be in the following
safe operation of your vehicle. We locations:
hand-held device while driving and • Inside the media bin.
encourage the use of voice-operated • Inside the center console.
systems when possible. Make sure you • On the lower instrument panel.
that may affect the use of electronic Note: The number and type of USB ports
devices while driving. may vary depending on your vehicle.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have
USB A data transfer capabilities. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 168).
E201595
USB C
E301114
495
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION Driving Restrictions

For your safety, certain features are
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
speed-dependent and restricted when your
system that works with your Bluetooth
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
enabled cellular phone and portable media
player. This allows you to: Safety Information
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player. WARNING: Driving while distracted
• Use 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance
* and injury. We strongly recommend that
and applications via SYNC AppLink.
• Access phonebook contacts and music device that may take your focus off the
using voice commands. road. Your primary responsibility is the
• Stream music from your connected safe operation of your vehicle. We
phone. recommend against the use of any
• Text message. encourage the use of voice-operated
• Use the advanced voice recognition systems when possible. Make sure you
system. are aware of all applicable local laws
• Charge your USB device (if your device that may affect the use of electronic
supports this). devices while driving.
*
These features are not available in all When using SYNC:
markets and may require activation.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
power cords or cables are broken, split
market.
or damaged. Place cords and cables
Make sure that you review your device's out of the way, so they do not interfere
manual before using it with SYNC. with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
Support
• Do not leave playing devices in your
SYNC support is available at your regional vehicle during extreme conditions as it
Ford website. See SYNC™ could cause them damage. See your
Troubleshooting (page 504). device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
SYNC Owner Account system. See an authorized dealer.
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
Privacy Information
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC. SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
• Access to customer support for any
phone. This profile is created in order to
questions you may have.
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
496
(read and unread), and call history, court order, or where required by law
including history of calls when your cellular enforcement, other government
phone was not connected to the system. authorities, or other third parties acting
In addition, if you connect a media device, with lawful authority. Other parties may
the system creates and retains an index of seek to access the information
supported media content. The system also independently of Ford Motor Company and
records a short development log of Ford of Canada. For further privacy
approximately 10 minutes of all recent information, see the section on 911 Assist.
system activity. The log profile and other See SYNC™ Applications and Services
system data may be used to improve the (page 500).
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the This system helps you control many
vehicle unless you delete them and are features using voice commands. This
generally accessible only in the vehicle allows you to keep your hands on the
when you connect the cellular phone or wheel and focus on what is around you.
media player. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend Initiating a Voice Session
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information. Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
No one can access system data without E142599 appears in the display.
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not Global Voice Commands
access the system data for any purpose These voice commands are always
other than as described absent consent, a available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
Help Gives you available commands you can use

on the current screen.
List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice
commands.
Cancel This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by pressing seek
up, seek down, or holding the voice button
for two or more seconds.
497
Helpful Hints System Interaction and Feedback

• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is The system provides feedback through
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from audible tones, prompts, questions and
open windows and road vibrations may spoken confirmations depending on the
prevent the system from correctly situation and the chosen level of
recognizing spoken commands. interaction. You can customize the voice
• Before giving a voice command, wait recognition system to provide more or less
for the system announcement to finish, instruction and feedback.
followed by a single tone. Any The default setting is to a higher level of
command spoken before this does not interaction in order to help you learn to use
register with the system. the system. You can change these settings
• Speak naturally, without long pauses at any time.
between words.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the Press the voice button. When
voice button. You can cancel a voice prompted, say:
session by pressing and holding the E142599
voice button.
Voice Command Action and Description
Interaction Mode Standard Provides more detailed interaction and

guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
Interaction Mode Advanced Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Phone Confirmation Off When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
Phone Confirmation On The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
498
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR 6. When a message to begin pairing

appears in the audio display, search for
PHONE SYNC on your device.
Hands-free calling is one of the main Depending on your phone's capability and
features of SYNC. While the system your market, the system may prompt you
supports a variety of features, many are with questions, such as setting the current
dependent on your cellular phone's phone as the primary phone and
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular downloading your phonebook.
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions: Using Voice Commands
• Answering an incoming call. Make sure to switch on your
• Ending a call. phone's Bluetooth feature
E142599 before starting the search. See
• Dialing a number. your device's manual if necessary.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification. Press the voice button and when
• Caller identification. prompted say:
Other features, such as text messaging Voice Command Action and Descrip-
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook tion
download, are phone-dependent features.
Pair Phone Follow the instruc-
Pairing a Phone tions on the audio
display.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
Phone Voice Commands
calls.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition Press the voice button. You can
and the radio. Shift the transmission into do things like place a phone call
park (P) for automatic transmission or
E142599 and access text messages.
neutral (N) for manual transmission. When prompted, say a command. See the
following table for examples of
Using the Audio System commands.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio Voice Command
system.
___ List of Commands
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the Help
search. See your device's manual if
necessary. Call ___
2. Press the Settings button. Dial ___
3. Select Bluetooth from the menu. Text Messages
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
499
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it

could be the name of anything, such as a WARNING: Do not wait for 911
contact or phone number. Assist to make an emergency call if you
Phone Controls can do it yourself. Dial emergency
services immediately to avoid delayed
Use the phone buttons on your steering response time which could increase the
wheel to answer, reject, or hang up a call. risk of serious injury or death after a
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within
Accessing Features through the five seconds of the crash, the system or
Phone Menu phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well WARNING: Always place your
as access phone and system settings. phone in a secure location in your vehicle
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the so it does not become a projectile or get
phone menu. damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
2. Scroll through the menu to view
damage the phone which could prevent
contacts, text messages, and the
911 Assist from working properly.
phone dialer.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND set on before the incident.
SERVICES Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of in which 911 is the emergency number.
an emergency. Note: Before setting this feature on, make
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
to and use certain applications (if your Notice later in this section for important
phone is compatible). information.
These features may require activation. Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by or off, that setting applies for all paired
market. phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
911 Assist or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the Note: Every phone operates differently.
system will not dial for help which could While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
delay response time, potentially cellular phones, some may have trouble
increasing the risk of serious injury or using this feature.
death after a crash.
500
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee In the Event of a Crash

airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
vehicle may be able to contact emergency the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
services by dialing 911 through a paired and Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
connected Bluetooth®-enabled phone. damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
See Supplementary Restraints System to connect to a previously paired cell
(page 45). Important information about phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
airbag deployment is in this chapter. emergency services.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 325). Before making the call:
Important information about the fuel pump
• SYNC provides a short window of time
shut-off is in this chapter.
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
Setting 911 Assist On or Off If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
Press the Settings button then select: • SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
Menu Action and Description 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
Item your screen or press and hold the
911 Assist Select the desired option, on phone button on your steering wheel".
or off. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
To make sure that 911 Assist works message plays for the 911 operator, and
properly: then the occupant(s) in your vehicle are
able to talk with the operator. Be prepared
• SYNC must be powered and working
to provide your name, phone number and
properly at the time of the incident and
location immediately, because not all 911
throughout feature activation and use.
systems are capable of receiving this
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on information electronically.
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a 911 Assist May Not Work If
Bluetooth® enabled and compatible • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
cell phone to SYNC. hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
phone must have the ability to make system has no power.
and maintain an outgoing call at the
time of the incident. • The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled the system.
phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal
strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
501
911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: For information on available apps,

supported smartphone devices and
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
disclose to emergency services that your website.
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of Note: Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or Apps will vary by region.
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable Note: Make sure you have an active account
of electronically or verbally disclosing to for the app that you have downloaded.
911 operators your vehicle location or other Some apps work automatically with no
details about your vehicle or crash to assist setup. Other apps want you to configure
911 operators to provide the most your personal settings and personalize your
appropriate emergency services. If you do experience by creating stations or favorites.
not want to disclose this information, do We recommend you do this at home or
not switch the feature on. outside of your vehicle.
SYNC Mobile Apps To Access Using the SYNC Menu
The system enables voice and steering Press the Mobile Apps button to access
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled the menu on-screen. Then select:
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main Menu Action and Description
features of the app through voice Item
commands and steering wheel controls.
Find Scroll through the list of
Note: You must pair and connect your Mobile available applications and
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. Apps select a particular app.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth®. Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button, then when prompted say:

Mobile Applications Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
List Applications SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.
Find Applications Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible
mobile apps.
Help Use this command to discover the available voice commands.
502
App Permissions Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps

App permissions are organized by groups. In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
You can grant these group permissions requires user consent to send and receive
individually. You can change a permission app authorization information and updates
group status any time when not driving, by using the data plan associated with the
using the settings menu. connected device.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the Data is sent to Ford in the United States
system may ask you to grant certain through the connected device. The
permissions, for example: information is encrypted and includes, for
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle example, the vehicle identification number
information to the app such as, but not of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel number, odometer, enabled apps, usage
consumption, engine speed, rain statistics and debugging information.
sensor, odometer, VIN, external Updates may take place.
temperature, gear position, tire Note: You must enable mobile apps for
pressure, and head lamp status. each connected device the first time you
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving select a mobile app using the system.
characteristic information such as, but Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not limited to: MyKey, seatbelt status, not responsible for any additional charges
engine revolutions per minute, gear you may receive from your service provider,
position, braking events, steering wheel when your vehicle sends or receives data
angle, and accelerator pedal position. through the connected device. This includes
• To allow your vehicle to provide any additional charges incurred due to
location information, including: GPS driving in areas when roaming out of a home
and speed. network.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications MEDIA PLAYER
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps. SYNC supports digital media sources
including: iPod, Bluetooth® devices, and
Note: You only need to grant permissions most USB drives. SYNC also supports
the first time you use an app with SYNC. audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for and ACC.
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any Media Sources
vehicle data that you approve Ford to The AUX or MEDIA button allows you to
provide to an app. view and select available media sources.
Press the AUX or MEDIA button to view
your sources. Use the directional arrows
and OK button to select your source. You
can also use the steering wheel audio
controls.
503
Audio Voice Commands Command

Press the voice button. You can Sirius Channel ___
do things like play a specific song
E142599 or album, or tune to a radio USB
station. When prompted, say a command.
See the following table for example Bluetooth Audio
commands. Not all commands may be
available on your vehicle. __ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as an
artist, station, or media source.
Command
___ List of Commands SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING

Help
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
Pause should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Play
Use your local Ford website at any time to
AM ___ check your phone's compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well
FM ___ as access a customer representative via
an online chat (during certain hours).
CD Player
Market Website(s)
North America www.SYNCMyRide.com

www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Issues
Issue Possible Cause(s) Possible Solution(s)
The audio control settings Review your phone's manual

There is excessive back-
on your phone may be about audio adjustments.
ground noise during a phone
affecting SYNC perform-
call.
ance.
Try turning off the device,
During a call, I can hear the
This may be a possible resetting the device,
other person but they
phone malfunction. removing the device's
cannot hear me.
battery, then trying again.
SYNC is not able to down- This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
load my phonebook. feature. your phone's compatibility.
504
Phone Issues

resetting the device or
removing the device's
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
This may be a possible the Add Contacts feature.
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
The system says Phonebook Remove any pictures or

Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on special ring tones associ-
phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. ated with the missing
empty or missing contacts. contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
I am having trouble
This is a phone-dependent Try turning off the device,
connecting my phone to
feature. resetting the device or
SYNC.
505
Phone Issues
Try deleting your device

from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth® connection on
This may be a possible your phone.
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
This is a phone-dependent Go to the website to review
feature. your phone's compatibility.
Text messaging is not Try turning off the device,
working on SYNC. This may be a possible resetting the device or
phone malfunction. removing the device's
I cannot return to the Phone
You are on the Select a Press the Phone button to
menu when selecting a
Character screen. return to the Phone menu.
contact.
USB and Media Issues

resetting the device,
I am having trouble This may be a possible
Make sure you are using the
connecting my device. device malfunction.
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
506
USB and Media Issues
Make sure that the device

does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
SYNC does not recognize
leaving the device in your
my device when I turn on the This is a device limitation.
vehicle during very hot or
car.
cold temperatures.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your
feature. phone supports the
Bluetooth® audio does not Bluetooth® audio
stream. streaming function.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
The device is not connected.
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre Make sure that all song
information. details are populated.
SYNC does not recognize
The file may be corrupted.
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
The song may have copy-
change the USB settings
right protection, which does
from mass storage to MTP
not allow it to play.
class.
Switch radio bands and
return to Sirius or switch the
I cannot change the Sirius feature off. You can then
Sirius Replay is active.
station. change the Sirius station
using the directional
buttons.
507
Voice Command Issues
Review the phone voice

commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand After pressing the voice icon,
what I am saying. wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
You may be speaking too
appears before saying a
soon or at the wrong time.
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
voice commands.
of the media section.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
You may be saying the by Prince and the Revolution
name differently than the or Prince and the New
way you saved it. Power Generation.
SYNC does not understand
Make sure you are saying the
the name of a song or artist.
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
The system may not be them. LOLA requires you to
reading the name the same say "L-O-L-A".
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
SYNC does not understand Review the Phone voice
or is calling the wrong commands at the beginning
voice commands.
contact when I want to of the phone section.
make a call.
508
Voice Command Issues
Make sure you are saying the

contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it. read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
The system works better if
The system may not be
you list full names, such as
reading the name the same
"Joe Wilson" rather than
way you are saying it.
"Joe".
Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special charac-
may be very short and ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
similar, or they may contain the system does not recog-
special characters. nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
Your phonebook contacts have to spell it. JAKE
may be in CAPS. requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink Issues
Ensure you have a compat-

ible smartphone; an Android
AppLink Mobile Applica-
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
iPhone 3GS or newer with
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
find any applications.
ally, ensure your phone is
paired and connected to
509
AppLink Issues
SYNC in order to find

AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
AppLink-enabled apps are your phone. Some apps
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on require you to register or
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device. login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a Ford SYNC
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an Exit or Quit
option, select that then
Sometime apps do not
restart the app. If the app
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
does not have that option,
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC,
you can also manually Force
cannot find any apps. over ignition cycles, for
Close the app by going to
example.
the phone's settings menu,
selecting Apps. then finding
the particular app and
choosing Force stop.
Remember to restart the
app afterwards, then select
Find New Apps on SYNC.
510
AppLink Issues
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to

force close an app, double
tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Touch the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in the SYNC Mobile
App menu.
My Android phone is Reset the Bluetooth® on
There is a Bluetooth® bug
connected, my app(s) are your phone by turning it off
on some older versions of
running, I restarted them, and then turning
the Android operating
but I still cannot find any Bluetooth® back on. If you
system that may cause apps
apps. are in your vehicle, SYNC
that were found on your
should be able to automatic-
previous vehicle drive to not
ally re-connect to your
be found again if you have
phone if you press the
not turned off Bluetooth®.
Phone button.
511
AppLink Issues
Unplug the USB cable from

the phone, wait a moment,
My iPhone phone is and plug the USB cable
connected, my app is back in to the phone. After a
The USB connection to
running, I restarted the app few seconds, the app should
SYNC may need to be reset.
but I still cannot find it on appear in SYNC's Mobile
SYNC. Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
Try increasing the
I have an Android phone. I
Bluetooth® volume of the
found and started my media
The Bluetooth® volume on device by using the device's
app on SYNC, but there is no
the phone may be low. volume control buttons
sound or the sound is very
which are most often found
low.
on the side of the device.
Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
Bluetooth® links apps can to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have SYNC" setting, disable that
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your setting in the app's settings
phone listed in SYNC's phone than the number of menu on the phone.
Mobile Apps Menu. available Bluetooth® links,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
512
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION Using the Touchscreen

devices while driving. E293823
About SYNC A Status bar.

The system allows you to interact with the B Home screen.
entertainment, information and C Clock. See Settings (page 543).
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen. D Outside air temperature.
The system provides easy interaction with E Feature bar.
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings. Status Bar
Note: You can switch the system on and
Cell phone microphone muted.
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you Audio system muted.
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are Software update installed.
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
513
Automatic crash notification Updating the System

system off.
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Cell phone network signal
Downloading an Update
strength.
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
Vehicle data sharing on. local Ford website.
2. Download the update.
Vehicle location sharing on. Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Vehicle data and vehicle location Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
sharing on. meet the minimum requirements detailed
on the website.
Wireless charger active.
4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
Feature Bar Installing an Update

Select to use the radio, a USB, a Note: You can use the system when an
media player or a Bluetooth installation is in progress.
E100027
device. See Entertainment 1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
(page 521). the USB ports.
Select to adjust climate settings 2. Connect the USB drive with the update
See Climate (page 531). to a USB port.
E283811
Note: Installation starts automatically
Select to make calls and access within 10 minutes.
the phonebook on your cell
phone. See Phone (page 533). Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
535).
Select to search for and use feature bar.
E280315
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page 1. Select Automatic Updates.
540).
2. Select System Wi-Fi.
Select to adjust system settings. 3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
See Settings (page 543).
E280315 4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Cleaning the Touchscreen
Note: Enter the network password to
See Cleaning the Interior (page 395). connect to a secure network.
514
Switching Automatic System Updates USING VOICE RECOGNITION

On
Select the settings option on the The system allows you to interact with the
feature bar. entertainment, information and
E280315 communication systems on your vehicle
1. Select Automatic Updates. using voice commands. This allows you
to keep your hands on the steering wheel
2. Switch Automatic System Updates and focus on what is in front of you.
on.
Press the voice control button
The system is now set to check for and on the steering wheel and wait
receive system updates when it is E142599 for the voice prompt.
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
Note: Press the voice control button again
Note: You can use the system when a to interrupt a voice prompt and begin
download is in progress. speaking.
Note: If the system is disconnected from Note: Turn the volume control when a voice
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in prompt plays to adjust the volume.
progress, the download continues the next
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi Note: Press and hold the voice control
network. button on the steering wheel to use Siri on
your iOS device.
Additional Information and The following voice commands are
Assistance designed to help you from any screen:
For additional information and assistance, • List of Commands
we recommend that you contact an • Help
authorized dealer or refer to the local Ford
website. The following tables list some of the more
frequently used voice commands. For a
complete list of voice commands, refer to
our website.
General
Voice Command Description
___ List of Commands 1

Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
Cancel Cancel an active voice session.
___ Help 1
Get a list of voice commands for a specific feature.
Go back Return to the previous screen.
Main Menu Go to the main menu.
515
Next Page Go to the next page.

Previous Page Go to the previous page.
1 Add the name of the feature to the command.
Entertainment
Audio Source
Radio Use the radio.

CD Player Use the CD player.
Bluetooth Stereo Use a Bluetooth® device.
USB Use a USB or media player.
Radio
AM Listen to AM radio.
AM ___ 1
Tune to a specific AM frequency.
Sirius Channel ___ 2
Listen to SiriusXM radio.
FM Listen to FM radio.
FM ___ 1
Tune to a specific FM frequency.
1 Addthe radio frequency to two decimal places to the command.
2 Youcan say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius Channel 16" or "Sirius
The Pulse".
516
USB and Media Player
Play Album ___

Play Artist ___
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___ Play your music by category.
1
Play Song ___

Play Audiobook ___
Play Podcast ___
Browse All Albums
Browse All Artists
Browse All Audiobooks
Browse All Genres Browse music on a USB device.
Browse All Playlists
Browse All Podcasts
Browse All Songs
Browse Album ___
Browse Artist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
1
Browse your music by category on a USB device.
Browse Genre ___
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Podcast ___
1 Add
an album name, artist name, audiobook name, genre name, playlist name, podcast
name or track name to the command. Say the name exactly as it appears on your device.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Climate (If Equipped) climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
You can control the temperature of the setting.
vehicle using voice commands.
517
To adjust the temperature, say:

Voice command Description
Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F

(15.5–29.5°C).
Phone
Pair Phone Pair a cell phone or Bluetooth®-enabled device.

Redial Redial the last number that you dialed.
Dial ___ 1
Dial a number.
Call ___ 2
Call a specific contact from your phonebook.
Call ___ ___ Call a specific contact from your phonebook at a
3
specific location.
Listen to Message Listen to a text message.
Listen to Message ___ Listen to a specific text message from a list of text
messages.
Reply to Message Reply to the last text message.
1 Add the number you want to dial to the command.
2 Add a contact name from your phonebook to the command. Say the first and last name
of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.

3 Add a contact name and location from your phonebook to the command. Say the first
and last name of your contact exactly as it appears on your device.
518
Navigation (If Equipped)

Setting a Destination
Find an Address Enter a destination address. When prompted,

provide the house number, the street and city.
Find a Place Search for a point of interest by name or by category.
Find the Next ___ 1
Search for a nearby point of interest by category.
Find a POI Category 1
Search for a point of interest category.
Drive Home Set your saved home address as your destination.
Drive to Work Set your saved place of work as your destination.
Show Previous Destinations Display and select from a list of previous destina-
tions.
Show Favorites Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.
1 Add a point of interest category or the name of a major brand or chain to the command.
Route Guidance
Cancel Route Cancel the current route.

Detour Select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeat the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Display an overview of the route.
Show Traffic Display a list of traffic events on your route.
Show Map Display the map on the touchscreen.
North Up Display a two-dimensional map with north toward
the top of the touchscreen.
Heading Up Display a two-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the top of the touchscreen.
Show 3D Display a three-dimensional map with the direction
you are traveling toward the front.
519
Apps
General
Mobile Applications Start an app. The system prompts you for the app
name.
List Applications Get a list of apps running on your device.
Find Applications Search and connect to apps running on your device.
Active App
___ Help 1
Get a list of voice commands for a specific app.
Exit ___ 1
Close an app.
1 Add an app name to the command.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped)
Voice Description
command
Show Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Traffic
Show Displays the current weather map.
Weather
Map
Show Fuel Displays a list of fuel prices.
Prices
Show 5 Displays the 5 day weather forecast.
Day Fore-
cast
520
Voice Settings
Voice Settings Go to the voice settings menu.

Interaction Mode Novice Switch long voice prompts on.
Interaction Mode Advanced Switch short voice prompts on.
Phone Confirmation On Switch call confirmation on. The system prompts
you to confirm before making a call.
Phone Confirmation Off Switch call confirmation off. The system does not
prompt you to confirm before making a call.
Voice Command Lists On Switch the display of voice commands on.
Voice Command Lists Off Switch the display of voice commands off.
Automatic Blower Motor Speed ENTERTAINMENT

Reduction
If necessary, the system decreases the A
blower motor speed when you are using
voice commands to reduce the amount of
background noise in your vehicle. It returns
to normal when you are done.
Switching Automatic Blower Motor

Speed Reduction Off
Simultaneously press the A/C and
recirculated air buttons.
E293491
B
A Audio source. Select to choose

a different audio source.
B Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
You can access these options using the

touchscreen or voice commands.
521
Sources Press this button to select the source of

media you want to listen to.
Menu Item
AM
FM
SIRIUS 1
CD
USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.
Bluetooth Stereo
Apps If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio Once you have entered the station's

call numbers, you can select:
Tuning a Station
Menu Item Action and Descrip-
You can use the tune or seek controls on tion
the radio bezel to select a station.
Enter Press to begin
To tune a station using the playing the station
touchscreen, select: you have entered.
Menu Item Cancel Press to exit

without changing
Direct Tune the station.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in Presets

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are To set a new preset, tune to the station
currently listening to. and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
You can press the backspace button to briefly while the system saves the station
delete the previously entered number. and then returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
522
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If For more information on extended

Activated) subscription terms (a service fee is
Note: This feature may not be available in list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
all markets and requires an active and other features, please visit
subscription. www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
E234451 its prices, at any time, with or without notice
SiriusXM satellite radio is a to you. We are not responsible for any such
subscription-based satellite radio service programming changes.
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, Note: This receiver includes the eCos
news, weather, traffic and entertainment real-time operating system. eCos is
programming. Your factory-installed published under the eCos License.
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:

Menu Item Action and Description
Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
523
Replay Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Live When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
You may be able to add additional preset

Memory Presets pages using the settings option on the
To set a preset, tune to the station then feature bar.
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
interference ence and the audio system may mute.
524
Troubleshooting Tips
Message Cause Action
Acquiring Signal Radio requires more than two No action required. This
seconds to produce audio for message should disappear
the selected channel. shortly.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or If this message does not clear
system failure present. shortly, or with an ignition key
SIRIUS system failure cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able. choose another preset.
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Satellite acquiring The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
signal… usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.
Updating… Update of channel program- No action required. The
ming in progress. process may take up to three
minutes.
Questions? Call 1- Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
888-539-7474 longer available. 539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
None found. Check All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide or the
channel guide. category are either skipped or Sirius XM Settings tile to turn
locked. off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
SIRIUS Subscription SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
updated channels available for your
vehicle.

HD Radio™ Information (If available in all markets.
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 543).
525
HD Radio technology is the digital The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your station, and then changes to orange when
system has a special receiver that allows digital audio is playing. When this logo is
it to receive digital broadcasts (where available, you may also see Title and Artist
available) in addition to the analog fields on-screen.
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital The multicast indicator appears in FM
broadcasts provide a better sound quality mode (only) if the current station is
than analog broadcasts with free, broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
crystal-clear audio and no static or The highlighted numbers signify available
distortion. For more information, and a digital channels where new or different
guide to available stations and content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming, please visit: programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
Website multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
www.hdradio.com
Note: There is also an additional feature
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a for stations that have more than 1 HD
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
you may notice the following indicators on HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
your screen: Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
E142616
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message Action and Description
Presets Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.

Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
526
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
audio volume.
Sound fading or The radio is shifting between No action required. The recep-
blending in and out. analog and digital audio. tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
delay when selecting available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the
HD2 or HD3, multicast broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available.
preset or Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is available.
527
Potential Station Issues
Issues Cause Action
Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
HD3 multicast channel preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current
when recalling a preset available in your current recep- location.
or from a direct tune. tion area.
Text information does Data service issue by the radio 1
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently broadcaster.
playing audio.
There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
information shown for broadcaster. 1
currently selected
frequency.
1 You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under CD (If Equipped)

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD Once you select this option, the system
and HD Radio logos are proprietary returns you to the main audio screen.
trademarks of DTS. The vehicle The current audio information appears on
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible the screen.
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
528
Button Function
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or Bluetooth® Stereo or USB
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth® Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth® device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth® and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
play buttons to control the audio playback. provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
529
Button Function
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Select this option to play audio from your

USB Ports USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth®-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 540).
Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information
E211463
The system is capable of hosting nearly
The USB ports are in the center console or any digital media player, including iPod,
behind a small access door in the iPhone, and most USB drives.
instrument panel. Supported audio formats include MP3,
This feature allows you to plug in USB WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives Supported audio file extensions include
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
support this feature. FLAC.
530
Supported USB file systems include: FAT, You can direct air through any combination
exFAT, and NTFS. of these air vents.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media Setting the Blower Motor Speed
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive Touch up or down to increase or
software identifiers embedded in the decrease the volume of air that
media files, provide information about the circulates in your vehicle.
file.
If your indexed media files contain no Setting the Temperature
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty Touch up or down on the left-hand
metadata tags as unknown. temperature control to set the left-hand
temperature.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 Note: This control also adjusts the
devices. right-hand side temperature when you
switch off dual zone mode.
Touch up or down on the right-hand
CLIMATE temperature control to set the right-hand
temperature.
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control Switching Auto Mode On and Off
features.
Note: You can switch temperature units Touch the button to switch on
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See automatic operation, then set
Settings (page 543). the temperature.
Accessing the Climate Control The system adjusts the blower motor
Menu speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air
Touch the button to access to reach and maintain the temperature you
additional controls for the front have set.
E265038
climate system.
Switching the Air Conditioning On
and Off
Directing the Airflow
A pop-up appears on the screen
Touch the button to direct
to display the air conditioning
airflow to the windshield air
options.
vents and de-mister.
Touch the button to direct MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate
E244097 airflow to the instrument panel and maximize cooling. The driver and
air vents. passenger temperatures are set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
Touch the button to direct instrument panel vents, air conditioning
airflow to the footwell air vents. automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
531
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning Switching the Heated Rear
on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to Window On and Off
improve cooling performance and
efficiency. Touch the button to clear the
rear window of thin ice and fog.
Note: In certain conditions, such as E184884
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even Switching the Heated Seats On
though you switch off the air conditioning. and Off
Switching the Climate Control On Touch the button to cycle
and Off through the various heat
settings.
Touch the button.
Switching the Heated Steering
Wheel On and Off
Switching the Climate Controlled Touch the button.
Seats On and Off
Touch the button to cycle
through the various climate Switching Maximum Air
E265282
controlled seat settings. Conditioning On and Off
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Touch the button for maximum
Off cooling.
Touch the button to switch on Recirculated air flows through the

temperature control for the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
E265280 right-hand side of the vehicle. turns on and the blower motor adjusts to
the highest speed.
Switching the Heated Exterior
Mirrors On and Off Switching Maximum Defrost On
and Off
Touch the button.
Touch the button for maximum
E266189
defrosting.
Switching the Heated Windshield Air flows through the windshield air vents,
On and Off and the blower motor adjusts to the
Touch the button to clear the highest speed.
windshield of thin ice and fog. You can also use this setting to defog and
The heated windshield turns off clear the windshield of a thin covering of
after a short period of time. ice.
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
532
Note: The heated rear window also turns Switching Rear Auto Mode On and
on when you select maximum defrost. Off
Switching Recirculated Air On and Touch the button to switch on
Off rear automatic operation, then
set the temperature.
Touch the button to switch
between outside air and
recirculated air.
Switching the Rear Climate
Controlled Seats On and Off
The air currently in the passenger Touch the button to cycle
compartment recirculates. This may through the various climate
reduce the time needed to cool the interior, E265282
controlled seat settings.
when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Switching the Rear Heated Seats
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or On and Off
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk Touch the button to cycle
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on through the various heat
and off in various air distribution control settings.
combinations during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency. Switching the Rear Ventilated
Seats On and Off
Switching the Ventilated Seats On
and Off Touch the button to cycle
through the various ventilated
Touch the button to cycle E268558
seat settings.
through the various ventilated
E268558
seat settings.
PHONE
Accessing Rear Climate Controls
Touch the button to access
additional controls for the rear WARNING: Driving while distracted
E270447
climate system. can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
Rear Climate Control Lock
Indicator road. Your primary responsibility is the
Touch the button. safe operation of your vehicle. We
When on, you can only operate
E265289 hand-held device while driving and
the rear passenger settings encourage the use of voice-operated
through the front controls. systems when possible. Make sure you
533
Check the compatibility of your device on Change Phone

the regional website.
Display the list of paired or connected
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the devices that you can select.
First Time
Phone Settings
Go to the settings menu on your device and
Change ring tones, alerts or pair another
switch Bluetooth® on.
phone.
Select the phone option on the
feature bar. Do Not Disturb
Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
1. Select Add Phone. and alerts off.
Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
vehicle on your cell phone. Phone Keypad
2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone. Directly dial a number.
Note: A number appears on your cell phone Mute
and on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the number on your cell Mute the microphone when in a call or
phone matches the number on the voice recognition session.
touchscreen.
Text Messaging
Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
have successfully paired your cell phone. Setting Text Message Notification
4. Download the phonebook from your iOS
cell phone when you are prompted.
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone, phone.
use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting 2. Select Bluetooth.
at any time. 3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
Using Your Cell Phone
4. Switch text message notification on.
Recent Call List
Android
Display and select an entry from a list of
previous calls. 1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
Contacts 2. Select Bluetooth.
Display a smart search form to look up your 3. Select the profiles option.
contacts. Use the List button to 4. Select the phone profile.
alphabetically sort your contacts.
5. Switch text message notification on.
534
Using Text Messaging
Menu Item Description
Hear It Hear the text message.

View View the text message.
Call Call the sender.
Reply Reply to the text message with a standard text message.
2. Switch Android Auto off.

Apple CarPlay (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port. NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen. Note: For more information, refer to our
website.
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Apple Select the navigation option on
CarPlay. the feature bar.
Switching Apple CarPlay Off

feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences.

2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
Android Auto (If Equipped)

1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen.
Note: You might need to enable Android
Auto from the settings menu. E297557
Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android A Map view menu.
Auto. B Zoom out.
Switching Android Auto Off C Zoom in.
Select the settings option on the D Route guidance menu.
feature bar. E Destination entry menu.
1. Select Android Auto.
535
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
Item Description
Search Enter a destination address.

Previous Destinations Display and select from a list of previous destinations.
Home Set your saved home address as your destination
Work Set your saved place of work as your destination.
Favorites Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.
Setting a Destination Using the Text You can search by entering all or part of
Entry Screen the destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City,
Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you do
not specify a location, the system will
use the current vehicle location. You can
specify a location by address, city, state
or zip code. For additional search support,
please visit: support.ford.com.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand
corner of the main map to display estimated
time of arrival, remaining travel time or
distance to destination.
E297558
A Text entry field.

B Automatic suggestions based on
the text you enter.
C Information icon.
D Search.
E Keyboard settings.
Note: Select one of the suggestions to
copy the detail to the text entry field.
536
Setting a Destination Using the Map Zoom

Screen
Display more or less detail on the map.
Note: You can use pinch gestures to zoom
in and out. Place two fingers on the screen
and move them apart to zoom in. Place two
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out.
Route Guidance
E297559
A Re-center the map.

B Selected location.
C 3D map rotation. Swipe left or
right.
D Start route guidance.
E297560
F
E Destination name.
A Turn indicator. Select to hear the
Select the location on the map. last voice prompt.
Select Start to begin route guidance. B Point of interest.
Changing the Format of the Map C Estimated time of arrival,
distance to destination or time
Display the map in one of the following to destination.
formats:
D Current road.
• A two-dimensional map with the
direction you are traveling toward the E Mute guidance prompts.
top of the screen. F Cancel route guidance.
• A two-dimensional map with north
Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
toward the top of the screen.
turn the volume control when a guidance
• A three-dimensional map with the prompt plays.
direction you are traveling toward the
front.
537
Route Guidance Menu
Menu Item Description
Screen View Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.
Full Map View a full screen map when route guidance is active.
Highway Exit Info View highway exit information for your current route.
Turn List View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid
it.
Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information
by pressing this button. This information requires an active
subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route
is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a
route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Navigation Settings Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 543).
Where Am I? View information about your current location.
Cancel Route Cancel route guidance.
View Route View the entire current route on the map.
Detour View an alternative route compared to your current one.
Edit Waypoints Change the order or remove waypoints.
Optimize Order The system determines the order of waypoints for you.
Go Go to the next screen and start the new route.
Note: The system mutes the next and all

Adjusting the Guidance Prompt future guidance prompts.
Volume
Adding Waypoints
Turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume. You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted
You can add up to five waypoints.
the volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and 1. Select the search option on the map.
then adjust the volume to the desired level. 2. Set a destination.
Muting Guidance Prompts 3. Select Add Waypoint.
Select the mute option on the 4. Select Go.
screen to mute guidance
prompts.
538
Canceling Route Guidance When you have selected a point of interest,

the location and information appear, such
Select the route guidance menu as address, phone number and a star
option on the active guidance rating.
screen.
Press More Information to see a photo,
Select Cancel Route. a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
E294817 address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
Note: The route guidance menu option is
always in the bottom right-hand corner of • Business center
the main map. • Handicap facilities
cityseeker (If Equipped) • Laundry
• Refrigerator
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI) • 24 hour room service
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in • Fitness center
Canada and 15 in Mexico). • Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that

provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
539
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If The navigation system map data may
Equipped) contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time,
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available changing circumstances, sources used and
on vehicles equipped with navigation and the nature of collecting comprehensive
only in select markets. You must activate geographic data, any of which may lead to
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic incorrect results. Inaccurate speed limit
and Travel Link information. It helps you information, turn restrictions and other
locate the best gas prices, find movie road attributes may affect the determined
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the route and associated guidance
weather map, get accurate ski conditions Annual navigation map updates are
and see current sports scores. available for purchase through your
The system calculates a reasonable dealership. Depending on your purchase
efficient route based on available speed agreement, you might be eligible for free
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may Map update. You can choose to download
know a local short cut that is more efficient the Map data update onto a USB, order a
at a given time than the route provided by USB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight updates. To update your Map data over
difference in minutes or miles with the Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to
SYNC 3 route. a Wi-Fi access point. Map Data files are
large, so it is highly recommended to
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped) perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may
The Michelin travel guide is a service which apply. For USB updates, free map update
provides additional information about eligibility, and other details, contact
certain places of interest, for example dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United
restaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Points States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539
of interest that have Michelin travel guide in Mexico or visit our local website for more
information display a button to show you information.
more information. Push the button to see
the additional information. If you have
paired your phone with the system, you APPS
can press the phone button to directly
establish a call with the selected point of The system allows you interact with select
interest. mobile apps while keeping your eyes on
the road. Voice commands, your steering
Navigation Map Accuracy and wheel buttons, or a quick tap on your
Updates touchscreen give you advanced control of
compatible mobile apps. You can also
HERE is the digital map provider for the stream your favorite music or podcasts,
navigation application. If you find map data share your time of arrival with friends, and
errors, you may report them directly to keep connected safely.
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
540
When you start an app through the system Using Apps on an Android Device
for the first time, you could be asked to
grant certain permissions. You can review Select the apps option on the
and change the permissions that you have feature bar.
granted at any time when your vehicle is
not moving. We recommend that you 1. If your device is connected via USB,
check your data plan before using your switch Android Auto off. See Phone
apps through the system. Using them (page 533).
could result in additional charges. We also 2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 533).
recommend that you check the app
provider's terms and conditions and 3. Start the apps on your device that you
privacy policy before using their app. Make want to use through SYNC.
sure that you have an active account for Note: If you close the apps on your device,
apps that you want to use through the you will not be able to use them through the
system. Some apps will work with no system.
setup. Others require you to configure
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
some personal settings before you can use
them. Note: The system searches and connects
to compatible apps that are running on your
Note: For more information about available device.
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
5. Select the app that you want to use on
Using Apps on an iOS Device the touchscreen.
Select the apps option on the Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the
feature bar. USB port to establish a connection with
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are
1. If your device is connected via USB, enabled.
switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 533). Using Mobile Navigation on an
2. Connect your device to a USB port or Android Device
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
1. Connect your device to a USB port.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable. 2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone
(page 533).
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC. 3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via
USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
Note: If you close the apps on your device,
you will not be able to use them through the 4. Select the apps option on the feature
system. bar.
5. Select the app that you want to use on 5. Select the navigation app that you
the touchscreen. want to use on the touchscreen.
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if Note: When using a navigation app, keep
you want to use a navigation app. When your device unlocked and the app open.
using a navigation app, keep your device
unlocked and the app open.
541
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Equipped) Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
WARNING: Driving while distracted access and use these features. Go to
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
and injury. We strongly recommend that information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
hand-held device while driving and Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
encourage the use of voice-operated for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
systems when possible. Make sure you Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
are aware of all applicable local laws vehicles.
that may affect the use of electronic When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
devices while driving. and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may current traffic alerts, view the current
not be available in all markets. weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
Traffic on Route Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
Traffic Nearby places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
542
Area Select to choose from a listing of

weather locations.
Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
Driver Assist (If Equipped)

SETTINGS
Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist
Press the button to enter the features like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping
settings menu. System, Pedestrian Detection, and
E280315 Auto-Start-Stop.
Once you select a tile, press the Vehicle
button next to a menu item to
E268570 view an explanation of the Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings
feature or setting. like windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKey
settings.
Sound
FordPass
Select this tile to adjust the sound settings.
Select this tile to adjust the FordPass
Clock settings.
Select this tile to adjust the clock settings. General

Bluetooth® Select this tile to adjust settings like
language, measurement units, or to reset
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth® on the system.
and off and adjust the settings.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
Phone
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and off.
manage the connected device settings.
Automatic Updates
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the automatic
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings. update settings.
Mobile Apps
Select this tile to adjust permissions,
enable, disable, and update mobile apps.
543
Display Seats (If Equipped)

Select this tile to adjust display settings Select this tile to adjust the lumbar
like brightness and auto dim. function of your seats.
Charge Settings (If Equipped) Message Center (If Equipped)
Select this tile to adjust the electric vehicle Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
charge settings.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
Voice Control
Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
Select this tile to adjust voice control features when using personal profiles.
settings like command confirmations and
displayed lists. Valet Mode (If Equipped)
Navigation (If Equipped) Select this tile to enable and disable valet
mode.
Select this tile to adjust navigation settings
like map preferences and route guidance. Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Multi Contour Seats (If Equipped) Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
Select this tile to adjust the position and
massage function of your multi contour
seats.
544
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
The system does not under- – You might not be using supported voice commands.
stand what I am saying. • See Using Voice Recognition (page 515).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You might be speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not under- – Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice
stand the name of a track or commands.
artist. • Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
– You might not be using supported voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 515).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
on your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it
appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviations
in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-
screen to select and play the track.
The system does not under- – You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
stand the name of a contact on your device.
in the phonebook on my • Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
device and calls the wrong as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-
contact. ations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the contact.
545
The system does not under- – You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
stand certain names of on your device.
contacts in the phonebook • Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
on my device. as it appears on your device. The system applies
phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in the phone-
book on your device. Select the name of the
contact on the touchscreen and use the Hear it
option to get an idea of how the system expects
you to pronounce it.
The system voice prompts – Device limitation.

and the pronunciation of • The system uses text-to-speech technology and
some words do not seem to uses a synthetically generated voice rather than
be very accurate. pre-recorded human voice.
USB and Bluetooth® Audio
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.

• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and
on to reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
546
– Incorrect device settings.

• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-
install program or active security settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recog- – Device limitation.

nize my device. • Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very
hot or very cold weather conditions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
The system does not under- – Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice
stand the name of a track or commands.
artist. • Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
I cannot stream audio from – Incompatible device.

my Bluetooth® device. • Check the compatibility of your device on our
website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 533).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recog- – Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example
nize the music on my device. artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
547
– Copyright-protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-
right protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
See Entertainment (page 521).
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 543).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
Sometimes I cannot hear a – Device malfunction.

track playing on my device. • Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and
on to reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS – Device limitation.

device the audio volume is • Turn the volume down on your device.
set to maximum.
The system does not play If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device
the tracks on my USB drive in the correct order, the following information could help:
in the correct order. – If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the
system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sorted
alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the
system has finished indexing, SYNC plays all tracks
sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag
regardless of where they are located. SYNC uses the
file name if the title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from
the browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sorted
alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of
where they are located. SYNC uses the file name if the
title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore
device option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabetically
by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC
then plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder you
have selected.
548
Phone
During a call, I can hear – Incorrect cell phone settings.

excessive background noise. • Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell
phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
During a call, I can hear the – Cell phone malfunction.

other person but they • Switch your cell phone on and off, and vehicle
cannot hear me. Bluetooth® on and off and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
During a call, I cannot hear – System restart required.

the other person and they • Switch the ignition off and open the door. Close
cannot hear me. the door and lock the vehicle. Wait until the
touchscreen is off and any illuminated USB ports
are not illuminated. Unlock the vehicle, switch the
ignition on and try again.
I cannot download a phone- – Incompatible cell phone.

book. • Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off and on to reset it and
try again.
549
A message displays – Incorrect cell phone settings.

suggesting that my phone- • Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
book has downloaded but it cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
is empty or it has missing
contacts. • Check the location of the missing contacts on your
cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, move
them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
I cannot connect my cell – Incompatible cell phone.

phone. • Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from the system and delete
SYNC from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See
Text messaging does not – You might not have switched on text message notific-
work. ations.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone
(page 533).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
try again.
I cannot hear text messages. – Device message sharing is not enabled.

• Check the permissions on your device to ensure
text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
550
Navigation (If Equipped)
I cannot enter a street name – Incorrect entry method.

when I am abroad. • Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recog- – Using the wrong coordinates format.
nize coordinates. • Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,
E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if the
direction is West and keep a positive value if the
direction is East, for example 12.5412 means East
and -12.5412 means West.
551
Apps
The system cannot find any – Incompatible device.

apps. • You need an Android device with OS 4.3 or higher
or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pair and
connect your Android device to find compatible
apps. Connect your iOS device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth®.
I have a compatible device – Compatible apps are not installed on your device.
and it is correctly connected • Download and install the latest version of the app.
but the system still cannot
find any apps. – Compatible apps are not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them
and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device
and allow SYNC to access the app if required.
I have a compatible device, – Apps failed to fully close.

it is correctly connected and • Restart the apps and try again.
my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any • If you have an Android device with apps that have
apps. an exit or quit option, use this and then restart the
apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the
settings menu on your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher,
tap the home button on your device twice and then
swipe the app upward to close it.
I have an Android device – An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-
that is correctly connected, ating system could result in apps not being found.
I have restarted my apps • Switch Bluetooth® off and on again to force the
and they are running but the system to reconnect to your device.
system still cannot find
them.
552
I have an iOS device that is – Cable connection issue.

correctly connected, I have • Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a
restarted my apps and they moment and then connect it again to force the
are running but the system system to reconnect to your device.
still cannot find them.
I have an Android device – Device volume is low.
running a media app which • Turn the volume up on your device.
the system has found but I
cannot hear the sound or
the sound is very quiet.
I have an Android device – Device limitation. If you have more apps running on
running a number of your device than the number of available Bluetooth®
compatible apps but the links, the system cannot find all of them.
system cannot find all of • Close some of the apps to allow the system to find
them. those that you want to use.
553
Wi-Fi Connectivity
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi – Password error.

network. • Enter the correct network password.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection – Weak network signal.

disconnects after successful • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
connection. a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot – Obstructed network signal.

but the network signal • If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
strength is weak. your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the – Hidden network.

list of available networks • Make the network visible and try again.
that I expect to see.
554
I cannot see SYNC when I – System limitation.

search for Wi-Fi networks on • SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
my cell phone or other
device.
Software downloads take – Weak network signal
too long. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
The system seems to – No software update available.

connect to a Wi-Fi network – Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
and the signal strength is of terms and conditions.
excellent but the software
does not update. • Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
You might not have set up Personal Profiles.

You might have entered an invalid profile.
You might not have selected a memory button when
I cannot create a profile. prompted.
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You might not have selected the lock button on the remote
control.
I cannot link a remote The remote control selected was already associated with
control. another profile and the system declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a
remote control.
555
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you

shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
You might be using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do A different personal profile is active.
not save.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal
profile.
You might not have created a personal profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You might not have linked the memory button you are
using to a profile.
My profile will not recall. You might not have linked the remote control you are using
to a profile.
You might be using the wrong remote control.
You might be pressing a button other than the unlock or
remote start on a linked remote control.
You might have deleted the personal profile.
My preset positions recall, Personal Profiles is turned off.
but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my
preset positions do not. The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-
ously active profile.
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal
I lost a remote control.
Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.
You might have erased and reprogrammed the remote
controls. This could happen if you let a dealership add a
I lost all profiles. new remote control to replace a lost one.
Someone performed a master reset.
556
Resetting the System

1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek up and the audio unit power
buttons until the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and

Assistance
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
557
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories For maximum vehicle performance, keep
that are available for your vehicle, please the following information in mind when
contact your authorized dealer or visit the adding accessories or equipment to your
online store web site: vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
Web Address (United States) passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
www.Accessories.Ford.com capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
Web Address (Canada) indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
www.Accessories.Ford.ca dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
We will repair or replace any properly Commission (FCC) and Canadian
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Radio Telecommunications
Accessory found to be defective in Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
factory-supplied materials or workmanship of mobile communications systems
during the warranty period, as well as any that are equipped with radio
component damaged by the defective transmitters, for example two-way
accessories. radios, telephones and theft alarms.
We will warrant your Ford Original Any such equipment installed in your
Accessory through the warranty that vehicle should comply with Federal
provides the greatest benefit: Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
• 24 months, unlimited mileage. Telecommunications Commission
• The remainder of your new vehicle (CRTC) regulations and should be
limited warranty. installed only by an authorized dealer.
Contact an authorized dealer for details • An authorized dealer needs to install
and a copy of the warranty. mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
Ford Licensed Accessories are the operation of your vehicle, particularly
accessory manufacturer's designs. The if the manufacturer did not design the
manufacturer develops and therefore mobile communication system
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and specifically for automotive use.
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford any non-Ford electrical or electronic
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited accessories or components to your
warranty details, and request a copy of the vehicle, you may adversely affect
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited battery performance and durability. In
warranty from the accessory manufacturer. addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
558
Accessories
AUXILIARY SWITCHES (IF

EQUIPPED)
For maximum vehicle performance, keep

the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, E220728
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight The auxiliary switch option package
capacity of the vehicle or of the front provides six switches mounted in the
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as overhead console. These switches operate
indicated on the Safety Compliance when the vehicle is running or from battery
Certification label). Ask an authorized power, depending on the switchable fuse
dealer for specific weight information. AUXF4's location in the upfitter relay box.
We recommend, however, that the engine
• The Federal Communications remain running to maintain battery charge
Commission (FCC) and Canadian when using the auxiliary switches for
Radio Telecommunications extended periods of time or higher current
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use draws.
of mobile communications systems
equipped with radio transmitters, for Note: When your vehicle has a diesel
example, two-way radios, telephones engine, use the auxiliary switches only when
and theft alarms. Any such equipment the engine is running. The glow plugs also
installed in your vehicle should comply drain battery power when the ignition key is
with Federal Communications in the on position. Using the auxiliary
Commission (FCC) and Canadian switches, even for limited amounts of time,
Radio Telecommunications can cause your battery to drain quickly and
Commission (CRTC) regulations, and prevent your vehicle from restarting.
should be installed by an authorized When switched on, the auxiliary switches
dealer. provide electrical battery power for a
• An authorized dealer needs to install variety of personal or commercial uses.
mobile communications systems. Switches 1 through 4 provide 25 amps.
Improper installation may harm the Switches 5 and 6 provide 40 amps.
operation of your vehicle, particularly The relay box for the auxiliary switches is
if the manufacturer did not design the in the rear of the engine compartment,
mobile communication system near the back wall. See your authorized
specifically for automotive use. dealer for service.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
The relays are coded as shown:
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
559
Accessories
Each switch includes a blunt-cut, sealed

wire. The wires are under the instrument
panel on the right-hand side of the
passenger footwell.
E220729
560
Accessories
E314958
The power leads are coded as shown:
Switch Circuit Number Wire Color Fuse Amp Rating
AUX 1 CB117A Brown with green 25A

trace
AUX 2 CB114A Violet with orange 25A
trace
AUX 3 CB116A Blue with green 25A
trace
AUX 4 CB113A Gray with brown 25A
trace
AUX 5 CB115A Brown with blue 40A
trace
AUX 6 CB118A Gray with orange 40A
trace
561
Accessories
Upfitter Interface Module (If Equipped)

The Upfitter Interface Module (UIM) is an
electronic control module that operates
equipment (such as lift buckets, cranes,
motors, salt spreaders and snow plows)
with external relays.
If you replace the module, it will require
additional programming by the upfitter.
Obtain this data directly from the upfitter
company. The upfitter contact information
is in the vehicle door opening.
For more information on the Upfitter
Interface Module and the auxiliary
switches, contact your upfitter.
562
Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING That means you get:

COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. Lincoln dealership.
Ford Protect Extended Service • Repairs performed by factory trained
Plans (U.S. Only) technicians, using genuine parts.
Ford Protect extended service plan means Rental Car Reimbursement

peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and 1st day Rental Benefit
provides more protection beyond the New If you bring your car into your dealer for
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford the day.
Protect extended service plans!
Extended Rental Benefits
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
One trip to the Service Center could easily repairs, you are eligible for rental car
exceed the price of your Ford Protect coverage, including warranty repairs, and
extended service plan. With Ford Protect Field Service Actions.
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising Roadside Assistance
repair costs.
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle including:
Components • Towing, flat-tire change and battery
There are four mechanical Ford Protect jump starts.
extended service plans with different levels • Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for • Travel expense reimbursement for
details. lodging, meals and rental car.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most • Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
comprehensive coverage. With over coverage or other transportation.
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to Transferable Coverage
list what’s not covered.
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, Protect extended service plan coverage
and includes many high-tech items. expires, you can transfer any remaining
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
more peace of mind.
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
563
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Ford Protect Extended Service

Vehicle Plan (CANADA ONLY)
Ford Protect extended service plan also You can get more protection for your
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
covers all scheduled maintenance, and extended service plan. Ford Protect
selected wear items. The coverage is extended service plan is the only service
prepaid, so you never have to worry about contract backed by Ford Motor Company
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
Covered maintenance includes: you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Rental reimbursement.
• Spark plugs.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
wear items.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Protection against repair costs after
• Shock absorbers. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Struts. Coverage expires.
• Engine Belts. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and There are several Ford Protect extended
o-rings. service plans available in various time,
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if distance and deductible combinations.
equipped). Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
• Cabin air filter replacement every and rental. When you purchase Ford
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric Protect extended service plan, you receive
vehicles only). added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Interest Free Finance Options
Mexico, provided by a network of
Just a 5% down payment will provide you participating authorized Ford Motor
with an affordable, no interest, no fee Company dealers.
payment program allowing you all the Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
security and benefits Ford Protect and the United States are not eligible for
extended service plan has to offer while Ford Protect extended service plan
paying over time. You are pre-approved coverage.
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended This information is subject to change. For
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan Ford Protect extended service plan that is
P.O. Box 321067 right for you.
Detroit, MI 48232
564
GENERAL MAINTENANCE Our Genuine Replacement Parts

INFORMATION Dealerships stock our parts and our
authorized branded re-manufactured
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
Carefully following the maintenance at your dealership carry a nationwide
schedule helps protect against major repair 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
expenses resulting from neglect or parts and labor limited warranty.
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when If you do not use our authorized parts they
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for may not meet our specifications and
completed maintenance with your vehicle. depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon Convenience
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper Many dealerships have extended evening
times. These intervals serve two purposes; and Saturday hours to make your service
one is to maintain the reliability of your visit more convenient and they offer one
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost stop shopping. They can perform any
of owning your vehicle down. services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
It is your responsibility to have all repairs.
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
the specifications identified in this owner's or body shops. Please contact your dealer
manual. See Capacities and for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts Maintenance is an investment that pays
affected by the lack of maintenance. dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your maintain the proper performance of your
Dealership? vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
Factory-Trained Technicians maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent
help them become experts on the Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
operation of your vehicle. Ask your message in the information display at the
dealership about the training and proper oil change interval. This interval
certification their technicians have may be up to one year or 10,000 mi
received. (16,000 km).
565
When the oil change message appears in We strongly recommend the use of only
the information display, it is time for an oil our genuine or our authorized
change. Make sure you perform the oil re-manufactured replacement parts
change within two weeks or 500 mi engineered for your vehicle.
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Additives and Chemicals
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
This owner's manual and our Workshop
Change Indicator Reset (page 356).
Manual list the recommended additives
If your information display resets and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you recommend using chemicals or additives
should perform the oil change interval at not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from normal maintenance. Please consult your
your last oil change. Never exceed one year warranty information.
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals. Oils, Fluids and Flushing
You can drive high performance vehicles In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
in such a way that may lead to higher oil normal operating characteristic and, by
consumption this includes extended time itself, does not necessarily indicate a
at high engine speeds, high loads, engine concern or that the fluid needs to be
braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track changed. However, a qualified expert, such
and off-road usage. Under these as the factory-trained technicians at your
conditions, oil consumption of dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter that also show signs of overheating or
per 800 km) is possible. As a result, you foreign material contamination
need to check the engine oil level at every immediately.
refueling and adjust to maintain proper
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
levels to avoid engine damage.
fluids at the specified intervals or in
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
with multiple, complex, performance viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
systems. Every manufacturer develops sub-systems during scheduled
these systems using different maintenance. It is critical that systems are
specifications and performance features. flushed only with new fluid that is the same
That is why it is important to rely upon your as that required to fill and operate the
dealership to properly diagnose and repair system or using our approved flushing
your vehicle. chemical.
We have recommended maintenance Owner Checks and Services
intervals for various parts and component
systems based upon engineering testing. Make sure you perform the following basic
We rely upon this testing to determine the maintenance checks and inspections every
most appropriate mileage for replacement month or at six-month intervals.
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
566
Check Every Month

1
Air filter restriction gauge.
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
1
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
1
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
1 Diesel vehicles only.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
567
Multi-Point Inspection problems. We recommend having the

following multi-point inspection performed
In order to keep your vehicle running right, at every scheduled maintenance interval
it is important to have the systems on your to help make sure your vehicle keeps
vehicle checked regularly. This can help running great.
identify potential issues and prevent major
Multi-Point Inspection
Accessory drive belt or belts Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
1
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires including the spare for wear and
2
proper pressure
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service

advisor or technician about the multi-point NORMAL SCHEDULED
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive MAINTENANCE
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle. Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor that determines when you should
change the engine oil based on how you
use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
568
This means you do not have to remember The following table provides examples of
to change the oil on a mileage-based vehicle use and its impact on oil change
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
an oil change is due by displaying a change intervals depend on several factors
message in the information display. and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to Expect the Message Prompting You to Change Your Oil
mi (km) Vehicle Use and Example
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi Normal commuting with highway driving.

(12,000–16,000 km) No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi Moderate to heavy load or towing.

(8,000–12,000 km) Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling, 200-300 hours.
Extended hot or cold operation.
Extreme
2,500–5,000 mi Maximum load or towing.
(4,000–8,000 km) Extreme hot or cold operation.
Use of high sulfur diesel fuel.
Note: Use the appropriate special operating condition for maintenance information when
using high sulfur diesel fuels, operating your vehicle off-road or in dusty conditions, such as
unpaved roads.
Note: For every hour that your vehicle idles, it accumulates the equivalent of approximately
25 mi (40 km).
569
Gasoline Engine
Normal Maintenance Intervals
10,000 mi (16,000 km)/ 450 Engine Hours or 12 Months - Whichever Comes First
1
Change the engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
Perform multi-point inspection - recommended.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine coolant concentration, freeze-point protection, level and the hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. If applicable, lubricate the grease fittings. Four-wheel
drive vehicles.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints. If applicable, lubricate the grease fittings.
1 Resetthe Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
2 Rotate the front wheels on vehicles with dual rear wheels when specified. Only rotate
the rear wheels if you notice unusual wear.
1
Brake Fluid Maintenance
Every three years 2

Change the brake fluid.
1 Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time
for the interval.
2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
570
Other Maintenance Items
Every 20,000 mi Replace the cabin air filter.

(32,000 km)
Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine air filter.
(48,000 km)
Every 60,000 mi Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seal, if
(96,000 km) you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 100,000 mi
Replace the spark plugs.
(160,000 km)
Every 100,000 mi 1
Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.
(160,000 km)
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. Consult
dealer for requirements.
Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced within
the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km) Replace the front wheel bearings and seals if you use non-
sealed bearings.
Change the axle(s) fluid. See exceptions.
Change the transfer case fluid, if applicable.
At 200,000 mi 2
Change the engine coolant.
(320,000 km)
1 If
not replaced, inspect the belt or belts every 15,000 mi (24,000 km).
2 Initial
replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every 5 years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Diesel Engine
Electronic Air Filter Maintenance
Minder
Diesel engines have an electronic air filter
maintenance minder that indicates the
status of the engine air filter. You can find
this information within the Vehicle
Maintenance menu, in the information
displays. One of three indications are
possible:
571
Engine Air Filter Status Result

Message
Filter OK Indicates the engine air filter is performing as expected.

1 Indicates that there is a higher than expected restriction
Check filter
across the engine air filter, which could represent an air filter
at full useful life or a filter with an obstruction.
When this displays, inspect the engine air filter and replace
if necessary.
After the inspection or engine air filter replacement, you must
reset the system in order to change the status from Check
Filter to Filter OK.
System fault Indicates that there is an error within the electronic air filter
maintenance minder system requiring service.
1 Reset the engine air filter information monitor after you replace the air filter.
Normal Maintenance Intervals
1
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
2
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
4
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure the tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
3
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the air filter if necessary.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake.
Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant concentration freeze-point
protection, level and the hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
572
1
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate any grease fittings. Four-wheel drive
vehicles.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and the U-
joints. Lubricate any grease fittings.
1 Do not exceed one year/10,000 mi (16,000 km) or 350 engine hours between service
intervals.
2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
1
Brake Fluid Maintenance
Every three years 2

Change the brake fluid.
1 Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time
for the interval.
2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer.
1
Other Maintenance items
Every 20,000 mi Replace the cabin air filter.

(32,000 km)
2
Replace the engine air filter.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters.
Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant
(48,000 km) concentration freeze-point protection, additive corrosion
inhibitor strength, coolant level, and hoses. Add coolant
additive if necessary.
Every 50,000 mi Replace the engine air inlet foam filter.
(80,000 km)
Every 60,000 mi Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seal if
(96,000 km) using non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
At 90,000 mi 3
Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.
(144,000 km)
573
1
Other Maintenance items
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. Consult

dealer for requirements.
Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced
within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km) Replace the front wheel bearings and seals if using non-
sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Change the axle(s) fluid. See exceptions.
Change the transfer case fluid, if equipped.
At 200,000 mi 4
Change the engine and secondary cooling system coolant.
(320,000 km)
1 You can perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last oil
change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.

3 Perform follow-up inspections every 15,000 mi (24,000 km) after the initial inspection.
Replace the belt or belts at 150,000 mi (240,000 km).

4 Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (320,000 km), then every 5 years or
100,000 mi (160,000 km).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Gasoline Engine
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
574
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Inspect frequently, service Inspect and lubricate the U-joints grease fittings - if
as required applicable.
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
1
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.
or six months.
Inspect and lubricate the U-joints grease fittings. - if
applicable.
Every 30,000 mi Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seals
(48,000 km) if you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 60,000 mi Change the transfer case fluid, four-wheel drive vehicles.
(96,000 km)
Replace the spark plugs.
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
- Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
Inspect frequently, service Replace the engine air filter.

as required
Replace the cabin air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the brake system.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
Lubricate the control arm and steering ball joints grease
fittings - if applicable.
Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the
1
tread depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect and lubricate the U-joints grease fittings - if
or six months applicable.
575
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
- Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
or six months or 200 engine
hours.
Every 30,000 mi Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seals
(48,000 km) if you use non-sealed bearings.
Every 60,000 mi Replace the spark plugs.
(96,000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions - Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently, service Replace engine air filter.

as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
1
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.
or six months
Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease
fittings.
Every 30,000 mi Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
(48,000 km) non-sealed bearings are used.
Off-road operation
Inspect frequently, service Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints and the U-joints,
as required Lubricate grease fittings - if applicable.
Replace the engine air filter.
or six months
Replace the cabin air filter.
576
Off-road operation
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the tread
1
depth.
Every 30,000 mi Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
(48,000 km) you use non-sealed bearings.
Exclusive use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Diesel Engine
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the

information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
(24,000 km) or six months, filters.
600 engine hours
577
Every 30,000 mi Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you
(48,000 km) use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
At 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Flush and refill the coolant.
or 2400 engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Frequent or Extended Idling - Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving or Frequent
Low-speed Operation if you use your Vehicle for Stationary Operation

(24,000 km), six months or filters.
600 engine hours
Frequent Low-speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Long Rush-hour Traffic

600 engine hours
578
Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating - Maximum Loaded Weight
for Vehicle Operation

600 engine hours
Every 30,000 mi Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you
(48,000 km) use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C)

600 engine hours
Every 30,000 mi Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using
(48,000 km) non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km) Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure
1
tread depth.
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the air filter
2
if necessary.
Inspect the steering, suspension ball joints and the tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
579
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km), 3

six months or 300 engine
hours Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
(24,000 km), 6 months or filters.
600 engine hours
Every 30,000 mi Replace the air inlet foam filter.
(48,000 km)
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you
use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Off-road Operation
As required Inspect the functional holes in each leg of the twin exhaust
tips and the holes under the shield just inboard of the right
rear tire to make sure they are clean and clear of debris or
foreign materials. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter of your
owner’s manual for more information.
Inspect the steering, suspension ball joints and the tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km), Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure
six months or 300 engine 1
the tread depth.
hours
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the air filter
2
if necessary.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km) 3
or 300 engine hours
600 engine hours
Every 30,000 mi Replace the air inlet foam filter.
(48,000 km)
580
Off-road Operation
Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if you

use non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles.
Every 50,000 mi Change the rear axle fluid. Dana rear axles only - some F-
(80,000 km) 350s; all F-450s and F-550s.
Change the transfer case fluid. Four-wheel drive vehicles.
Inspect the front axle fluid. Four-wheel drive vehicles.
Using Biodiesel, up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20)

300 engine hours
Using Fuel Other Than Ultra-low Sulfur Diesel Fuel - Vehicles Operated Where Ultra-low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel is not Required or Available
or three months (if using
high sulfur fuel with more
than 500 ppm sulfur)
or six months (if using high
sulfur fuel with fewer than
500 ppm sulfur)
581
Exceptions California Fuel Filter Replacement
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
Axle(s) and transfer case, 4X4 only, fluid determined that the failure to perform this
changes or level checks are not required maintenance item does not nullify the
unless a leak is suspected or the assembly emission warranty or limit recall liability
has been submerged in water. During long before the completion of your vehicle's
periods of trailer towing with outside useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) or at urges you to have all recommended
wide-open throttle for long periods above maintenance services performed at the
45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axle specified intervals and to record all vehicle
fluid every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) if the service.
rear axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid.
This interval can be waived and the Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
150,000 mi (240,000 km) service interval
can continue if the rear axle is filled with Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number locations with similar climates using an
XY-75W140-QL, or equivalent. Add friction American Petroleum Institute (API)
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
equivalent for complete refill of mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
Traction-Lok rear axles. See Capacities oil change interval is 3,000 mi (5,000 km).
and Specifications (page 441). If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
Additional Axle Maintenance for Dual 2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Rear Wheels
Change the rear axle fluid every Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
250,000 mi (400,000 km) under normal Replacement
driving conditions on all commercial The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
applications. When you operate your filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
vehicle at or near maximum gross vehicle and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
weights, change the rear axle fluid every these conditions require frequent
60,000 mi (96,000 km). In addition, inspection and replacement of the engine
follow this 60,000 mi (96,000 km) air filter and cabin air filter.
schedule when you operate your vehicle
under the special operating conditions Diesel Particulate Filter
where noted.
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
582
In this case, the engine control system

illuminates a service light , wrench icon, to
inform you to bring your vehicle to the
dealer for service. If there are any issues
with the oxidation catalyst or particulate
filter system, the engine control system
illuminates a service light, wrench or engine
icon to inform you to bring your vehicle into
a dealer for service.
583
RADIO FREQUENCY Djibouti

CERTIFICATION LABELS
Blind Spot Information System

Sensors (If Equipped)
Argentina
E340826
European Union EU
E337180
E310043
E340516
Ghana
Brazil
E340204
E269695
China
CMIIT ID: 2015DJ1610
584
Jamaica Moldova
E340517
Malaysia
E337971
Pakistan
E269697
2018
RALM/24A/0715/S(15-2272)
E340825
Mauritania
Paraguay
E340199
E337181
585
Serbia South Korea
E340200 E339675
Singapore MSIP-CRM-8DC-SRR3B
Taiwan, China
E340203
Ukraine
E339940
South Africa
E338024
E269696
586
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) Vietnam
E338020 E269693
United States and Canada Zambia
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B

E340205
IC: 4135A-SRR3B
IC: RSS-310 compliant, Per FCC Test report
no.: 1-8707-14-01-03 Body Control Module
This device complies with Part 15 of the Argentina
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
operation.
E338547
587
Brazil Moldova
E340499 E337971
Ghana Morocco
E341433 E340501
Jamaica Paraguay
E340500 E339812
2019-01-I-000076
588
Serbia Ukraine
E341434
E269682
Singapore United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E339940 E341432
South Africa United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: M3NA2C766336

E340510
IC: 7812A-A2C766336
589
This device complies with Part 15 of the Cruise Control Module (If Equipped)
and Economic Development Canada’s Argentina
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E340805
Brazil
E278262
Zambia
E340806
China
CMIIT ID: 2013DJ5794
E340511
590
Djibouti CIDF18000193
Mauritania
E340807
Ghana E340818
Moldova
E340808
Jamaica
E337971
Morocco
E340809
Malaysia
E340811
E339836
591
Pakistan South Africa
E340812
E340814
Serbia South Korea
E269681
E339675
Singapore KCC-CRI-DPH-L20051TR
Syria
E340815
E340813
592
Taiwan United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0051TR

E340816
IC: 3432A-0051TR
Ukraine This device complies with Part 15 of the
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E278262
E340817
593

Argentina
E343017
Ghana
E340119
E340307
E340317
E340316
Jamaica
Djibouti
E340308
E340306
E340318
594
Malaysia Morocco
E340311
E339836
F17000176
Mauritania
E343018
Pakistan
E340310
Moldova
E337971 E337974
595
Paraguay South Africa
TA-2016/2012
E339812 E340313
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2016-9-I-000222
Serbia
E343025
South Korea
E269681
Singapore
E339675
E340312 MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000
596
Ukraine
E340509
E269682
E344043
United States and Canada

E340314
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426

FCC ID: M3N-A2C931423
E340486 IC: 7812A-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C913423
597

interference, and
operation.
E343026
Vietnam
Passive Anti-Theft System
Argentina
E278262
Zambia
E339818
Brazil
E340315
E339848
598
Canada and United States of Ghana

America
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: OUC11545917 E340495
IC: 850K-11545917
Indonesia
interference, and
operation.
Djibouti E339937
Jamaica
E274067
E339936
599
Malaysia Morocco
E339836 E339939
CIDF18000209 Pakistan
Mauritania
E339843
E339938
Paraguay
Moldova
E337971
E339837
600
Serbia South Korea
E269681
E339675
Singapore MSIP-RRM-OAC-OUC11541917
Syria
E339940
E340498
South Africa
Taiwan, China
E269667
E339847
601
Ukraine Radio Transceiver Module

Argentina
E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) E339077
Djibouti
E340642
E340643
E347099
Ghana
Vietnam
E340644
E340645
Jamaica
E278262
E340640
602
Morocco
E340197
Mauritania
E340648
Pakistan
E340530
E342392
Serbia
E340531
Moldova
E341434
E337971
603
South Africa United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E340649 E340647
Ukraine
E340218
E269682 United States and Canada
Taiwan
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0082R

FCC ID: L2C0083TR
E340641 IC: 342A-0083TR
604
This device complies with Part 15 of the Brazil

interference, and
interference that may cause undesired E339830
operation.
Zambia China
E340646
E341500
SYNC Djibouti
Argentina
E339941
E339829
605
European Union EU Malaysia
E310043 E339836
Ghana RBAB/57H/0318/S(18-0624)
Mauritania
E341502
E341583
Jamaica Moldova
E340519
E337971
606
Morocco Serbia
E339942 E339831
Pakistan Singapore
E339943
E341519
South Africa
Paraguay
E339832
E339812
NR: 2017-12-I-0000413
607
South Korea United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E340520
E339675
MSIP-CMM-pAs-FA-170-BCAR-HS United States and Canada

Taiwan
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: ACJ-FG-185-SG32MH

IC: 216B-FG185SG32MH
E339833
Ukraine and Economic Development Canada’s
interference, and
operation.
E269682
608
Vietnam Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Sensors - Vehicles With: 315 MHz
Sensors
Argentina
E339834
Zambia
E338008
Brazil
E339835
E338010
609
Jamaica United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: MRXFP3

E338213
IC: 2546A-FP3
Mexico This device complies with Part 15 of the
interference, and
operation.
E338212
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Sensors - Vehicles With: 433 MHz
Sensors
Paraguay
Argentina
E338214
E338009
610
China Jordan
E338011 E338017
Djibouti Mauritania
E338012 E337970
Ghana Moldova
E338016
E337971
611
Nigeria Paraguay
E337972 E338018
Oman Serbia
E337973
Pakistan
E338019
Singapore
E337974 E338051
South Korea
E338023
612
Ukraine Wireless Accessory Charging

Module (If Equipped)
Argentina
E338024
United Arab Emirates

E340521
Brazil
E340824
E338025
Djibouti
E340823
613
European Union EU Malaysia
E310043 E339836
Ghana SQASI/TA/19/4129
Mauritania
E340522
Jamaica
E340523 E340524
Jordan Moldova
E340657
E337971
614
Morocco Singapore
E340525 E339940
Paraguay South Africa
TA-2017/3167
E339812 E340658
2017-10-I-0000333 South Korea

Serbia
E273475
E340200
615
Taiwan, China United States
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0066T

E338220
Ukraine and Economic Development Canada’s
interference, and
operation.
Vietnam
E269682
E278262
E340526
616
Zambia
E340659
617
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
WARNING: Do not place objects applicable local legislation and other
or mount equipment on or near the requirements. Installation of some
airbag cover, on the side of the front or aftermarket electronic devices could
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may degrade the performance of vehicle
come into contact with a deploying functions, which use radio frequency signals
airbag. Failure to follow these such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
instructions may increase the risk of pressure monitoring system, push button
personal injury in the event of a crash. start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite
navigation.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
brake pipes. telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
WARNING: Keep antenna and following illustrations and table. We do not
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from provide any other special provisions or
any electronic modules and airbags. conditions for installations or use.
Car/SUV
E239120
618
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
619
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
620
Appendices
END USER LICENSE Description of Other Rights and

Limitations
AGREEMENT
• Speech Recognition: If the
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER SOFTWARE includes speech
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) an inherently statistical process and
have acquired a vehicle having several that recognition errors are inherent in
devices, including SYNC ® and various the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
control modules, ("DEVICES") that COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
include software licensed or owned by liable for any damages arising out of
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates errors in the speech recognition
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those process. It is your responsibility to
software products of FORD MOTOR monitor any speech recognition
COMPANY origin, as well as associated functions included in the system.
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
("SOFTWARE") are protected by Decompilation and Disassembly:
international intellectual property laws You may not reverse engineer,
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is decompile, translate, disassemble or
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• The SOFTWARE may interface with SOFTWARE nor permit others to
and/or communicate with, or may be reverse engineer, decompile or
later upgraded to interface with and/or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
communicate with additional software and only to the extent that such activity
and/or systems provided by FORD is expressly permitted by applicable
MOTOR COMPANY. law notwithstanding this limitation or
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END to the extent as may be permitted by
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") the licensing terms governing use of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY any open source components included
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT • Limitations on Distributing,
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, Copying, Modifying and Creating
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT Derivative Works: You may not
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF distribute, copy, make modifications
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). to or create derivative works based on
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
EULA grants you the following license: extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
• You may use the SOFTWARE as notwithstanding this limitation or to
installed on the DEVICES and as the extent as may be permitted by the
otherwise interfacing with systems licensing terms governing use of any
and/or services provide by or through open source components included with
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third the SOFTWARE.
party software and service providers.
621
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user • Additional Software/Services: The

documentation for the DEVICES and SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
related systems and services may COMPANY, third party software and
contain multiple EULAs, such as service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
multiple translations and/or multiple its designated agent to provide or make
media versions (e.g., in the user available to you SOFTWARE updates,
documentation and in the software). supplements, add-on components, or
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you Internet-based services components
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of of the SOFTWARE after the date you
the SOFTWARE. obtain your initial copy of the
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
permanently transfer your rights under Components".) SOFTWARE updates
this EULA only as part of a sale or may cause you to incur additional
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you charges from your wireless service
retain no copies, you transfer all of the provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
SOFTWARE (including all component or third party software and services
parts, the media and printed materials, suppliers provide or make available to
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the you Supplemental Components and
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the no other EULA terms are provided
recipient agrees to the terms of this along with the Supplemental
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, Components, then the terms of this
any transfer must include all prior EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
versions of the SOFTWARE. COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any discontinue without liability any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY Internet-based services provided to
may terminate this EULA if you fail to you or made available to you through
comply with the terms and conditions the use of the SOFTWARE.
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
622
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

SOFTWARE may provide you with the All title and intellectual property rights in
ability to link to third party sites. The and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
third party sites are not under the limited to any images, photographs,
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, animations, video, audio, music, text and
its affiliates and/or its designated "applets" incorporated into the
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its materials, and any copies of the
designated agent are responsible for SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
(I) the contents of any third party sites, COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
any links contained in third party sites, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
or any changes or updates to third not copy the printed materials
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
other form of transmission received and intellectual property rights in and to
from any third party sites. If the the content which may be accessed
SOFTWARE provides links to third through use of the SOFTWARE is the
party sites, those links are provided to property of the respective content owner
you only as a convenience, and the and may be protected by applicable
inclusion of any link does not imply an copyright or other intellectual property
endorsement of the third party site by laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates rights to use such content outside its
and/or its designated agent. intended use. All rights not specifically
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: granted under this EULA are reserved by
You recognize your obligation to drive FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
responsibly and keep attention on the and third party software and service
road. You will read and abide with the providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
DEVICES operating instructions services which may be accessed through
particularly as they pertain to safety the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
and you agree to assume any risk respective terms of use relating to such
associated with the use of the services. If this SOFTWARE contains
DEVICES. documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or subject to U.S. and European Union export
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes applicable international and national laws
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
replacement copy for the existing as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
this EULA, including any additional EULA other governments.
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
623
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
you any rights in connection with any Information Read and follow
trademarks or service marks of FORD instructions:
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers. • Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are information provided in this end user
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by following precautions found in the
Ford Motor Company is under license. Owner Guide can lead to an accident
Other trademarks and trade names are or other serious injuries.
those of their respective owners.
General Operation
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
• Voice Command Control: Certain
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
functions within the SYNC® system
provided in the documentation for the
may be accomplished using voice
DEVICES product support, such as the
commands. Using voice commands
vehicle owner guide.
while driving helps you to operate the
Should you have any questions concerning system without removing your hands
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD from the wheel or eyes from the road.
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
please refer to the address provided in the access any function requiring a
documentation for the DEVICES. prolonged view of the screen while you
No Liability for Certain Damages: are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD manner before attempting to access a
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY function of the system requiring
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, prolonged attention.
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO • Volume Setting: Do not raise the
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, volume excessively. Keep the volume
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL at a level where you can still hear
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN outside traffic and emergency signals
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR while driving. Driving while unable to
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS hear these sounds could cause an
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY accident.
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES • Navigation Features: Any navigation
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE features included in the system are
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW intended to provide turn by turn
VEHICLE. instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
624
Appendices
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of

features may require manual Risk
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to • You agree to each of the following:(a)
perform such set-up or insert data Any use of the SOFTWARE while
while driving can distract your attention driving an automobile or other vehicle
and could cause an accident or other in violation of applicable law or
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
and legal manner before attempting presents a significant risk of distracted
these operations. driving and should not be attempted
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any under any circumstances;(b) Use of
navigation features are provided only the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
as an aid. Make your driving decisions poses a significant risk of hearing
based on your observations of local damage and should not be attempted
conditions and existing traffic under any circumstances;(c) The
regulations. Any such feature is not a SOFTWARE may not be compatible
substitute for your personal judgment. with new or different versions of an
Any route suggestions made by this operating system, third party software,
system should never replace any local or third party services, and the
traffic regulations or your personal SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
judgment or knowledge of safe driving critical failure of an operating system,
practices. third party software, or third party
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route service.(d) Any third party service
suggestions if doing so would result in accessed by or third party software
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
would be placed in an unsafe situation, charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
or if you would be directed into an area may not work correctly, on an
that you consider unsafe. The driver is uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
ultimately responsible for the safe may change streaming formats or
operation of the vehicle and therefore, discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
must evaluate whether it is safe to adult, profane or offensive content; and
follow the suggested directions. (v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps or safety information or other content;
used by this system may be inaccurate and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
because of changes in roads, traffic cause you to incur additional charges
controls or driving conditions. Always from your wireless service provider
use good judgment and common sense (WSP) and any data or minute
when following the suggested routes. calculators that may be included in the
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on software program are for reference
any navigation features included in the only, are not warranted in any way and
system to route you to emergency should not be relied upon in anyway.
services. Ask local authorities or an • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
emergency services operator for these to be responsible for and assume the
locations. Not all emergency services entire risk to the items set forth in
such as police, fire stations, hospitals Section (a) – (e) above.
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
625
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF • The laws of the State of Michigan
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY govern this EULA and Your use of the
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN SOFTWARE. Your use of the
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, SOFTWARE may also be subject to
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND other local, state, national, or
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY international laws. Any litigation arising
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES out of or related to this EULA shall be
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST brought and maintained exclusively in
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT a court of the State of Michigan
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY located in Wayne County or in the
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, United States District Court for the
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES consent to submit to the personal
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) jurisdiction of a court in the State of
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE Michigan located in Wayne County and
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, the United States District Court for the
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE Eastern District of Michigan for any
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) dispute arising out of or relating to this
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, EULA.
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
626
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action the right to litigate (or participate in as a
Waiver party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
(a) Application. This Section applies to will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT whose decision will be final except for a
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO limited right of appeal under the Federal
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, over the parties may enforce the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF arbitrator’s award.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
controversy between You and FORD forum will be conducted solely on an
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
exceptions listed above, concerning the MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this dispute heard as a class action, as a private
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, attorney general action, or in any other
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other proceeding in which any party acts or
legal or equitable basis. proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a be combined with another without the
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY prior written consent of all parties to all
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, affected arbitrations or proceedings.
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the (f) Arbitration procedure. Any
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the arbitration will be conducted by the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and American Arbitration Association (the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
resolve any dispute through informal Rules. If You are an individual and use the
negotiation within 60 days from the date SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may less whether or not You are an individual
commence arbitration. or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
(c) Small claims court. You may also Consumer-Related Disputes will also
litigate any dispute in small claims court apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
in your county of residence or FORD Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
business, if the dispute meets all request a telephonic or in-person hearing
requirements to be heard in the small by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
claims court. You may litigate in small involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
claims court whether or not You be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
negotiated informally first. good cause to hold an in-person hearing
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD instead. For more information, see adr.org
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
dispute by informal negotiation or in small commence arbitration only in your county
claims court, any other effort to resolve of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
the dispute will be conducted exclusively principal place of business. The arbitrator
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
627
Appendices
may award the same damages to You filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
individually as a court could. The arbitrator expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
may award declaratory or injunctive relief fees or expenses from you in any
only to You individually, and only to the arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
extent required to satisfy Your individual counted in determining how much a
claim. dispute involves.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives. (h) Claims or disputes must be filed
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. within one year. To the extent permitted
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will by law, any claim or dispute under this
promptly reimburse your filing fees and EULA to which this Section applies must
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and be filed within one year in small claims
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
COMPANY’S last written settlement d). The one-year period begins when the
offer made before the arbitrator was claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
appointed (“last written offer”), your a claim or dispute is not filed within one
dispute goes all the way to an year, it is permanently barred.
arbitrator’s decision (called an (I) Severability. If the class action waiver
“award”), and the arbitrator awards (Section e) is found to be illegal or
you more than the last written offer, unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you dispute, then that portion of Section e will
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of not apply to those parts. Instead, those
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your parts will be severed and proceed in a court
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
(3) reimburse any expenses (including in arbitration. If any other provision of that
expert witness fees and costs) that portion Section e is found to be illegal or
your attorney reasonably accrues for unenforceable, that provision will be
investigating, preparing, and pursuing severed with the remainder of Section e
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator remaining in full force and effect.
will determine the amounts.
Telenav Software End User License
• ii. Disputes involving more than
Agreement
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s Please read these terms and conditions
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. carefully before you use the TeleNav
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In Software. Your use of the TeleNav
any arbitration you commence, FORD Software indicates that you accept these
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA terms and conditions. If you do not accept
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or these terms and conditions, do not break
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the the seal of the package, launch, or
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
or brought for an improper purpose. In TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
any arbitration FORD MOTOR the privacy policy at any time, with or
COMPANY commences, it will pay all without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
628
Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use 2. Account Information

You acknowledge that devoting attention You agree: (a) when registering the
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
of injury or death to you and others in true, accurate, current, and complete
situations that otherwise require your information about yourself, and (b) to
undivided attention, and you therefore inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
agree to comply with the following when to such information, and to keep it true,
using the TeleNav Software: accurate, current and complete.
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise 3. Software License
drive safely;
• Subject to your compliance with the
(b) use your own personal judgment while
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
hereby grants to you a personal,
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
(except as expressly permitted below
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
in connection with your permanent
you into an area that you consider to be
transfer of the TeleNav Software
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
license), without the right to
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise sublicense, to use the TeleNav
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless Software (in object code form only) in
your vehicle is stationary and parked; order to access and use the TeleNav
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for Software. This license shall terminate
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, upon any termination or expiration of
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, this Agreement. You agree that you will
or in any manner inconsistent with this use the TeleNav Software only for your
Agreement; personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices navigation services to other parties.
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in 3.1 License Limitations
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
with your driving and will not prevent the disassemble, translate, modify, alter
operation of any safety device (such as an or otherwise change the TeleNav
airbag). Software or any part thereof; (b)
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav attempt to derive the source code,
harmless against all claims resulting from audio library or structure of the
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate TeleNav Software without the prior
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving express written consent of TeleNav;
vehicle, including as a result of your failure (c) remove from the TeleNav
to comply with the directions above. Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
629
Appendices
distribute, sublicense or otherwise is dependent on the accuracy of

transfer the TeleNav Software to navigation, as the maps or functionality
others, except as part of your of the TeleNav Software are not
permanent transfer of the TeleNav intended to support such high risk
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav applications, especially in more remote
Software in any manner that geographical areas.
I. infringes the intellectual property or • TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
privacy or other rights of any party, CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
regulation, including but not limited to laws WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
and regulations related to spamming, FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
privacy, consumer and child protection, OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
obscenity or defamation, or LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
obscene, libelous, or otherwise PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
otherwise permit unauthorized access by RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
third parties to the TeleNav Software SOFTWARE.
without advanced written permission of • Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
TeleNav. disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible 5. Limitation of Liability
pursuant to applicable law, in no event • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
or agents or employees of any of the CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
foregoing, be liable for any decision OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
made or action taken by you or anyone BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
else in reliance on the information PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
provided by the TeleNav Software. INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
TeleNav also does not warrant the SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
accuracy of the map or other data used (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
for the TeleNav Software. Such data LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
may not always reflect reality due to, INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
among other things, road closures, OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
construction, weather, new roads and LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
other changing conditions. You are PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
responsible for the entire risk arising OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
out of your use of the TeleNav USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
Software. For example but without TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
limitation, you agree not to rely on the TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
TeleNav Software for critical POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
navigation in areas where the NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
well-being or survival of you or others THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
630
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, to the exclusive jurisdiction of the

WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES courts of the County of Santa Clara,
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL California. The United Nations
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN Convention on Contracts for the
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING International Sale of Goods shall not
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE apply.
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS 7. Assignment
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT • You may not resell, assign, or transfer
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE this Agreement or any of your rights or
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES obligations, except in totality, in
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT connection with your permanent
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR expressly conditioned upon the new
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS to be bound by the terms and
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. conditions of this Agreement. Any such
6. Arbitration and Governing Law sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
• You agree that any dispute, claim or paragraph will result in immediate
controversy arising out of or relating to termination of this Agreement, without
this Agreement or the TeleNav liability to TeleNav, in which case you
Software shall be settled by and all other parties shall immediately
independent arbitration involving a cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
neutral arbitrator and administered by Notwithstanding the foregoing,
the American Arbitration Association TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
in the County of Santa Clara, California. any other party at any time without
The arbitrator shall apply the notice, provided the assignee remains
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the bound by this Agreement.
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered 8. Miscellaneous
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
8.1
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration This Agreement constitutes the entire
proceeding and the decision of the agreement between TeleNav and you with
arbitrator shall be binding upon both respect to the subject matter hereof.
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement 8.2
and performance hereunder will be
Except for the limited licenses expressly
governed by and construed in
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
accordance with the laws of the State
all right, title and interest in and to the
of California, without giving effect to
TeleNav Software, including without
its conflict of law provisions. To the
limitation all related intellectual property
extent judicial action is necessary in
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
connection with the binding arbitration,
not expressly granted in this Agreement
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
631
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute, 8.6

inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors The headings in this Agreement are for
hereby reserve all of their respective rights convenience of reference only, will not be
other than the licenses explicitly granted deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
in this Agreement. and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
8.3 this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
By using the TeleNav Software, you variations thereof, will not be deemed to
consent to receive from TeleNav all be terms of limitation, but rather will be
communications, including notices, deemed to be followed by the words
agreements, legally required disclosures "without limitation".
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's • The Telenav Software utilizes map and
Website or by downloading such Notices other data licensed to Telenav by third
to your wireless device. If you desire to party vendors for the benefit of you and
withdraw your consent to receive Notices other end users. This Agreement
electronically, you must discontinue your includes end-user terms applicable to
use of the TeleNav Software. these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
8.4 of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
TeleNav's or your failure to require with the following additional terms and
performance of any provision shall not conditions, which are applicable to
affect that party's right to require Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any North America, LLC
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself. The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
8.5 resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
If any provision herein is held conditions which are agreed to by you, on
unenforceable, then such provision will be the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
modified to reflect the intention of the its licensors (including their licensors and
parties, and the remaining provisions of suppliers) on the other hand.
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
632
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from Restrictions. Except where you have been
the United States Postal Service® to specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
publish and sell ZIP+4® information. and without limiting the preceding
©United States Postal Service® 2014. paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
Prices are not established, controlled or with any products, systems, or applications
approved by the United States Postal installed or otherwise connected to or in
Service®. The following trademarks and communication with vehicles, capable of
registrations are owned by the USPS: vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
United States Postal Service, USPS, and real time route guidance, fleet
ZIP+4 management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
The Data for Mexico includes certain data positioning devices or any mobile or
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y wireless-connected electronic or computer
Geografía. devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 computers, pagers, and personal digital
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd assistants or PDAs.
The data (“Data”) is provided for your Warning. The Data may contain
personal, internal use only and not for inaccurate or incomplete information due
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is to the passage of time, changing
subject to the following terms and circumstances, sources used and the
conditions which are agreed to by you, on nature of collecting comprehensive
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., geographic data, any of which may lead to
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including incorrect results.
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
Terms and Conditions risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data guarantees, representations or warranties
together with the Telenav Software solely of any kind, express or implied, arising by
for the internal business and personal law or otherwise, including but not limited
purposes for which you were licensed, and to, content, quality, accuracy,
not for service bureau, time-sharing or completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
subject to the restrictions set forth in the use or results to be obtained from this
following paragraphs, you agree not to Data, or that the Data or server will be
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, uninterrupted or error-free.
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
portion of this Data, and may not transfer ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
except to the extent permitted by ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
mandatory laws. OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
633
Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, HERE from complying with any of its
Territories and Countries do not allow obligations hereunder to deliver or
certain warranty exclusions, so to that distribute Data, such failure shall be
extent the above exclusion may not apply excused and shall not constitute a breach
to you. of this Agreement.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND Entire Agreement. These terms and
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR conditions constitute the entire agreement
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT between Telenav (and its licensors,
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY including their licensors and suppliers) and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE and supersedes in their entirety any and
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR all written or oral agreements previously
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR existing between us with respect to such
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR Governing Law. The above terms and
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
conditions shall be governed by the laws
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
where European HERE Data is used],
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
Convention for Contracts for the
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
International Sale of Goods, which is
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION [insert “The Netherlands” where European
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A HERE Data is used] for any and all
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS disputes, claims and actions arising from
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE or in connection with the Data provided to
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some you hereunder.
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or Government End Users. If the Data is
damages limitations, so to that extent the being acquired by or on behalf of the
above may not apply to you. United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
Export Control. You shall not export from those customarily claimed by the United
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct States government, this Data is a
product thereof except in compliance with, “commercial item” as that term is defined
and with all licenses and approvals at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
required under, applicable export laws, accordance with these End-User Terms,
rules and regulations, including but not and each copy of Data delivered or
limited to the laws, rules and regulations otherwise furnished shall be marked and
administered by the Office of Foreign embedded as appropriate with the
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and treated in accordance with such Notice:
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
634
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE B. Canada Data. The following provi-

sions apply to the Data for Canada,
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ which may include or reflect data from
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE third party licensors (“Third Party
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
60606 Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
these End-User Terms under which this agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data was provided. Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
If the Contracting Officer, federal licensors of such data, including Her
government agency, or any federal official Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
refuses to use the legend provided herein, make no guarantees, representa-
the Contracting Officer, federal tions or warranties respecting such
government agency, or any federal official data, either express or implied,
must notify HERE prior to seeking arising by law or otherwise, including
additional or alternative rights in the Data. but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
I. US/Canada Territory for a particular purpose.
A. United States Data. The End-User b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Terms for any Application containing Party Data licensors, including Her
Data for the United States shall contain Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
the following notices: shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license spective of the nature of the cause
from the United States Postal of the claim, demand or action
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® alleging any loss, injury or damages,
information.” direct or indirect, which may result
“©United States Postal Service® from the use or possession of such
20XX. Prices are not established, Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
controlled or approved by the United revenues or contracts, or any other
States Postal Service®. The following consequential loss of any kind
trademarks and registrations are resulting from any defect in the
owned by the USPS: United States Data.
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
635
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with either express or implied, arising by

each copy of all or any portion of the law or otherwise, including but not
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client limited to, effectiveness, complete-
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the ness, accuracy or fitness for a
following copyright notice on at least particular purpose. The licensors,
one of: (i) the label for the storage including Her Majesty, Canada Post
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging and NRCan, shall not be liable in
for the copy; or (iii) other materials respect of any claim, demand or
packaged with the copy, such as user action, irrespective of the nature of
manuals or end user license agree- the cause of the claim, demand or
ments: “This data includes information action alleging any loss, injury or
taken with permission from Canadian damages, direct or indirect, which
authorities, including © Her Majesty may result from the use or posses-
the Queen in Right of Canada, © sion of the data or the Data. The
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada licensors, including Her Majesty,
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
Department of Natural Resources be liable in any way for loss of
Canada. All rights reserved.” revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
3. End-User Terms: Except as other- resulting from any defect in the data
wise agreed by the parties, in connec- or the Data.
tion with the provision of any portion End User shall indemnify and save
of the Data for the Territory of Canada harmless the licensors, including Her
to End-Users as may be authorized Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
under the Agreement, Client shall and their officers, employees and
provide such End-Users, in a reason- agents from and against any claim,
ably conspicuous manner, with terms demand or action, irrespective of
(set forth with other end user terms the nature of the cause of the claim,
required to be provided under the demand or action, alleging loss,
Agreement, or as otherwise may be costs, expenses, damages or injuries
provided, by Client) which shall include (including injuries resulting in death)
the following provisions on behalf of arising out of the use or possession
the Third Party Data licensors, of the data or the Data.
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan: 4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
The Data may include or reflect tion to all of the rights and obligations
data of licensors, including Her of the parties under the Agreement.
Majesty the Queen in the Right of To the extent that any of the provi-
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada sions of this Section are inconsistent
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) with, or conflict with, any other provi-
and the Department of Natural sions of the Agreement, the provisions
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such of this Section shall prevail.
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
636
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

II. Mexico. The following provision applies of the Data and/or packaging relating
to the Data for Mexico, which includes thereto shall include the respective Third
certain data from the Instituto Nacional Party Notices set forth below and used
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or included in such copy:
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: Country Notice
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)” Jordan “© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
III. Latin America Territory for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Client or any of its permitted
of the Data and/or packaging relating
sublicensees (if any) fail to
thereto shall include the respective Third
meet such requirement,
Party Notices set forth below and used
HERE shall have the right to
as described below corresponding to
terminate Client’s license
the Territory (or portion thereof)
with respect to the Jordan
included in such copy:
Data.
Territory Notice
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL licensing and/or otherwise distributing
ARGENTINO” HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
AUTORIZACION N° IGM- in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
ENERO DE 2011” censees (if any) and End-Users are
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD restricted from using the Jordan Data in
TOPO ®” Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Guade-
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
loupe,
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
French
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
Guiana
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
and
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
asset management applications, call
nique Nacional de Estadística y
center applications, telematics applica-
Mexico Geografía)”
tions, public organization Internet
IV. Middle East Territory applications or for providing geocoding
services.
637
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior

V. Europe Territory written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe with respect to Data for the Territory of
1. General Restrictions Applicable to Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
and agrees that in certain countries of Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
the Europe Territory, Client will need Client is restricted from using Data for
to obtain rights directly from third the Territory of France to create paper
party RDS-TMC code providers to maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
receive and use the Traffic Codes in 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
the Data and to deliver to End-Users from using any Data to create, sell or
Transactions in any way derived from distribute paper maps that are the same
or based on such Traffic Codes. For or substantially similar, in terms of data
such countries, HERE shall deliver the content and specific use of color,
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to symbols and scale, to paper maps
Client only after receiving certification published by the European national
from Client of its having obtained such mapping agencies, including without
rights. limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
2. Display of Third Party Rights Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
each Transaction that uses Traffic Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Codes for Belgium, provide the Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
following notice to the End-User: swesen of Austria, and the National
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are Land Survey of Sweden.
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Transports.” Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
license granted to Client relating to a direct action against Client to enforce
making, selling or distributing paper compliance with the OS copyright notice
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or (see Section IV(D) below) and paper
paper-like medium): (a) such license map requirements (see Section IV(B)
with respect to Data for the Territory of above) contained in this Agreement.
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
separate written agreement with the of the Data and/or packaging relating
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and thereto shall include the respective Third
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the Party Notices set forth below and used
OS any and all applicable paper map as described below corresponding to
royalties, and Client’s complying with the Territory (or portion thereof)
the OS copyright notice requirements; included in such copy:
(b) such license for selling or otherwise Country(ies) Notice
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
638
Appendices
Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich- Spain “Información geográfica

und Vermessungswesen” propiedad del CNIG”
Croatia Sweden “Based upon electronic
Cyprus, data © National Land
Estonia, Survey Sweden.”
Latvia,
Lithuania, Switzerland “Topografische
Moldova, Grundlage: © Bundesamt
Poland, für Landestopographie.
Slovenia E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
and/or acknowledges that HERE has not
Ukraine “© EuroGeographics” received approvals to distribute map
France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD data for the following countries in such
TOPO ®” respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
Germany “Die Grundlagendaten HERE may update such list from time to
wurden mit Genehmigung time. The license rights granted to Client
der zuständigen Behörden under this TL with respect to the Data
entnommen” for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
Great Britain “Contains Ordnance laws and regulations, including, without
Survey data © Crown limitation, any required licenses or
copyright and database approvals to distribute the Application
right 2010 Contains Royal incorporating such Data in such
Mail data © Royal Mail respective countries.
copyright and database
right 2010”
VI. Australia Territory
Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.” A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top- thereto shall include the respective Third
Map Ltd.” Party Notices set forth below and used
Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è as described below corresponding to
stata prodotta usando the Territory (or portion thereof)
quale riferimento anche included in such copy:
cartografia numerica ed Copyright. Based on data provided
al tratto prodotta e fornita under license from PSMA Australia
dalla Regione Toscana.” Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Norway “Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
639
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is © DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED

20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
addition to the foregoing, the End-User DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
Terms for any Application containing (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
shall contain the following notice: WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
“Product incorporates traffic location OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora- AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
tion Limited and its licensors.” INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
Telematics Disclosure OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS, CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH DEVICE.
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
SERVICES
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE GUARANTEE ANY END USER
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
640
Appendices
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR do not remove any copyright notices that
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, appear and do not modify the Data in any
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS and may not transfer or distribute it in any
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR form, for any purpose, except to the extent
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) permitted by mandatory laws.
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, Restrictions
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE Except where you have been specifically
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR not (a) use this Data with any products,
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING systems, or applications installed or
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY otherwise connected to or in
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN communication with vehicles, capable of
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER real time route guidance, fleet
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL management or similar applications; or (b)
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END with or in communication with any
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND positioning devices or any mobile or
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER wireless-connected electronic or computer
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY devices, including without limitation
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE computers, pagers, and personal digital
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES using this Data if you fail to comply with
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER these terms and conditions.
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE Limited Warranty
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
CARRIER. perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
VII. China Territory period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
Personal Use Only provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
You agree to use this Data together with described in applicable written materials
[insert name of Client Application] for the provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
solely personal, non-commercial purposes support engineers will make commercially
for which you were licensed, and not for reasonable efforts to solve any problem
service bureau, time-sharing or other issues.
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
641
Appendices
Customer Remedies FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
resulted from accident, abuse, or
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
be warranted for the remainder of the
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
nor any product support services offered
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
by NAV2 are available without proof of
exclusions may not be permitted under
purchase from an authorized international
applicable law, so to that extent the above
source.
exclusion may not apply to you.
No Other Warranty:
Export Control
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
You agree not to export to anywhere any
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
part of the Data provided to you or any
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
direct product thereof except in
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
compliance with, and with all licenses and
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
approvals required under, applicable
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
export laws, rules and regulations.
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A IP Protection
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
exclusions may not be permitted under suppliers and are protected by applicable
applicable law, so to that extent the above copyright and other intellectual property
exclusion may not apply to you. law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
Limited Liability: sale.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY Entire Agreement
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR These terms and conditions constitute the
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT entire agreement between NAV2(and its
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY licensors, including their licensors and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE matter hereof, and supersedes in their
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR entirety any and all written or oral
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR agreements previously existing between
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH us with respect to such subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
642
Appendices
Governing Law. ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote
The above terms and conditions shall be
Data only by means of the intended End
governed by the laws of the People’s
User functions of this device. This device
Republic of China, without giving effect to
may contain content belonging to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
for the International Sale of Goods, which
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
content and such content providers shall
from or in connection with the Data
be entitled to all of the benefits and
provided to you hereunder shall be
protections set forth herein that are
submitted to the Shanghai International
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
Economic and Trade Arbitration
will use the content from Gracenote
Commission for arbitration.
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote® Copyright the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
CD and music-related data from non-commercial use only. You agree not
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
Gracenote. This product and service may associated with a music file) to any third
practice one or more of the following U.S. party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
6,330,593 and other patents issued or SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
pending. Some services supplied under EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. HEREIN.
Patent 6,304,523. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
Gracenote and CDDB are registered to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of violate these restrictions. If your licenses
Gracenote. terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote® End User License Agreement Data, the Gracenote Software, and
(EULA) Gracenote Servers.
This device contains software from Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Emeryville, California 94608 Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
("Gracenote"). Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote become liable for any payment
"Gracenote Software") enables this device to you for any information that you provide,
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
643
Appendices
including any copyrighted material or IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

music file information. You agree that MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Gracenote may enforce its respective PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
rights, collectively or separately, under this NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
agreement against you, directly in each GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
company's own name. THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
queries for statistical purposes. The GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
queries without knowing anything about DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
who you are. For more information, see the OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
web page at www.gracenote.com for the WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Gracenote Privacy Policy. Radio Frequency Statement
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, Canada. Operation is subject to the
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY following two conditions:
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE (1) This device may not cause harmful
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY interference, and
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT (2) this device must accept any
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT interference received, including
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE interference that may cause undesired
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF operation.
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARNING: Changes or
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER modifications not expressively approved
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE by the party responsible for compliance
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR could void the user's authority to operate
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE radio certification number only signifies
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR that Industry Canada technical
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE specifications were met.
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY The antenna used for this transmitter must
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES not be co-located or operating in
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO conjunction with any other antenna or
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE transmitter.
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
644
Appendices
Taiwan Territory By using SUNA Products and/or Services,

you will be deemed to have accepted and
Note: In accordance with the management agreed to be bound by the terms and
approach of low-power radio wave conditions fully detailed at:
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified Website
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
the frequency, increase the power or ditions/
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization. 2. Intellectual Property
Article 14: The usage of low-power SUNA Products and/or Services are for
radio-frequency motors must not affect your personal use. You may not record, or
aviation safety and interfere with legal retransmit the content, nor use the content
telecommunications. Should interference in association with any other traffic
be detected, immediately stop using the information or route guidance service or
device and only resume usage after device not approved by Intelematics. You
ensuring that there is no longer any obtain no right of ownership in any
interference. For the legal Intellectual Property Rights (including
telecommunication and wireless copyright) in the data that is used to
telecommunication of the telco, the provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference 3. Appropriate Use
from telecommunication, industrial, SUNA Products and/or Services are
scientific and radio wave equipment. intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS comprehensive or accurate information on
AND CONDITIONS all occasions. On occasions, you may
By activating, using and/or accessing the experience additional delay as a result of
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
other content or material provided by acknowledge that it is not intended, or
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products suitable, for use in applications where time
and/or Services), you must accept of arrival or driving directions may impact
certain terms and conditions. The following the safety of the public or yourself.
is a brief summary of the terms and 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
conditions that apply to you. To view the while driving
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, You, and other authorised drivers of the
please consult: vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
Website observing all relevant laws and codes of
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon- safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
ditions/ actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
1. Acceptance
645
Appendices
5. Service Continuity and Reception of inability to use SUNA Products and/or

the SUNA Traffic Channel Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
We will use reasonable endeavours to
damages. You also acknowledge that the
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
guarantees nor make any warranties that
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
relate to the availability, accuracy or
for technical reasons or for planned
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
maintenance. We will try to perform
Services, and to the extent which it is
maintenance at times when congestion is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
Supplier excludes any warranties which
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
might otherwise be implied by any State
time.
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted Products and/or Services.
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
7. Please Note
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
Great care has been taken in preparing this
6. Limitation of Liability
manual. Constant product development
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or may mean that some information is not
the manufacturer of your device (the entirely up-to-date. The information in this
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to document is subject to change without
any third party for any damages either notice.
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Radio Frequency Statement
SYNC Version FCC Identification Number IC Identification Number
3.0 ACJ-SYNCG3-L 216B-SYNCG3-L

3.1 ACJ-FA-170-BCARHS 216B-FA170BCARHS
3.2 ACJ-FG-185-SG32MH 216B-FG185SG32MH
These devices comply with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
WARNING: Changes or Canada. Operation is subject to the
modifications not expressively approved following two conditions:
could void the user's authority to operate 1. The device does not cause harmful
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the interference.
radio certification number only signifies 2. The device accepts any interference
that Industry Canada technical received, including interference that
specifications were met. could cause undesired operation.
646
Index
3 Airbag Disposal...............................................54
Air Conditioning
360 Degree Camera...................................238 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Advanced Camera Views...............................238 Automatic Temperature Control.............143
Auxiliary Camera.................................................241 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual
Bed View Camera..............................................240 Temperature Control....................................147
Camera Views.....................................................238 Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Front Camera......................................................239 Specification - 6.2L..................................459
Keep Out Zone....................................................239 Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Side Camera........................................................240 Specification - 6.7L Diesel....................460
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
4 Specification - 7.3L...................................461
Air Filter
4WD See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................213 6.2L.....................................................................357
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L
A Diesel.................................................................358
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
A/C 7.3L.....................................................................360
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Alarm
Automatic Temperature Control.............143 See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................76
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Ambient Lighting.............................................91
Temperature Control....................................147 Adjusting the Brightness....................................91
About This Manual...........................................9 Switching Ambient Lighting Off......................91
ABS Switching Ambient Lighting On.......................91
See: Brakes...........................................................223 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................76
ABS driving hints Arming the Alarm..................................................77
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Disarming the Alarm............................................77
Brakes................................................................225 Using the System.................................................76
Accessories....................................................558 Appendices.....................................................618
Accessories Apps.................................................................540
See: Replacement Parts SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................542
Recommendation............................................16 Using Apps on an Android Device................541
ACC Using Apps on an iOS Device.........................541
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............243 Using Mobile Navigation on an Android
Adjustable Pedals.........................................84 Device.................................................................541
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................381 At a Glance.......................................................20
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................382 Audible Warnings and Indicators...........109
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................381 Headlamps On Warning Chime....................109
Adjusting the Pedals....................................84 Key in Ignition Warning Chime......................109
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles Keyless Warning Alert.......................................109
With: Manual Adjustable Steering Parking Brake On Warning Chime...............109
Column.............................................................81 Audio Control...................................................81
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles You can operate the following functions
With: Power Adjustable Steering with the control:...............................................81
Column...........................................................80 Audio System................................................479
End of Travel Position........................................80 General Information.........................................479
Memory Feature...................................................80
647
Index
Audio Unit.......................................................479 Switching Auto Mode On and Off................145

Accessing the Apps Menu.............................480 Switching Dual Mode On and Off................146
Accessing the Clock Settings.......................480 Autowipers.......................................................85
Accessing the Media Source Menu............480 Auxiliary Power Points...............................168
Accessing the Phone Features....................480 400 Watt AC Power Point..............................168
Accessing the Settings Menu.......................480 DC Power Point...................................................168
Accessing the Sound Settings.....................480 Locations...............................................................169
Adjusting the Volume......................................480 Auxiliary Switches.......................................559
Changing Radio Stations...............................480 Upfitter Interface Module...............................562
Listening to the Radio.......................................481
Playing or Pausing Media................................481
Selecting the Audio Modes...........................489
B
Setting a Memory Preset...............................489 Battery
Switching Radio Text On and Off.................481 See: Changing the 12V Battery......................379
Switching Repeat Mode On and Off...........481 Bed Extender....................................................73
Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off...........481 Grocery mode........................................................75
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........481 Tailgate mode........................................................74
Switching the Display On and Off...............481 Blind Spot Information System.............254
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Reverse..............................................................481 Tow.....................................................................256
Using the Display Control................................481 Switching the System Off and On..............258
Using the Number Block..................................481 System Errors......................................................258
Autolamps........................................................88 Using the System...............................................255
Windshield Wiper Activated BLIS
Headlamps........................................................88 See: Blind Spot Information System..........254
Automatic High Beam Control..................93 Bonnet Lock
Automatic High Beam Control See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........348
Indicators........................................................93 Booster Seats..................................................33
Automatic Transmission...........................207 Types of Booster Seats......................................34
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................210 Brake Fluid Check.........................................377
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Brake Fluid Service Interval............................378
Snow....................................................................211 Brake Fluid Specification..........................465
Neutral Idle with F350, F450, F550 and Brakes...............................................................223
F600 Chassis Cab Vehicles.......................210 General Information..........................................223
Understanding the Shift Positions of Your Breaking-In.....................................................320
Automatic Transmission............................207 Bulb Specification Chart...........................447
Understanding Your SelectShift
Automatic™ Transmission.......................208
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity
C
and Specification - Diesel.....................463 Calculating Payload....................................274
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity Calculating the Load Limit.......................274
and Specification - Gasoline................463 Helpful examples for calculating the
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission..........463 available amount of cargo and luggage
Ten-Speed Automatic Transmission.........464 load capacity..................................................275
Automatic Transmission Fluid Canceling the Set Speed...........................231
Check.............................................................376 Capacities and Specifications.................441
Auto Mode.......................................................145 Cargo Lamps....................................................91
Auto Mode Indicators........................................145
648
Index
Car Wash Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................392 Name or Password...................................478
Catalytic Converter......................................195 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................382
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................196 Checking MyKey System Status..............64
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance MyKey Distance....................................................64
(I/M) Testing....................................................197 Number of Admin Keys......................................64
Center Console................................................171 Number of MyKeys..............................................64
Changing a Bulb...........................................383 Checking the Wiper Blades.....................382
Cargo Lamp and Central High Mounted Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Brake Lamp Bulbs........................................385 Maintenance.................................................44
Fog Lamp Bulbs.................................................384 Child Restraint Positioning.........................35
Front Park and Direction Indicator Lamp Child Safety......................................................22
Bulbs..................................................................383 General Information............................................22
Headlamp Bulbs................................................383 Child Safety Locks..........................................37
LED Lamps..........................................................386 Left-Hand Side......................................................37
License Plate Lamp Bulb...............................386 Right-Hand Side...................................................37
Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear Direction Cleaning Leather Seats.............................397
Indicator and Reversing Lamp With King Ranch Edition.................................398
Bulbs.................................................................384 Without King Ranch Edition...........................397
Changing a Fuse..........................................346 Cleaning Products........................................391
Fuses......................................................................346 Materials................................................................391
Changing a Road Wheel...........................429 Cleaning the Engine....................................393
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel.......394
Information.....................................................429 Cleaning the Exterior..................................392
Jacking the Vehicle............................................434 Cleaning the Exterior Lamps.........................392
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools........430 Cleaning the Exterior Precautions...............392
Stowing the Flat Tire or Spare Tire.............439 Exterior Chrome Parts......................................392
Tire Change Procedure....................................430 Exterior Plastic Parts........................................392
Changing the 12V Battery.........................379 Stripes or Graphics............................................392
Battery Management System......................380 Underbody...........................................................393
Changing the Engine Air Filter - Under Hood.........................................................393
6.2L.................................................................357 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L Instrument Cluster Lens.........................397
Diesel............................................................358 Cleaning the Interior...................................395
Air Filter Restriction Gauge............................359 Cleaning the Wheels..................................399
Changing the Engine Air Filter - Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
7.3L.................................................................360 Blades...........................................................394
Changing the Engine-Mounted and Clearing All MyKeys.......................................63
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel Climate.............................................................531
Filters - 6.7L Diesel...................................386 Accessing Rear Climate Controls................533
Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Accessing the Climate Control Menu..........531
Filter...................................................................386 Directing the Airflow..........................................531
Engine-mounted Fuel Filter..........................389 Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator..........533
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................531
Filter...............................................................356 Setting the Temperature..................................531
Engine lubrication for severe service Switching Auto Mode On and Off................531
operation.........................................................356 Switching Dual Zone Mode On and
Off.......................................................................532
649
Index
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile

and Off..............................................................532 Network........................................................474
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Connecting FordPass to the Modem..........474
Off.......................................................................532 Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........474
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and What Is the Modem..........................................474
Off.......................................................................533 Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Switching Recirculated Air On and Network........................................................474
Off.......................................................................533 Coolant Check
Switching the Air Conditioning On and See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L...............364
Off........................................................................531 See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On Diesel................................................................368
and Off..............................................................532 See: Engine Coolant Check - 7.3L.................371
Switching the Climate Control On and Cooling System Capacity and
Off.......................................................................532 Specification - 6.2L..................................455
Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On Cooling System Capacity and
and Off..............................................................532 Specification - 6.7L Diesel....................456
Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Cooling System Capacity and
Off.......................................................................532 Specification - 7.3L..................................456
Switching the Heated Seats On and Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........53
Off.......................................................................532 Creating a MyKey............................................62
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On Programming or Changing Configurable
and Off..............................................................532 Settings...............................................................63
Switching the Heated Windshield On and Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........478
Off.......................................................................532 Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled Hotspot.............................................................478
Seats On and Off..........................................533 Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and Password.........................................................478
Off.......................................................................533 Cross Traffic Alert........................................259
Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On Cross Traffic Alert Behavior When Trailer
and Off..............................................................533 is Attached.......................................................261
Switching the Ventilated Seats On and Cross Traffic Alert Indicator............................261
Off.......................................................................533 Cross Traffic Alert Information
Climate Control.............................................143 Messages..........................................................261
Auto Mode.............................................................145 Cross Traffic Alert System
Climate Control – Troubleshooting.............146 Limitations......................................................260
Climate Control – Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors............260
Troubleshooting.........................................146 Switching the System On and Off...............261
Climate Control – Frequently Asked Using Cross Traffic Alert..................................259
Questions.........................................................146 Cruise Control................................................242
Connected Vehicle......................................474 Cruise Control Indicators..........................243
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Network............................................................474 Cruise Control...............................................82
Connected Vehicle Limitations...............474 Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise
Connected Vehicle Requirements.........474 Control.............................................................82
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting - Customer Assistance.................................332
Vehicles With: Modem............................475 Customer Information...............................584
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting - Radio Frequency Certification
Vehicles With: SYNC/SYNC 3..............476 Labels...............................................................584
650
Index
D Driver and Passenger Airbags...................46

Children and Airbags............................................51
Data Recording..................................................11 Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch .........46
Comfort, Convenience and Entertainment Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Data.......................................................................13 Adjustment.......................................................50
Event Data................................................................13 Driving Aids....................................................250
Service Data............................................................12 Driving Hints....................................................317
Services That Third Parties Provide...............14 Driving Through Water...............................320
Services That We Provide..................................14 For Vehicles without Tremor Off-Road
Vehicles With a Modem......................................14 Package............................................................320
Vehicles With an Emergency Call For Vehicles with Tremor Off-Road
System..................................................................15 Package.............................................................321
Vehicles With SYNC.............................................14 DRL
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With: See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Configurable Daytime Running Configurable Daytime Running
Lamps.............................................................88 Lamps.................................................................88
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With: See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)............89 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)................89
Declaration of Conformity.......................646
Radio Frequency Statement........................646 E
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Capacity and
Specification..............................................462 Economical Driving.......................................317
Diesel Particulate Filter.............................202 Electromagnetic Compatibility...............618
Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel Electronic Locking Differential.................221
Particulate Filter System...........................202 Activating the Electronic Locking
Regeneration.......................................................202 Differential........................................................221
Digital Radio...................................................481 Operating ELD With a Spare or Mismatched
HD Radio Reception and Station Tires....................................................................222
Troubleshooting............................................483 Electronic Tailgate...........................................71
Directing the Flow of Air.............................145 With the Outside Control Button.....................71
Directing Air to the Footwell Air With the Remote Control...................................71
Vents...................................................................145 Emission Law.................................................194
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Vents...................................................................145 Tampering Acts and Maintenance..........195
Directing Air to the Windshield Air Tampering With a Noise Control
Vents...................................................................145 System...............................................................194
Direction Indicators.......................................90 Enabling Remote Start..............................140
Doors and Locks.............................................66 End User License Agreement...................621
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
Diesel..............................................................361 AGREEMENT (EULA) ..................................621
Draining the Diesel Fuel Conditioner Engine Block Heater....................................182
Module..............................................................362 Using the Engine Block Heater......................183
Filter Location.....................................................362 Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L..................364
Drive Control.................................................268 Adding Coolant..................................................364
Selectable Drive Modes..................................268 Engine Coolant Temperature
Driver Alert.....................................................250 Management..................................................367
Using Driver Alert...............................................250 Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................366
Recycled Coolant..............................................365
651
Index
Severe Climates.................................................365 Engine Oil Check - 7.3L..............................355

Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Adding Engine Oil..............................................355
Diesel............................................................368 Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L..........................352
Adding Coolant..................................................368 Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel.............352
Coolant Change...................................................371 Engine Oil Dipstick - 7.3L...........................352
Engine and Secondary Cooling System Engine Specifications - 6.2L.....................441
Refill Procedure.............................................370 Drivebelt Routing................................................441
Engine-driven Cooling Fan..............................371 Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel.......441
Recycled Coolant...............................................370 Drivebelt Routing...............................................442
Severe Climates...................................................371 Engine Specifications - 7.3L.....................442
Engine Coolant Check - 7.3L.....................371 Drivebelt Routing...............................................443
Adding Coolant...................................................372 Entertainment................................................521
Coolant Change..................................................374 AM/FM Radio......................................................522
Engine Coolant Temperature Apps.......................................................................530
Management..................................................375 CD............................................................................528
Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan HD Radio™ Information (If
Clutch)..............................................................374 Available).........................................................525
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................374 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Recycled Coolant...............................................373 Activated)........................................................523
Severe Climates..................................................374 Sources..................................................................522
Engine Emission Control...........................194 Stereo or USB.....................................................529
Engine Idle Shutdown.................................182 Supported Media Players, Formats and
Engine Immobilizer Metadata Information................................530
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76 USB Ports.............................................................530
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Environment.....................................................19
6.2L................................................................449 Essential Towing Checks..........................305
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Before Towing a Trailer.....................................313
Climates...........................................................450 Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear View
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Camera System............................................306
6.7L Diesel...................................................450 Hitches...................................................................307
Alternative Engine Oil for Biodiesel Fuel Integrated Trailer Brake Controller...............310
Blends (B20 Max)........................................452 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Watercraft (PWC).........................................314
Climates...........................................................452 Safety Chains.....................................................309
Alternative Engine Oil for Severe Duty Trailer Brakes......................................................309
Service..............................................................453 Trailer Lamps........................................................313
Engine Oil.............................................................450 Trailer Towing Connector...............................305
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - When Towing a Trailer......................................313
7.3L.................................................................453 Event Data Recording
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold See: Data Recording..............................................11
Climates...........................................................454 Export Unique Options.................................18
Engine Oil Check - 6.2L..............................352 Extending the Remote Start
Adding Engine Oil..............................................353 Duration........................................................140
Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel................354 Exterior Mirrors................................................96
Adding Engine Oil..............................................354 Blind Spot Information System......................99
Engine lubrication for severe service Clearance Lamps ................................................98
operation .........................................................355 Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................98
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................96
652
Index
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................98 Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right

Memory Mirrors ...................................................98 Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................96 Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required ..........187
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Mirrors..................................................................97 Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Puddle Lamps.......................................................98 Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United
Spot Lamps...........................................................98 States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin
Telescoping Mirrors..............................................97 Islands And Other Locales) ......................187
Trailer Towing Camera System.......................98 Fuel Quality - E85........................................185
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
F Vehicles.............................................................185
Switching Between E85 and
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................39 Gasoline............................................................186
Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................40 Fuel Quality - Gasoline..............................186
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................41 Choosing the Right Fuel..................................186
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy...............40 Fuel Shutoff...................................................326
Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue Fuel Tank Capacity - Diesel.....................457
(Front Center Seat on Super Cab and Fuel Tank Capacity - Gasoline...............458
Crew Cab)..........................................................39 Fuses................................................................339
Flat Tire Fuse Specification Chart..........................339
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................429 Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................339
Floor Mats.......................................................323 Passenger Compartment Fuse
Fog Lamps - Front Panel..................................................................343
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................89
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................84
G
Ford Credit.........................................................15 Garage Door Opener...................................164
US Only.....................................................................15 Garage Door Opener
Ford Protect...................................................563 See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........164
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan Gauges..............................................................102
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................564 DEF Gauge............................................................104
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........104
Only)..................................................................563 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge.............................104
Four-Wheel Drive..........................................213 Fuel Gauge............................................................104
Front Axle Fluid Capacity and Transmission Fluid Temperature
Specification..............................................466 Gauge.................................................................104
Front Fog Lamps............................................89 Turbo Boost Gauge............................................104
Front Fog Lamp Indicator.................................89 Type 1 and 2..........................................................102
Switching the Front Fog Lamps On or Type 3.....................................................................103
Off.........................................................................89 Gearbox
Fuel and Refueling.......................................184 See: Transmission..............................................207
Fuel Consumption........................................193 General Information on Radio
Advertised Capacity..........................................193 Frequencies...................................................55
Fuel Economy......................................................193 Intelligent Access.................................................55
Fuel Filter - 6.2L/7.3L..................................382 General Maintenance Information.......565
Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................187 Multi-Point Inspection.....................................568
Biodiesel................................................................188 Owner Checks and Services.........................566
Diesel Fuel Additives ........................................189 Protecting Your Investment...........................565
653
Index
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................565 Ignition Switch................................................174

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your In California (U.S. Only).............................333
Dealership?.....................................................565 Information Display Control.......................82
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Information Displays....................................110
Canada.........................................................335 General Information...........................................110
Getting the Services You Need...............332 Information Messages.................................121
Away From Home..............................................332 4WD.........................................................................138
Global Opening..............................................96 Active Park..............................................................121
Opening the Windows.......................................96 Adaptive Cruise Control....................................122
Adaptive Steering...............................................123
H AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............123
Airbag......................................................................124
Handbrake Alarm and Security.............................................124
See: Parking Brake.............................................225 Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................124
Hazard Flashers...........................................326 Battery and Charging System........................125
HDC Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
See: Using Hill Descent Control....................232 Alert System....................................................125
Headlamp Adjusting Diesel Messages..................................................126
See: Adjusting the Headlamps......................381 Doors and Locks..................................................128
Headrest Driver Alert.............................................................129
See: Head Restraints..........................................151 Drivetrain................................................................129
Head Restraints..............................................151 Engine.....................................................................129
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................152 Fuel..........................................................................130
Heated Seats.................................................160 Keys and Remote Controls.............................130
Rear Heated Seats.............................................160 Lane Keeping System.........................................131
Heated Steering Wheel................................82 Maintenance..........................................................131
Heating MyKey......................................................................132
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Off Road.................................................................132
Automatic Temperature Control.............143 Park Aid...................................................................133
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Park Brake..............................................................133
Temperature Control....................................147 Power Steering....................................................134
Hill Start Assist.............................................225 Pre-Collision Assist............................................134
Switching the System On and Off..............226 Remote Start........................................................135
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................226 Seats........................................................................135
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Starting System ..................................................135
Brakes............................................................225 Tailgate...................................................................135
Hood Lock Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................136
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........348 Trail Control..........................................................136
Horn.....................................................................83 Trailer.......................................................................137
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert Installing Child Restraints...........................24
System Work...............................................162 Child Seats..............................................................24
Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid Capacity Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
and Specification......................................472 Anchors for Attaching Child
Restraints...........................................................30
I Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Regular Cab)....................................................31
Identifying the Climate Control Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew
Unit..................................................................143 Cab and Super Cab).......................................32
654
Index
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Lighting Control..............................................87

Outboard Seating Positions (Center Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............88
Seating Use) ....................................................29 Headlamp High Beam........................................87
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front Lighting...............................................................87
Center Position of Super Cab and Crew General Information............................................87
Cab)......................................................................24 Limited Slip Differential..............................221
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center Load Carrying..................................................271
Position of Super Cab and Crew Load Carrying Precautions........................271
Cab)......................................................................26 Locating the Cabin Air Filter.....................150
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Locating the Safety Compliance
CHildren (LATCH)...........................................28 Certification Labels..................................272
Using Tether Straps............................................30 Locking and Unlocking................................66
Instrument Cluster.......................................102 Activating Intelligent Access...........................66
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................88 Autolock..................................................................68
Instrument Panel...........................................20 Battery Saver.........................................................68
Interior Air Quality........................................150 Illuminated Entry..................................................68
Interior Lamps.................................................90 Power Door Locks................................................66
Front Interior Lamp.............................................90 Remote Control....................................................66
Rear Interior Lamps..............................................91 Smart Unlock.........................................................67
Interior Mirror...................................................99 Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................99 Keys.......................................................................67
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................99 Lug Nuts
Introduction........................................................9 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................429
J M
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................327 Maintenance.................................................348
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................327 General Information.........................................348
Jump Starting......................................................328 Manual Seats.................................................153
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................327 Manual Lumbar ..................................................154
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................328 Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................154
K Recline Adjustment...........................................154
Memory Function..........................................157
Keyless Entry...................................................69 Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................158
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
KEYPAD..............................................................69 Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
Keyless Starting.............................................175 ...............................................................................157
Keys and Remote Controls.........................55 Recalling a Preset Position..............................157
Saving a Preset Position...................................157
L Message Center
See: Information Displays................................110
Lane Keeping System.................................251 Mirrors
Switching the System On and Off...............252 See: Windows and Mirrors................................95
System Display...................................................252 Mobile Communications Equipment.......17
System Settings.................................................252 Moonroof........................................................100
Troubleshooting.................................................253 Bounce-Back........................................................101
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...........100
655
Index
Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L..............................443 Parking Brake.................................................225

Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel.................445 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................76
Motorcraft Parts - 7.3L..............................446 SecuriLock®...........................................................76
MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................64 PATS
MyKey™..............................................................61 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76
Principle of Operation.........................................61 Perchlorate........................................................15
Phone...............................................................533
N Android Auto.......................................................535
Apple CarPlay.....................................................535
Navigation......................................................535 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Changing the Format of the Map................537 Time...................................................................534
cityseeker..............................................................539 Text Messaging...................................................534
Michelin Travel Guide......................................540 Using Your Cell Phone.....................................534
Navigation Map Accuracy and Pickup Bed Anchor Points.........................277
Updates...........................................................540 Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Route Guidance..................................................537 Tie-Down Cleats............................................277
Setting a Destination.......................................536 Locating the Pickup Bed Anchor
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................540 Points.................................................................277
Zoom.......................................................................537 Pickup Bed Anchor Point Load
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........568 Capacities........................................................278
Diesel Engine........................................................571 Pickup Bed Anchor Point
Gasoline Engine..................................................570 Precautions......................................................277
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor............................568 Pickup Bed......................................................277
Pickup Bed Anchor Points...............................277
O Pickup Bed Ramps............................................279
Pickup Bed Ramps......................................279
Off-Road Driving...........................................317 Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
After Off-Road Driving......................................319 Ramp Holder...................................................279
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques..............318 Installing and Removing the Pickup Bed
Crossing Obstacles............................................319 Ramps..............................................................280
Hill Climbing.........................................................319 Pickup Bed Ramp Precautions.....................279
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................356 Storing the Pickup Bed Ramps.....................281
Oil Check Post-Crash Alert System..........................329
See: Engine Oil Check - 6.2L..........................352 Power Door Locks
See: Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel............354 See: Locking and Unlocking.............................66
See: Engine Oil Check - 7.3L..........................355 Power Running Boards.................................78
Opening and Closing the Hood..............348 Power Seats...................................................154
Ordering Additional Owner's Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................155
Literature......................................................337 Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........337 With Active Motion .......................................155
Overhead Console.........................................171 Power Steering Fluid Check.....................378
Overriding Automatic High Beam Power Take-Off.............................................212
Control............................................................93 Split Shaft Capability........................................212
Power Windows.............................................95
P Accessory Delay...................................................96
Bounce-Back.........................................................95
Parking Aids...................................................234 One-Touch Up or Down.....................................95
Principle of Operation......................................234 Window Lock.........................................................96
656
Index
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................264 Rear Occupant Alert System

Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist Precautions..................................................162
Settings............................................................266 Rear Occupant Alert System...................162
Blocked Sensors.................................................267 Rear Parking Aid...........................................234
Distance Indication and Alert.......................265 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................235
Using the Pre-Collision Assist Rear Seats.......................................................158
System..............................................................264 Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ..............158
Protecting the Environment........................19 Rear Under Seat Storage.................................159
Puncture Returning the Seat to the Seating
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................429 Position..............................................................159
Rear View Camera.......................................235
R Camera Guidelines............................................236
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................237
Radio Frequency Certification Rear Camera Delay............................................237
Labels...........................................................584 Using the Rear View Camera System........236
Blind Spot Information System Rear View Camera
Sensors............................................................584 See: Rear View Camera...................................235
Body Control Module.......................................587 Recommended Towing Weights...........300
Cruise Control Module....................................590 Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Keys and Remote Controls............................594 Weight for Your Vehicle..............................304
Passive Anti-Theft System............................598 Refueling - Diesel.........................................190
Radio Transceiver Module.............................602 Dual Fuel Tanks...................................................192
SYNC......................................................................605 Fueling Tips............................................................191
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Refueling.................................................................191
Sensors............................................................609 Refueling - Gasoline....................................189
Wireless Accessory Charging Module.........613 Fuel Filler Cap......................................................190
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Remote Control..............................................55
Specification - Diesel..............................467 Car Finder...............................................................60
Rear Axle - 10.5...................................................467 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................55
Rear Axle - 10.8..................................................468 Intelligent Access Key.........................................56
Rear Axle - 11.8 ..................................................468 Memory Feature...................................................59
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Replacing the Battery.........................................57
Specification - Gasoline........................469 Sounding the Panic Alarm...............................60
Rear Axle - 10.5..................................................469 Remotely Starting the Engine.................140
Rear Axle - 10.8...................................................470 Remotely Stopping the Engine................141
Rear Axle - 11.8 ...................................................470 Remote Start Limitations.........................140
Rear Axle - 11.8 (With Heavy Duty Tow Remote Start Remote Control
Option)...............................................................471 Indicators.......................................................141
Rear Axle..........................................................221 Remote Control Feedback...............................141
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible Remote Start.................................................140
Warnings.......................................................163 Remote Start Settings.......................................141
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators Remote Start Settings.................................141
- Vehicles With: SYNC 3..........................163 Setting the Remote Start Duration..............142
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators Switching Climate Control Auto Mode On
- Vehicles With: SYNC..............................163 and Off................................................................141
Rear Occupant Alert System Switching Climate Control Last Settings
Limitations...................................................162 On and Off.........................................................141
657
Index
Switching the Heated Seat Settings On and Seatbelts...........................................................38

Off.........................................................................141 Principle of Operation........................................38
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Settings On and Off.......................................141 Chime...............................................................42
Removing the Tailgate..................................72 Conditions of operation.....................................42
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............399 Seats...................................................................151
Replacement Parts Security..............................................................76
Recommendation........................................16 Selective Catalytic Reductant System -
Collision Repairs....................................................16 Diesel..............................................................197
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or
Repairs.................................................................16 Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................16 System...............................................................201
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and
Control............................................................60 Information.....................................................200
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter..................150 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level...............................197
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages
Only)..............................................................337 and Vehicle Operations...............................199
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank..........198
Only)..............................................................337 Settings...........................................................543
Resuming the Set Speed..........................243 ..................................................................................543
Roadside Assistance..................................325 911 Assist...............................................................543
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Ambient Lighting...............................................544
Assistance.......................................................326 Audio......................................................................543
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Automatic Updates..........................................543
Roadside Assistance...................................325 Charge Settings.................................................544
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Clock.......................................................................543
Roadside Assistance...................................325 Display...................................................................544
Roadside Emergencies..............................325 Driver Assist.........................................................543
Running-In FordPass...............................................................543
See: Breaking-In.................................................320 General..................................................................543
Running Out of Fuel....................................189 Message Center.................................................544
Mobile Apps.........................................................543
S Multi Contour Seats..........................................544
Navigation............................................................544
Safety Canopy™.............................................52 Personal Profiles................................................544
Safety Precautions......................................184 Phone.....................................................................543
Satellite Radio..............................................484 Seats......................................................................544
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number Sound.....................................................................543
(ESN)................................................................485 Valet Mode...........................................................544
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............485 Vehicle...................................................................543
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................485 Voice Control.......................................................544
Troubleshooting................................................486 Setting the Blower Motor Speed............144
Scheduled Maintenance..........................565 Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........242
Seatbelt Extensions......................................44 Changing the Set Speed.................................242
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................42 Setting the Temperature...........................144
Seatbelt Reminder........................................43 Setting the Trail Control Speed...............231
Belt-Minder™........................................................43 Side Airbags......................................................51
Sitting in the Correct Position...................151
658
Index
Sliding Windows............................................99 Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/

Power Sliding Back Window...........................99 7.3L...................................................................175
Snow Chains Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................176
See: Using Snow Chains.................................420 Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel
Snow Plowing................................................321 Vehicles Only)..................................................177
Engine temperature while plowing.............323 Failure to Start.....................................................176
Installing the Snowplow..................................321 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................177
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Important Ventilating Information................177
Attached...........................................................322 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped Moving................................................................176
Vehicle...............................................................322 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Transmission operation while Stationary.........................................................176
plowing.............................................................323 Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................175
Spare Wheel Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................176
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................429 Starting and Stopping the Engine..........174
Special Notices................................................16 General Information...........................................174
New Vehicle Limited Warranty........................16 Steering...........................................................262
On Board Diagnostics Data Link Adaptive Learning.............................................263
Connector...........................................................16 Adaptive Steering..............................................263
Special Instructions.............................................16 Electronic Torque Overlay Steering............262
Using a Slide-In Camper.....................................17 Hydraulic Power Steering...............................262
Using your Vehicle as an Ambulance.............17 Steering Wheel...............................................80
Using your Vehicle as a Stationary Power Storage Compartments..............................171
Source...................................................................17 Sunroof
Using your Vehicle With a Snowplow............17 See: Moonroof.....................................................100
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Sun Visors.......................................................100
Maintenance...............................................574 Illuminated Vanity Mirror.................................100
Diesel Engine........................................................577 Supplementary Restraints System.........45
Exceptions............................................................582 Principle of Operation........................................45
Gasoline Engine..................................................574 Switching Air Conditioning On and
Speed Control Off....................................................................143
See: Cruise Control............................................242 Switching Automatic High Beam Control
Spot Lamps.....................................................90 On and Off.....................................................93
Spring U-Bolt Check - F-600.................389 Activating the Automatic High Beam
U-bolt Nut Torque.............................................390 Control.................................................................93
Stability Control...........................................228 Switching Climate Control On and
Principle of Operation......................................228 Off....................................................................143
Starter Switch Switching Cruise Control On and
See: Ignition Switch............................................174 Off...................................................................242
Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L Switching Cruise Control Off.........................242
Diesel...............................................................177 Switching Cruise Control On.........................242
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................179 Switching Maximum Cooling On and
Cold Weather Operation..................................179 Off....................................................................143
Cold Weather Starting......................................179 Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug Off....................................................................143
System...............................................................178 Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L
Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................178 Diesel..............................................................182
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................178
659
Index
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System Terrain Control..............................................232

On and Off...................................................163 Principle of Operation......................................232
Semiannual Reminder......................................163 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System Line Program (U.S. Only).......................334
On and Off - Vehicles With: Tire Care.........................................................404
SYNC..............................................................162 Glossary of Tire Terminology........................405
Semiannual Reminder......................................162 Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Switching Recirculated Air On and Grading.............................................................404
Off....................................................................143 Information Contained on the Tire
Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Sidewall...........................................................406
Off...................................................................144 Temperature A B C...........................................405
Switching the Heated Rear Window On Traction AA A B C..............................................404
and Off..........................................................144 Treadwear............................................................404
Switching the Heated Wiper Park On and Tire Pressure Monitoring System............421
Off...................................................................144 Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring
Switching Trail Control On and Off........231 System..............................................................428
Symbols Glossary.............................................9 Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring
SYNC™ 3.........................................................513 System...............................................................421
General Information..........................................513 Tires
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................545 See: Wheels and Tires.....................................402
Additional Information and Towing a Trailer............................................282
Assistance........................................................557 Load Placement.................................................282
Apps........................................................................552 Towing Points...............................................330
Navigation.............................................................551 Towing the Vehicle on Four
Personal Profiles................................................555 Wheels...........................................................314
Phone.....................................................................549 Emergency Towing.............................................314
Resetting the System.......................................557 Recreational Towing..........................................314
USB and Audio...................................................546 Towing..............................................................282
Voice Recognition..............................................545 Traction Control............................................227
Wi-Fi Connectivity.............................................554 Principle of Operation.......................................227
SYNC™ Applications and Trail Control Indicators................................231
Services.......................................................500 Trail Control.....................................................231
911 Assist..............................................................500 Trailer Reversing Aids.................................283
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................502 Conventional Trailer Setup............................285
SYNC™...........................................................496 Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailer
General Information.........................................496 Setup.................................................................288
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................504 Positioning Your Vehicle and Trailer...........284
Pro Trailer Backup Assist With Trailer
T Reverse Guidance.........................................283
Setting Up the System....................................285
Tailgate Lock.....................................................71 Troubleshooting - Conventional
Tailgate Step.....................................................72 Trailer.................................................................292
Closing the Step....................................................73 Troubleshooting - Fifth Wheel and
Opening the Step.................................................73 Gooseneck Trailer.........................................297
Tailgate................................................................71 Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist...................289
Technical Specifications Using Trailer Reverse Guidance...................290
See: Capacities and Specifications.............441 Trailer Sway Control...................................300
660
Index
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and Entering and Exiting Rock Crawl Mode with
Specification..............................................466 Tremor Package.............................................215
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................377 How Your Vehicle Differs from Other
Transmission.................................................207 Vehicles.............................................................216
Transporting the Vehicle...........................329 Operating 4WD Vehicles with Spare or
Mismatched Tires..........................................215
U Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD
system................................................................214
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L...................349 Using Hill Descent Control.......................232
Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Hill Descent Modes...........................................232
Diesel............................................................350 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Under Hood Overview - 7.3L.....................351 Systems..........................................................64
Under Seat Storage.......................................171 Using Power Running Boards....................78
Front Under Seat Storage Compartment - Automatic Power Deploy..................................78
Vehicles With Locking Storage..................172 Automatic Power Stow......................................78
Front Under Seat Storage Compartment - Bounce-back..........................................................79
Vehicles Without Locking Storage............171 Enabling and Disabling......................................79
Rear Under Seat Storage..................................172 Manual Power Deploy........................................78
Universal Garage Door Opener...............164 Using Snow Chains.....................................420
HomeLink Wireless Control System...........164 Using Stability Control...............................229
USB Port.........................................................487 AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
Locating the USB Ports...................................487 (RSC®).............................................................229
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................243 Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Automatic Cancellation...................................247 Player............................................................503
Blocked Sensor..................................................248 Audio Voice Commands.................................504
Canceling the Set Speed................................246 Media Sources....................................................503
Changing the Set Speed.................................246 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........499
Detection Issues.................................................247 Accessing Features through the Phone
Following a Vehicle...........................................244 Menu.................................................................500
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow Pairing a Phone..................................................499
Usage.................................................................247 Phone Controls..................................................500
Overriding the Set Speed...............................246 Phone Voice Commands...............................499
Resuming the Set Speed................................246 Using Traction Control................................227
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed............244 Switching the System Off...............................227
Setting the Gap Distance...............................245 System Indicator Lights and
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Messages..........................................................227
Off.......................................................................247 Using Voice Recognition...........................497
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Apps.......................................................................520
On.......................................................................244 Automatic Blower Motor Speed
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........249 Reduction..........................................................521
System Not Available......................................248 Climate....................................................................517
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................213 Entertainment.....................................................516
4WD Indicator Lights.........................................213 General...................................................................515
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Initiating a Voice Session................................497
Vehicles.............................................................216 Navigation.............................................................519
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD Phone......................................................................518
system................................................................213 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................520
System Interaction and Feedback.............498
661
Index
Voice Settings......................................................521 Diesel Engine Brake...........................................106

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Diesel Exhaust Fluid..........................................106
Program (Canada Only)........................335 Direction Indicator..............................................107
Door Ajar................................................................107
V Electronic Locking Differential.......................107
Engine Coolant Temperature.........................107
Vehicle Care....................................................391 Engine Oil...............................................................107
General Information..........................................391 Fasten Seatbelt...................................................107
Vehicle Identification Number................473 Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................109
Locating the Vehicle Identification Front Airbag..........................................................107
Number.............................................................473 Front Fog Lamps.................................................107
Vehicle Identification Number High Beam.............................................................107
Overview...........................................................473 Hill Descent...........................................................107
Vehicle Identification..................................473 Low Fuel Level.....................................................107
Vehicle Identification Number......................473 Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................107
Vehicle Storage............................................399 Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Body.......................................................................399 Power/Electronic Throttle Control.........108
Brakes...................................................................400 Service Engine Soon.........................................108
Cooling system..................................................400 Stability Control..................................................108
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery............400 Stability Control Off..........................................108
Engine...................................................................400 Tailgate Ajar.........................................................108
Fuel system.........................................................400 Transmission Tow/Haul...................................108
General..................................................................399 Wait To Start........................................................108
Miscellaneous....................................................400 Water In Fuel........................................................108
Removing Vehicle From Storage................400 Washer Fluid Check....................................382
Tires.......................................................................400 Washer Fluid Specification.......................461
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot................................478 Washers
Ventilated Seats............................................161 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................392
Ventilation See: Wipers and Washers.................................85
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Waxing.............................................................393
Automatic Temperature Control.............143 What Is Automatic High Beam
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Control............................................................93
Temperature Control....................................147 What Is Cruise Control...............................242
Voice Control...................................................82 Requirements......................................................242
What Is Remote Start.................................140
W What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................150
What Is the Gross Axle Weight
Warning Lamps and Indicators...............105 Rating.............................................................272
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................105 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).............272
Adaptive Steering...............................................105 What Is the Gross Combined Weight
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................105 Rating.............................................................273
Automatic High Beam......................................105 What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight
Battery....................................................................106 Rating.............................................................272
Blind Spot Monitor............................................106 What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Brake System Warning Lamp........................106 Weight...........................................................272
Check 4X4............................................................106 What is the Rear Occupant Alert
Check Fuel Cap...................................................106 System...........................................................162
Cruise Control......................................................106 What Is Trail Control....................................231
662
Index
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................429
Wheels and Tires.........................................402
General Information.........................................402
Technical Specifications................................440
Windows and Mirrors...................................95
Windshield Washers.....................................86
Windshield Wipers........................................85
Speed Dependent Wipers................................85
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................382
Wipers and Washers.....................................85
Wireless Accessory Charger.....................169
663

2021-Ford-F-250 350 450 550 600-Owners-Manual-version-3 Om EN 03 2021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021-Ford-F-250 350 450 550 600-Owners-Manual-version-3 Om EN 03 2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

2021 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual

All rights reserved.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

Introduction Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................46

Supplementary Restraints Power Running Boards

Steering Wheel Automatic High Beam Control

Wipers and Washers Instrument Cluster

Lighting Information Displays

Climate Control - Vehicles Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off

Climate Control - Vehicles What is the Rear Occupant Alert System

Rear Occupant Alert System Audible Engine Emission Control

Terrain Control Calculating Payload ...................................274

Capacities and Specifications Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and

SYNC™ Declaration of Conformity ......................646

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

WARNING: Driving while

Note: This manual describes product Air conditioning system lubricant

Brake system Flammable

Cabin air filter Front airbag

Check fuel cap Front fog lamps

Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset

Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment

Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers

Cruise control Heated rear window

Do not open when hot Windshield defrosting system

Engine air filter Interior luggage compartment

Engine coolant Jack

Engine coolant temperature Keep out of reach of children

Engine oil Lighting control

Explosive gas Low tire pressure warning

Fan warning Maintain correct fluid level

Fasten seatbelt Note operating instructions

Horn control Shield the eyes

Panic alarm Stability control

Parking aid Hill descent control

Parking brake Trail control

Power steering fluid Windshield wiping system

Power windows front/rear Windshield wash and wipe

Power window lockout

Requires registered technician

Your vehicle has electronic control units Service Data

Event Data To read data recorded by an event data

Entertainment Data service providers could have access to

REPLACEMENT PARTS The Ford Warranty may not cover damage

primary responsibility is the safe

Using mobile communications equipment

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS

A Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 90).

GENERAL INFORMATION (CPST) to make sure that you properly

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Use a child restraint

When installing a child restraint with

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

1. Position the child restraint in a seat

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and

5. To put the retractor in the automatic

Note: The automatic locking mode is

The belt webbing below the tongue is the

3. While holding both shoulder and lap

9. Check from time to time to be sure that